JP7326222B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that provides a plurality of parts (for example, an introductory part, a win/fail determination part, an epilogue part, etc.) from the start to the end of a variable display to increase the interest of the player (Patent Document 1). ). In addition, among the jackpot patterns, the jackpot pattern changes again after temporarily stopping with the non-probability variation pattern (normal jackpot pattern), and then the non-probability variation pattern or the probability variation pattern stops. (Patent Document 2).

JP 2019-118411 A JP 2016-179389 A

According to the gaming machine described above, there is still room for improvement in terms of showing a better flow of the series of effects that are executed.

The present invention has been devised in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of showing a series of effects to be executed in a more suitable manner.

(A) A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a light emitting means capable of emitting light;
display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
an effect execution means capable of executing a specific display effect of displaying the specific display and a specific light emission effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, a dialog sound emitted by a character is output,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by characters and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed,
The effect executing means causes the light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect before the display of the specific display is completed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition,
A rate of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting control to be in an advantageous state during execution of the variable display, and when the suggestive effect is being executed and when the suggestive effect is not being executed. It is possible to execute the specific light emission effect with
further comprising sound output means capable of outputting a variable display corresponding sound corresponding to the variable display, a suggestive effect corresponding sound corresponding to the suggestive effect, and a specific light emitting effect corresponding sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect,
The sound output means is
when the specific light emission effect is executed while the sound corresponding to the variable display is being output, the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the variable display being output;
When the specific light-emitting effect is executed while the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect is being output, the sound corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect can be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect being output,
Before the light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, the sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect can be output.
It is characterized by
Furthermore, (1) a gaming machine (eg, gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (eg, jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect (for example, a notification effect to notify whether or not a big hit will be achieved) for informing whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
It is determined that the notification effect is controlled to the advantageous state after the introductory part (for example, a fanning part) until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and after the success or failure is notified. An epilogue part (for example, a hit epilogue part) that is executed when the
The notification effect includes a first notification effect (for example, a notification effect of SP second half reach A) and a second notification effect (for example, a notification effect of SP final reach),
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, a dialog sound emitted by a character is output,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by characters and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 175). , Sometimes subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds and sometimes not),
The number of lines spoken by the character differs between the first notification effect and the second notification effect (for example, the number of lines shown in FIG. 175),
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the epilogue part of the first notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introductory part of the first notification effect. High (for example, the ratio of subtitles in the hit epilogue part of SP latter half reach A in FIG. 175 is higher than the ratio of subtitles in SP latter half reach A),
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the epilogue part of the second notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introductory part of the second notification effect. High (for example, the ratio of subtitles in the epilogue part per SP final reach in FIG. 175 is higher than the ratio of subtitles in the inflection part of the SP final reach),
moreover,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display;
A specific display effect for displaying the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a portion in which a pending display or an active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ) ) and a specific light emitting effect (for example, flash effect at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light, effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120)
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 283). -28, Figures 283-29(A) to 283-32(H), Figures 283-49(A) to 283-50(D), prior to completion of display of pending indications The part that lights the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning),
The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-24, when the winning flash effect is executed) In the case of winning, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning),
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means has a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect). A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. period) in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. A part that flashes at cycle T1 and flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of late winning),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, FIGS. 283-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink with the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, and the flash effect at the time of the second prize is executed. During the period, the part blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T0),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the series of effects to be executed look more suitable. In addition, since the light emitting means emits light before the completion of the display of the specific display, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and during the first period of the specific light emission effect, the By causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous, so that the specific display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect. becomes even easier for the player to recognize.

In addition, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention relating to the gaming machine of the following (2). Conventionally, in a game machine, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (entering the game ball into the starting area), as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-105941, the identification based on the establishment of the predetermined condition The display (suspended display or active display) is displayed on the display means, and for the variable display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, a pre-reading notice is executed that suggests that the variable display will be controlled to an advantageous state before the start of the variable display. In addition, there is a game machine in which a light-emitting means provided in the game machine emits light to execute a pre-reading notice (specific light-emitting effect). However, in such a gaming machine, depending on the timing at which the specific display is started and the timing at which the specific light emission effect is started, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. In view of this point, there is a need to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect.

(2) A gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (eg, jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display;
A specific display effect for displaying the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a portion in which a pending display or an active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ) ) and a specific light emitting effect (for example, flash effect at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light, effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120)
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 283). -28, Figures 283-29(A) to 283-32(H), Figures 283-49(A) to 283-50(D), prior to completion of display of pending indications The part that lights the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning),
The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-24, when the winning flash effect is executed) In the case of winning, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning),
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means has a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect). A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. period) in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. A part that flashes at cycle T1 and flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of late winning),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, FIGS. 283-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink with the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, and the flash effect at the time of the second prize is executed. During the period, the part blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T0),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect. , not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means can emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous. This makes it even easier for the player to recognize the specified display.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating a frame lamp. It is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the special figure LED board, the fourth symbol unit, and the fourth symbol unit and the game effect lamp. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of a screen in an image display device; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the various board|substrates etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating hit classification. It is a figure for demonstrating each random number. It is a figure for demonstrating a big-hit determination table and a big-hit kind determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a production|presentation control command. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a previous variation pattern on the main side; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-variation pattern on the main side; It is a diagram for explaining a post-fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of losing. It is a diagram for explaining a post-variation pattern determination table at the time of the big hit. It is a figure for demonstrating a previous fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the main side; It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the lottery of the production|presentation pattern in a sub side. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design variation processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during jackpot opening. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit opening post-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of a series of production|presentation. It is a figure for explaining the relationship before and after determination of success, the SP first half reach A jackpot, and the SP final reach jackpot. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the start part; It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) and a losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) and a losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a role object action part (at the time of SP second half development). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a fanning part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach A) and a losing epilogue part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a fanning part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B) and a losing epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a winning epilogue part (SP final reach) and a losing epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a relief winning part. It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a re-lottery part (odd-numbered symbol or even-numbered symbol derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a re-lottery part (odd-numbered symbol derivation|leading-out after button operation), and a fanfare part. It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a re-lottery part (even-numbered symbol derivation|leading-out after button operation), and a fanfare part. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to an LED driver; It is a figure for demonstrating the lighting mode of a game effect lamp. It is a figure for demonstrating the lighting mode of a game effect lamp. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a rendering mode in the start part; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a rendering mode in the start part; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a rendering mode in the start part; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a rendering mode in the start part; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a rendering mode in the start part; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a rendering mode in the start part; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a rendering mode in the start part; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a character action part (at the time of SP second half development). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a losing epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a losing epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a losing epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a losing epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a hit epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a hit epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a hit epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a hit epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a loss epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a loss epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a relief winning part. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a relief winning part. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanfare part. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanfare part. FIG. 11 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (b11) to (b13); FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining volume levels; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining volume levels; FIG. FIG. 10 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (r24) to (r27); It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r28) to (r31) portion. FIG. 11 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (r32) to (r35); It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role product motion in (b18) to (i1). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role product motion in (b18) to (i1). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role product motion in (r54) to (s4). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role product motion in (r54) to (s4). FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines; FIG. 4 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (A1) to (A23); It is a detailed explanatory view of (A24) to (A46) portions. (b4) to (b6) are detailed explanatory diagrams and comparison diagrams during the jackpot round. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the transmittance of subtitles for dialogue and the output of sound; FIG. 4 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (b4) to (b6) and a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (o3) to (o5). FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitles; FIG. 11 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (B4) to (B11); It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of pattern output. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of re-lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of re-lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of re-lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of re-lottery. It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the pattern fixing period. FIG. 4 is a detailed explanatory diagram of a blackout; FIG. 10 is a detailed explanatory diagram of a game effect lamp at the time of losing and a diagram for explaining a modified example at the time of losing; (r48) It is detailed explanatory drawing of a part. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a luminance data table used for the start part; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for the start part; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used for a fanning part of SP first half reach A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a swing part of SP first half reach A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a hit epilogue part of SP first half reach A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a failed epilogue part of SP first half reach A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the backing part of SP first half reach B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a swing part of SP first half reach B; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in a hit epilogue part of SP first half reach B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a losing epilogue part of SP first half reach B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a role item action part in the latter half of SP development; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a luminance data table used for a swing part of reach A in the second half of SP; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a swing part of reach A in the second half of SP; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a swing part of reach A in the second half of SP; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a hit epilogue part of SP latter half reach A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in a losing epilogue part of SP latter half reach A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a luminance data table used for a swing part of reach B in the second half of SP; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a swing part of reach B in the second half of SP; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a hit epilogue part of SP latter half reach B; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a losing epilogue part of SP latter half reach B; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the backing part of the SP final reach; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a swing part of SP final reach; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a swing part of SP final reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in an epilogue part for a SP final reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in a losing epilogue part of SP final reach; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a relief part; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the re-lottery part; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in a re-lottery part (before operation promotion); FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a re-lottery part (symbol promotion after operation promotion); FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a re-lottery part (patterns maintained after operation promotion); FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for fanfare; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a smooth rainbow luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the smooth rainbow luminance data table; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps and a grandchild table for board left lamps in the smooth rainbow luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for attacker lamps in the smooth rainbow luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the accessory action red blinking luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the yellow haze luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the white blinking (white flash) luminance data table; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the board left lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for attacker lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for attacker lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for left-board lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for attacker lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for attacker lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the tilt luminance data table without operation prompting; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the trigger display luminance data table and the operation promotion luminance data table; FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the shutter brightness data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the missing luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the per-relief luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the per-relief luminance data table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the winning determination luminance data table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the winning determination luminance data table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the re-lottery effect brightness data table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the re-lottery effect brightness data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the background luminance data table; It is a figure for demonstrating the comparison of the ramp control in the time of a hit, and the time of a loss. It is a figure for demonstrating the comparison of the ramp control in the time of a hit, and the time of a loss. It is a figure for demonstrating the comparison of the ramp control in the time of a hit, and the time of a loss. It is a figure for demonstrating the swaying aspect of a design. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of re-lottery production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of re-lottery production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of re-lottery production|presentation. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of the child table; It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. 1 is a front view of an image display device; FIG. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a performance control data holding area, (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning, and (C) is a configuration of an active display buffer. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example; It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of winning random number determination processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing whether or not to execute a pending display forewarning effect as a foreseeing forewarning and a determination ratio of a display pattern; It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of specific display display start effect execution processing. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a rendering mode of a specific display display start rendering A; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a rendering mode of a specific display display start rendering B; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a winning flash effect execution process; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a winning flash effect execution process; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the flash production|presentation at the time of an early winning a prize, and the flash production|presentation at the time of a late winning a prize. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of flash production|presentation at the time of winning. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; (A) is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine with the game effect lamp lit at high brightness (C1), and (B) is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine with the game effect lamp off. be. A front view of a pachinko game machine in which the game effect lamp is lit with low luminance (C2), and a pachinko machine showing the transition of the light emission mode of the game effect lamp in the state in which the game effect lamp is lit with low luminance. It is a front view of. The timing of the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash lamp at the time of winning, the game effect lamp, and the starter lamp, and the display of the effect image and the silhouette image. It is a timing chart showing. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. In the modified example, when a prize-winning flash effect occurs, output of a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, lighting of the flash lamp at the time of winning, the game effect lamp, and the starter lamp, and the display of the effect image and the silhouette image is a timing chart showing the timing of FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing timings of lighting of a win-time flash lamp, a game effect lamp, and a starter lamp, display of an effect image and a silhouette image, and operation of a movable body in a modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing timings of display of a winning flash lamp and a silhouette image in a modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing operation timings of a win-time flash lamp and a movable body in a modified example, and a diagram showing determination ratios of timings at which light-emitting modes of the win-time flash lamp change. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing display modes of pending display and active display in a modified example, suggestive contents of each display mode, and selection ratios at the time of determining execution of flash effect at the time of winning. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a mode of effect in the pending display and the active display when the winning flash effect is executed in the modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a mode of effect in the pending display and the active display when the winning flash effect is executed in the modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a mode of effect in the pending display and the active display when the winning flash effect is executed in the modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example.

<Pachinko machine configuration, etc.>
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 1 shows the arrangement layout of main members in a pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of the game machine. A pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine, is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. there is A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a game is played by variably displaying special symbols. "Variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

Incidentally, as the special symbols variably displayed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, two types of special symbols are provided. For example, one special symbol is also called "first special symbol" or "first special symbol", and the other special symbol is also called "second special symbol" or "second special symbol". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game".

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decoration symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically scrolling display or updated display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

On the game board 2 on the left side of the image display device 5, a character called Yume-chan, who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1, is drawn. Yume-chan is the main character who appears in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Also, on the game board 2 at the lower right of the image display device 5, a character called Jam-chan, who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1, is drawn. Jam-chan is a character that appears in content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening (electric chew) that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 6). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, thereby opening the second starting prize opening. It will be in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (it is also said that the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize opening is open). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7A having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7A includes a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 6). hereinafter referred to as a general prize winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7A consists of a game board 2 located on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a glass door frame 3a (see FIG. 2) located on the front side (player side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A large winning entrance door is provided in the space between them, and this large winning entrance door slides horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open and close the normal big winning mouth with game balls. open a path to Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in an off state, the large winning opening door is slid to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the normal large winning opening, and the game balls enter the normal large winning opening. (Pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides toward the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the normal large winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the normal large winning opening. .

A game ball entering the normal big winning hole is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through a region provided inside the normal big winning hole. When the game balls are detected by the count switch 23 (see FIG. 6), the game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. When the game balls enter the normal big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example. Also, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10), one round ends and the normal big winning opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 7B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 7A. The V variable winning ball device 7B includes a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 6). (referred to as a winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7B is provided with a large winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a. By horizontally sliding and opening the space between , the path for the game ball to the V big winning opening is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 83 is in an off state, the large winning opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V large winning opening, and the game ball enters the V large winning opening. (Pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door is slid to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the V large winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the V large winning opening. .

A game ball that has entered the V big winning opening is detected by the V winning switch 24 (see FIG. 6) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as a V winning area) provided inside the V big winning opening. When the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 24, the game state is controlled to a probability variable state. That is, in the present embodiment, V winning occurs on the condition that the game ball enters the V big winning opening during the round of the jackpot game state, and the game state is controlled to the probability variable state. . Incidentally, the normal big prize opening and the V big prize opening are also collectively referred to as the big prize opening. Also, the big winning opening is also called an attacker.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

In the pachinko game machine 1, variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstructing nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects are provided at left and right upper positions of the frame 3 for a game machine.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. The movable body 32 is composed of a character string "POWERFULII". "POWERFUL II" may be the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or may be a name representing content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the title of an animation, the name of a singer, etc.). Also, the characters attached to the movable body 32 may indicate the name of a character that appears in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, "Mume" indicating the main character, Yume-chan). In this embodiment, the model name (Powerful II) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is indicated on the movable body 32 .

In the present embodiment, the movable body 32 is movable between a position above the image display device 5 and a position covering (overlapping) the front surface of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the movable body 32 covers the front surface of the image display device 5 by causing the characters "POWERFULII" to fall diagonally (falling so that "P" is downward and "II" is upward) ( overlap) position. In addition, the movable body 32 is also called an accessory.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is a stick controller 31A as an operating rod that can be gripped by the player and tilted (operated in the front, back, left, and right directions, and pulled toward the player). is installed. A controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 6) for detecting a tilting operation on the operation rod is provided inside the main body of the stick controller 31A. The stick controller 31A also incorporates a vibrator motor (not shown) for vibrating the stick controller 31A. Note that the stick controller 31A is also called a "trigger" because it can be pulled toward the player.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 6).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a special figure LED board 9020 at the lower left of the game board 2. - 特許庁The special figure LED board 9020 is an LED board that is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 and notifies the number of first reserved memories, the number of second reserved memories, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing of the LED. In the special symbol LED board 9020, depending on the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs, the type of special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the special symbol in the second special symbol game Represents the type of (second special figure). For example, as shown in FIG. 4(a) to be described later, in the special figure LED board 9020, a combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021, The type of the first special figure is represented, and the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 represents the type of the second special figure. In the present embodiment, the term "lighting mode" is used as a concept including lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of various lamps such as frame lamps to be described later.

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a fourth symbol unit 9050 at the lower left of the image display device 5 . The fourth symbol unit 9050 is an LED board that is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 and notifies the variation of special symbols, the number of reserved memories, the right-handed display, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing of the LED. In the fourth symbol unit 9050, depending on the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs, the type of special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the special symbol in the second special symbol game Represents the type of (second special figure). For example, as shown in FIG. 4B to be described later, in the fourth symbol unit 9050, a combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 9053, Represents the type of the first special figure, by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 2 variable display unit 9054, represents the type of the second special figure.

The pachinko game machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps (also referred to as game effect lamps) on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3 . Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided near the accessory lamp 9A provided on the movable body 32, the board left lamp 9B provided on the left side of the game board 2, and the special variable winning ball device 7B. The attacker lamp 9E, the V-attacker lamp 9F provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the V big winning opening are open to allow V winning to occur. A V lamp 9G that informs that a A button lamp 9K, a frame left lamp 9L provided on the left side of the game machine frame 3, and a frame right lamp 9R provided on the right side of the game machine frame 3 are provided. The V lamp may notify that a big hit has occurred.

The role lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as role lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Specifically, the member with the character "POWERFUL II" included in the movable body 32 is divided into four parts, the character lamp 9A1 is behind the parts "P" and "O", and the character lamp 9A2 is The character lamps 9A3 are arranged behind the "W" and "E" parts, the character lamps 9A3 are arranged behind the "R" and "F" parts, and the character lamp 9A4 are arranged behind the "U" and "L" parts. there is As a result, the character lamps 9A1 to 9A4 are lit (lighted) on the back side of the member to which the letters "POWERFUL II" are attached, so that "POWERFUL II" is lighted (lighted).

The board left lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5. On the left side of the game board 2, a main character (for example, "Muyume" indicating the main character, Mumu) in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn, and the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 indicate the main character. are arranged on the back side of the portion of the game board 2 on which is drawn. As a result, the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 light up (light up) behind the part of the game board 2 on which the hero is drawn, so that the part of the game board 2 on which the hero is drawn lights up (lights up). ing.

The attacker lamp 9E is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B. As a result, the attacker lamp 9E lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B lights up (lights up). Also, the V-attacker lamp 9F is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A. As a result, the V-attacker lamp 9F lights (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, thereby lighting (lighting up) the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A.

The V lamp 9G is arranged on the back side of the part of the game board 2 marked with "V". As a result, the V lamp 9G lights up (lights up) behind the part of the game board 2 drawn with "V", so that the part of the game board 2 drawn with "V" lights up (lights up). It's becoming The electric tube lamp 9H is arranged in the vicinity of the variable winning ball device 6B, and by lighting (lighting), the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B is lit (lighted).

The stick controller lamp 9J is provided on the stick controller 31A, and when lit (lighted), the stick controller 31A is lit (lighted). The push button lamp 9K is provided in the push button 31B, and lights up (lights up) the push button 31B.

The frame left lamp 9L is composed of a plurality of lamps 9L1 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 3) provided on the left side of the game machine frame 3, and when each lamp lights (lights), the lamp for the game machine The left side of the frame 3 is lit (lighted). The frame right lamp 9R is composed of a plurality of lamps 9R2 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 3) provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp lights (lights), the gaming machine The right side of the frame 3 is lit (lighted). The frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R are also collectively referred to as frame lamps. In addition, role lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, V lamp 9G, electric tube lamp 9H, stick controller lamp 9J, push button lamp 9K, frame left lamp 9L, and frame right lamp 9R are also collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main substrate 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the winning probability of a big win and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main substrate 11, for example, at predetermined positions on the power supply substrate 17 (see FIG. 6).

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main substrate 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 6) is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. As shown in FIG. The display monitor 29 may be constructed using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the total number of prize balls, which is the number of prize balls awarded to the big prize opening (attacker). The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls won in the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the frame lamp. The frame left lamp 9L has a group of 12 lamps, frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12, extending counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. As shown in FIG. The frame left lamp 9L causes the vicinity of the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 to emit light by lighting or blinking a plurality of lamps (12 lamps in this example). On the other hand, the frame right lamp 9R has a group of eleven lamps, frame left lamps 9R2 to 9L12, extending clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. As shown in FIG. The frame right lamp 9R causes the vicinity of the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 to emit light by lighting or blinking a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example).

FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the special figure LED board 9020 and the fourth symbol unit 9050. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4(a), the special figure LED board 9020 includes a special figure 1 variable display portion 9021 showing the variable display of the first special figure, and a special figure 2 variable display portion showing the variable display of the second special figure. 9022, a special figure 1 storage display unit 9023 indicating the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a special figure 2 memory display unit 9024 indicating the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special figure game , Normal pattern storage display unit 9025 showing the number of normal pattern pending storage, normal pattern display unit 9026 showing variable display of normal patterns, right hitting display unit 9030 prompting the player to hit right, presence or absence of probability variation state , a time saving display portion 9029 indicating whether or not there is a time saving state, and a round display portion 9027 indicating the number of rounds of a big hit. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, the result, the current game state, the number of reservations, etc. by lighting or blinking by lighting means such as LEDs. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 9021 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 indicates whether or not the second special figure is being variably displayed in the second special figure game, and the stop figure of the second special figure determined by the result of the variable display is indicated by an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by the lighting means.

Furthermore, the special figure LED board 9020 can prompt the player to hit to the right by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED in the right hitting display section 9030 . In the present embodiment, when prompting the player to hit to the right, lighting means such as an LED in the right-hand hitting display unit 9030 lights (lights up), and when not prompting the player to hit to the right, That is, when prompting the player to hit left, lighting means such as an LED in the hitting right display section 9030 is extinguished. After the design is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display lighting designation command to the effect control CPU 120, lights the right-handed display unit 9030, and after the design is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. , A right-handed display extinguishing designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120, and the right-handed display unit 9030 is extinguished. In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 may light the right-handed display unit 9030 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 and turns off the right hitting display section 9030 .

Here, hitting to the right means that the game ball is shot toward the second flow path out of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. is to operate the hitting operation handle 30 (how to hit). The first flow-down path is, for example, a path passing through the left area of the game area, and ahead of it is a first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, while the variable winning ball device This path does not have the second start winning opening formed in 6B. The second flow path is, for example, a path that passes through the right side area of the game area, and beyond that is a second start winning opening and a big winning opening (usually a big winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V grand prize opening) exist. When the player shoots the game ball toward the first flow-down path, the game ball flows through the first flow-down path toward the first start winning opening. When the player shoots the game ball toward the second flow-down path, the game ball passes through the second flow-down path and enters the second start winning opening or the big winning opening (normal big winning opening, V big winning opening). flow into.

In the present embodiment, in the jackpot game after the occurrence of the jackpot, and the game state after the jackpot game (time-saving state and variable probability state), the player hits to the right, and is provided on the right side of the game area. The game ball is made to enter the second start winning opening and the big winning opening, and during that time, the right-handed display section 9030 prompts the player to hit right. The player hits to the right while the display urging him to hit to the right is displayed, thereby causing the game balls to enter the second start prize-winning opening and a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls to be paid out. The right of the second special game can be obtained, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls are paid out by entering the game balls into the normal big winning opening. Furthermore, as will be described later in detail, the V big winning opening is opened during the round of the probability variable jackpot. It is also possible to obtain the right to enter the game ball into the winning opening and be controlled to the variable probability state. Therefore, by hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right is being displayed, the player can benefit overall. In addition, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the hitting ball operation handle 30 so as to shoot the game ball toward the first flow-down path (hitting method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), the fourth symbol unit 9050 includes a special figure 1 storage display unit 9051 indicating the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a second special figure corresponding to the second special figure game. 2 Special figure 2 storage display unit 9052 showing the number of pending memories, Special figure 1 variable display unit 9053 indicating the situation or display result of the variable display of the 1st special figure, The situation or display result of the variable display of the 2nd special figure A special figure 2 variable display unit 9054 showing and a right hitting display unit 9055 prompting the player to hit right. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence/absence of variable display of the special figure, the number of reservations, and the instruction to hit to the right by lighting/flashing/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 9053 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 9054 indicates whether or not the second special symbol is being variably displayed in the second special figure game, and the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of the variable display is indicated by an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by the lighting means.

Below, the variation display (variable display) of the first special symbol to represent the variation of the stop symbol of the first special symbol by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 1 variable display portion 9021 and the special figure 1 variable display portion 9053 Also called In addition, representing the variation of the stop design of the second special symbol by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 2 variable display unit 9022 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 9054 is also referred to as the variation display (variable display) of the second special symbol. called.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when prompting the player to hit to the right, lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 9055 of the fourth symbol unit 9050 lights (lights up), indicating that the player hits to the right. is not urged to the player, that is, when the player is urged to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display section 9055 is extinguished. After design determination, the effect control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display unit 9055 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting designation command from the CPU 103, and the design is changed by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After the determination, the right-handed display unit 9055 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed display extinguishing designation command from the CPU 103 . In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 may light the right hitting display section 9055 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 extinguishes the right hitting display section 9055 based on the reception of the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103 .

FIG. 4(c) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the fourth symbol unit and the game effect lamp. In the pachinko game machine 1, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a before-variation pattern command and a later-variation pattern command, or a symbol determination command, among the effect control commands, the fourth symbol unit 9050 and the game effect lamp , lighting/blinking/extinguishing. Before the fluctuation pattern command and after the fluctuation pattern command, from the CPU103 of the game control microcomputer 100 to be described later, is a command output to the production control CPU120 of the production control board 12, before the fluctuation pattern command and after the fluctuation pattern It is output to CPU120 for production|presentation control from CPU103 by one set by a command. Hereinafter, the pre-variation pattern command and the post-variation pattern command are collectively referred to as a variation pattern command.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 changes the lighting mode of the LED (special figure 1 variable display 9053 and special figure 2 variable display 9054) in the fourth symbol unit 9050 when a variation pattern command is received from the CPU 103 . For example, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives a variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol game from the CPU 103, based on the received variation pattern command, the lighting mode of the special figure 1 variable display 9053 is changed to the first special symbol. Switching from extinguishing indicating stop to blinking indicating variation of the first special symbol. In addition, the effect control CPU120, when receiving the variation pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol game from the CPU103, based on the received variation pattern command, changes the lighting mode of the special figure 2 variable display 9054 to the second special symbol. Switching from the light-off indicating the stop to the blinking indicating the variation of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern command from the CPU 103, the lighting mode before receiving the variation pattern command is changed without changing the lighting mode of the LED (frame lamp, etc.) in the game effect lamp. maintain.

Also, the effect control CPU 120 changes the lighting mode of the LED (special figure 1 variable display 9053 and special figure 2 variable display 9054) in the 4th symbol unit 9050 when the design confirmation command is received from the CPU 103 . For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103 a symbol determination command that specifies to end the variation of the symbol in the first special figure game, the special figure 1 variable display 9053 is lit based on the received symbol determination command. The aspect is switched from blinking indicating the variation of the first special symbol to extinguishing indicating the stop of the first special symbol. In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103 a symbol determination command that specifies to end the variation of the symbol in the second special figure game, based on the received symbol determination command, the special figure 2 variable display 9054 is lit. The aspect is switched from blinking indicating the variation of the second special symbol to extinguishing indicating the stop of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, even if the design confirmation command is received from the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 does not change the lighting condition of the LED (frame lamp, etc.) in the game effect lamp, and changes the lighting condition before receiving the design confirmation command. maintain.

Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the fourth symbol unit 9050, the mode of the lamp (LED) changes according to the reception of the variation pattern command and the symbol determination command. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game effect lamp 9 maintains the state of the lamp before and after receiving the command regardless of whether the variation pattern command or the symbol determination command is received. Incidentally, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the mode of the game effect lamp 9 according to the reception of the variation pattern command. For example, when the game state changes from the normal state to the time saving state after the big hit, the pachinko game machine 1 changes from the lighting mode of the normal state to the time saving state in response to receiving the variation pattern command for starting the time saving state. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed to the lighting mode of .

FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the screen in the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 displays images such as variable display of decorative patterns and ready-to-win effects. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, decoration patterns (designs showing numbers etc.) as decoration identification information of a plurality of types different from the special patterns are displayed. etc.) is displayed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

At the lower end of the screen of the image display device 5, there is a first reserved memory display area 5D in which the number of reserved memories can be displayed by the number of circular reserved displays, and the number of second reserved memories is displayed by the number of reserved circular displays. A displayable second pending memory display area 5U and an active display area 5A for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display being executed as an active display are provided.

At the upper right end of the screen of the image display device 5, a fourth symbol 5J is displayed to indicate that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. Numbers indicating the number of first reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories are displayed below the fourth symbol 5J. As for the number indicating the number of reservations, the left side indicates the first reserved number of memories, and the right side indicates the second number of reserved memories. A small pattern 5M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed at the bottom of the display showing the number of reservations. The small patterns are displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L, the "middle" decorative design display area 5C, and the "right" decorative design display area 5R. Patterns corresponding to each of the decorative patterns are arranged in the horizontal direction. The small pattern 5M is also a pattern that is always displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 without being hidden during the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 5, the decorative pattern is arranged in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 5M is smaller in size than the decorative pattern at the right end of the screen of the image display device 5. are placed. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 5M is lower than the visibility of the decoration pattern.

As shown in FIG. 5A, the shape of the screen of the image display device 5 is rectangular or substantially rectangular, and the game board 2 is fixed so as to cover the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. It is Therefore, as shown in FIG. 5(b), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, part of the screen of the image display device 5 (especially the edge) is invisible or difficult to see due to the game board 2. It has become.

<Board configuration>
FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining various substrates and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a relay board 15, and the like. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 . Furthermore, a power board 17 connected to a power switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100 V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (for example, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 , an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 has, for example, an input port for receiving various signals (detection signals to be described later), and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the special LED board 9020 and the like, solenoid drive signals). and

The switch circuit 110 receives a detection signal ( A detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 .

The output circuit 111 transmits the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, or the solenoid 83.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 30 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control commands include, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the type of jackpot), variation patterns used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, the start and end of variable display, the opening status of the big winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The effect control CPU 120 supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9. Luminance data (a signal designating the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) for the operation is supplied to the LED driver. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

Each game effect lamp has a game effect lamp LED board on which an LED (lamp) and an LED driver that supplies a current to the LED are mounted, although the details will be described later. The LED driver turns on/flashes/extinguishes the game effect lamp 9 by adjusting the current for each LED (lamp) included in the game effect lamp 9 based on the luminance data from the performance control CPU 120 . In this manner, the effect control CPU 120 controls lighting/blinking/extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9 .

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, luminance data signal). and an output port for

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12 and the sound control board 13, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

The fourth symbol unit 9050 is connected to the effect control board 12, and is capable of lighting (blinking) each display part under the control of the effect control CPU 120. FIG.

<Overview of Game Progress>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the configuration described above, the game progresses as follows. A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first start winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the special figure 1 variable display section 9021 of the special figure LED board 9020 is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game by the special figure 2 variable display section 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running or during the period when it is controlled to the jackpot game state described later (starting winning occurs, but it is based on the starting winning If the special game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display portion 9021 and the special figure 2 variable display portion 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 is a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol, described later) The actual pattern differs depending on the kind of jackpot.) When a combination of lighting modes corresponding to the above is achieved, a "jackpot" is achieved. In addition, in the combination of the lighting mode of a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display portion 9021 and the special figure 2 variable display portion 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020, the lighting mode corresponding to a specific special pattern (big hit pattern) is also referred to as a "specific display result". In addition, the combination of lighting modes of a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display portion 9021 and the special figure 2 variable display portion 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 corresponds to a special pattern (losing pattern) different from the big hit pattern When a combination of lighting modes is obtained, it becomes "losing". In addition, in the combination of lighting modes of a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display portion 9021 and the special figure 2 variable display portion 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020, it corresponds to a special pattern (losing pattern) different from the big hit pattern This lighting mode is also referred to as a "failure display result".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. In addition, you may be made to be controlled by a small hit game state as an advantageous state. Here, a small win is a win in which the number of openings of the big winning opening is smaller than that of a big win. In addition, when the small hit game state ends, the game state does not change. That is, before and after the small winning game state, there is no transition from the variable probability state to the normal state or from the normal state to the variable probability state. In addition, as with the big hit types, the "small hit" may also be provided with a small hit type.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is either the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses or the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earliest timing. This predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (10 times or 7 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, the kind of big win is set in the "big win". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning mouth and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a probability variable state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game is improved compared to the normal state. Therefore, control (high open control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time-saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the termination conditions, such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big win game state, is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as the number of times cut (number of times cut short time, number of times cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a probability variable state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, as in the case where the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability-high base state, a high-probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and a normal state is also called a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of the game effect lamp 9, It may be performed by turning off the light, by moving the movable body 32, or by using any rendering device including some or all of these.

As effects executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which is higher in reliability of big win than normal reach. In addition, super reach includes the first half of super reach that ends in the first half of super reach, the second half of super reach that develops from the first half of super reach, and the final reach that develops from the first half of super reach. In the present embodiment, the reliability of the big hit is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the normal reach. Also, the reliability of the big hit is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the latter half of the super reach than the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach. Also, the reliability of the big hit is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the final reach than the display result of the variable display is derived in the second half of the super reach. In the following, "super reach" is referred to as "SP reach", "first half of super reach" is "first half of SP (first half of SP reach)", "second half of super reach" is "second half of SP (second half of SP reach)", " Final Reach” is also referred to as “SP Final (SP Final Reach)”.

When the display result of the special game is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to the "jackpot" (specific display result described above), on the screen of the image display device 5, the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern is determined in advance. Determined decoration patterns that will be a big hit combination are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decoration patterns is "big hit"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7") are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big win'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stop-displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit". As the promotion effect, for example, after temporarily stopping the non-probability variation pattern (normal pattern) as a result of the big hit display, a re-lottery effect may be executed for inciting whether or not to promote to the probability variation pattern. In addition, a round promotion performance may be executed in which the non-probability variable big win is promoted to the probability variable big win during the big win game state.

When the display result of the special figure game is a combination of the lighting modes corresponding to "losing" (the above-mentioned losing display result), the variable display of the decorative pattern is not the ready-to-win mode, but the variable display of the decorative pattern. As a result of the display, the fixed decoration pattern of the non-reach combination (also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect that foretells the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

<Various tables related to big hits>
Various tables relating to big wins will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG.

[Hit type]
FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the hit types. As shown in FIG. 7, in the hit type table, for each type (type) of hit in the big win, the probability of big win after the end of the big win game state, the base after the end of the big win game state, and the number of times of opening in the big win ( number of rounds) is shown.

Specifically, as types of jackpots, normal jackpots 1 and 2 and variable probability jackpots 1 to 9 are provided. In addition, below, the mark of each round may be represented by "R". For example, the first round is also referred to as the 1Rth, and the second round is also referred to as the 2Rth.

The normal jackpot 1 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after three rounds of jackpot game states are completed. In the normal jackpot 1, such a low-probability-high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is performed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

The normal jackpot 2 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low-probability state and a high-base state after three rounds of jackpot game states are completed. In the normal jackpot 2, such a low-probability-high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability variable jackpots 1 to 5 are jackpots controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after three rounds of the jackpot game state are completed. In the probability variable jackpot 1, such a high probability/high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The variable probability big win 6 is a big win controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after five rounds of the big win game state are completed. In the probability variable jackpot 6, such a high probability/high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability variable jackpot 7 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after seven rounds of jackpot game states are completed. In the probability variable jackpot 7, such a high probability/high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability variable jackpots 8 and 9 are jackpots controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after 10 rounds of the jackpot game state are completed. In the probability variable jackpots 8 and 9, such a high probability/high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

[Each random number]
FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining each random number. As shown in FIG. 8, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, the random 1 is a hit determination random counter that determines whether or not to make a big win. Random 1 is, for example, updated by adding 1 from 1 to its upper limit of 65536, and then updated again from 1. Random 2 is a random counter (for jackpot type determination) that determines the jackpot type (type).

Random 3 and random 4 are random counters (for later variation pattern determination) that determine a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a later variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the later variation among the variation patterns. The post-fluctuation refers to the fluctuation in the second half of the fluctuations in the special design. Random 3 is a random counter that determines a post-fluctuation pattern corresponding to the time of failure. Updated. Random 4 is a random counter that determines a post-variation pattern corresponding to a hit.

Random 5 is a random counter (previous variation pattern determination) that determines a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a previous variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the previous variation among the variation patterns. The previous fluctuation refers to the fluctuation in the first half of the special symbol fluctuation. Random 5 is, for example, incremented by 1 from 1 to its upper limit of 251, and then incremented from 1 again. Random 6 is a random counter (for normal design hit determination) that determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal design. Random 6 is, for example, incremented by 1 from 1 to its upper limit of 201, and then incremented from 1 again.

In this embodiment, it is determined based on the value of the jackpot determination random number (random 1) whether or not the game is controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Then, which one of the plurality of types of jackpots is selected is determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 2). At this time, the jackpot pattern may be determined based on the random 2 value.

Also, first, the post-variation pattern is determined according to the hit or loss using the post-variation pattern determination random number (random 3, 4), and the post-variation pattern determination random number (random 5) is used to determine the post-variation pattern. be done. Thus, in this embodiment, a variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

[Jackpot determination table, jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a big-hit determination table and a big-hit type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101. FIG.

FIG. 9(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which jackpot determination values to be compared with random 1 are set. The big hit determination table includes a normal (non-variable probability) big win determination table used in a normal state (game state not variable probability state, that is, non-variable probability state) and a variable probability big win determination table used in the variable probability state.

In the normal jackpot determination table, the jackpot determination values are set by the number of determination values listed in the upper column of FIG. A big hit judgment value is set for the number of judgment values described in . The jackpot judgment value set in the probability variable jackpot judgment table is the same as the jackpot judgment value set in the normal jackpot judgment table. A larger number of jackpot determination values than the jackpot determination table are set. As a result, in the variable probability state, it is determined to be a big hit with a higher probability than in the normal state.

At a predetermined time, the CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 and compares the extracted value with the value of the jackpot determination random number (random 1). If it coincides with the big hit determination value, it is determined to make a big win (normal big win or probability variable big win) with respect to the special symbol. In addition, FIG. 9(a) shows the probability (percentage) of winning or the probability (percentage) of losing.

FIGS. 9B and 9C are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table. FIG. 9(b) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type when the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot. FIG. 9(c) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type when the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot.

In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 9(b), the numerical values to be compared with the random value 2 for jackpot type determination correspond to normal jackpots 1 and 2 and probability variable jackpots 1 to 4, respectively. Judgment values are set for the number of judgment values that have been set. For example, as shown in FIG. 9B, for the first special figure, the normal jackpot 1 is assigned 25 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, and the normal jackpot 2 is assigned 100 random 2 values. 25 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values are assigned, variable jackpot 1 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, and variable jackpot 2 is assigned 37 out of 100 random 2 values random 2 values are assigned, variable jackpot 3 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2, variable jackpot 4 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 value is assigned.

In the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 9 (c), the determination value is set as the number of determination values corresponding to each of the probability variable jackpots 5 to 9, which is the numerical value to be compared with the random 2 value. It is For example, as shown in FIG. 9(c), for the second special figure, the probability variable jackpot 5 is assigned 10 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, and the probability variable jackpot 6 is assigned 100 random 2 values. 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values are assigned, variable jackpot 7 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, and variable jackpot 8 is assigned 70 out of 100 random 2 values random 2 values are assigned, and the probability variable jackpot 9 is assigned 10 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines a type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of random 2 matches as the jackpot type, and also determines the value of random 2 as the jackpot pattern. Determine the jackpot pattern. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

<Production control command>
FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of the effect control command. The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, which is the control board on the main side, transmits various production control commands to the production control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The effect control command is composed of, for example, 2 bytes, the 1st byte indicates MODE (class of command), and the 2nd byte indicates EXT (type of command). Note that the command form shown in FIG. 10 is an example, and other command forms may be used. In the following, "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number, but may be omitted in this specification.

The command 80XX (H) is a variation pattern that designates a variation pattern (previous variation pattern) corresponding to the previous variation among the variation patterns of the decorative symbols variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols. command (XX corresponds to the number of the previous variation pattern). The previous variation on the sub side refers to the variation in the first half of the variation of the decoration design that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of previous variation patterns, there is a previous variation pattern command corresponding to each of the previous variation patterns specified by the number.

The command 84XX (H) is a variation pattern that designates a variation pattern (post-variation pattern) corresponding to the post-variation among the variation patterns of the decorative symbols variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols. command (XX corresponds to the post-variation pattern number). The post-variation on the sub-side refers to the variation in the latter half of the variation of the decoration design that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of post-variation patterns, there is a post-variation pattern command corresponding to each of the post-variation patterns specified by the number.

A front variation pattern command and a rear variation pattern command are transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control CPU 120 as one set of two commands. The effect control CPU 120 cannot specify the variation pattern only by receiving only one of the front variation pattern command and the rear variation pattern command, and receives both the front variation pattern command and the rear variation pattern command. By doing so, the variation pattern can be identified.

Command 8101 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special figure. Command 8102 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the second special figure. When the command 8101 (H) or the command 8102 (H) is received, the effect control CPU 101 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The command 8C01(H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that it is determined to be a failure. The command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 1 is determined. The command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (normal jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 2 is determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (variable probability big hit 1 designation command) indicating that variable probability big hit 1 is determined. The command 8C05 (H) is a display result 5 designation command (variable probability big hit 2 designation command) indicating that the variable probability big hit 2 is determined. Command 8C06 (H) is a display result 6 designation command (variable probability big hit 3 designation command) indicating that variable probability big hit 3 is determined. Command 8C07 (H) is a display result 7 designation command (variable probability big hit 4 designation command) indicating that variable probability big hit 4 is determined. The command 8C08 (H) is a display result 8 designation command (variable probability big hit 5 designation command) indicating that the variable probability big hit 5 is determined. Command 8C09 (H) is a display result 9 designation command (variable probability big hit 6 designation command) indicating that variable probability big hit 6 is determined. The command 8C10 (H) is a display result 10 designation command (variable probability big hit 7 designation command) indicating that the variable probability big hit 7 is determined. The command 8C11 (H) is a display result 11 designation command (variable probability big hit 8 designation command) indicating that the variable probability big hit 8 is determined. The command 8C12 (H) is a display result 12 designation command (variable probability big hit 9 designation command) indicating that the variable probability big hit 9 is determined. Loss designation commands, normal jackpot 1, 2 designation commands, and probability variable jackpot 1-9 designation commands, or collectively these commands are also referred to as 8C system commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the first special figure. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special figure. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or collectively these commands are also referred to as 8D system commands. The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that designates the end of the variation of the first special figure and the second special figure.

The command 9000 (H) is an initialization designation command that designates initialization (designates display of the initial screen at power-on) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power failure recovery specification command that specifies recovery from power failure (specifies display of a power failure recovery screen) that is transmitted when power supply to the game machine is resumed. A command 9500 (H) is a normal state designation command for designating a normal state background. The command 9501 (H) is a time saving state designation command for designating the background of the time saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a probability changing state designation command that designates the background of the probability changing state. Each of the normal state designation command, the time saving state designation command, and the variable probability state designation command, or these are collectively referred to as the 95 series command or the background designation command.

The command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating transition to a customer waiting demonstration display. The effect control CPU 120 determines that there is no pending at present by receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Then, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the demonstration image 30 seconds after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 lights the game effect lamp 9 in a lamp mode for demonstration 30 seconds after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 for demonstration is more lively than the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 in the normal state (higher brightness, more blinking mode, rainbow lighting, etc.). As a result, the attractiveness of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shown to the player. In the demonstration display of waiting for customers, the background in the normal state (hereinafter also referred to as the normal background) is displayed, and the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Also, in the demonstration display of waiting for customers, the title of the gaming machine 1 (for example, "POWERFUL II") may be displayed, or an introductory image (still image or moving image) of part of the effect may be displayed.

The command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that designates the start of the normal jackpot 1. The command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command for designating the start of the normal jackpot 2 . Command A003 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 3 designation command that designates the start of probability variable jackpot 1 . Command A004 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 4 specification command that designates the start of probability variable jackpot 2 . Command A005 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 5 designation command that designates the start of probability variable jackpot 3. The command A006 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 6 designation command that designates the start of the probability variable jackpot 4 . Command A007 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 7 specification command that designates the start of probability variable jackpot 5 . Command A008 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 8 specification command that designates the start of probability variable jackpot 6 . Command A009 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 9 specification command that designates the start of probability variable jackpot 7 . Command A010 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 10 designation command that designates the start of probability variable jackpot 8 . The command A011 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 11 specification command that designates the start of the probability variable jackpot 9 . Each of the jackpot start 1 to 11 designation commands, or collectively these commands are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX(H) is a command for specifying during the opening of the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designation command during the opening of the big winning opening is also referred to as an A1 system command. A2XX(H) is a post-opening designation command for the large winning opening that indicates closing of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designated command after the opening of the big winning opening is also called an A2 series command.

The command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command for designating the end of the normal jackpot 1. The command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that designates the end of the normal jackpot 2 . Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 1 . Command A304 (H) is a jackpot end 4 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 2 . Command A305 (H) is a jackpot end 5 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 3. Command A306 (H) is a jackpot end 6 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 4 . Command A307 (H) is a jackpot end 7 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 5 . Command A308 (H) is a jackpot end 8 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 6 . Command A309 (H) is a jackpot end 9 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 7 . The command A310 (H) is a jackpot end 10 designation command that designates the end of the probability variable jackpot 8 . Command A311 (H) is a jackpot end 11 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 9 . Each of the jackpot end 1 to 11 designation commands, or collectively these commands are also called A3 series commands.

Command AD00 (H) is a variable probability determination device passing designation command that designates that a V prize has occurred. The probability variation determination device passage specification command is a command transmitted when a game ball that has passed through the V big winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 24 .

Command B100 (H) is a first start prize designation command that designates that there has been a first start prize. Command B200 (H) is a second start prize designation command that designates that there has been a second start prize.

Command C1XX(H) is a first reserved storage number designating command that designates that the first reserved storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first reserved storage number designation command is also called a C1-type command. The command C2XX(H) is a second pending storage designation command that designates that the second pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second reserve storage number designation command is also called a C2-type command.

Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) are the contents of the judgment results at the time of winning such as jackpot judgment, jackpot type judgment, variation pattern type judgment at the time of start winning to the first start winning mouth or second start winning mouth It is a production control command shown. Among them, the command C4XX(H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not a big hit will be made and the judgment result of the kind of big win among the results of determination at the time of winning.

C7XX(H) is a large winning opening designation command indicating passage of the game ball to the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed display extinguishing command indicating extinguishing of the right-handed display. A command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1 is a right-handed display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed display. In the present embodiment, especially the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD system command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a big win will occur, the type of the big win, and the range of judgment values of the variation pattern type judging random number at the time of starting winning. Then, a value designating a big hit and a value designating the type of big win are set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, and control is performed to transmit them to the effect control CPU 120 . In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value specifying the range of the determination value as the determination result of the variation pattern type to the EXT data of the variation type command, and controls transmission to the effect control CPU 120 . The effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result will be a big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and can recognize the type of the big win, and can recognize the variation pattern type based on the variation type command. .

<Variation pattern>
Contents of the variation pattern and determination of the variation pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 17. FIG.

In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100, which is the main side, sets a plurality of types of variation patterns. Each variation pattern is managed by a main variation number, and is composed of a combination of a pre-variation pattern, which is a variation pattern corresponding to the pre-variation, and a post-variation pattern, which corresponds to the post-variation. It is designed to contain The previous variation pattern corresponds to the previous variation pattern command (80XX (H)) described with reference to FIG. 10, and the later variation pattern corresponds to the later variation pattern command (84XX (H)) described with reference to FIG. corresponds to

[Previous fluctuation pattern on the main side]
FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a previous variation pattern on the main side. Of the plurality of types of pre-variation patterns to which the pre-variation numbers are respectively assigned, the pre-variation number 1 is a pre-variation pattern command (8000 (H)) that designates normal variation (for example, variation of decorative patterns over 13 seconds) is. The previous variation number 2 is a previous variation pattern command (8001 (H)) that designates a shortened variation (for example, a variation of decorative patterns over 7 seconds). The previous variation number 3 is a previous variation pattern command (8002 (H)) that designates a super-shortened variation (for example, a variation of the decoration pattern over 3 seconds).

Pre-variation number 4 is a pre-variation pattern command (8003 (H)) that specifies normal reach (normal or first half of SP) (reach that ends with normal reach or end with first half of SP reach after becoming a reach mode). Pre-variation number 5 is a pre-variation pattern command (8004 (H)) that designates normal reach (SP latter half development) (reach that develops into SP latter half reach after becoming a reach mode). Pre-variation number 6 is a pre-variation pattern command (8005 (H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) (reach that develops into final reach after being in a reach mode).

Pre-variation number 7 is a pre-variation pattern command (8006 (H)) that designates execution of normal reach (normal or first half of SP) after one pseudo-variation. Pseudo-variation means that the variable display is temporarily stopped and then restarted from the start of the variable display (variable display) of the decorative pattern until the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. It is a variable display (variable display). An effect that repeats such a pseudo-variation is also called a pseudo-run. By executing the pseudo-continuation, the variable display based on one reserved memory can be shown to the player as if it were a plurality of pseudo-variable displays. Note that the variable display resumed after being temporarily stopped is also referred to as “re-variable display”. Pre-variation number 8 is a pre-variation pattern command (8007 (H)) that designates execution of normal reach (development of SP latter half) after one pseudo-variation. Pre-variation number 9 is a pre-variation pattern command (8008 (H)) that designates normal reach (final reach development) after one pseudo-variation.

Pre-fluctuation number 10 is a pre-fluctuation pattern command (8009(H)) that designates execution of normal reach (normal or first half of SP) after two pseudo-fluctuations. Pre-variation number 11 is a pre-variation pattern command (800A(H)) that designates execution of normal reach (development of SP latter half) after performing pseudo-variation twice. Pre-variation number 12 is a pre-variation pattern command (800B(H)) that designates normal reach (final reach development) after performing pseudo-variation twice.

Each of the previous variation patterns has a specified variation time, and an animation (moving image) is displayed on the image display device 5 over each variation time. Incidentally, in the pachinko game machine 1, it takes about 33.3 msec for one still image (referred to as a frame) constituting a moving image. For example, in the case of the patterns of previous variation numbers 7 to 9, the variation time is set to 41500 mse, and the number of frames is approximately 1246 frames. In the case of the patterns of the previous variation numbers 10 to 12, the variation time is set to 62000 mse, and the number of frames is approximately 1861 frames.

[Post-fluctuation pattern on the main side]
FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-variation pattern on the main side. Of the plurality of types of post-variation patterns to which post-variation numbers are assigned, post-variation number 1 is a post-variation pattern command (8400 (H)) that designates a 13-second variation. Post-variation number 2 is a post-variation pattern command (8401(H)) that designates a 7-second variation. Post-variation number 3 is a post-variation pattern command (8402(H)) specifying a 3-second variation. Post-variation number 4 is a post-variation pattern command (8403(H)) that designates execution of a pseudo-repeating sequence. Pseudo-continuum is an effect that pretends to execute a pseudo-continuum but does not execute the pseudo-continuum after all.

Post-variation number 5 is a post-variation pattern command (8404 (H)) that designates normal reach (losing) (variation of decoration pattern that becomes a loss mode without developing into SP reach although it becomes a reach mode). Post-variation number 6 is a post-variation pattern command (8405 (H)) that designates the first half of SP (losing) (variation of decorative pattern that develops into SP reach but loses in the first half of SP reach). The post-variation number 7 is a post-variation pattern command (8406 (H)) that designates the second half of the SP (losing) (the variation of the decorative pattern that develops in the latter half of the SP reach but becomes a losing mode in the latter half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 8 is a post-variation pattern command (8407 (H)) that designates the final reach (loss) (variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the final reach but becomes a loss mode in the final reach).

The post-variation number 9 is a post-variation pattern command (8408(H)) that designates normal reach (hit) (variation of the decorative pattern that becomes a reach state and becomes a hit state). The post-variation number 10 is a post-variation pattern command (8409 (H)) that designates the SP first half (hit) (variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the SP reach and becomes a hit mode in the first half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 11 is a post-variation pattern command (840A(H)) that designates the second half of the SP (hit) (variation of the decorative pattern that develops in the latter half of the SP reach and becomes a hit mode in the latter half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 12 is a post-variation pattern command (840B(H)) that designates the final reach (hit) (variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the final reach and becomes a winning mode in the final reach).

[Determination of post-fluctuation pattern]
The post-variation pattern is determined using different random counters depending on whether a big win or a loss is determined in the big win determination. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the post-fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of losing. As shown in FIG. 13, when it is determined to be a loss in the big hit determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using random 3 described in FIG. Furthermore, when it is determined to be a loss in the big hit determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using different determination values according to the number of pending memories after digestion, and the determined post-variation number is also different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13 (a), when the number of retained memories after digestion is 0, one of the post-variation numbers 1, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, A different number of judgment values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (the selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is 1, one of the post-variation numbers 1, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (the selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is 2, one of the post-variation numbers 2, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (the selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is 3, any post-variation pattern is determined from post-variation numbers 3, 4, 5 to 8, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (the selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

In this way, a post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of judgment values according to the number of retained memories after digestion, and a post-variation number is determined using a different number of judgment values according to the number of retained memories after digestion. Therefore, the type of variation pattern changes according to the number of remaining reserved memories, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game and improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the post-variation pattern determination table at the time of the big hit. As shown in FIG. 14, when a big win is determined in the big win determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using the random 4 described in FIG. Furthermore, when a big win is determined in the big win determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using different determination value numbers according to the type of the big win.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14(a), when the normal jackpot 1, 2 or the probability variable jackpot 1, 2, 5 to 8 is determined, one of the post-variation numbers 9 to 12 posterior variation patterns are determined, and a different decision value number is provided for each of the posterior variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (the selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

When one of the probability variable jackpots 3 and 9 is determined, one of the post-variation patterns is determined from among the post-variation numbers 9 to 12, and different judgment values are provided for each of the post-variation patterns. . The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (the selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

When the probability variable jackpot 4 is determined, one of the post-variation numbers 9 to 12 is determined, and different judgment values are provided for each of the post-variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (the selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

In this way, since the post-variation pattern is determined using different judgment value numbers according to the type of the big win, the kind of the variation pattern changes according to the kind of the big win, thereby adding variety to the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13, the probability of being determined to be one of the fluctuation numbers 6 to 8 after developing into the SP reach or the final reach is about 1/102 at the time of losing, whereas the big hit Since the time is about 1/1.1, which is higher than that, the player can expect a big win in the event of SP reach or final reach.

[Determination of previous fluctuation pattern]
FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the previous variation pattern determination table. The pre-variation pattern is determined using a different number of random 5 judgment values depending on the type of the pre-determined post-variation pattern. Furthermore, the determined pre-variation number differs depending on the type of post-variation pattern that has been previously determined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(a), when the post-variation pattern of post-variation number 1 is determined, the pre-variation pattern of pre-variation number 1 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(b), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 2 is determined, the pre-fluctuation pattern of pre-fluctuation number 2 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(c), when the post-variation pattern of post-variation number 3 is determined, the pre-variation pattern of pre-variation number 3 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(d), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 4 is determined, the pre-fluctuation pattern of pre-fluctuation number 1 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15(e), when either of the post-fluctuation patterns of post-fluctuation numbers 5 and 9 is determined, the pre-fluctuation pattern of pre-fluctuation numbers 4 and 7 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(f), when any of the post-variation patterns of post-variation numbers 6 and 10 is determined, the pre-variation pattern of any of pre-variation numbers 4, 7 and 10 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(g), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 7 is determined, the pre-fluctuation pattern of any of pre-fluctuation numbers 5, 8, and 11 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15(h), when the post-variation pattern of post-variation number 11 is determined, the pre-variation pattern of any of pre-variation numbers 5, 8, and 11 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(i), when the post-variation pattern of post-variation number 8 is determined, the pre-variation pattern of pre-variation number 6, 9 or 12 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(j), when the post-variation pattern of post-variation number 12 is determined, the pre-variation pattern of pre-variation number 6, 9 or 12 is determined.

[Total fluctuation pattern]
FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the main side. When the post-variation pattern and the pre-variation pattern are determined as described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15, one of the variation patterns of main variation numbers 1 to 26 as shown in FIG. 16 is obtained.

FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining an example of a lottery for an effect pattern on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 17, the effect control CPU 120 on the sub side determines the effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103 on the main side.

For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to one of the main variation numbers 7 to 9 from the CPU 103, among a plurality of types of reach effects, the effect of the SP first half reach A losing pattern described later, or , SP first half reach B loss pattern production is determined. When the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to one of the main variation numbers 18 to 20 from the CPU 103, the effect of the hit pattern of the SP first half reach A described later, or the SP One of the performances of the hit pattern of the first half reach B is determined.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to one of the main variation numbers 10 to 12 from the CPU 103, the effect of the losing pattern of reach A in the second half of SP, which will be described later, or SP It is determined to one of the effects of the losing pattern of the second half reach B. When the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to one of the main variation numbers 21 to 23 from the CPU 103, the effect of the hit pattern of the SP second half reach A, which will be described later, or the SP Any of the performances of the hit pattern of the second half reach B is determined.

<Action>
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

[Major Operations of Main Board 11]
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described.

(Special pattern process processing)
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), and settings for making the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

When the restoration condition is satisfied (Y in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation process (step S5) after executing the restoration process (step S4). The CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (N in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (step S6) and then the setting change process (step S7). The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle 30, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped. It is sufficient to perform control so that a display corresponding to is performed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, the CPU 103 stores (updates) the setting values displayed on the display monitor 29 in the backup area of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by the operation of the game hall staff. The display monitor 29 is turned off. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch 92 is ON, the initialization process of step S6 The setting change process of step S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. . If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is OFF when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is OFF, and if the clear switch 92 is ON, the initialization process of step S6 is performed. While it is executed, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and permits the interrupt. (Step S10). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

(Timer interrupt processing for game control)
FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing an example of game control timer interrupt processing. When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 19 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined main-side error process to perform an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and makes it possible to issue a warning according to the diagnosis result if necessary (step S22). After that, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output process so that, for example, the big win information (information indicating the number of occurrences of big wins, etc.) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the starting Data such as information (information indicating the number of start-up wins, etc.) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the odds have changed) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". Execution of the general pattern game is performed by driving the general pattern display unit 9026, and displays the general pattern reservation number by lighting the general pattern storage display unit 9025.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

(Special pattern process processing)
FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol process processing. The special symbol process processing is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S117) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit" and the type of the big hit in the case of a "big hit" are determined by the display result. is determined (predetermined) before is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of prior determination of whether or not the display result is a "big hit". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the form of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative pattern It specifies the content of the production (such as the type of reach production), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes the processing of setting for varying the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022, and the elapsed time since the special symbol starts to change It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022 stop the variation of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the variable probability state, and when the end of the number of cuts is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big win, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1, the lower the probability of winning a big win. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

The number of set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, and the game ball is a special variable winning ball device 7 during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the probability of big hit is higher than when the set value is any one of 1 to 3. may be set so that the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when the playability is changed according to the set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to an effect switch (for executing a predetermined effect each time a game ball passes through a predetermined area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Start winning judgment process)
FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the start prize determination process. The CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process in S101 of the special symbol process process shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (step S51). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is ON (Y in step S51), the number of first special figure pending memories, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. (For example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is determined (step S52). CPU103, for example by reading the first reservation storage number count value is the stored value of the first reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), it is sufficient if it can specify the number of the first special figure reservation storage. When the number of the first special figure reserved storage is not the upper limit value in step S52 (N in step S52), for example, the stored value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "1". (Step S53).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step S51 (N in step S51), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit in step S52 (Y in step S52), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is on (step S54). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is ON (Y in step S54), the number of second special figure pending memories, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. (For example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is determined (step S55). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation storage. When the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value in step S55 (N in step S55), for example, the storage value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2". (Step S56).

After executing either of the processes of step S53 and step S56, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (step S57). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", 1 is added to the first reserved storage number count value, and when the starting buffer value is "2", 1 is added to the second reserved storage number count value. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step S58). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of step S58, the CPU 103 selects the random number random number 1 for judging a big hit or the The numerical data representing the random number random number 2 and the random number random number numbers 3 and 4 for determining the variation pattern are extracted (step S59). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting port buffer value (step S60). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers random 1 to random 4 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit (not shown), while the start buffer value is "2". At some point, numerical data indicating random number random 1 to random 4 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit (not shown).

The numerical data indicating the random number random number 1 for judging the big hit and the random number random number 2 for judging the type of big hit determine whether the fluctuation display result of the special pattern or decorative pattern is "big hit", and whether the fluctuation display result is "big hit". It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number random numbers 3 and 4 for determining the variation pattern are used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step S59, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results of the special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step S59, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step S60). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", the performance control board 12 stores the storage address of the first start winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. to send the first start winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting mouth buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, etc. 2 Make settings for sending the start winning designation command. The start winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be.

Following the process of step S60, CPU 103 saves the random value in the save area corresponding to the reserved storage (step S61). After that, the CPU 103 clears the start buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (step S62), and then ends the start prize determination process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 22, in the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 is a first reserved storage buffer (storage buffer for storing the reserved storage information of the first special symbol) or a second reserved storage buffer (of the second special symbol It is determined whether or not there is reserved storage data in a storage buffer for storing reserved storage information (step S1001). If there is no reserved storage data in either the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (N in step S1001), it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stopped (step S1002). When the predetermined period does not pass from the fluctuation stop (N in step S1002), the special symbol normal processing is terminated. On the other hand, when a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (Y in step S1002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed (step S1003), and the special symbol normal process ends. Here, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, after transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt, based on the fact that the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag is set, the customer It is controlled so as not to send the wait demo designation command. Such a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag is reset when the variable display of the next special symbol is started.

When there is reserved storage data in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (Y in step S1001), the CPU 103 determines that the first data among the data set in the reserved specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether or not it is data (step S1004). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is not the data indicating the "second" (that is, the data indicating the "first") (N in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets the special symbol pointer (the Data indicating "first" is set in a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for one special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for a second special symbol (step S1005). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step S1004), CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step S1006 ).

In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special The variable display of the pattern is executed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

By the control of steps S1004 to S1006, if there is even one data of the second reserved storage in the second reserved storage buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second reserved storage is 1 It is executed with priority to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data of the reserved storage.

Next, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the saving area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 (step S1007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the first reserved memory count=1 in the first reserved memory buffer is read and stored in the reserve storage buffer of RAM 102 . In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in a pending storage buffer in RAM 102 .

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the number of storage areas in the first reserved storage buffer Shift content. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved storage number counter, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103, in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102, saves the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) Each stored random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n−1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reservation storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reservation storage buffer of the RAM 102 Store the random value in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or Second reserved storage number)=1, 2, 3, 4.

Next, the CPU 103, based on the value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after the subtraction, performs control to transmit the reserved storage number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 120 ( step S1009). In this case, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number designation command. Further, when a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step S1010), reads random R (random number for judging a big hit) from the reserve storage buffer, and executes a judging module for a big hit (step S1011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for judging a big hit, which is extracted in the starting winning judging process and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and judges the big win. The big-hit determination module is a program that compares a predetermined big-hit determination value (see FIG. 8) with a big-hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a big-hit if they match. That is, it is a program for executing the process of judging a big hit.

In the process of judging a big hit, when the game state is a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than when the game state is a non-variable probability state (normal game state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, the number of jackpot determination values is set in advance to a large number of probability-variable jackpot determination tables (tables in which the numbers in the lower column of FIG. 9 (a) are set), and when the number of jackpot determination values is variable A normal jackpot determination table (a table in which numerical values in the upper column of FIG. 9A are set) is provided, which is set to be smaller than the jackpot determination table. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming state is the variable probability state, and when the gaming state is the variable probability state, performs the processing for judging the big hit using the variable probability big hit determination table, and the game state is normal. When it is in the state or the time-saving state, the judgment of the big hit is processed using the normal big-hit judgment table. That is, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a big hit when the value of the big-hit determination random number (random 1) matches one of the big-hit determination values shown in FIG. 9(a). If it is determined to be a big hit (Y in step S1011), the process moves to step S1012. Determining whether or not to make a big win means determining whether or not to shift to the big win gaming state, but it also means determining whether or not the stop symbols in the special symbols are to be the big winning symbols. .

It should be noted that confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is the variable probability state is performed by whether or not the variable probability flag is set. The variable probability flag is set when the game state is shifted to the variable probability state, and is reset when ending the variable probability state. Specifically, the variable probability flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then the condition that the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the condition that the next big hit is determined. It is reset at the timing of ending the variable display of the special symbols and stop-displaying the stop symbols when either of the earlier conditions is established.

If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random 1) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S1011), the process proceeds to step S1015, which will be described later.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) matches any of the big hit determination values in step S1011, the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating a big hit (step S1012). It should be noted that the jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of jackpot types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 9(b) and the second special symbol jackpot type of FIG. 9(c) Select one of the determination tables. Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 9(b). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 9(c). Then, the CPU 103 reads the random number for judging the type of jackpot that is extracted in the starting winning judgment process and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and stores it in the reserve memory buffer using the selected jackpot type determination table. The jackpot type and jackpot pattern corresponding to the value of the random number (random 2) for judging the jackpot type are determined (step S1013).

Moreover, CPU103 sets the big-hit classification data which show the determined big-hit classification to the big-hit classification buffer in RAM102 (step S1014).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a special symbol stop symbol (step S1015). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, "-" which is a losing symbol is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot pattern determined in step S1014 is set as the special pattern stop pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result specifying command (step S1016), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step S1017).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 23, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines a post-variation pattern based on randoms 3 and 4 according to the number of pending memories and the presence or absence of a big hit (step S1101). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects the post-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Determining fluctuation patterns. Further, in the case of a big hit, the CPU 103 selects a post-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. decide.

Next, CPU 103 determines a previous variation pattern based on random 5 (step S1102). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects the previous fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 15 according to the post-variation pattern determined in S1102, and the pre-fluctuation based on the selected pre-variation pattern determination table and the random 5 value. determine the pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern (previous variation pattern and back variation pattern) to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1103).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a variable time timer formed in the RAM 102 to a value corresponding to the variable time corresponding to the selected variable pattern (step S1104). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1105), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step S1106).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 24, in the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step S1201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step S1202), the value of the special symbol process flag is changed to the special symbol. The value corresponding to the stop processing (step S113) is updated (step S1203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N in step S1202), the process ends.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 25, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to terminate the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the stop symbol on the special figure 1 variable display portion 9021 or the special figure 2 variable display portion 9022. Control for derived display is performed (step S1301). In addition, when data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 variable display section 9021 is ended, and "second" is indicated in the special symbol pointer. When the data is set, the variation of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 variable display section 9022 is ended. In addition, a symbol determination designation command is set in the effect control CPU 120 (step S1302). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 . Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S1303). Then, when the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1303), the process proceeds to step S1309.

When the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 103 resets the variable probability flag and the time saving flag (step S1304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right-handed display lighting command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1305).

In addition, referring to the opening pattern data stored in the ROM 101, the number of times of opening (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), the time between rounds Data indicating an open state such as an interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step S1306). For example, in the case of a 3R normal jackpot, an opening mode for opening the normal big winning openings in all of the 1st to 3rd rounds is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102 . In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot, the opening mode of opening the normal big prize winning opening in the 1st to 3rd and 5th rounds and opening the V big winning opening in the 4th round is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102.例文帳に追加In addition, in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot, the opening mode of opening the normal big prize winning opening in the 1st to 8th and 10th rounds and opening the V big winning opening in the 9th round is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102.例文帳に追加. Data on the number of times of opening (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of times of opening.

Also, a value corresponding to the fanfare time, which is the time for displaying the big win (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of the big win on the image display device 5), is set in the big winning hole control timer (step S1307). Thereafter, in the big win opening pre-processing, the big winning hole control timer is decremented by 1, and when it reaches 0, the big winning hole is opened and a round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step S1308), and the process is terminated.

When it is determined that the jackpot flag is not set in step S1303 (N in step S1304), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step S1309). . If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S1309), the process proceeds to step S1316. When the time saving flag is set (Y in step S1309), 1 is subtracted from the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the number of remaining fluctuations in the time saving state (step S1310). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time saving number counter has reached 0 (step S1311). When the value of the time saving number counter becomes 0 (Y in step S1311), it is determined that the duration of the time saving state has ended, and the time saving flag is reset (step S1312). As a result, when the variable display resulting in the failure display is performed a specific number of times (100 times) in the time saving state, the game state shifts from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. In step S1311, when the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (N in step S1311), the process proceeds to step S1316.

After step S1312, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is set (step S1313). When the probability variation flag is set (Y in step S1313), the probability variation flag is reset (step S1314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 in response to the fact that the game state has shifted from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step S1315), to step S1316. move on. If the variable probability flag is not set in step S1313 (N in step S1313), the process proceeds to step S1315 without performing the process of step S1314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1316), and the process is terminated.

(Jackpot opening preprocessing)
FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the big hit opening pre-processing. As shown in FIG. 26, in the jackpot opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 subtracts and updates the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (step S1401). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the big winning hole control timer is 0 (step S1402).

When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1402), a special winning opening open designating command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1403). Then, according to the opening pattern, the solenoid 82 is driven to open the normal big winning opening (step S1404). As a result, the normal big winning opening is opened in the first round.

Next, based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step S1306), the CPU 103 sets the large winning opening control timer to the maximum time (large winning opening opening time) during which the large winning opening can be opened. The corresponding big winning opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is set (step S1405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated (step S1406) to a value corresponding to the process during big hit opening (step S115), and the process ends.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of the process during jackpot opening. As shown in FIG. 27, in the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 subtracts and updates the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (step S1501).

Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big winning hole control timer has reached 0 (step S1502). When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1502), the process proceeds to step S1511. When the value of the big winning hole control timer is not 0 (N in step S1502), it is determined whether or not the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open (step S1503). Whether or not the normal big winning slot or the V big winning slot is open may be determined by the value of the opening number counter.

If it is determined in step S1503 that the normal big winning opening or the V big winning opening is not open (N in step S1503), the process is terminated.

If the normal big prize opening or the V big prize opening is open (Y in step S1503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 24 is turned on (step S1504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 24 is turned on (N in step S1504), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is ON (Y in step S1504), the winning number counter is incremented by 1 (updated by addition) (step S1505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation determination flag is set (step S1506). The variable probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that the variable probability state is controlled when a V winning occurs. If the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step S1506), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the variable probability determination flag is not set (N in step S1506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1507). If the V winning switch 24 is not turned on (N in step S1507), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is turned on (Y in step S1507), the probability variation determination flag is set (step S1508), the probability variation determination device passage specification command is transmitted (step S1509), and the process proceeds to step S1510 do.

Then, CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S1510). If the value of the winning number counter does not reach the predetermined number (N in step S1510), the process is terminated.

When the value of the winning number counter reaches a predetermined number (Y in step S1510), the CPU 103 controls to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal big winning opening, or to drive the solenoid 83 to close the V big winning opening. is closed (step S1511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing (setting to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step S1512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening post-processing (step S116) (step S1513), and ends the process.

(Jackpot opening post-processing)
FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of the process after opening the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 28, in the jackpot opening post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the opening number counter is 0 (step S1601).

If the value of the opening number counter is 0 (Y in step S1601), a jackpot end designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1602), and the jackpot end time (that the jackpot game has ended) is set to the big win opening control timer. For example, the time to notify in the image display device 5) is set (step S1603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end processing (step S117) (step S1604), End the process.

In step S1601, if the value of the number-of-opening counter is not 0 (N in step S1601), a designated command after opening the large winning opening is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1605), and the round starts in the large winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step S1606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round before the round (also referred to as the V opening round) in which the V big winning opening is opened, that is, the next round is the V opening round (step S1607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 and open the normal big winning opening (step S1608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 83 and open the V big winning opening (step S1609).

After step S1608 or step S1609, the CPU 103 transmits a special winning opening open specification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the process during big hit opening (step S115) (step S1611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot ending process. As shown in FIG. 29, in the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end control timer set with the jackpot end time (step S1701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the big winning hole control timer is 0 (whether or not the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step S1702). If the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1702), the process is terminated. If the value of the big winning hole control timer is 0 (Y in step S1702), the big hit flag is reset (step S1703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a variable probability determination flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step S1704). If the probability variation determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1704, if the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step S1704), the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set (step S1707). Next, the variable probability state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1708), the variable probability determination flag is reset (step S1709), and the process proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, a time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step S1710), and 100 is set to the time saving number counter (step S1711). Then, the process proceeds to step S1712.

On the other hand, in step S1704, if the probability variation determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), in step S1705, the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step S1705), and 100 is set to the time saving counter. (step S1706), and the process proceeds to step S1712.

In step S1712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1713), and ends the process. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 side can recognize whether it is in any game state, variable probability, short time, or normal, by a variable probability state designation command or the like transmitted from the CPU 103 .

[Main operations of production control board 12]
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described.

(Production control main processing)
In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30 is executed. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect control main process. When the production control main process shown in FIG. 30 is started, the production control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, CTC register settings. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (N in step S73), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to emit a prohibit command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (Y at step S73), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 for the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect control process processing. Effect control process processing is processing executed in step S76 of FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 31, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S175 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or, by driving the movable body 32, by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13 to output a sound or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, by outputting a command (lamp control data) to the LED driver Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs. After such effect control is performed, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decoration pattern is read out from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decoration pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . When receiving a performance control command designating the start of the big win game state, if the command designates the start of the big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving the command designating the start of the jackpot gaming state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the production process flag is set. is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". In this jackpot middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the effect contents in the big win game state, and executes various effect control in the big win game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "5" which is the value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. As shown in FIG. 32, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the result of the variable display is determined to be lost (step S7101). If the effect control CPU 120 is determined to be lost, it checks whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern is received as the variation pattern command (step S7103).

When it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern is received, the effect control CPU 120 uses the losing pattern determination data table to determine the display result of the losing pattern that does not become the reach as the final stop of the effect pattern (step S7105), and proceeds to step S7106.

When it is determined that it is not a non-reach variation pattern in the process of step S7103 (when it is determined that it is a reach variation pattern), the stop design of the effect design constituting the combination of reach design is determined (step S7104), and step S7106. proceed to

In addition, when it is not determined to be a loss in the process of step S7101 (when it is determined to be a big hit), the effect control CPU 101 forms a combination of big win patterns according to the type of the big win. A stop design of the effect design is determined (step S7102), and the process proceeds to step S7106.

Next, after executing the effect setting process (step S7106) for setting various effects in the variable display, the process proceeds to step S7107. For example, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute an effect suggesting a big hit (inciting whether or not it is a big hit) in the effect setting process of step S7106. Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute a cut-in effect shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 specifies whether or not to develop to the final reach based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command, and if it develops to the final reach, a big hit based on the variation pattern. Determine whether or not to execute a cut-in effect based on the determined result of whether or not it is a big hit, and determine the type of cut-in effect (red cut-in effect, green cut-in effect) in the case of execution. do. When executing the cut-in effect, the effect control CPU 101 sets information for executing the cut-in effect in the effect setting process.

In step S7107, the production control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types of production control patterns. In step S7107, according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command, and the various production control (production operation) patterns specified by the production control pattern of the production determined in the process of step S7106, the pattern fluctuation control pattern Among a plurality of types of pattern variation control patterns stored in a table, one of the performance control patterns corresponding to various specified performance operation patterns is selected and determined as a use pattern.

In the control pattern table stored in the ROM 121, for example, the performance symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 during the period from the start of the variation of the performance symbols to the stop display of the fixed performance symbols that are the final stop symbols. Data indicating the control contents of various production operations such as variable display operation, production display operation in ready-to-win production, production display operation by pseudo-continuous production, and production display operation in advance notice production are stored in multiple types as pattern variation control patterns. It is

In addition, each symbol variation control pattern, for example, effect control process timer set value, effect control process timer judgment value, effect display control data, voice control data, brightness data, and end code, corresponding to the effect symbol variable display Including control data for controlling various production operations, in time series, the contents of various production control, switching timing of production control, etc. are set.

Next, a process table corresponding to the production control pattern is selected (step S7108). Then, the process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data of the selected process table is started (step S7109).

After the process of step S7109 is executed, the production device (the image display device 5 as production parts, various lamps as production parts, and The control of the speakers 8L, 8R) as parts for presentation is started (step S7110). For example, according to the display control execution data, a command is output to display an image (including effect symbols) corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . In addition, it outputs a control signal (lamp control data) to an LED driver in order to control lighting/extinguishing of light emitters such as various LEDs. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step S7111), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172). (Step S7112), the variable display start setting process ends.

<Details of game progress>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first shoots a game ball toward the first flow-down path passing through the left side area of the game area by hitting to the left. When the launched game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display section 9021 becomes a display mode showing a big win pattern, a big win occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special game include normal jackpots 1 and 2 and probability variable jackpots 1-4. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-hand hitting promotion effect is executed to urge the player to hit right. As a right-handed promotion effect, a character (for example, "Right-handed") and a figure (for example, an arrow pointing rightward, which is the direction of the second flow path) are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage right-handed hitting. Along with displaying the image, in the right-handed display portion 9030 of the special figure LED board 9020 and the right-handed display portion 9055 of the fourth symbol unit 9050, for example, lighting of lighting means such as LED prompts right-handed hitting. As a result, the player will hit to the right from then on.

During the round of the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times in the case of a 3R normal jackpot, and 10 times in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot). One time opening of the big winning opening is determined by timing of elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until whichever comes first.

When the ending effect after the jackpot game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the time saving state over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). Furthermore, when V winning occurs during the big hit round, the game state is controlled to the probability variable state over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) controlled to the time saving state.

Even in the variable probability state or the time saving state after the big hit round, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 9030, and the right-handed display section 9055. - 特許庁Therefore, after the first big win (also called the first win) occurs, the player is always urged to hit right by the right-handed promotion performance even in the time-saving state after the big-win round ends.

In the time-saving state, control is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period to fluctuate the special figure) than the normal state, and the average normal figure fluctuation time (period to fluctuate the general figure) is executed to shorten the normal state, and furthermore, control is executed to improve the probability of becoming a "normal game hit" in the normal state than in the normal state. In addition, in the time-saving state, by increasing the frequency of opening the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning opening, the frequency of game balls entering the second starting winning opening is increased and the second starting is performed. Electronic chew support control may be performed to facilitate entry into the winning slot (higher entry, higher frequency).

In the time-saving state after the big hit round, the second special game is started by entering the launched game ball into the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display part 9022 becomes a display mode showing a big hit pattern, a big hit (also called a consecutive chance hit) occurs.

As the types of jackpots in the second special game, there are probability variable jackpots 5 to 9 as described above. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. Note that the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 9030, and the right-handed display section 9055 continues from the time of the first hit.

During the round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One time opening of the big winning opening is determined by timing of elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until whichever comes first.

Then, when the ending effect after the big hit game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the time saving state and the probability variable state (high probability high base state) over the fluctuation of a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) as in the case of the first hit. be done. Even in the variable probability state after the jackpot rounds in consecutive wins, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 9030, and the right-handed display section 9055. - 特許庁For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player can hit the consecutive chances in the variable probability state or the short time state after the end of the big hit round, Even in the state, it is always urged to hit to the right by the right hitting promotion effect.

After the first big hit round ends, the probability variable state or time saving state ends without a big hit occurring Then, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low-probability-low base state), and the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 9030, and the right-handed display section 9055 is ended. As a result, the player shoots the game ball toward the first flow-down path passing through the left area of the game area by hitting left again.

<Flow of production>
Next, the flow of a series of effects executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining the flow of a series of effects. In the pachinko game machine 1, the notification effect is executed from when the variable display is started to when the variable display is stopped. The notification effect is an effect for informing the player whether or not the variation of the special symbols and decorative symbols stops in a manner indicating a big hit, that is, whether or not the game is controlled to a big win game state. The notification effect is made up of a plurality of parts. Includes fanfare part. After the re-lottery part, it becomes a fanfare part to be executed before shifting to the jackpot game state. Note that the inciting part is also called an introductory part. Also, the winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part are collectively referred to as an epilogue part.

[Start part]
The start part is a part in which an effect corresponding to the previous variation pattern is executed. The start part is also the part that indicates the period from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the SP reach after the pseudo run or normal reach is executed. It should be noted that the start part also includes fluctuations that are non-reachable.

[Promotion part (introduction part)]
The fanning part (introductory part) includes from the start of SP reach (also referred to as super reach) (start timing of SP reach title display) to the timing of heading for a big hit or a loss. In addition, the fanning part is a part for fanning whether the performance to be executed results in a big hit or a loss. The fanning part corresponds to either the part corresponding to SP first half reach A or SP first half reach B executed after the start part, SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, or SP final reach that develops from SP first half reach. part is included. In addition, SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B may be collectively referred to as SP first half, SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, and SP final reach may be collectively referred to as SP second half.

[Epilogue part]
The epilogue part includes a winning epilogue part announcing a big win display result and a losing epilogue part announcing a losing display result after each fanning part. In the winning epilogue part, at least in the final part of the epilogue part, a performance is executed by developing a story to inform that the changing pattern is displayed as a big winning result and controlled to a big winning game state. In the losing epilogue part, at least in the final part of the epilogue part, an effect is executed by developing a story to inform that the changing symbols will result in a losing display and the game will not be controlled to a big win game state.

Also, in the epilogue part, the notification that it will be a big hit display result is, like the final reach described later, after the introduction part, when notifying by the movement of the role when performing the success or failure notification, and the SP reach other than the final reach As in the above, there are times when the notification is given by story development on the liquid crystal (image display device 5) without using any accessories. Of the epilogue parts, the hit epilogue part notified by the movement of the accessory is also referred to as the hit/fail notification part. Specifically, in SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, in the epilogue part executed after the introduction part, when a big hit occurs, the liquid crystal is used by the hit epilogue part as described above. It is notified that the game is controlled to a big win game state as the end of the story performance, and if no big win occurs, a loss epilogue part informs that the story performance using the liquid crystal is not controlled to the big win game state. The first story development in the story production may suggest whether it is a hit or not. On the other hand, in the final reach, in the epilogue part that is executed after the introductory part, first of all, there is a branch as to whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled by the action of the role product by the success/failure notification part (the role product operation part). After that, when a big win occurs, the winning epilogue part as described above informs that the game will be controlled to a big win game state as the end of the story production using the liquid crystal, and when no big win occurs, the losing epilogue part informs the liquid crystal. As the end of the story presentation using , it is notified that the game is not controlled to the jackpot game state. Thus, the winning epilogue part in the final reach includes the winning or losing reporting part and the winning epilogue part or the losing epilogue part that follows.

Also, corresponding to the SP first half reach A, the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach A and the losing epilogue part of the SP first half reach A are executed. Corresponding to the SP first half reach B, the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach B and the losing epilogue part of the SP first half reach B are executed. Corresponding to the SP latter half reach A, the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A and the losing epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A are executed. Corresponding to the SP latter half reach B, the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B and the losing epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B are executed. Corresponding to the SP final reach, the SP final reach winning epilogue part and the SP final reach losing epilogue part are executed.

[Accessory movement part]
The character action part is a part corresponding to the period during the development of the latter half of the SP during which an effect indicating that the game progresses from the first half of the SP to the latter half of the SP is executed by operating the movable body 32 . The role object action part is executed after the premonition part of the SP first half reach A or the premonition part of the SP reach first half B. After the accessory action part, any one of the SP latter half reach A boosting part, the SP latter half reach B boosting part, and the SP final reach boosting part is executed.

[Benefit Part]
The relief winning part is a part in which a relief winning performance is executed to make it look like a loss and then suggest a big win. The rescue winning part is a part that can develop from either the losing epilogue part of SP second half reach A, the losing epilogue part of SP second half reach B, or the losing epilogue part of SP final reach.

[Re-lottery part]
The re-lottery part is a part executed after the winning epilogue part in which the big win display result is displayed. Specifically, the re-lottery effect is the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the winning epilogue part of SP reaching first half B, the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A, the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B, and the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B. Executed after the hit epilogue part and the relief hit part. In this embodiment, the re-lottery part is always executed after each winning part (winning epilogue part, relief winning part), but there may be a case where the re-lottery effect part is not performed. For example, after the relief part, the re-lottery part may not be executed, the re-lottery part may not be executed after the hit epilogue part, and the probability variation pattern (that it will be a probability variation) as a result of the hit display The re-lottery part may not be executed when the odd number symbol shown) is derived.

[Relationship before and after determination]
Next, an example will be described in which a series of presentations are separated at timings before and after determination of success or failure. FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining the relationship before and after determination of success or failure, the SP first half reach A jackpot, and the SP final reach jackpot. Here, the win/fail decision is an effect that indicates the branching result of the big win display result or the losing display result in the final stage of the fanning part. As shown in FIG. 34(A), a series of performances can be divided into parts that are executed before and after determination of success or failure at timings before and after determination of success or failure from the start of variation to the end of variation. The part before the judgment of suitability includes the start part and the fanning part. In addition, the part after the success/failure determination includes an epilogue part (hit/lost), a relief winning part, and a re-lottery part.

In this way, a series of effects from the start of variation to the stop of variation are composed of a plurality of parts. Also, the period from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation can be divided into before and after the start of SP reach (after the start of fluctuation). In such a case, before the start of SP reach corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the previous fluctuation described above, and after the start of SP reach corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the post fluctuation described above.

Next, the variation pattern of the main variation number 20, which is the variation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot among the variation patterns, will be described with reference to FIG. 34(B). In the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot, the start part is from the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (after the start of fluctuation). Then, from the start of the SP reach (the start of the post-variation) to the determination of whether or not the result is right or wrong becomes the fanning part (the first half of the reach A of the SP). In the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot, the accessory is not moved at the timing of the win/fail decision. Then, from the determination of success or failure to the start of the re-lottery effect is the epilogue part (per reach A in the first half of SP). Then, the re-lottery part is from the start of the re-lottery effect to the stop of the fluctuation. For example, in the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot, the start part is 60 seconds, the fanning part (SP first half reach A) is 20 seconds, the epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is 15 seconds, and the re-lottery part is 20 seconds. The time is set so that

Next, the variation pattern of the main variation number 26, which is the variation pattern for the SP final reach big hit, among the variation patterns will be described with reference to FIG. 34(C). In the variation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the start part is from the start of variation to the start of SP reach (after the start of variation). Then, from the start of the SP reach (the start of the later fluctuation) to the development of the second half of the SP is the fanning part (first half of the SP reach A). And from the development of the second half of the SP to the determination of whether it is right or wrong will be the fanning part (SP final reach). In the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the accessory is not moved at the timing of the winning/failing determination. Then, from the determination of success or failure to the start of the re-lottery effect is the epilogue part (per SP final reach). Then, the re-lottery part is from the start of the re-lottery effect to the stop of the fluctuation. For example, in the variation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the start part is 60 seconds, the fanning part (SP first half reach A) is 20 seconds, the fanning part (SP final reach) is 25 seconds, and the epilogue part (SP final reach) is 30 seconds. The time is set so that the second part is 20 seconds and the re-lottery part is 20 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 34(B) and 34(C), the fluctuation time is longer in the SP final reach, which has a higher degree of expectation, than in the SP first half reach A. In addition, the total time of the fanning part and the time of the epilogue part are longer in the SP final reach, which has a higher degree of expectation than in the SP first half reach A. As a result, the higher the degree of expectation of the variation, the longer the period during which the player is agitated, and the longer the lingering time when the player wins, so that the feeling of blessing can be enhanced.

<About the scenario>
Next, the correspondence relationship between the contents of the effects executed in a series of effects and the game effect lamps 9 will be explained using a scenario for each part. The scenario described here has the role of a script that summarizes the contents of each scene in a series of productions. The scenario of each part corresponds to a diagram for explaining the effect mode corresponding to each part, which will be described later. Details such as the effect executed on the screen of the image display device 5 and the mode of the game effect lamp 9 will be described in detail with reference to the drawings for explaining the effect mode described later. In the following, the relationship between diagrams for explaining the scenario of each part and diagrams for explaining the effects mode described later will be explained.

FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the start part. The scenario of the start part corresponding to number 1 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. 55 to 61, which will be described later. FIG. 36 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the fanning part (SP first half reach A). The scenario of the fanning part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 2 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining scenarios of a winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) and a losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). The scenario of the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 3 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in FIGS. The scenario of the missing epilogue part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 4 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the rendering modes in FIGS.

FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the fanning part (SP first half reach B). The scenario of the fanning part (SP first-half reach B) corresponding to number 5 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining scenarios of a winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) and a losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 6 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. The scenario of the lost epilogue part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 7 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the rendering mode of FIGS. FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the character action part (during the second half of the SP development). The scenario of the role product action part (during the latter half of the SP development) corresponding to number 8 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode in FIG.

FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the fanning part (SP second half reach A). The scenario of the fanning part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 9 in FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining scenarios of a winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach A) and a losing epilogue part (SP latter half reach A). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 10 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. The scenario of the unsuccessful epilogue part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 11 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the fanning part (SP second half reach B). The scenario of the fanning part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 12 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining scenarios of a winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B) and a losing epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 13 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. The scenario of the lost epilogue part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 14 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS.

FIGS. 45 and 46 are diagrams for explaining the scenario of the fanning part (SP final reach). The scenario of the fanning part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 15 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. 115 to 132 described later. FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining scenarios of a winning epilogue part (SP final reach) and a losing epilogue part (SP final reach). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 16 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in FIGS. The scenario of the losing epilogue part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 17 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the rendering modes in FIGS. FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a winning part for relief. The scenario of the relief winning part corresponding to number 18 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the rendering mode of FIGS. 139 to 140, which will be described later.

FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the re-lottery part (derivation of odd or even symbols after button operation). The scenario of the re-lottery part corresponding to number 19 in FIG. 33 (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation) corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 141 to 156 described later. FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a re-lottery part (odd-numbered symbols derived after button operation) and a fanfare part. The scenario of the re-lottery part (odd symbol derivation after button operation) corresponding to number 20 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. The scenario of the fanfare part corresponding to number 22 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the rendering mode in FIG. 160, which will be described later. FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a re-lottery part (even-numbered symbols are derived after button operation) and a fanfare part. The scenario of the re-lottery part corresponding to number 21 in FIG. 33 (derivation of even-numbered symbols after button operation) corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 161 to 163 described later. The scenario of the fanfare part corresponding to number 22 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the rendering mode in FIG. 164, which will be described later.

<Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)>
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 turns on/blinks/lights out one or more lamps (LEDs) among a plurality of lamps (LEDs) included in the game effect lamp 9. It outputs luminance data for making the LED driver (also called a lamp driver). In addition, below, the control of lighting / blinking / light extinction performed with respect to lamps, such as LED, by CPU120 for production|presentation control is also called lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the effect control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp in order to turn on/blink/extinguish each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 subject to lamp control. Each game effect lamp 9 lights/blinks/lights off based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

More specifically, the ROM 121 and RAM 122 of the effect control board 12 store a brightness data table storing brightness data for lamp control of each game effect lamp 9 . The brightness data table is the error brightness data table used when an error occurs, and the brightness for SP reach used in each part during SP reach (flashing part, winning epilogue part, losing epilogue part, character action part, etc.) It includes a data table and a luminance data table for background.

Furthermore, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in a low probability/low base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state in which a fanfare effect is executed, and a jackpot game. The jackpot background brightness data table used during the round of the state, the ending background brightness data table used in the ending state in which the ending effect that informs the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and the high probability high base state (probability variable state) and a variable background brightness data table used in the state).

Each of the background brightness data tables described above is used without overlapping, and is controlled to any one of a plurality of game states such as a normal state, a fanfare state, a jackpot game state, an ending state, and a variable probability state. One of the background luminance data tables is used depending on whether the That is, the effect control CPU 120 uses one of the background luminance data tables for each gaming state under control, and outputs luminance data based on the background luminance data table to the LED driver. As a result, each game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled according to the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, the priority of each of the error luminance data table, the SP reach luminance data table, and the background luminance data table is determined when they are used. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52, the priority is higher when used in the order of the error luminance data table, the SP reach luminance data table, and the background luminance data table.

For example, the production control CPU 120, when developing into SP reach while outputting luminance data based on the normal background luminance data table in the normal state, the SP reach luminance data table corresponding to the SP reach is displayed in the normal background. The brightness data table for SP reach is used preferentially over the brightness data table for SP reach, and brightness data is output to the LED driver based on the brightness data table for SP reach. As a result, when the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a mode corresponding to the normal state based on the brightness data table for normal background, when SP reach occurs, a mode corresponding to SP reach occurs based on the brightness data table for SP reach. , the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled. While the brightness data based on the brightness data table for SP reach is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for normal background is not output to the LED driver. When the state returns to normal, luminance data based on the background luminance data table is output to the LED driver, and when a big hit results in a fanfare state, luminance data based on the fanfare background luminance data table is output to the LED driver. output.

More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 uses a background luminance data table corresponding to the game state under control while timing the lamp control time corresponding to the game state under control with a timer. However, if it develops into SP reach or the like, the luminance data table for SP reach corresponding to the SP reach is preferentially used over the luminance data table for background and the luminance data is output to the LED driver. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 keeps updating the value of the timer without stopping the clocking of the lamp control time using the background luminance data table. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the luminance data contained in the background luminance data table even while the game effect lamp 9 is under lamp control based on the SP ready-to-win luminance data table. Since the luminance data contained in the data table has a lower priority than the luminance data contained in the SP reach luminance data table, the luminance data contained in the background luminance data table is not output to the LED driver. ing. After the end of the SP reach, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data included in the background luminance data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the luminance data that has been continuously updated.

Also, for example, if an error occurs while outputting luminance data based on the luminance data table for SP reach during SP reach, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the luminance data table for error corresponding to the error to SP reach. The error luminance data table is used preferentially over the error luminance data table, and the luminance data is output to the LED driver based on the error luminance data table. As a result, if an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is under lamp control in a mode corresponding to SP reach based on the brightness data table for SP reach, a game effect is generated in a mode corresponding to the error based on the brightness data table for error. Lamp 9 is lamp controlled. While the brightness data based on the error brightness data table is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. When returning to the game state of , the brightness data based on the brightness data table for SP reach is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the effect control CPU120, while measuring the time of the lamp control corresponding to the SP reach under control by the timer, using the brightness data table for the SP reach corresponding to the SP reach to the LED driver brightness Data is output, but when an error occurs, the luminance data table for error corresponding to the error is preferentially used over the luminance data table for SP reach to output luminance data to the LED driver. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 keeps updating the value of the timer without stopping the time measurement of the lamp control using the brightness data table for SP reach. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the brightness data table for SP reach even while performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 based on the brightness data table for error, but Since the luminance data contained in the luminance data table has a lower priority than the luminance data contained in the error luminance data table, the luminance data contained in the SP reach luminance data table should not be output to the LED driver. It's becoming After the error is released, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data contained in the luminance data table for SP reach to the LED driver again from the continuation of the luminance data that has been continuously updated.

<Lighting Mode of Game Effect Lamp>
In this embodiment, each game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled by outputting luminance data to the LED driver by the effect control CPU 120 as described above. Here, the lighting mode of each game effect lamp 9 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. 53 and 54 are diagrams for explaining how the game effect lamp 9 lights.

In the present embodiment, terms relating to the lighting of the game effect lamps 9 such as the frame lamp, the character lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric chew lamp 9H are defined as "turn off", " "Almost off", "on", and "flashing" are used. Further, as described above, the mode of each game effect lamp 9 by "lighting" and "blinking" is also referred to as "lighting mode".

The term "lights off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and the brightness is zero. The term "almost extinguished" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit but its brightness is extremely low (for example, brightness "1" to be described later).

For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the luminance data of the frame lamp is "000", the frame lamp is "turned off". Also, when the luminance data (RGB data) of the frame lamp is "111", the frame lamp lights in white with extremely low luminance. In the present embodiment, the state of the frame lamp in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "almost extinguished" for the sake of convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the data of RRRR (Red, Red, Red, Red) defined as the luminance data of the role lamp 9A is "0000", the role lamp 9A is "turned off". . Also, when the luminance data (RRRR data) of the character object lamp 9A is "1111", the character object lamp 9A lights up in red with extremely low luminance. In the present embodiment, such a state of the role product lamp 9A in which the RRRR data is "1111" may be referred to as "almost extinguished" for the sake of convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when WWWWW (White, White, White, White, White) data defined as luminance data of the left panel lamp 9B is "00000", the left panel lamp 9B is turned off. "do. Further, when the luminance data (WWWW data) of the board left lamp 9B is "11111", the board left lamp 9B is lit with extremely low luminance. In the present embodiment, the state of the board left lamp 9B in which the WWWWW data is "11111" may be referred to as "almost extinguished" for the sake of convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53(X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the luminance data of the attacker lamp 9E is "000", the attacker lamp 9E is "turned off". Further, when the luminance data (RGB data) of the attacker lamp 9E is "111", the attacker lamp 9E is lit with extremely low luminance. In the present embodiment, such a state of the attacker lamp 9E in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially extinguished" for the sake of convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53(X1), when WWW (White, White, White) data defined as luminance data of the V-attacker lamp 9F is "000", the V-attacker lamp 9F is "turned off". Further, when the luminance data (WWW data) of the V-attacker lamp 9F is "111", the V-attacker lamp 9F is lit with extremely low luminance. In the present embodiment, such a state of the V-attacker lamp 9F in which the WWW data is "111" may be referred to as "almost extinguished" for the sake of convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the luminance data of the electric tuning lamp 9H is "000", the electric tuning lamp 9H is "turned off". Further, when the luminance data (RGB data) of the electric tuning lamp 9H is "111", the electric tuning lamp 9H is lit with extremely low luminance. In the present embodiment, such a state of the electric tuning lamp 9H in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "almost extinguished" for the sake of convenience.

The term "lighting" includes constant lighting, in which the game effect lamp 9 is always lit, wave lighting, in which a plurality of lined lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are sequentially switched from off to on, and lighting when the game effect lamp 9 is on. It also includes haze lighting that dimly lights while changing the luminance. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the luminance data is any one of "2" to "F". The brightness data is hexadecimal data and can be specified from "0" to "F", where "0" is no brightness, "1" is the lowest brightness, and "F" is the highest brightness. becomes higher.

For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (X2), when the luminance data (RGB data) of the left frame lamps 9L1 to 9L12 is "AAA", the left frame lamps 9L1 to 9L12 are "lighted". Since the brightness is high, the frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12 are brightly lit.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X3), when the luminance data (RGB data) of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is "AAA", the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 are "lighted". Since it is high, the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 are brightly lit.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X4), when the brightness data (RRRR data) of the role lamp 9A is "AAAA", the role lamp 9A "lights". The object lamp 9A lights up brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X5), when the luminance data (WWWW data) of the board left lamp 9B is "AAAAAA", the board left lamp 9B is "lighted". The left lamp 9B lights up brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X6), when the brightness data (RGB data) of the attacker lamp 9E is "AAA", the attacker lamp 9E is "lighted". lights up brightly. When the brightness data (WWW data) of the V-attacker lamp 9F is "AAA", the V-attacker lamp 9F is "lighted". When the luminance data (RGB data) of the electric tuning lamp 9H is "AAA", the electric tuning lamp 9H "lights". Especially in this case, since the luminance is high, the electric tuning lamp 9H lights brightly.

The term "blinking" refers to a mode other than the above-described "turning off" or "turning on" of the game effect lamp 9, in which the lighting luminance of each lamp is a first luminance and a second luminance higher than the first luminance. including alternately switching between For example, "blinking" includes repeating turning on and off or almost off. This includes switching between the luminance data being "0" and "1" over time. As described above, in the present embodiment, the lighting mode of the lamp is haze lighting. , and blinking are different in that each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 repeats lighting and extinguishing or substantially extinguishing.

<Production Mode of Pachinko Machine 1>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 to 164, the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be described. In this embodiment, an effect mode when any one of the main variation numbers 9, 12, 15, 20, 23 and 26 is selected will be described.

Specifically, when the variation pattern of main variation number 9 is selected, among the plurality of routes shown in FIG. The production transitions in the order of the losing epilogue part (4), or the production transitions in the order of the start part (1), the inciting part (5) of the first half of the SP reach B, and the losing epilogue part (7) of the first half of the SP reach B. .

When the variation pattern of the main variation number 12 is selected, the start part (1), the inflection part of the SP first half reach A (2), the role action part (8), the inflection part of the SP second half reach A (9), SP The production transitions in the order of the losing epilogue part (11) of the second half reach A, or the start part (1), the inflection part of the first half of the SP reach A (2), the role movement part (8), the inflection part of the second half of the SP reach B (12), the effect transitions in the order of SP second half reach B loss epilogue part (14), or the start part (1), SP first half reach B fanning part (5), role movement part (8), SP second half Reach A's fanning part (9), SP second half Reach B's losing epilogue part (14) The production transitions in order, or the start part (1), SP first half reach B's fanning part (5), role movement part ( 8), the effect transitions in the order of SP second half reach B swaying part (12) and SP second half reach B losing epilogue part (14).

When the variation pattern of the main variation number 15 is selected, the start part (1), the inflection part of the SP first half reach A (2), the action part (8), the inflection part of the SP final reach (15), the SP final Whether the production transitions in the order of reach loss epilogue part (17), start part (1), SP first half reach B fanning part (5), role movement part (8), SP final reach fanning part (15) , The effect transitions in the order of SP final reach losing epilogue part (17).

When the variation pattern of the main variation number 20 is selected, the production transitions in the order of the start part (1), the inflection part (2) of the SP first half reach A, and the hit epilogue part (3) of the SP first half reach A, or the start The effect transitions in the order of part (1), SP first half reach B swaying part (5), and SP first half reach B winning epilogue part (6).

When the variation pattern of the main variation number 20 is selected, the start part (1), the inflection part of the SP first half reach A (2), the character action part (8), the inflection part of the SP second half reach A (9), SP The effect transitions in the order of the hit epilogue part (10) in the second half reach A, or the start part (1), the inflection part (2) in the first half of SP reach A, the role movement part (8), the inflection part in second half reach B (12), the effect transitions in the order of SP second half reach B hit epilogue part (13), or start part (1), SP first half reach B fanning part (5), character movement part (8), SP second half Reach A's fanning part (9), SP second half reach B hit epilogue part (10), or the start part (1), SP first half reach B's fanning part (5), role movement part ( 8), the effect transitions in the order of SP second half reach B swaying part (12) and SP second half reach B winning epilogue part (13).

When the variation pattern of the main variation number 26 is selected, the start part (1), the inflection part of the SP first half reach A (2), the action part (8), the inflection part of the SP final reach (15), the SP final Reach hitting epilogue part (16) production transitions in order, start part (1), SP first half reach B fanning part (5), character action part (8), SP final reach fanning part (15) , SP final reach hit epilogue part (16).

The figure also shows the mode of each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 and the effect sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this embodiment, the re-lottery part is always executed after the winning epilogue, but there may be a variation pattern in which the re-lottery effect is not executed and ends with the winning epilogue part. In addition, although description of the variation pattern corresponding to the relief winning part is omitted in the example of all variation patterns, the variation pattern corresponding to the relief winning part will also be described. In the case of winning, since the variation time is longer than the variation pattern of losing, the relief winning part that looks like losing and becomes a winning may use the variation time to perform the performance of the relief winning part.

[Direction mode in the start part]
Rendering modes in the start part will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 61. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 55(a1), when the variable display (variable display) starts based on one reserved memory, the decorative design is variable in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5. Along with the display, the fourth pattern 5J is variably displayed, and the small pattern 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including images of characters and scenery is displayed as the background during variable display. In the present embodiment, an image of a flying girl called Yume-chan is displayed as a character that appears in variations during the normal game state. Yume-chan is a main character who appears as an ally character in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 .

At the start of the fluctuation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow corresponding to the normal background. Note that during the variable display, sound effects are appropriately output from the speakers 8L and 8R, but only part of the drawings are shown for the sound effects. Further, the lighting of yellow corresponding to the normal background by the game effect lamp 9 is referred to as "yellow background lighting". The effect control CPU 120 lights the game effect lamp 9 in a yellow background lighting pattern based on the normal background luminance data table described with reference to FIG. The "lighting" referred to here includes constant lighting, wave lighting, haze lighting, etc., as described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, and the same applies to the following description.

As shown in FIG. 55(a2), after the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the "2" symbol, the "NEXT" symbol as a pseudo continuous symbol stops at the middle symbol. The stop of the "NEXT" symbol indicates the start of the second pseudo-variation. When the "NEXT" symbol is stopped, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. It should be noted that the term "blinking" as used herein includes the repetition of lighting and extinguishing of the lamp as described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, and the same applies to the following description. After that, as shown in FIG. 55(a3), the characters "x2" are displayed to indicate that the second variable display is performed by the pseudo continuous effect. When "x2" is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(a4), re-fluctuation is performed as the second pseudo-fluctuation. At the upper left of the screen, a small letter "x2" is displayed to indicate that it is the second variable display. At the time of re-fluctuation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a yellow background lighting pattern. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(a5), after the ready-to-win mode, the "NEXT" symbol as a pseudo consecutive symbol stops on the middle symbol. The stop of the "NEXT" symbol indicates the start of the third pseudo-variation. When the "NEXT" symbol is stopped, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(a6), the characters "x3" are displayed to indicate that the third variable display is performed by the pseudo continuous effect. When "x3" is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(a7), pseudo re-variation is performed as the third variable display. At the upper left of the screen, a small letter "x3" is displayed to indicate that it is the third variable display. At the time of re-fluctuation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a yellow background lighting pattern. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(a8), "2" stops in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, and "2" also stops in the right decorative pattern display area 5R. It becomes a mode. During reach tenpai, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Then, as shown in FIG. 57(a9), the background begins to darken while the medium pattern is changed in the state of reach tenpai, and the screen becomes dark. At the start of background darkening, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58(a10), an image in the shape of a shutter (hereinafter also simply referred to as a shutter) is displayed so as to hide the display of the decorative design and the character image of Yume-chan. The shutter layer has a higher priority than the decoration pattern layer and the Yume-chan character layer. High priority means that the image layer (image layer) is located on the front side. As shown in FIG. 58(a10), the shutter is displayed to close from the top and bottom of the screen toward the center of the screen. Due to the image of the shutter, the image behind the shutter becomes invisible. In addition, the brightness of the screen is gradually reduced in accordance with the gradual closing of the shutter. In the state where the shutter is closed in (a10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while decreasing the brightness step by step.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58(a11), the shutter is further closed and the screen brightness is lower than at (a10). When the shutter is closed in (a11), the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is further lowered from the time of (a10), and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. After that, as shown in FIG. 58(a12), the shutter is further closed and the screen brightness is lower than at the time of (a11). When the shutter is closed in (a12), the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is further lowered from the time of (a11), and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. The screen luminance gradually decreases from (a10) to (a12) such that the relationship is, for example, (a10) 75%>(a11) 50%>(a12) 25%. Also, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 gradually decreases from (a10) to (a12).

After that, as shown in FIG. 59(a13), the shutter is completely closed. When the shutter is closed in (a13), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while maintaining the same brightness as in (a12). After that, the closed state of the shutter is maintained from FIG. 59(a14) to (a15). In the state where the shutter is kept closed in (a14) and (a15), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while maintaining the same luminance as at the time of (a13).

After that, the screen brightness is gradually improved in accordance with the situation in which the shutter is gradually opened from (a16) to (a18) in FIG. In the state where the shutter is opened in (a16), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while maintaining the same luminance as at the time of (a15). After that, as shown in FIG. 60(a17), the shutter is further opened and the screen luminance is improved from that at (a16). When the shutter is opened in (a17), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in red while maintaining the same luminance as at the time of (a16). After that, as shown in FIG. 60(a18), the shutter is further opened and the screen brightness is improved from the time of (a17). In the state where the shutter is opened in (a18), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in red while maintaining the same luminance as at the time of (a17).

The screen luminance gradually increases from (a16) to (a17) so as to satisfy the relationship of (a16) 25%<(a17) 50%<(a18) 75%, for example. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while maintaining the luminance from (a16) to (a18). Then, as shown in FIG. 61(a19), when the shutter is completely opened, a screen corresponding to SP first half reach A is displayed. The screen brightness is 100% when the shutter is open in (a19). Also, in the state where the shutter of (a19) is open, the game effect lamp 9 is extinguished. In addition, it may be "substantially turned off" instead of "turned off". Further, when it is determined to shift to SP first half reach B when the shutter is opened, a screen corresponding to SP first half reach B is displayed. When the SP first half reach A is executed from the state of (a19), it shifts to the production of FIG. 62 (b1), and when the SP first half reach B is executed from the state of (a19), FIG. It shifts to the production of e1).

[Production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach A)]
62 to 67, description will be given of the effect mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach A). The fanning part (Reach A in the first half of SP) is a part in which the story unfolds in which Yume-chan, an ally character, chases Bakuchu, an enemy character. In the fanning part (SP first half Reach A), the story develops that if Mumu-chan can catch Bakuchu, it will be a big hit, and if Mumu-chan cannot catch Bakuchu, it will be a loss.

As shown in FIG. 62(b1), in the fanning part in which the SP first half reach A is executed, a title corresponding to the SP first half reach A, "Catch Bakuchu!" is displayed. The contents of the effect of the first half of the SP to be executed from now on are indicated by the title display. While the title display of (b1) is being displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. After that, as shown in FIG. 62(b2), the title display is erased, and an image showing how the enemy character "Bakuchu" lands is displayed. When the title display of (b2) disappears, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Also, at the timing when the image related to the title display of (b2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the SP first half reach A is output. After that, as shown in FIG. 62(b3), an image is displayed in which the enemy character Bakuchu lands in the center of the screen and takes a pose. When the enemy character appears in (b3), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63(b4), an image is displayed in which Yume-chan, the friend character, and Bakuchu, the enemy character, face each other in the center of the screen. In the confrontation state of (b4), the game effect lamp 9 lights in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan on the left side where Yume-chan is displayed. Also, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the character of Bakuchu on the right side where Bakuchu is displayed. After that, as shown in (b5), the subtitle display "I found it" corresponding to Mumu-chan's line "I found it" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (b5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in green corresponding to Yume-chan's speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63(b6), the subtitle display "found" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "found" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (b6), the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu's speech.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64(b7), Yume-chan, who is a friendly character, is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (b7), the subtitle display "I'll catch you!" corresponding to Yume-chan's line "I'll catch you!" is displayed on the Yume Yume up screen. Also, in the Yume-up state of (b7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to Yume-chan's speaking. After that, as shown in (b8), an image of Mumu-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed. In addition, in the dream-chasing state of (b8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to the line "Too" from Yume-chan. After that, as shown in (b9), an image of Bakuchu running away from Mumu-chan is displayed. In addition, in the state of Bakuchu Escape (b9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red corresponding to Bakuchu's utterance of the line "Hehehe".

After that, as shown in FIG. 65(b10), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background (b10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (b11), an image in which Mumu-chan on the left side of the screen chases Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (b11), the subtitle display "Wait~" corresponding to Mumu-chan's line "Wait~" is displayed on the Muyume Chasing screen. In addition, Mumu-chan's footsteps "za-za-za" are output as a physical sound (hereinafter referred to as a physical sound) in accordance with the image of Mumu-chan. In addition, Bakuchu's footsteps "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as physical sounds in accordance with Bakuchu's video. In addition, in the dream-chasing state of (b11), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in green in response to Yume-chan's speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65(b12), an image of Yume-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is continuously displayed. As shown in (b11), Yume-chan's footsteps "za-za-za-za" are output as physical sounds in accordance with the image of Yume-chan. In addition, Bakuchu's footsteps "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as physical sounds in accordance with Bakuchu's video. Also, in the state of chasing dreams (b12), the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66(b13), Bakuchu's back view is displayed, along with a part of Mumu's hand, and Bakuchu escapes from Mumu. As shown in (b13), the subtitle display "I'm caught!" corresponding to the line "I'm caught!" In addition, Yume-chan's footsteps "za-za-za-za" are output as physical sounds in accordance with the image of Yume-chan. In addition, Bakuchu's footsteps "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as physical sounds in accordance with Bakuchu's video. In addition, in the state of Bakuchu escape (b13), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu's speech.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66(b14), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Mumu-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (b14), an explosive jump sound "pyon" is output as a pseudo sound (hereinafter referred to as an onomatopoeic sound) in accordance with the image of the explosive jump. In addition, in the Baku-chu jump state of (b14), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to Baku-chu jumping. After that, as shown in (b15), Bakuchu, which is the enemy character, is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (b15), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character on the Bakuchuup screen.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(b16), Yume-chan, who is a friendly character, is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (b16), on the screen of Yume Yume Up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume Yume. After that, as shown in (b17), an image of Mumu-chan jumping and jumping on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (b17), Yume-chan's line "Torya~!" is output on the screen of Yume Yume Jump. Also, in the state of Yume Yume Jump (b17), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to Yume Yume jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(b18), a screen is displayed in which Yume-chan is displayed in an enlarged form for the winner/failure decision scene. In addition, in the scene (b18) before the winning/failing determination, the game effect lamp 9 keeps lighting in white so as to correspond to the winning/failure determination scene. By muting the sound in the scene before the success/failure decision, it is easy to understand that the scene is the branch scene of the success/failure decision. From the state of (b18), when it is determined that the jackpot will be achieved in the SP first half reach A, the process proceeds to the presentation of (c1). From the state of (b18), when it is determined that the SP first half reach A will be lost, the process moves to the effect of (d1). From the state of (b18), when it is decided to develop into SP reach in the latter half, it shifts to the production of (h1).

[Production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach A)]
68 and 69, description will be given of the effect mode in the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach A). The winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is a part in which it is announced that the game will be controlled to a big winning game state as the story of Mumu-chan catching Bakuchu unfolds.

As shown in FIG. 68(c1), in the hit epilogue part of Reach A in the first half of SP, an image of Yume-chan catching Bakuchu's tail with her hand is displayed. In addition, in the state of (c1) catching Bakuchu, the sound that Mumu catches Bakuchu is output as a physical sound in accordance with the image of Mumu chan catching Bakuchu. Also, in the state of (c1) catching Bakuchu, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white brighter than the white of (tb18) indicating the lighting mode of (b18) corresponding to catching Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(c2), an image of Mumu-chan, who has caught Bakuchu, and is making a vei sign is displayed. As shown in (c2), in the state of catching Bakuchu, the subtitle display "easy victory!" corresponding to Mumu's line "easy victory!" is displayed. In addition, in the state of (c2), the game effect lamp 9 smoothly lights up in rainbow colors to indicate that a big win has been achieved. Hereinafter, smooth lighting of rainbow colors is also referred to as rainbow lighting (smooth). Also, in the state of (c2), BGM for winning is output. After that, as shown in (c3), an image in which Mumu-chan, who has caught Bakuchu, is giving a v-sign is displayed in a graphic style still image. In the state of the still image of (c3), the game effect lamp 9 becomes rainbow lighting (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 69(c4), a design effect is executed in which the decoration symbol combination "222" indicating the big win display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (c4), the pattern of "222" is enlarged and emphasized by the concentrated lines in the pattern display. In the state of drawing out the symbols of (c4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in bright white. Thereafter, as shown in (c5), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (c4). In the state of drawing out the symbols of (c5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (c6), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in the normal size, being further reduced from the state of (c5). In the state of (c6) two symbols (normal size), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production mode in the lost epilogue part (SP first half reach A)]
70 to 71, description will be given of the effect mode in the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). The lost epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is a part in which it is announced that the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state due to the development of the story in which Mumu-chan could not catch Bakuchu.

As shown in FIG. 70(d1), in the missing epilogue part of Reach A in the first half of SP, an image is displayed in which Yume-chan did not catch Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of (d1) where Bakuchu is not caught, the sound "Suka" that Mumu could not catch is output as an onomatopoeic sound in accordance with the video in which Mumu could not catch Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of (d1) where Bakuchu is not caught, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white color of (tb18) indicating the lighting mode of (b18) corresponding to the fact that Bakuchu was not caught. Lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70(d2), an image is displayed in which Mumu-chan, who was unable to catch Bakuchu, gets down on his knees in regret, and Bakuchu is delighted. As shown in (d2), in a disappointing state, the game effect lamp 9 lights in white that is darker than the white in (td1) indicating the lighting mode in (d1). After that, the screen is darkened as shown in (d3). The game effect lamp 9 is extinguished in the screen darkening state of (d3). After that, as shown in FIG. 71(d4), the symbol "232", which is the losing symbol combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state of (d4) where the normal screen is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same yellow background lighting pattern as (ta1) indicating the lighting mode of (a1).

[Production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach B)]
72 to 77, description will be given of the effect mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach B). The fanning part (Reach B in the first half of the SP) is a part in which a story unfolds in which Yume-chan, an ally character, and Boingo, an enemy character, play hockey. In the fanning part (SP first half Reach B), the story unfolds that if Mumu-chan wins against Boingo, it will be a big hit, and if Mumu-chan loses to Boingo, it will be a loss.

As shown in FIG. 72(e1), in the fanning part in which the SP first half reach B is executed, a title corresponding to the SP first half reach B of "Biribiri Hockey Showdown" is displayed. The contents of the effect of the first half of the SP to be executed from now on are indicated by the title display. While the title display of (e1) is being displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. After that, as shown in FIG. 72(e2), an image is displayed in which the screen is cracked and the title display is erased. In the state of (e2) where the screen cracks and the title display disappears, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green. After that, as shown in (e3), an image showing the appearance of competing characters is displayed in which Yume-chan, who is an ally character, and Boingo, which is an enemy character, appear on the screen. In the state of (e3) where the opponent character appears, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73(e4), an image is displayed in which Yume-chan, who is an ally character at the front left of the screen, and Boingo, who is an enemy character at the back right of the screen, face each other. In the confrontation state of (e4), the game effect lamp 9 lights in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan on the left side where Yume-chan is displayed. Also, the game effect lamp 9 lights in cream color corresponding to the character of Boingo on the right side where Boingo is displayed. Also, at the timing when the title display of (e4) disappears, BGM corresponding to SP first half reach B is output. After that, as shown in (e5), the subtitle display "I won't lose" corresponding to Mumu's line "I won't lose" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (e5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in green corresponding to Yume-chan's speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in cream corresponding to the Boingo character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73(e6), the subtitle display "Call me" corresponding to Boingo's line "Call me" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (e6), the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right blinks in cream color corresponding to Boingo's speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 74(e7), an image of Yume-chan, who is an ally character, hitting a puck is displayed. Also, as shown in (e7), on the screen that is Mumu's turn, Yume's line "ya~" is output. Also, in the state of Yume Yume turn (e7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to Yume Yume's speech. After that, as shown in (e8), the puck hit by Yume-chan is enlarged and displayed. In addition, in the state of puck display of (e8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to the physical sound "whoosh" of the action of the puck. After that, as shown in (e9), an image of a state in which Boingo blocks Mumu-chan's puck is displayed. In addition, in the state of (e9) Boingo prevention, the game effect lamp 9 lights in cream corresponding to the Boingo character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75(e10), an image of the flipped puck flying in the air is displayed. In the state of dancing in the puck of (e10), a physical sound of rotating the puck is output. In addition, in the state of (e10), the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in cream corresponding to the Boingo character. After that, as shown in (e11), an image in which the enemy character Boingo hits the puck is displayed. Also, as shown in (e11), Boingo's line "Let's go" is output on the screen which is Boingo's turn. In addition, in the state of Boingo's turn (e11), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in cream color corresponding to Boingo's speaking. After that, as shown in (e12), the puck hit by Boingo is enlarged and displayed. In addition, in the pack display state of (e12), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to the physical sound "whooshing" that the pack moves.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76(e13), an image is displayed in which Yume-chan is damaged by directly receiving the puck, and electricity runs through her bones. As shown in (e13), Yume-chan's line "Uwa~" is output in the Yume-damaged state. In addition, in the Yume damage state of (e13), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white corresponding to the fact that Yume-chan received damage. After that, as shown in (e14), an image is displayed in which Yume-chan is damaged and electricity runs through her bones. In addition, in the Yume damage state of (e14), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white corresponding to the fact that Yume-chan received damage. After that, as shown in (e15), an image in which Yume-chan is damaged and electricity runs through her bones is displayed with the same content as (e13). In addition, in the Yume damage state of (e15), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white corresponding to the fact that Yume-chan received damage.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77(e16), an image similar to that shown in (e14) is displayed in which Yume-chan is damaged and electricity runs through her bones. In addition, in the Yume damage state of (e16), the BGM is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to the fact that Yume-chan received damage. After that, as shown in (e17), the scene changes to the scene before the winner/failure decision, in which a state in which Yume-chan is damaged is displayed. In the scene (e17) before the win/fail decision, the game effect lamp 9 keeps lighting in white so as to correspond to the scene before the win/fail decision. By muting the sound in the scene before the success/failure decision, it is easy to understand that the scene is a branching scene of the success/failure decision. From the state of (e17), when it is determined that the jackpot will be achieved in the SP first half reach B, the process shifts to the effect of (f1). From the state of (e17), when it is determined that the SP first half reach B will be lost, the process shifts to the effect of (g1). From the state of (e17), when it is decided to develop into SP reach in the second half, the process moves to the production of (h1).

[Production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach B)]
78 to 80, description will be given of the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). The winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) is a part in which it is reported that the game will be controlled to a big winning game state as the story of Yume-chan winning over Boingo develops.

As shown in FIG. 78(f1), in the hit epilogue part of SP first half Reach B, an image of Yume-chan hitting back the puck is displayed. In addition, in the Yume attack state of (f1), in which Yume-chan attacks by hitting back the puck, the subtitle display "Go!" corresponding to Yume-chan's line "Go~!" In addition, in the state of Yume Yume attack of (f1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white brighter than the white of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) corresponding to Yume Yume's attack. do.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78(f2), an image in which Boingo is blown away after being attacked by Mumu-chan is displayed. As shown in (f2), in the state of being attacked by Boingo, the subtitle display "Wow!" corresponding to Boingo's line "Wow!" is displayed. In addition, in the state of (f2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up rainbow (smooth) indicating that a big win has been achieved. Also, in the state of (f2), BGM for winning is output. After that, as shown in (f3), an image of Yumu Victory, in which Mumu-chan makes a fist pose and Boingo is lying down, is displayed. As shown in (f3), in the state of Mumu Victory, the subtitle display "Easy Victory!" corresponding to Mumu-chan's line "Easy Victory!" is displayed. In addition, in the state of (f3), the game effect lamp 9 becomes rainbow lighting (smooth).

After that, as shown in (f4), the image of Victory Mumu is displayed as a still image in the style of a graphic novel. In the state of the still image of (f4), the game effect lamp 9 becomes rainbow lighting (smooth). After that, as shown in FIG. 79(f5), a design effect is executed in which the decoration symbol combination "222" indicating the big win display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (f5), the pattern of "222" is magnified in the pattern display, and the pattern is emphasized with concentrated lines. In the state of (f5) where the symbols are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (f6), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (f5). The game effect lamp 9 flashes in white in the state of drawing out the symbols of (f6). After that, as shown in FIG. 80(f7), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (f6) and displayed in normal size. In the state of (f7) two symbols (normal size), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production mode in the lost epilogue part (SP first half reach B)]
81 and 82, description will be given of the effect mode in the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). The lost epilogue part (SP first half reach B) is a part in which it is reported that the game will not be controlled to the big win game state as the story of Mumu-chan being defeated by Boingo develops.

As shown in FIG. 81 (g1), in the missing epilogue part of SP first half Reach B, an image of Yume-chan being blown away after being attacked by Boingo is displayed. As shown in (g1), in the state of Yume Yume being flung, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white color of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) corresponding to Yume Yume being flung. lights up in white. After that, as shown in (g2), an image in which Yume-chan is blown farther than in the state of (g1) is displayed. As shown in (g2), in the state where Yume Yume is tossed, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white color of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) corresponding to Yume Yume being blown away. lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 81 (g3), an image is displayed in which Mumu-chan, who was defeated by Boingo, kneels in regret, and Boingo is laughing. As shown in (g3), in a disappointing state, the game effect lamp 9 lights in white that is darker than the white of (tg1) and (tg2) indicating the lighting modes of (g1) and (g2). After that, the screen is darkened as shown in FIG. 82 (g4). In the state of the screen darkening of (g4), the game effect lamp 9 is extinguished. After that, as shown in FIG. 82(g5), the symbol "232", which is the losing symbol combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen of (g5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same yellow background lighting pattern as (ta1) indicating the lighting mode of (a1).

[Direction mode in character movement part (at the time of development in the second half)]
Description will be made of the mode of presentation in the character action part (at the time of development in the second half) with reference to FIG. 83 .

As shown in FIG. 83(h1), when developing from SP first half reach A or SP first half reach B to SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, or SP strongest reach, any of SP reach in the second half is used. , the movable body 32 operates. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the character falls from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen while tilting at an angle. As shown in (h1), a radial effect image is displayed for the character object on the screen when the character object starts falling. Due to the effect image, the character of Yume-chan and the reduced “2” decoration pattern cannot be visually recognized. In addition, in the state of (h1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red as the accessory falls.

After that, in the state of (h2), the accessory falls further from the state of (h1). In the state of (h2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red as the accessory falls. After that, in the state of (h3), the role is further extended so that the character "P" of the characters of the role is positioned so that it overlaps the place where the reduced "2" decoration pattern was displayed. Fall. In the state of (h3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. From the state of (h3), an effect is executed in which the accessory rises. If it has been decided that the game will develop into reach A in the second half of the SP after the character rises, the process shifts to the production of (i1). If it has been determined that the game will progress to reach B in the second half of the SP after the character rises, the process shifts to the production of (n1). If it has been determined that the SP final reach will occur after the character rises, the process shifts to the presentation of (r1).

[Production mode in the fanning part (SP second half reach A)]
84 to 96, description will be given of the effect mode in the fanning part (Reach A in the second half of SP). The fanning part (Reach A in the second half of SP) is a part in which the story unfolds in which friendly characters Yume-chan and Jam-chan chase Bakuchu, an enemy character. In the fanning part (Reach A in the second half of the SP), the story unfolds that if Yume-chan and Jam-chan can catch Baku-chu, it will be a big hit, and if Yume-chan and Jam-chan cannot catch Baku-chu, it will be a loss. be.

As shown in FIG. 84(i1), in the agitation part in which the SP second half reach A is executed, a title corresponding to the SP second half reach A, "Catch Bakuchu!" is displayed. The content of the effect of the SP latter half reach which will be executed from now on is indicated by the title display. In the state where the title display of (i1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (i2), an image is displayed in which friendly characters Mumu-chan and Jam-chan (leftmost characters) and enemy characters Bakuchu face each other in the center of the screen. In the confrontation state of (i2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters on the left side of which Yume-chan and Jam-chan are displayed. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the character of Bakuchu on the right side where Bakuchu is displayed. Also, at the timing when the image related to the title display of (i2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the reach A in the latter half of the SP is output. After that, as shown in (i3), the subtitle display "I won't let you go!" corresponding to Yume-chan's line "I won't let you escape!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (i3), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in green corresponding to Yume-chan's speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85(i4), the subtitle display "I'll help you too!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "I'll help you too!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (i4), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (i5), the subtitle display "I'll run away again!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "I'll run away again!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (i5), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters, Yume-chan and Jam-chan. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu's speech.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85(i6), when Jam-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "I'll catch you!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "I'll catch you!" is displayed. In the jam display state of (i6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speaking. After that, as shown in FIG. 86(i7), when Yume-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Let's go~" corresponding to Yume-chan's line "Let's go~" is displayed. In the dream display state of (i7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to Yume-chan's speech.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86(i8), when Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle display "Come on!" corresponding to the line "Come on!" In the Bakuchu display state of (i8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu's speech. After that, as shown in (i9), when an image of Jam-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed, a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed. In the state of chasing jam (i9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (i10), when an image of Bakuchu running away from Jam-chan is displayed, Bakuchu's footsteps "ta-ta-ta" are output as physical sounds. Also, in the state of (i10) Bakuchu escape, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu escape. After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (i11), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background (i11), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (i12), an image of Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. In addition, as shown in (i12), the subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed on the jam chasing screen. As indicated by (i12), jam-chan's footsteps as physical sounds are output in accordance with jam-chan's image. In addition, Bakuchu's footsteps "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as physical sounds in accordance with Bakuchu's video. Also, in the state of chasing jam (i12), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (i13), an image of Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is continuously displayed. As indicated by (i13), jam-chan's footsteps as physical sounds "za-za-za-za" are output in accordance with Jam's image. In addition, Bakuchu's footsteps "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as physical sounds in accordance with Bakuchu's video. Also, in the chasing jam state of (i13), the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up in purple corresponding to the Jam-chan character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (i14), an image of Jam-chan jumping and jumping on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i14), in the jam jump state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times corresponding to Jam-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (i15), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Jam-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i15), the jump sound of Baku-chu as an onomatopoeia is output in accordance with the image of Baku-chu's jump. Also, in the state of Baku-chu jump (i15), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to Baku-chu jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (i16), an image in which Jam-chan could not catch Bakuchu is displayed. Also, in the state of (i16) where Bakuchu cannot be caught, the subtitle display "Can't catch you" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Can't catch you" is displayed. In addition, along with the image of Jam-chan not catching Bakuchu, the onomatopoeic sound "Suka" that Jam-chan was unable to catch is output. Also, in the state of (i16) where Bakuchu is not caught, the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speech. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (i17), when Yume-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Next is me!" corresponding to Yume-chan's line "Next is me!" is displayed. . In the dream display state of (i17), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to Yume-chan's speech. After that, as shown in (i18), an image of Mumu-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed. In the state of chasing Bakuchu (i18), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to the action of Yume-chan.

After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (i19), when an image of Bakuchu running away from Mumu-chan is displayed, Bakuchu's footsteps "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as physical sounds. Also, in the state of (i19) Bakuchu escape, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu escape. After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (i20), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background (i20), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (i21), an image of Mumu-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i21), the subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Mumu-chan's line "Wait!" In addition, as indicated by (i21), Yume-chan's footsteps "za-za-za-za" are output as physical sounds in accordance with the image of Yume-chan. In addition, Bakuchu's footsteps "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as physical sounds in accordance with Bakuchu's video. In addition, in the dream-chasing state of (i21), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in green corresponding to Yume-chan's speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (i22), an image of Yume-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is continuously displayed. As indicated by (i22), the footsteps of Yume-chan as a physical sound "za-za-za-za" are output in accordance with the image of Yume-chan. In addition, Bakuchu's footsteps "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as physical sounds in accordance with Bakuchu's video. In addition, in the dream-chasing state of (i22), the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (i23), an image of Mumu-chan jumping and jumping on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i23), in the state of Yume Yume Jump, the game effect lamp 9 blinks white three times corresponding to Yume Yume jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (i24), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Jam-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i24), the jump sound of Bakuchu as an onomatopoeia is output in accordance with the image of Bakuchu's jump. In addition, in the state of Baku-chu jump (i24), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to Baku-chu jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (i25), an image in which Mumu-chan could not catch Bakuchu is displayed. Also, in the state of (i25) where Bakuchu cannot be caught, the subtitle display "Can't catch you" corresponding to Mumu's line "Can't catch you" is displayed. In addition, along with the image of Yume-chan not catching Bakuchu, the sound "Suka" that Yume-chan couldn't catch is output as an onomatopoeia. Also, in the state of (i25) where Bakuchu is not caught, the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in green corresponding to Yume-chan's speech. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (i26), two friends, Yume-chan and Jam-chan, are displayed. As shown in (i26), when the two teammates are displayed, the subtitle display "Next is two people!" corresponding to the lines of the two teammates "Next is two people!" is displayed. In the state (i26) in which two teammates are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right blinks in green corresponding to Yume-chan's speaking. After that, as shown in (i27), Yume-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, in the Yume-up state of (i27), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (i28), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the left side of the screen, and Mumu-chan is enlarged and displayed on the right side of the screen. As shown in (i28), in the state of Yume Yume and Jam Up, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. After that, as shown in (i29), an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i29), when two players are chasing each other, the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 30 (i30), an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is continuously displayed. At (i30), an image in which two people are closer to Bakuchu than at (i29) is displayed. As shown in (i30), the footsteps of Yume-chan and Jam-chan as physical sounds, "za-za-za-za", are output in accordance with the image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan. In addition, Bakuchu's footsteps "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as physical sounds in accordance with Bakuchu's video. Also, in the chasing state of two characters (i30), the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94 (i31), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (i31), on the jam-up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character. After that, as shown in (i32), an image of Jam-chan jumping and jumping on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i32), Jam-chan's line "wow" is output on the jam jump screen. Also, in the jam jump state of (i32), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple corresponding to Jam-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (i33), Mumu-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (i33), in the screen of Yume-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (i34), an image of Mumu-chan jumping and jumping on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i35), Yume-chan's line "Wow~" is output on the screen of Yume Yume Jump. Also, in the state of Yume Yume Jump (i34), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to the fact that Yume Yume is jumping. After that, as shown in (i35), an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan jumping and jumping on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i35), in the two-person jump state, the subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to the line "Wait!" of the two teammates is displayed. In the state of two players jumping (i35), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to two players jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (i36), an image in which Yume-chan and Jam-chan are jumping is displayed as still image 1. FIG. In the two-person jump state of (i36), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white corresponding to the fact that two players are jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (i37), an image in which Yume-chan and Jam-chan are jumping is displayed as still image 2. FIG. In the state of two players jumping (i37), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white corresponding to two players jumping. After that, as shown in (i38), an image in which Yume-chan and Jam-chan are jumping is displayed as still image 3 . In the state of two players jumping (i38), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white corresponding to two players jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (i39), an image in which Yume-chan and Jam-chan are jumping is displayed as a still image 4, which is the scene before the winner/failure determination. In the scene (i39) before the win/fail determination, the game effect lamp 9 keeps lighting in white so as to correspond to the scene before the win/fail determination. By muting the sound in the scene before the success/failure decision, it is easy to understand that the scene is the branch scene of the success/failure decision. From the state of (i39), when it is determined that the game will be a big hit with reach A in the latter half of the SP, the process proceeds to the effect of (j1). From the state of (i39), if it is determined that the game will be lost in reach A in the latter half of the SP or that it will be a relief win, the process shifts to the production of (k1).

[Production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP second half reach A)]
97 and 98, description will be given of the effect mode in the hit epilogue part (SP second half reach A). The winning epilogue part (Reach A in the second half of SP) is a part in which it is reported that the game will be controlled to a big winning game state by developing a story in which Yume-chan and Jam-chan catch Bakuchu.

As shown in FIG. 97(j1), in the hit epilogue part of Reach A in the second half of the SP, an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan catching Bakuchu's tail with their hands is displayed. In addition, in the state of (j1) catching Bakuchu, the sound of Yume and Jam chan catching Bakuchu is output as a physical sound in accordance with the image of Yume and Jam chan catching Bakuchu. Also, in the state of (j1) catching Bakuchu, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white brighter than the white of (ti39) indicating the lighting mode of (i39) corresponding to catching Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 97(j2), Mumu-chan who has caught Baku-chu gives a buoy sign, and an image of Jam-chan riding on Baku-chu is displayed. As shown in (j2), in the state of catching Bakuchu, the subtitle display "It was a shame!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "It was a shame!" is displayed. In addition, in the state of (j2), the game effect lamp 9 becomes rainbow lighting (smooth) indicating that a big win has been achieved. Also, in the state of (j2), BGM for winning is output. After that, as shown in (j3), Mumu-chan, who has caught Baku-chu, gives a buoy sign, and an image in which Jam-chan is riding on Baku-chu is displayed in a graphic style still image. In the state of the still image of (j3), the game effect lamp 9 becomes rainbow lighting (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 98 (j4), the effect of putting out a symbol is executed in which the decoration symbol combination "222" indicating the result of the big hit display is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (j4), the pattern of "222" is enlarged and the pattern is emphasized by the concentrated lines in the pattern display. In the state of (j4) where the symbols are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (j5), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (j4). The game effect lamp 9 flashes in white in the state of (j5) where the symbols are displayed. After that, as shown in (j6), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (j5) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of (j6) two symbols (normal size), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production mode in the lost epilogue part (SP second half reach A)]
99 to 100, description will be given of the effect mode in the lost epilogue part (SP second half reach A). The lost epilogue part (Reach A in the second half of SP) is a part in which it is announced that the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state due to the development of the story in which Yume-chan and Jam-chan could not catch Bakuchu.

As shown in FIG. 99(k1), in the missing epilogue part of Reach A in the second half of the SP, an image is displayed in which Yume-chan and Jam-chan did not catch Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of (k1) where Bakuchu is not caught, an onomatopoeic sound "suka" that cannot be caught is output in accordance with the image in which Mumu-chan and Jam-chan could not catch Bakuchu. Also, in the state of (k1) where Bakuchu is not caught, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white color of (ti39) indicating the lighting mode of (i39) corresponding to the fact that Bakuchu was not caught. Lights up white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99(k2), Bakuchu is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (k2), the subtitle display "Uh-shih!" corresponding to Baku-chu's line "Uh-shih!" is displayed on the Baku-chu-up screen. In the state of (k2) "Bakuchu-up", the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color of (tk1) indicating the lighting mode of (k1). After that, as shown in (k3), an image is displayed in which Mumu-chan and Jam-chan, who could not catch Bakuchu, are on their knees in regret. As shown in (k3), in a disappointing state, the game effect lamp 9 lights in white that is darker than the white in (tk1) indicating the lighting mode in (k1). After that, the screen is darkened as shown in FIG. 100 (k4). In the state of the screen darkening of (k4), the game effect lamp 9 is extinguished. After that, as shown in (k5), the symbol "232", which is the losing symbol combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state in which the normal screen of (k5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the yellow background lighting pattern common to (ta1) indicating the lighting mode of (a1). From the state of (k5), when it is determined that the win will be a relief win, the process shifts to the effect of (v1).

[Production mode in the fanning part (SP second half reach B)]
101 to 109, description will be given of the mode of presentation in the fanning part (Reach B in the second half of SP). The fanning part (Reach B in the latter half of SP) is a part in which a story unfolds in which friend characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan face off against enemy characters crab robots. In the fanning part (Reach B in the latter half of the SP), the story unfolds that if Jam-chan and Nana-chan and the crab robot win against Boingo, it will be a big hit, and if Jam-chan and Nana-chan lose to the crab robot, it will be a loss.

As shown in FIG. 101 (n1), in the fanning part in which the SP second half reach B is executed, the title corresponding to the SP second half reach B of "Gekishin Robo Battle" is displayed. The content of the effect in the latter half of the SP to be executed from now on is indicated by the title display. Below the title display, the expected degree of big hit in this reach is indicated by the number of stars. It should be noted that the display indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit may be displayed in another SP reach. In the state where the title display of (n1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (n2), an image is displayed in which friendly characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan (characters on the left end) face each other and the enemy character crab robot faces each other. As shown in (n2), the subtitle display "I will not lose!" corresponding to the line "I will not lose!" In the confrontation state (n2), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in white corresponding to the fact that the two players are speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the crab character. Also, at the timing when the image related to the title display of (n2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the SP latter half reach B is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 101(n3), an image of a crab attack in which an enemy character crab shoots a beam is displayed. In addition, in the crab attack state (n3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to the crab attack. After that, as shown in FIG. 102(n4), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan escaping from the crab beam is displayed. As shown in (n4), on the screen where the two players are running away, the subtitle display "Kyaa!" corresponding to the line "Kyaa!" of the two teammates is displayed. In the state of (n4) two players running away, the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to the action of the two players running away.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102(n5), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan escaping into a depression in a rocky area to escape from the beam of the crab is displayed. In the two-player jump state of (n5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (n6), an image of the beam passing over the rocky area is displayed. When the beam of (n6) passes, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in FIG. 103(n7), an image is displayed in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are relieved in the shadow of a rocky place. As shown in (n7), the subtitle display "Hahaha" corresponding to Jam's line "Hahaha" is displayed on the screen where the two people are relieved. In the confrontation state (n7), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in pink corresponding to Nana's character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103(n8), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (n8), the subtitle display "This is your turn!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "This is your turn!" is displayed on the jam-up screen. Also, in the jam-up state of (n8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speaking. After that, as shown in (n9), an image of Jam-chan attacking the crab with a technique called Delta Break is displayed. In addition, in the jam attack state of (n9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's utterance of the line "delta break".

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10), an image is displayed in which the crab is damaged by Jam-chan's attack. In addition, in the crab attack state (n10), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to the crab saying the line "gununu~". After that, as shown in (n11), an image is displayed in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan face each other and the crab faces each other. In the confrontation state (n11), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the crab character. After that, as shown in (n12), an image of a crab attack in which an enemy character crab shoots a beam is displayed. In addition, in the crab attack state (n12), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to the crab attack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (n13), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan escaping from the crab beam is displayed. As shown in (n13), on the screen where the two players are running away, the subtitle display "Kyaa!" corresponding to the lines "Kyaa!" of the two teammates is displayed. In the state of two players running away (n13), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to the action of the two players running away. After that, as shown in (n14), an image in which the beam approaches Jam-chan and Nana-chan is displayed. In the beam state of (n14), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (n15), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan being damaged by crab beams is displayed. In addition, in the state of (n15) where two players are damaged, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times corresponding to the fact that two players are damaged.

After that, as shown in FIG. 106 (n16), an image is displayed in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan who have been damaged stand up. As shown in (n16), on the screen where the two players stand up, the subtitle display "From now on!" corresponding to the line "From now on!" of the two teammates is displayed. In the state of (n16) where two players stand up, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in pink corresponding to Nana's character. After that, as shown in (n17), Nana-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. In addition, in the Nana-up state of (n17), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink corresponding to the Nana-chan character. After that, as shown in (n18), a screen in which Nana prays is displayed. Nana-chan's prayer action is executed as a production to confuse the enemy. In addition, in the Nana prayer state (n18), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in pink corresponding to Nana's praying action.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107 (n19), an image in which the crab is confused by Nana's prayer is displayed. In addition, in the state of crab confusion (n19), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to the crab's confused action. After that, as shown in (n20), an image of an angry crab that has recovered from its confusion is displayed. In the angry crab state (n20), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the crab character. After that, as shown in (n21), an image of the crab swinging its arms to attack is displayed. In addition, in the crab attack state (n21), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red corresponding to the crab attack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (n22), an image is displayed in which Nana-chan is damaged by a crab attack. In addition, in the state of Nana being damaged (n22), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times corresponding to Nana being damaged. After that, as shown in (n23), an image of Jam holding the remote controller and operating it is displayed. As shown in (n23), the subtitle display "Leave it to me!" corresponding to the line "Leave it to me!" of the jam is displayed on the jam remote control operation screen. In addition, in the jam remote control operation state of (n23), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speaking. After that, as shown in (n24), an image of Jam-chan trying to press a remote control button is displayed. As shown in (n24), in the jam remote control operation state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan operating the remote control.

After that, as shown in FIG. 109 (n25), an effect is executed in which a hand appears from the sky. As shown in (n25), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white when the hand is out of the sky. After that, as shown in (n26), an image of a hand reaching out from the sky to catch a crab is displayed. As shown in (n26), in the crab catching state, the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white. After that, as shown in (n27), it becomes a scene before the winner decision in which an enlarged image of the crab and the hand is displayed. In the scene (n27) before the win/fail decision, the game effect lamp 9 keeps lighting in white so as to correspond to the scene before the win/fail decision. By muting the sound in the scene before the success/failure decision, it is easy to understand that the scene is the branch scene of the success/failure decision. From the state of (n27), when it is determined that the jackpot will be achieved in the latter half of the SP reach B, the process proceeds to the presentation of (o1). From the state of (n27), if it is determined that the game will be lost in reach B in the second half of SP or that the game will be a relief hit, the process shifts to the presentation of (p1).

[Production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B)]
110 to 112, description will be given of the effect mode in the hit epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). The winning epilogue part (Reach B in the second half of SP) is a part in which it is announced that the game will be controlled to a big winning state as the story of Jam-chan and Nana-chan winning over the crab robot unfolds.

As shown in FIG. 110(o1), in the hit epilogue part of reach B in the second half of SP, an image of a hand reaching from the sky catching a crab is displayed. Also, as shown in (o1), the subtitle display "I got killed" corresponding to the crab's line "I got killed" is displayed on the screen where the crab is caught. Also, in the state of (o1) catching crabs, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in brighter white than the white of (tn27) indicating the lighting mode of (n27) corresponding to catching crabs. After that, as shown in (o2), an image is displayed in which the caught crab is installed as a signboard of the shop. In addition, (o2) in the state of the shop where the crab is the signboard, the game effect lamp 9 becomes rainbow lighting (smooth) indicating that a big win has been achieved. Also, in the state of (o2), the winning BGM is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110(o3), a screen appears in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are displayed in front of a shop whose signboard is a crab. Also, as shown in (o3), the subtitle display "nice signboard" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "nice signboard" is displayed on the screen of the shop where the crab is the signboard. In addition, in the state of the shop where the crab is the signboard of (o3), the game effect lamp 9 becomes rainbow lighting (smooth). After that, as shown in FIG. 111(o4), the screen where Jam-chan and Nana-chan are displayed in front of a shop whose signboard is a crab continues. Also, as shown in (o4), the subtitle display "Work hard" corresponding to Nana's line "Work hard" is displayed on the screen of the shop with the crab as the signboard. In addition, in the state of the shop where the crab is the signboard of (o4), the game effect lamp 9 becomes rainbow lighting (smooth). After that, as shown in (o5), an image of a shop with a crab as a signboard is displayed as a still image in the style of a graphic novel. In the state of the still image of (o5), the game effect lamp 9 becomes rainbow lighting (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 111(o6), the effect of putting out a symbol is executed in which the decoration symbol combination "222" indicating the result of the big hit display is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (o6), the pattern of "222" is enlarged and the pattern is emphasized by the concentrated lines in the pattern display. In the state of (o6) where the symbols are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112(o7), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (o6). In the state of (o7) where the symbols are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (o8), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (o7) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of (o8) two symbols (normal size), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production mode in the lost epilogue part (SP second half reach B)]
113 to 114, description will be given of the effect mode in the missing epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). The lost epilogue part (Reach B in the second half of SP) is a part in which it is announced that the jackpot game state will not be controlled as the story develops in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are defeated by a crab robot.

As shown in FIG. 113 (p1), in the missing epilogue part of Reach B in the second half of the SP, an image is displayed in which a hand reaching from the sky could not catch a crab. In addition, in the state of (p1) where the crab is not caught, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white of (tn27) indicating the lighting mode of (n27) corresponding to the fact that the crab was not caught. Light. After that, as shown in (p2), an image of the crab walking sideways and running away is displayed. In the state of crab escape of (p2), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a darker white than the white of (tp1) indicating the lighting mode of (p1). After that, as shown in (p3), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan, who were escaped by a crab, looking down with regret, is displayed. Also, as shown in (p3), the subtitle display "Sonna~" corresponding to the line "Sonna~" of the two teammates is displayed on the regrettable screen. Also, as shown in (p3), in a disappointing state, the game effect lamp 9 lights in a white color darker than the white color of (tp1) indicating the lighting mode of (p1).

After that, the screen is darkened as shown in FIG. 114 (p4). In the state of the screen darkening of (p4), the game effect lamp 9 is extinguished. After that, as shown in (p5), the symbol "232", which is the losing symbol combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen of (p5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same yellow background lighting pattern as (ta1) indicating the lighting mode of (a1). From the state of (p5), when it is determined that the game will be a relief hit, the process proceeds to the presentation of (v1).

[Production mode in the fanning part (SP final reach)]
115 to 132, description will be given of the mode of presentation in the fanning part (SP final reach). The fanning part (SP final reach) is the part where the story unfolds in which six friendly characters, Yume-chan, Jam-chan, Nana-chan, Maid A, Maid B, and AD, chase after the enemy character Bakuchu. is. In the agitation part (SP final reach), a story is developed that if 6 people can catch Bakuchu, it will be a big hit, and if 6 people can not catch Bakuchu, it will be a loss. In addition, the fanning part (SP final reach) is the reach with the highest degree of expectation for a big hit among all the reach.

As shown in FIG. 115(r1), in the agitation part in which the SP final reach is executed, a title corresponding to the SP final reach is displayed, "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!". The contents of the effect of the SP final reach that will be executed from now on are indicated by the title display. In the state where the title display of (r1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (r2), six friendly characters AD, Maid A, Maid B, Nana-chan, Jam-chan, and Mumu-chan face each other in the center of the screen, Bakuchu, an enemy character. An image is displayed. On the screen where the characters are facing each other, the lines of the six allies "This is the end" are output. Also, in the confrontation state of (r2), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in white corresponding to the speeches of the six characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. Also, at the timing when the image related to the title display of (r2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the SP final reach is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 115(r3), Bakuchu's line "I'll run away again" is output on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (r3), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the six characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu's speech. After that, as shown in FIG. 116(r4), when the AD is displayed, the subtitle display "Leave it to me!" corresponding to the line "Leave it to me!" of the AD is displayed. In the AD display state of (r4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange corresponding to the AD issuing a line. After that, as shown in (r5), when the maid A is displayed, the caption display "look at me" corresponding to the line "look at me" of the maid A is displayed. In the maid A display state of (r5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue corresponding to the maid A speaking. After that, as shown in (r6), when the maid B is displayed, the subtitle display "Because I'll do my best" corresponding to the line "Because I'll do my best" of the maid B is displayed. In the state of maid B display of (r6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in Hawaiian blue corresponding to maid B speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117(r7), when Nana-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "I'll catch you~" corresponding to Nana-chan's line "I'll catch you~" is displayed. In the state of Nana-chan display of (r7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink corresponding to Nana-chan's speaking. After that, as shown in (r8), when Jam-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "It's okay" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "It's okay" is displayed. In the state of Jam-chan display of (r8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speaking. After that, as shown in (r9), when Yume-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Everyone's going~!" corresponding to Yume-chan's line "Everyone's going~!" is displayed. In the state where Yume-chan is displayed in (r9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to the fact that Yume-chan is speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118(r10), when Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle display "Anyone can call me" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Anyone can call me" is displayed. In the Bakuchu display state of (r10), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu's speech. After that, as shown in (r11), when the image of Maid A chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the caption "Wait!" corresponding to Maid A's line "Wait!" is displayed. In the jam chasing state of (r11), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue corresponding to the maid A speaking. After that, as shown in (r12), when an image of AD and Maid A chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait wait!" Is displayed. In the state of chasing AD & Maid A in (r12), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in orange corresponding to the speech of the AD character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes in blue corresponding to the maid A's character speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 119 (r13), when the image of Bakuchu running away is displayed, the subtitle display "Catch me!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Catch me!" In addition, as a physical sound, the footsteps of Bakuchu "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output. In addition, in the state of (r13) Bakuchu Escape, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red corresponding to Bakuchu escaping. After that, as shown in (r14), an image of Bakuchu running away from the screen is displayed. In addition, as a physical sound, the footsteps of Bakuchu "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output. In addition, in the state of (r14) Bakuchu Escape, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. After that, as shown in (r15), the background of the city is displayed on the screen. In the state of the town background of (r15), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (r16), when the image of Nana-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Nana-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed. . In the state of chasing Nana (r16), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink corresponding to Nana's speaking. After that, as shown in (r17), when the image of Maid B and Nana chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait wait!" is displayed. In the state of chasing Maid B & Nana in (r17), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in Hawaiian blue corresponding to the maid B's character speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right blinks in pink corresponding to the fact that Nana-chan's character is speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (r18), when the image of Bakuchu running away is displayed, the subtitle display "Woo!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Wow!" is displayed. In addition, as a physical sound, the footsteps of Bakuchu "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output. Also, in the state of (r18) Bakuchu escape, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu escape. After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (r19), the background of the city is displayed on the screen. In the state of the town background of (r19), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (r20), when the image of Mumu-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Mumu-chan's line "Wait!" be done. In the dream-chasing state of (r20), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to Yume-chan's speaking. After that, as shown in (r21), when an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait wait!" is displayed. In the state of Chasing Dream & Jam in (r21), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character uttering a line. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes in green corresponding to the speech of Yume-chan's character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (r22), the background of the city is displayed on the screen. In the state of the town background of (r22), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (r23), when the image of Bakuchu escaping is displayed, the subtitle display "Dangerous!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Dangerous!" is displayed. In addition, as a physical sound, the footsteps of Bakuchu "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output. In addition, in the state of (r23) Bakuchu Escape, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red corresponding to Bakuchu escaping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (r24), when the AD character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange corresponding to AD. After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (r25), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange when the AD performs the action of jumping. At this time, "Ah!" is output as the dialogue sound of the AD, but the caption is not displayed. After that, as shown in (r26), when the character of the maid A is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue corresponding to the maid A. After that, as shown in (r27), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue when the maid A performs the action of jumping. At this time, "Too!" is output as the speech sound of maid A, but the caption is not displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 124 (r28), when the maid B character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in Hawaiian blue corresponding to the maid B. As shown in FIG. After that, as shown in (r29), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in Hawaiian blue when the maid B performs the action of jumping. At this time, as maid B's voice, the same voice as maid A's voice, "Too!", is output, but the caption is not displayed. After that, as shown in (r30), when Nana-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink corresponding to Nana-chan. After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (r31), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink when Nana-chan performs the action of jumping. At this time, "Teiya!" is output as Nana's dialogue sound, but the subtitles are not displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (r32), when Jam-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan. After that, as shown in (r33), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple when Jam-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, Jam-chan's dialogue sound "Torya!" is output, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (r34), when the character of Yume-chan is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan. After that, as indicated by (r35), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green when Yume-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, Yume-chan's dialogue sound "Oyaa!" is output, but the subtitles are not displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (r36), an image in which the faces of the six characters are close-up is displayed on the divided screen. As shown in (r36), when the image of the six teammates up is displayed, the subtitle display "This is the last!" corresponding to the line "This is the last!" of the six teammates is displayed. In addition, in the state of (r36) 6 allies are up, the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to the fact that the 6 allies are speaking. After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (r37), the image of 6 teammates up is continuously displayed. Also, in the state of (r37) with 6 teammates up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (r38), Bakuchu is displayed along with the background of the city. Also, in the Bakuchu display state of (r38), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (r39), Bakuchu is enlarged and displayed. Also, as shown in (r39), when the image of Bakuchu-up is displayed, the subtitle display "Yabe!!!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Yabe!!!" is displayed. be. Also, in the Baku-chu-up state of (r39), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to Baku-chu's speech.

After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (r40), an image showing push button 31B and a time gauge are displayed together with concentration lines superimposed on the image of Baku-up. In addition, in the state of (r40) "Explosion Chew Up + Button Display", the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times. After that, when the player operates the button within the valid period of button operation, as shown in (r41), three main characters of the pachinko game machine 1, Nana-chan, Yume-chan, and Jam-chan, cut in on the screen. is displayed. A cut-in display is an effect in which another image is displayed as an interrupting image in the displayed image. Also, the cut-in display can indicate the degree of expectation for a big hit by the color of the cut-in display. For example, when the cut-in display is red, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when it is green. Also, in the cut-in state of (r41), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red or green according to the color of the cut-in display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (r42), after the cut-in display is over, an image of six people jumping toward Bakuchu is displayed. In addition, in the state of cut-in (r42), the BGM is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 is lit in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 129 (r43), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white when the screen displays six teammates. After that, as shown in (r44), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red when the screen on which Bakuchu is displayed is displayed. After that, as shown in (r45), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white when six teammates are displayed that are larger than those in (r43). After that, as shown in FIG. 130 (r46), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red when an explosion that is enlarged more than that at (r44) is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 130 (r47), when the six allies are displayed in a larger size than at (r45), the subtitle display "I'm cornered!" !” is displayed. In addition, in the state of (r47) in which six teammates are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white in response to six teammates speaking. After that, as shown in (r48), the display of Bakuchu and the display of six people are alternately displayed. In the state of (r48), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (r49), an image is displayed in which images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are gathered in the center of the screen. As shown in (r49), in response to the trigger display coming together in the center, a sound corresponding to prompting the operation is output for prompting the player to perform the operation. In addition, in the state of (r49) to the center of the trigger display, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. After that, as shown in (r50), an image is displayed in which the trigger display is gathered in the center of the screen rather than (r49). As indicated by (r50), in response to the trigger display coming together in the center, a sound corresponding to the prompting of operation is output for prompting the player to perform the operation. Also, in the state of (r50) to the center of the trigger display, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (r51), the image of Bakuchu is displayed as still image 1. FIG. At this time, the characters "Close!" are superimposed on the image of Bakuchu, a prompt for operating the trigger, and a time gauge are displayed. In the state where the closing display (still image 1) of (r51) is displayed, a sound corresponding to operation promotion is output to prompt the player to perform the operation. Also, in the state where the closing display (still image 1) of (r51) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (r52), the image of Bakuchu is displayed as still image 2. FIG. At this time, the characters "Close!" are superimposed on the image of Bakuchu, a prompt for operating the trigger, and a time gauge are displayed. The time gauge has decreased since (r51). In the state where the closing display (still image 2) of (r52) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion is output, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. After that, as shown in (r53), the image of Bakuchu is displayed as still image 3. FIG. At this time, the characters "Close!" are superimposed on the image of Bakuchu, a prompt for operating the trigger, and a time gauge are displayed. The time gauge has decreased since (r52). In the state where the closing display (still image 3) of (r53) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion is output, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (r54), the image of Bakuchu is displayed as a still image 4 before the decision is made. At this time, the characters "Close!" are superimposed on the image of Bakuchu, a prompt for operating the trigger, and a time gauge are displayed. The time gauge has decreased since (r53). In a state in which the draw display (still image 4) is displayed as a pre-determination scene of (r54), a sound corresponding to the operation promotion is output, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red. From the state of (r54), when it is determined that the game will be a big hit in the SP final reach, the process proceeds to the effect of (s1). From the state of (r54), when it is determined that the SP final reach will be a loss or that the win will be a relief win, the process shifts to the production of (u1).

[Production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP final reach)]
133 to 136, description will be given of the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). The winning epilogue part (SP final reach) is a part in which it is announced that the game will be controlled to a big winning game state by developing a story in which six players catch Bakuchu.

As shown in FIG. 133(s1), in the SP final reach hit epilogue part, as shown in (s1), a radial effect image is displayed for the character object on the screen in accordance with the start of the character object falling. be done. This effect image has a more flashy production mode than the effect image when developing to the second half of the SP reach. In addition, due to the effect image, the Bakuchu character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern cannot be visually recognized. In addition, in the state of (s1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color in accordance with the falling of the accessory.

After that, in the state of FIG. 133 (s2), the accessory falls further from the state of (s1). In the state of (s2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color in accordance with the falling of the accessory. After that, in the state of (s3), the character is further extended so that the character "P" of the characters of the character is positioned so that it overlaps the place where the reduced "2" decoration pattern was displayed. Fall. In the state of (s3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color. From the state of (s3), an effect is executed in which the accessory rises. After that, as shown in FIG. 134(s4), in the state after the rising of the character object, a scene in which Mumu-chan caught Bakuchu is displayed. Also, as shown in (s4), the subtitle display "Uh, I got caught" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Uh, I got caught" is displayed. In the state of catching Bakuchu in (s4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth). Also, in the state of (s4), BGM for winning is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134(s5), an image is displayed in which six people are happy to catch Bakuchu. Also, as shown in (s5), the subtitle display "Everyone did it!" corresponding to Mumu's line "Everyone did it!" is displayed. In the state of catching Bakuchu (s5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth). After that, as shown in (s6), an image of the six people happily catching Bakuchu is displayed. Also, as shown in (s6), the subtitle display "You did it, everyone!" is continuously displayed. In the state of catching Bakuchu in (s6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 135(s7), an image of the six people being happy with Bakuchu being caught is displayed in a graphic style still image. In the state of the still image of (s7), the game effect lamp 9 becomes rainbow lighting (smooth). After that, as shown in (s8), a design effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the big win display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (s8), in the pattern display, the pattern of "222" is enlarged and the pattern is emphasized with concentrated lines. The game effect lamp 9 blinks in white in the state of drawing out the symbols in (s8). Thereafter, as shown in (s9), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (s8). The game effect lamp 9 flashes in white in the state of drawing out the symbols in (s9). After that, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (s9) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of 2 symbols (normal size) of (s10), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production mode in the lost epilogue part (SP final reach)]
137 to 138, description will be given of the effect mode in the losing epilogue part (SP final reach). The lost epilogue part (SP final reach) is a part in which it is reported that the game will not be controlled to a big win game state by developing a story in which six players have failed to catch Bakuchu.

As shown in FIG. 137(u1), in the missing epilogue part of the SP final reach, an image of Bakuchu running away is displayed. In addition, in the state of (u1) Bakuchu Escape, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white of (tr54) indicating the lighting mode of (r54) corresponding to the failure to catch the Bakuchu. Light. After that, as shown in (u2), an image is displayed in which the Bakuchu runs far away and the six people who could not catch the Bakuchu are disappointed. Also, as shown in (u2), the subtitle display "I'm sorry~" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "I'm sorry~" is displayed on the screen of regret. As shown in (u2), in a disappointing state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white that is darker than the white of (tu1) indicating the lighting mode of (u1).

After that, the screen is darkened as shown in FIG. 137(u3). The game effect lamp 9 is extinguished in the screen darkening state of (u3). After that, as shown in FIG. 138(u4), the symbol "232", which is the losing symbol combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state (u4) where the normal screen is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights in the same yellow background lighting pattern as (ta1) indicating the lighting mode of (a1). From the state of (u4), when it is determined that the win will be a relief win, the process shifts to the effect of (v1).

[Production Mode in Relief Winning Part]
139 to 140, description will be given of the mode of presentation in the relief winning part. The redemption winning part is a part in which a story is developed by a redemption effect that becomes a big hit after the development of the losing story. In the relief per part, a premium character corresponding to relief (resurrection) named Mr. Drum, who did not appear in other Reach, appears.

As shown in FIG. 139 (v1), in the relief winning part, a relief effect is executed in which a character called Mr. Drum is displayed on the screen. By displaying Mr. Drum, the player can recognize that the resurrection hit is disguised as a loss. In the relief effect of (v1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in brighter red than (td4, tg5, tp5, tu4). After that, as shown in (v3), the screen is whited out. In the whiteout of (v2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 140(v3), the effect of putting out a symbol is executed in which the decoration symbol combination "222" indicating the result of the big hit display is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (v3), the design of "222" is enlarged and emphasized with concentrated lines in the design display. The game effect lamp 9 flashes in white in the state of (v3) where the symbols are displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (v4), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (v3). The game effect lamp 9 blinks in white in the state of drawing out the symbols (v4). Thereafter, as shown in (v5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size from the state of (v4) and displayed in normal size. In the state of (v5) two symbols (normal size), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production mode in re-lottery part (odd number pattern or even number pattern derivation after button operation)]
141 to 156, description will be given of the mode of production in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). In FIGS. 141 to 156, the flow of a series of effects from the detailed effect of putting out symbols in the fan effect to the button operation in the re-lottery effect will be described.

As shown in FIG. 141 (A1), the effect of putting out a symbol is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the big hit display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (A1), in the state of two-symbol enlargement, the symbol "222" is enlarged and the symbol is emphasized by the concentrated lines. In the state of 2-symbol enlargement of (A1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (A2), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a larger size than in the state of (A1). In the state of 2-symbol enlargement of (A2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (A3), the symbol combination "222" is reduced and displayed. In the (A3) 2-symbol reduction state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 142(A4), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed. In the 2-symbol reduction state of (A4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (A5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed in the normal size. In the state of (A5) two symbols normal size, the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (A6), the background is switched and the re-lottery effect is started. In the state of (A6), it is a swinging period in which the symbol combination "222" swings up and down. In (A6), a screen is displayed in which the pattern is raised from the normal position. In the state of (A6) two-symbol shaking, the game effect lamp 9 is extinguished.

Here, from the state (A5) to the state (A6), the period during which the pattern is shaking is omitted. Specifically, when the pattern is the normal size, the pattern is shaking. Then, after it becomes the normal size, the re-lottery part of the pattern swing will continue. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is lit at a timing related to the completion of the pattern output (including, for example, the timing immediately before the size becomes normal, the timing after the size becomes normal, and the timing at which the pattern swing starts). It switches from white blinking to rainbow colored smooth lighting. As a result, it is possible to perform smooth pattern display from pattern display to re-lottery performance, smooth transition to shaking period, and blessing by matching patterns by light emission of the screen and the lamp. After that, during the pattern shaking period of FIG. 143 (A7), a screen is displayed in which the pattern is lowered from the normal position. In the state of (A7) two-symbol shaking, the game effect lamp 9 is extinguished.

After that, as shown in FIG. 143 (A8), during the period of pattern fluctuation, a screen in which the pattern is displayed in the center is displayed. As shown in (A8), the game effect lamp 9 is extinguished in the state of two-symbol swing. After that, as shown in (A9), the two symbols are displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (A8) during the period when the movement starts due to the re-lottery effect. In the 2-symbol reduction state of (A9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144 (A10), two symbols are further reduced from the state of (A9) and displayed. In the 2-symbol reduction state of (A10), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red.

After that, the number used as the decoration pattern changes at high speed from FIG. 144 (A11) to FIG. When the switching display is performed, the temporarily stopped decorative patterns are sequentially replaced with other patterns, so that the decorative patterns are switched one after another. For example, as shown in (A11), two symbols are lightly displayed during high-speed fluctuation. In the change state of (A11), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. After that, as shown in (A12), the three symbols are clearly displayed during the high speed fluctuation. In the state of three symbols (A12), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. 145 (A13) to 148 (A23), such as 3 patterns, 4 patterns, 5 patterns, 6 patterns, 7 patterns, 1 pattern, etc., so that the patterns are changed while changing at high speed, and the display is thin. A clear display is repeated. From FIG. 145 (A13) to FIG. 148 (A23), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

After that, in FIG. 148 (A24) where the two symbols are clearly displayed again after one cycle of the high-speed fluctuation starting from the two symbols, the button image and the time gauge are faintly displayed under the two symbols. After that, as shown in FIG. 149 (A25), the button image and the time gauge are clearly displayed when the two symbols are displayed lightly during the high speed fluctuation. After that, 3 patterns, 4 patterns, 5 patterns, 6 patterns, 7 patterns, 1 pattern, 2 patterns, 3 patterns, 4 patterns, 5 patterns, 6 patterns, etc. from Fig. 149 (A26) to Fig. 156 (A46) , the pattern is changed while fluctuating at high speed, and the light display and the clear display are repeated. Also, the time gauge gradually decreases over time. From FIG. 148 (A24) to FIG. 156 (A46), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Then, when the push button 31B is operated from the state of (A46), if it is determined that the odd-numbered symbol will be derived, the process proceeds to the presentation of (B1). When the push button 31B is operated from the state of (A46), if it has been determined that an even-numbered symbol will be derived, the process proceeds to the presentation of (C1).

[Production mode in re-lottery part (odd number symbol derivation after button operation)]
157 to 160, description will be given of the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd symbol derivation after button operation). In FIGS. 157 to 160, the flow of a series of effects until the odd-numbered symbols are derived after the button operation is operated in the re-lottery effect will be described.

As shown in FIG. 157(B1), the effect of putting out a symbol is executed in which the decoration symbol combination "333" indicating the result of the big hit display is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (B1), in the state of 3-pattern enlargement, the background is brightened, the pattern of "333" is enlarged, and the pattern is emphasized by the concentrated lines. In the state of 3-symbol enlargement of (B1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (B2), the symbol combination "333" is displayed in a larger size than in the state of (B1). In the state of 3-symbol enlargement of (B2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (B3), the symbol combination "333" is reduced and displayed. In the 3-symbol reduction state of (B3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 158(B4), the symbol combination "333" is further reduced and displayed. In the 3-symbol reduction state of (B4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (B5), the symbol combination "333" is further reduced and displayed in the normal size. In the (B5) 3-symbol normal size state, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color. After that, as shown in (B6), there is a shaking period in which the symbol combination "333" shakes up and down. In (B6), a screen is displayed in which the pattern is raised from the normal position. In the state of (B6) 3-symbol shaking, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color. After that, the background changes to the normal background as shown in FIG. 159 (B7). The pattern shaking period also continues in the normal background of (B7). In the normal background shaking state of (B7), a screen is displayed in which the pattern is lowered from the normal position. In the normal background shaking state of (B7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 159 (B8), the decorative symbol "333" is determined and stopped. Also, during the symbol fixing period of (B8), the small symbols are also fixed and stopped at "333". During the symbol fixing period of (B8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow color. After that, as shown in (B9), the symbol fixing period continues. In the symbol fixing period of (B9), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the flashing lighting mode of rainbow color. After that, during the fanfare period of FIG. 160 (D1), the same screen as in the state of (B9) is displayed. However, the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is turned off corresponding to the fanfare. After that, as shown in (D2), after the mode of the game effect lamp 9, the screen is switched to a screen in which the characters "FEVER" indicating the fanfare mode and Yume-chan are displayed. At this time, the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained in the fanfare mode.

[Production mode in the re-lottery part (derivation of even-numbered symbols after button operation)]
161 to 164, description will be given of the mode of presentation in the re-lottery part (derivation of even-numbered symbols after button operation). In FIGS. 161 to 164, the flow of a series of effects until the even-numbered symbols are derived after the button operation is operated in the re-lottery effect will be described.

As shown in FIG. 161 (C1), the effect of putting out a symbol is executed, in which the decoration symbol combination "222" indicating the big hit display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (C1), in the state of 2-symbol enlargement, the background becomes brighter, the pattern of "222" is enlarged, and the pattern is emphasized by the concentrated lines. In the 2-symbol enlargement state of (C1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (C2), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a larger size than in the state of (C1). In the 2-symbol enlargement state of (C2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (C3), the symbol combination "222" is reduced and displayed. In the 2-symbol reduction state of (C3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 162(C4), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed. In the 2-symbol reduction state of (C4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (C5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed in the normal size. In the state of (C5) two-symbol normal size, the game effect lamp 9 smoothly lights up in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (C6), the background returns to the state of (A46), and a shaking period occurs in which the symbol combination "222" shakes up and down. In (C6), a screen is displayed in which the pattern is raised from the normal position. In the state of the two-symbol swing of (C6), the game effect lamp 9 smoothly lights up in rainbow colors. After that, the background changes to the normal background as shown in FIG. 163 (C7). The pattern shaking period also continues in the normal background of (C7). In the normal background shaking state of (C7), a screen is displayed in which the pattern is lowered from the normal position. In the normal background shaking state of (C7), the game effect lamp 9 smoothly lights up in rainbow colors.

After that, as shown in FIG. 163 (C8), the decorative symbol "222" is determined and stopped. Also, during the symbol fixing period of (C8), the small symbols are also fixed and stopped at "222". During the symbol fixing period of (C8), the game effect lamp 9 smoothly lights up in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (C9), the symbol fixing period continues. In the symbol fixing period of (C9), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the smooth lighting of the rainbow color. After that, during the fanfare period of FIG. 164 (E1), the same screen as in the state of (C9) is displayed. However, the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is turned off corresponding to the fanfare. After that, as shown in (E2), after the mode of the game effect lamp 9, the screen is switched to a screen in which the characters "FEVER" indicating the fanfare mode and Yume-chan are displayed. At this time, the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained in the fanfare mode.

<Description of Characteristic Portions in Effect Mode of Pachinko Machine 1>
Next, a detailed description will be given of the characteristic portions and modifications of the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above.

(Start 5)
The aforementioned shutter is an image that, when closed, renders the image of the effect being executed behind invisible, and when it is opened after being closed, the image of the effect being executed becomes visible. Also, the shutter is executed at a timing related to the fan part before the start of the fan part. Then, when the shutter is closed, the screen brightness is reduced as the area where the effect is visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter is open, the screen brightness is decreased as the area where the effect is visible becomes wider. becomes higher. According to this, the flow of production can be favorably shown by making the closure and opening of the shutter realistic. In addition, although the image of the shutter is used to make the image of the effect executed in the background invisible or visible, it may be an image other than the shutter, and the same effect can be executed with a character. may

(Start 6)
Further, the shutter described above is in a form in which it closes from the upper and lower ends of the screen toward the center of the screen. According to this, it is possible to favorably show an effect in which the screen brightness gradually changes. Also, the shutters may be closed from both ends of the screen toward the center like a fusuma (sliding door). Alternatively, the shutter may be closed from the upper end of the screen toward the lower end of the screen.

(Start 7)
Also, as shown in FIG. 58 described above, the image of the edge of the shutter is expressed in black. According to this, just before the shutter closes completely as shown in FIG. 58(a12), the boundary between the effect executed when the screen luminance is lowered and the edge of the shutter can be blurred, and the sense of incongruity can be eliminated. . When the shutter begins to open as shown in FIG. 60(a16), it is possible to eliminate the discomfort.

(Start 8)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 described above, after the shutter is opened, the SP first half reach is started. Until the shutter is fully opened, the effect of the SP first half reach is not started and the screen brightness is gradually increased, and after the shutter is opened, the SP first half effect proceeds. According to this, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction due to execution of the effect before the shutter is opened because the effect of the SP first half reach is the effect that the player wants to pay attention to.

(Start 10)
In addition, as shown in FIG. 57(a9) described above, the brightness of the screen decreases before the shutter starts to close, and the shutter closes completely at the timing when the shutter closes completely. . Here, if the brightness of the screen is lowered in conjunction with the shutter closing timing, the speed of the screen darkening may become too fast. Therefore, by starting to lower the screen brightness in advance, the speed of screen darkening can be made appropriate, and a series of presentations can be favorably shown.

(Start 12)
In addition, until the shutter is opened, the player does not know which SP first half reach is to be started. According to this, it is possible to have expectations about which production will be executed.

(Start 13)
It should be noted that the effect by the shutter described above may be executed at a timing other than the timing that develops in the first half of the SP. For example, it may be the timing from the second re-variation to the third re-variation in the pseudo-run. In addition, when the shutter is closed and then opened, an icon image (for example, a green pending image) that suggests a change in active pending, which is a pending display of the change, is displayed, and active pending is displayed in response to the icon image. It may be changed (for example, from blue to green). In addition, the effect by the shutter may be executed at the timing of developing from the SP first half reach to the SP second half reach. According to this, it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation by the shutter.

(Start 15)
Further, in addition to the above-described pattern in which the shutter is closed and automatically opened, a pattern in which a button image is displayed after the shutter is closed and the shutter is opened by executing a button operation may be provided. According to this, since a plurality of kinds of effects by the shutter are provided, the attraction of the effects by the shutter is improved.

(Provocation 1)
In addition, the above-mentioned agitation part for inciting the right or wrong has a production that is updated by the development in which the friendly characters and the enemy characters alternately fight (for example, SP first half reach B, SP second half reach B, etc.). In the production of such a teasing part, there is a scene in which a friendly character takes damage. In addition, in the effect of such a rousing part, the image display switching interval is shorter than that of the epilogue part, and the number of image display switching is large. According to this, it is possible to suitably show the fanning part by making the fanning part develop faster than the epilogue part.

(Provocation 2)
Also, as shown in FIG. 63(b5) and the like described above, in the teasing part, the lines of the teammate character are generated first, and the subtitles corresponding to the lines are displayed. According to this, the teammate character can be favorably recognized in the teasing part.

(Instigation 3)
Note that the caption display of the teammate character displayed first may be set to be displayed for a longer period of time than the caption display in another scene of the teasing part. According to this, the ally character can be recognized firmly.

(Instigation 4)
Also, as shown in FIG. 67(b17) and the like described above, there is a scene in which subtitles are not displayed when an ally character utters a line. According to this, it is possible to preferably show the caption display of the teammate character that is displayed first, and to show the screen display more preferably than adding the caption display to all the lines.

(Instigation 5)
In addition, in the above-mentioned inflection part, SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B as the first inflection part executed in the first half timing, and SP second half reach A as the second inflection part executed in the second half timing , SP latter half reach B, and SP final reach. In addition, there is a scene in which the ally character plays an active role in both the first and second teasing parts. Also, in any of the teasing parts, the line of the friendly character was generated first, and the caption corresponding to the line was displayed. According to this, the teammate character can be favorably recognized in any of the fanning parts.

(Instigation 6)
In addition, in the agitation part mentioned above, in the agitation part corresponding to reach B in the first half of the SP, Yume-chan's character is active, and in the agitation part corresponding to the second half of SP reach B, the characters of Jam-chan and Nana-chan are active. There were occasions when it worked. In Reach B in the first half of the SP, a line by Yume-chan, who is an ally character who plays an active role first, is generated, and subtitles corresponding to the line are displayed. In Reach B in the second half of the SP, dialogues by Jam-chan and Nana-chan, the friendly characters who are active first, were generated, and subtitles corresponding to the dialogues were displayed. According to this, the friendly character can be favorably recognized in any of the fanning parts. In addition, the number of active characters may be one or two or more. Also, the same character may play an active role in the first half and the second half of the excitement part.

(Provocation 11)
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 63(b5) and (b6), there is a scene in which each character speaks a line under a situation in which an ally character and an enemy character are displayed. Under such circumstances, the subtitle display for the dialogue is displayed in a fixed size and at a fixed display position. According to this, by not changing the display mode of the lines for each character, it is possible to reduce the chances of bugs getting angry.

(Inciting cut-in 2)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 127(r39) to 128(r42), at the timing when the cut-in display is executed, the caption display is displayed before the prompt display of the button image is displayed. According to this, since the button image can be continuously shown to the player who is watching the screen while paying attention to the subtitle display, the button image can be prevented from being overlooked, and the cut-in display can be suitably executed. can be done.

(Inciting cut-in 3)
Also, as shown in FIGS. 128(r41) to 130(r47), the design is such that there is no dialogue for a predetermined period after the cut-in display is over. Then, after a predetermined period of time without words has passed, a line is issued, and caption display is added to the line. According to this, the player can concentrate on the effect in the period after the cut-in display, and a suitable cut-in display can be achieved.

(Yes or No 1)
In addition, as shown in FIG. 132 (r54) described above, the scene of the success/failure decision was between the fanning part and the epilogue part. Then, in the scene of winning/failing determination, the player is informed whether or not the player has won a big hit after operating the trigger as the operating means. In addition, in the scene of winning or failing, the accessory was moved after the trigger operation in the case of a big hit. According to this, the attraction of the presentation is improved by making it a suitable scene for deciding whether to use the operating means.

(Yes or No 2)
Also, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r47) to 132 (r54), before the image corresponding to the operation means is displayed, subtitles by the teammate character are displayed, and then, on the screen corresponding to the operation means, The effect that was being executed becomes invisible. Then, the effect executed after that becomes recognizable again together with the image of the operating means. According to this, it is possible to give an impact by displaying the introduction of the operation means on the entire screen, and to display the performance that has been firmly executed at the timing when the operation means can be operated, so that the progress of the performance can be favorably shown. .

(Yes or No 3)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r48) to 131 (r51), while the introductory images (images (r49) to (r50)) for enabling operation of the operating means are displayed, are also being staged. According to this, by advancing the effect behind the scenes, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the image (the image of (r51)) in which the operation means can be operated, and also to make the player pay attention to the development of the effect.

(Yes or No 4)
132 (r51) to FIG. 132 (r54), when the trigger image as the promotion display was displayed, the tail slightly moved at each image change in the Bakuchu image. In this way, the effect may proceed while the promotion display is being displayed. Here, the progress of the presentation may include a scene change or a character action instead of just moving the tail. According to this, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the development of the presentation during the promotion display.

(Yes or No 5)
Further, the effect progressing while the promotion display is displayed progresses slower than the effect executed before the promotion display is displayed. According to this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the prompting display for operating the operation means, and to balance the prompting display and the progress of the effect. It should be noted that the effect that progresses while the promotion display is displayed may be slower than the effect that progresses while the introductory image is displayed. According to this, it is possible to make a difference in the progress speed of the effect during display of the promotion display and during display of the introductory image.

(Yes or No 6)
Also, it is preferable to echo the dialogue before the introduction image is displayed as shown in FIG. 130 (r47). According to this, the player can be excited before the introductory image is displayed.

(Yes or No 7)
Also, as shown in FIGS. 130(r47) to 131(r49) described above, the introductory image is displayed after the subtitle display before the introductory image is displayed is deleted. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display timings of the introductory image and the caption display from overlapping.

(Yes or No 14)
95 (i36) to FIG. 96 (i39), the image displaying the two characters, Yume-chan and Jam-chan, is gradually enlarged and displayed, and at the timing of (i39), 1 A single image is displayed while stationary for a predetermined period. After that, if it is a big hit, the video of the winning epilogue part will be played, and if it is a loss, the video of the losing epilogue part will be played. During the period in which one image is statically displayed for a predetermined period of time, one image can be reused for use, so it is possible to reduce the amount of data and favorably promote the success/failure decision scene. It should be noted that during the period in which the images in which the two characters are displayed are gradually enlarged and displayed, as many images (for example, 10) as shown in FIGS. may be used.

(Yes or No 16)
131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54), there is an introductory image display period in which images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are displayed in the center of the screen. Afterwards, there is a period of time during which prompts for activating the trigger are displayed. During the display period of the prompt display, a plurality of images are gradually moved to make it appear as if the character is moving. After that, by operating the trigger at the branching scene of winning/failing determination, the image of the winning epilogue part will be played if it is a big hit, and the image of the losing epilogue part will be played if it is a loss. All of these periods are periods during which dynamic display is performed in which images appear to be moving. According to this, a series of effects can be executed in a dynamic flow, and a suitable flow of effects can be obtained.

(Yes or No 18)
In addition, the winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part after the success/failure determination scene shown in FIGS. 133(s1) to 136(s10) and FIGS. In the winning epilogue part, an image corresponding to the winning epilogue part is played after the performance of the character action. Also, in the unsuccessful epilogue part, the screen turns black after the production corresponding to the unsuccessful epilogue part, and then returns to the normal screen. According to this, since it becomes the flow which switches a plurality of images after the scene of winning/failure determination, it can be set as the flow of suitable production|presentation.

(Epilogue 1)
The winning epilogue part described above is a part that does not transition when the game is lost, and is a part that has a scene in which the enemy character is at a disadvantage and a scene in which the ally character is at an advantage. Also, in the hit epilogue part, the number of image display switches in the production is smaller than in the fanning part. According to this, an appropriate effect can be executed in each part, and the flow of a series of effects can be favorably shown.

(Epilogue 4)
As shown in FIG. 104 (n10) described above, subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the teasing part. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 110(o1), subtitles are added to the dialogue of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage (scene of catching crabs) in the winning epilogue part. According to this, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles that were not displayed in the inciting part are displayed, so that the feeling of blessing can be emphasized.

(Epilogue 6)
As shown in FIGS. 134(s5) to (s6) described above, the subtitle display displayed in the winning epilogue part is designed to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display displayed in the introductory part. According to this, by displaying the subtitle display in the final winning epilogue part for a long period of time, the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the big win and the feeling of blessing can be emphasized. It should be noted that, when the caption display is displayed, the larger the number of characters, the longer it may be displayed than the smaller the number. Even in such a case, if the same number of subtitles (for example, 5 characters) are displayed in the winning epilogue part and the introductory part, the period during which the subtitles are displayed is longer in the winning epilogue part. should be designed as

(Epilogue 15)
As shown in FIGS. 134(s6) to 135(s8), the final caption display for the final line in the winning epilogue part is designed to be erased before the design effect is executed. . According to this, it is possible to prevent the caption display from being covered with the decoration pattern and misunderstanding that it is a message in the effect of the pattern display. Therefore, it is possible to suitably show the effect in the winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 17)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, at the timing when the effect of designing is completed and the player can recognize the decoration pattern, the decoration pattern and the image such as the character displayed as the background become a still image. there is According to this, it is possible to prevent the decoration pattern from becoming difficult to see because the background of the decoration pattern is a moving image.

(Epilogue 18)
As shown in FIG. 135 (s7) described above, the image that was playing in the winning epilogue part becomes a still image at the timing before the symbol presentation effect is executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the pattern from becoming difficult to see from the timing of the start of drawing out the pattern.

(Epilogue 19)
As shown in FIG. 135(s7) described above, the still picture displayed in the winning epilogue part has a special graphic style. According to this, by adding a special effect to the still picture, it is possible to make a suitable epilogue part by emphasizing that the picture is still and suggesting that the scene has changed.

(Epilogue 21)
It is desirable that the caption display before the pattern display shown in FIG. 134(s6) described above should not have the fade effect of gradually erasing the display. Here, a fade effect may be added to the caption display that is displayed at other timings to gradually erase the display. According to this, except for the final subtitle display, it is possible to effectively switch by adding a fade effect, and by instantaneously erasing the final subtitle display, the final subtitle display overlaps the decorative pattern. It is possible to prevent the message from being put away and the misunderstanding that it is a message in the performance of designing. Therefore, it is possible to suitably show the effect in the winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 22)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decoration pattern and the small pattern are displayed during the design effect. An effect image with concentrated lines is added to the decoration pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decoration pattern has a higher priority than the decoration pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the near side. According to this, it is possible to make it possible to make it possible to recognize that the small symbols are in the process of being changed while enhancing the production effect of the effect image with respect to the decorative symbols, and to make a suitable winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 23)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decoration pattern and the small pattern are displayed during the design effect. Here, the movement of the decorative design and the small design may be synchronized at the timing when the design of the decorative design is completed. Concretely, during the pattern shaking period in which the decoration pattern is completed and the pattern swings up and down, the small pattern may also swing up and down in the same motion as the decoration pattern. According to this, by synchronizing the movement of the decoration pattern and the small pattern, it is possible to suitably show the flow of the effect in the winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 24)
As shown in FIGS. 157(B1) to 158(B5) described above, both decorative patterns and small patterns are displayed during the effect of drawing out patterns in the re-lottery part. An effect image with concentrated lines is added to the decoration pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decoration pattern has a higher priority than the decoration pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the near side. According to this, it is possible to make it possible to recognize that the small symbols are being changed and displayed while enhancing the performance effect of the effect image regarding the decorative symbols.

(Epilogue 25)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decoration pattern and the small pattern may be displayed in a state where the patterns are aligned once when the design is produced. Then, in conjunction with the shift to the re-lottery part, both the decoration design and the small design may change again. According to this, the decoration pattern and the small pattern can be displayed in a suitable manner in synchronization.

(Re-lottery production 3)
As shown in FIG. 142 (A5) described above, in the final state of the design presentation in the winning epilogue part, the decorative patterns are displayed in a trembling manner, and an effect image with concentrated lines is added. Even when the background is switched from that state to the background of the re-lottery effect as shown in (A6), the effect image with the concentrated lines is continuously added. Also, the game effect lamp 9 is switched from smooth rainbow lighting to extinguished. In other words, from the design to the re-lottery production, the pattern fluctuation and effect mode continue, and the background and the lamp are designed to switch. According to this, it is possible to make it easy to understand from which decoration pattern the re-lottery effect started.

(Re-lottery production 6)
As shown in FIGS. 144 (A10) to 156 (A46) and 157 (B1) to 158 (B5) described above, in the re-lottery effect, the reduced size decorative pattern is used to advance the pattern, and the button is displayed. Then, when the player operates the button, an effect of displaying a symbol in which the symbol is enlarged and displayed is executed. In other words, from the moment the pattern is put out, the decoration pattern that is finally notified is displayed in an enlarged manner. According to this, since the symbol is finally announced from the start of enlargement, it is possible to show the player what the final notification symbol is in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Re-lottery production 16)
141(A1) to 142(A5) and the pattern output in FIGS. 161(C1) to 162(C5) are executed using substantially the same image. Concretely, the same image is used for the pattern output by the "2" pattern and the effect image, and the pattern output is executed in such a manner that the background portion is different. According to this, it is possible to make the image of the pattern output substantially the same, so that it is possible to clearly show to the player that the game has not been promoted to the definite variable pattern. It should be noted that the image of the patterned portion including the background may be completely the same.

(Re-lottery production 17)
In the above-described pattern display effect, a series of effects are executed in which the pattern is displayed in an enlarged size and then displayed in the normal size at the center of the screen. According to this, it is possible to favorably show a series of design effects by enlarging and reducing the design.

(Re-lottery production 18)
In the above-described symbol presentation performance, common symbol presentation data may be used in the symbol presentation presentation data in the winning epilogue part and the symbol presentation presentation data in the re-lottery presentation. Then, a series of pattern presentation effects may be executed by combining common pattern presentation data and a plurality of decorative designs. According to this, it is possible to reduce the data volume while favorably displaying the design effect. It should be noted that substantially the same data may be used for the symbol appearance effect data in the winning epilogue part and the symbol appearance effect data in the re-lottery effect.

<Detailed description of production modes>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 165 to 191, a detailed description will be given of characteristic portions and modifications to which particular mention should be made with respect to the above-described presentation modes.

[Regarding inciting 12, 13, 15]
In FIG. 165, characteristic parts of the fanning part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of parts (b11) to (b13))
FIG. 165 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the portions (b11) to (b13) of the SP first half reach A described above. As shown in FIG. 165(b11), the relationship between Yume-chan and Baku-chu on the screen is such that, in the horizontal direction, Yume-chan is on the left and Baku-chu is on the right. In accordance with this character arrangement, the frame left lamp lights up in green corresponding to Mumu-chan, and the frame right lamp lights up in red corresponding to Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of (b11), Yume-chan's line "Wait~" is output as the dialogue sound, Yume-chan's footsteps "za-za-za" are output as physical sounds, and Baku-chu's footsteps as physical sounds are output. Tata-ta-tat” is output.

Also, as shown in (b11), the relationship between Mumu-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that Bakuchu is in front and Mumu-chan is in back in the front-rear direction. The positional relationship seen by the player is that Bakuchu is near and Mumu is far away. On the other hand, the volume relationship is as follows: Yume-chan's line sound of "Wait~"> Baku-chu's footsteps, "Tata-ta-tata">Mume-chan's footsteps, "Za-za-za-za". In this way, the volume data is set so that Mumu-chan's dialogue sounds are louder than the footstep sounds of Bakuchu who is closer.

In FIG. 165(b12), the relationship between Yume-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is the same as in the state of (b11) in both the left-right direction and the front-rear direction. In (b12), no dialogue sound is output, and Yume-chan's footsteps "za-za-za-za" as physical sounds and Baku-chu's footsteps as physical sounds "tata-tata-tata" are output. The relationship between the volumes is as follows: "Bakuchu's footsteps 'ta-ta-ta-ta' > Yume-chan's footsteps 'za-za-za'." In this way, when dialogue sound is not output, the volume data is set so that the footsteps of the closer Bakuchu are louder than the footsteps of Yume-chan, who is farther away, so as to match the context on the screen.

In FIG. 165 (b13), the relationship between Mumu-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that, in the horizontal direction, Mumu-chan is on the left and Bakuchu is on the right. In addition, in the state of (b13), Bakuchu's line "Catch me!" "Ta-ta-ta-ta" is output. Also, as shown in (b13), the relationship between Mumu-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that Mumu-chan is in front and Bakuchu is in the back. The positional relationship seen by the player is that Mumu-chan is nearby and Bakuchu is far away. On the other hand, the relationship of the volume is as follows: the sound of the blasting lines of "Tararumonka!" > Yume-chan's footsteps, ``Za-za-za'' > the blasting footsteps, ``Tata-tata-ta''. In this way, the volume data is set so that the farther Bakuchu's dialogue sounds are louder than the closer Yume-chan's footsteps.

(Provocation 12)
In the fanning part, SP reach BGM is output, and there is a scene where dialogue sound and physical sound (also referred to as action sound) overlap with each other. When the dialogue sound and the physical sound are output at the timing when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap each other, the dialogue sound is output with a louder volume than the physical sound when output from the speakers 8L and 8R. According to this, by outputting the physical sound as a part of the production, the reality of the production is brought out, and when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap, the dialogue sound is output loudly, so that the contents of the production are conveyed to the player. It can be easily transmitted. Therefore, as a result, it is possible to show the performance in the fanning part better.

(Provocation 13)
Here, a work process for actually creating various effects in the pachinko game machine 1 will be described. First, in the pachinko game machine 1, images for each effect corresponding to the variable time such as SP reach are created. In accordance with this video, special software is used to add production sounds such as BGM, physical sounds, onomatopoeia, sound effects, and dialogue sounds one by one. The finished image and sound are played, and the strength of the sound is added. In such a series of work processes, rather than outputting sound with reality while maintaining the actual sense of distance on the image, sound is output that ignores the actual sense of distance that is easily conveyed to the player by throwing away reality. Sound data is set as follows. As a result, a series of presentations can be shown favorably.

(Provocation 15)
In addition, when the dialog sound of a character whose sense of distance is far from the player overlaps with the physical sound of which the player has a close sense of distance, the sound data is set so that the dialog sound sounds louder than the physical sound. It is As a result, a sound is output that discards reality and ignores the actual sense of distance that is easily conveyed to the player, so that the content of the presentation can be easily conveyed to the player.

[Regarding inciting 14 and 16]
In FIGS. 166 and 167, characteristic parts of the fanning part are numbered and explained.

(Description of volume level)
FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining volume levels. As shown in FIG. 166(A), among the sounds output from the pachinko gaming machine 1, the relationship between the volume levels of dialogue sounds, physical sounds (footsteps), and SP reach BGM will be described. The level of the volume to be output has a relationship of dialogue sound>physical sound (footsteps)>SP reach BGM. Also, when these three sounds overlap, the method of outputting the sounds differs between the dialogue sounds with subtitles and the dialogue sounds without subtitles.

As shown in FIG. 166(B), in the case of speech sounds with subtitles, when speech sounds (with subtitles), physical sounds, and SP reach BGM are output at timings that overlap, the SP reach BGM volume It is controlled to reduce the level and output. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. It is controlled to output without changing any sound volume level while maintaining the relationship of physical sound (footsteps)>SP reach BGM.

(Provocation 14)
In this way, when the physical sound of the character and the dialogue sound are output together, the dialogue sound is adjusted and output so that it sounds louder than the physical sound. For example, when the physical sound and the dialogue sound are output together, as shown in FIG. 166(B), the SP reach BGM is adjusted to be smaller in accordance with the output period of the dialogue sound. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation while presenting reality.

(Provocation 16)
Also, as shown in FIGS. 166B and 166C, when there is a subtitle for the dialogue sound overlapping the physical sound and when there is no subtitle for the dialogue sound overlapping the physical sound, there is a subtitle for the dialogue sound. In the case, it is adjusted so that it sounds louder because the volume of the SP reach BGM is lowered. Dialogue sounds with subtitles are more relevant to SP reach content than dialogue sounds without subtitles. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation by outputting loudly the dialogue sound with subtitles related to the content of the SP reach.

(Description of volume level)
FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining volume levels. A method of effectively outputting the volume by a method different from that of FIG. 166 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 167 and FIG. 166, the relationship of the output sound volume level is the same: dialog sound>physical sound (footsteps)>SP reach BGM. However, as shown in FIG. 167(B), when the character's physical sound and dialogue sound are output together, the dialogue sound is adjusted to be louder than the physical sound.

(Provocation 16)
As shown in FIGS. 167(B) and 167(C), the case where the dialogue sound overlapping the physical sound has subtitles and the case where the dialogue sound overlapping the physical sound does not have subtitles are different. Only one side is adjusted to increase the volume. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation by outputting loudly the dialogue sound with subtitles related to the content of the SP reach.

[About Inciting 7 and 8]
In FIGS. 168 to 170, characteristic parts of the fanning part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of (r24) to (r27) parts)
FIG. 168 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r24) to (r27) portions of the final reach described above. As shown in (r24), when the AD character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange corresponding to AD. After that, as indicated by (r25), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange when the AD performs the action of jumping. At this time, "Ah!" is output as the dialogue sound of the AD, but the caption is not displayed. After that, as shown in (r25'), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times in the scene where the AD is removed from the screen.

After that, as shown in (r26), when the character of the maid A is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue corresponding to the maid A. After that, as shown in (r27), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue when the maid A performs the action of jumping. At this time, "Too!" is output as the speech sound of maid A, but no caption is displayed. After that, as shown in (r27'), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white when the maid A is released from the screen.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of (r28) to (r31) parts)
FIG. 169 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r28) to (r31) portions of the final reach described above. As shown in (r28), when the maid B character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in Hawaiian blue corresponding to the maid B. After that, as shown in (r29), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in Hawaiian blue when the maid B performs the action of jumping. At this time, as maid B's dialogue sound, the same dialogue as that of maid A is output, but the caption is not displayed. After that, as shown in (r29'), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white when the maid B is released from the screen.

After that, as shown in (r30), when Nana-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink corresponding to Nana-chan. After that, as shown in (r31), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink when Nana-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, "Teiya!" is output as Nana's dialogue sound, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r31'), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white when Nana-chan is released from the screen.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of (r32) to (r35) parts)
FIG. 170 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r32) to (r35) portions of the final reach described above. As shown in (r32), when Jam-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan. After that, as indicated by (r32), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple when Jam-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, Jam-chan's dialogue sound "Torya!" is output, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r32'), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in the scene where Jam-chan is released from the screen.

After that, as shown in (r34), when the character of Yume-chan is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan. After that, as indicated by (r35), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green when Yume-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, Yume-chan's dialogue sound "Oyaa!" is output, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r35'), the game effect lamp 9 blinks white three times in the scene where Mumu-chan is released from the screen.

Here, in scenes such as r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35, the output speech is a one-word speech in which the player is enthusiastic. In these specific scenes, scene switching is faster than other scenes. Also, in these particular scenes, the subtitles are less directly related to the storyline than other subtitled scenes. For these reasons, subtitles corresponding to dialogue are not displayed.

(Instigation 7)
As shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, there are scenes in which the character utters lines in the introductory part but no subtitles are added (for example, scenes of r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35). However, even in such a specific scene, the brightness data of the game effect lamp 9 (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can emphasize the presentation. As a result, an effect corresponding to the character can be suitably executed, and the fanning part can be suitably shown to the player.

(Provocation 8)
Also, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, in scenes where characters appear (for example, r24, r26, r28, r30, r32, and r34), colors other than the colors corresponding to the corresponding characters in the preceding scene are displayed. , the control for turning on the game effect lamp 9 is performed. Specifically, before the scene (r24), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in yellow (r22) or red (r23), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange corresponding to the AD character. It becomes a lit scenario. Also, before the scene (r26), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in orange (r25) or white (r25'), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue corresponding to the character of Maid A. scenario. Also, before the scene (r28), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in blue (r27) or white (r27'), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in Hawaiian blue corresponding to the character of Maid B. It becomes a lit scenario. Also, before the scene (r30), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in Hawaiian blue (r29) or white (r29'), the game effect lamp 9 is displayed in pink corresponding to Nana's character. becomes a scenario that lights up. Also, before the scene (r32), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in pink (r31) or white (r31'), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character. scenario. Also, before the scene of (r34), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple of (r33) or white of (r33'), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. becomes. In this way, before the character appears, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a color different from the color corresponding to the character, after which the game effect lamp 9 is lit in the color corresponding to the character. control is performed. Therefore, it is possible to express in the form of lamps that the displayed character changes and that the player can easily understand which character is the character that has changed, and it is possible to make a suitable fanning part.

[About start 1 to 4]
Characteristic portions of FIGS. 171 and 172 are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of role product actions in (b18) to (i1))
FIG. 171 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role product motions in (b18) to (i1). In the scene shown in (b18) before the winner/failure decision is made, the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting mode. After that, when developing into the SP latter half reach, the movable body 32 as an accessory operates. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the character falls from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen while tilting at an angle. As shown in (h1), a radial effect image is displayed for the character object on the screen when the character object starts falling. Due to the effect image, the character of Yume-chan and the reduced “2” decoration pattern cannot be visually recognized. In addition, in the state of (h1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red as the accessory falls.

After that, in the state of (h2), the role is further extended so that the character "P" of the characters of the role overlaps with the place where the reduced "2" decoration pattern was displayed. Fall. In the state of (h2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Also, a role object corresponding sound corresponding to the falling of the role object is output as a sound effect. After that, in the state of (h3), the position of the accessory is maintained at the falling position in the state of (h2). In the state of (h3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

After that, as shown in (h4), the accessory starts to rise (the accessory moves from the advanced position to the retracted position). In the state of (h4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in yellow. When changing from the (h3) state to the (h4) retracting state, the brightness data table output from the brightness data table of the character action part to the brightness data table of the reach A (flashing part) in the second half of the SP changes. . After that, in the state of (h5), the role further rises. In the state of (h5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in yellow.

FIG. 172 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role product motions in (b18) to (i1). After (h5), in the state of (h6), the role further rises. In the state of (h6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in yellow. After that, as shown in (h7), when the character further rises, the effect image displayed corresponding to the character becomes faint. As the effect image becomes lighter (transmittance increases), the background corresponding to reach A in the latter half of the SP begins to be slightly visible. In the state of (h7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. In addition, a sound corresponding to the second half of the SP, which is BGM corresponding to the second half of the SP, is output as a sound effect. Note that sound effects related to the title in the second half of the SP may be output together with the BGM. After that, in the state of (h8), the character is further increased from the state of (h7). In the state of (h8), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (h7), so the background display is easier to see. In the state of (h8), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, in the state of (h9), the role further rises. In the state of (h9), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (h8), so the background display is easier to see. In the state of (h9), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, in the state of (h10), the role further rises. In the state of (h10), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (h9), so the background display is easier to see. In the state of (h10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, in the state of (i1), the effect image disappears and the title corresponding to the start scene of reach A in the second half of the SP is clearly displayed. In the state of (i1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

(Start 1)
As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the effect is switched from the SP first half reach A effect to the SP second half reach A effect by the action of the character. In addition, an effect image corresponding to the character object motion is displayed according to the motion of the character object falling. After that, the display is gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the movement of the character object to the screen corresponding to reach A in the latter half of the SP while the character object is rising. In addition, while the role product is rising, the brightness data table of the role product action part (child table WD8 shown in FIG. 202 to be described later) is changed to the brightness data table of SP latter half reach A (child table WD9 shown in FIGS. 204 and 205 to be described later). ) is switched to the luminance data table. Also, a sound corresponding to the latter half of the SP (for example, BGM in the latter half of the SP) is output while the character is rising. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object is displayed on the premise that the character object is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character object returns to the initial position, the display will not be aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the accessory completes the movement of returning to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the brightness data table of the sound effect and the game effect lamp 9 is switched to one corresponding to the latter half of the SP while the accessory is returning to the initial position, the rousing part of the latter half of the SP can be preferably displayed.

(Start 2)
As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the effect is switched from the SP first half reach A effect to the SP second half reach A effect by the action of the character. Also, before the action of the role object, the "2" pattern is reduced and displayed at the left and right lower corners of the screen. When the role object moves, the role object falls so that the character "P" among the characters of the role object is positioned so that it overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern "2" was displayed. do. In addition, an effect image corresponding to the action of dropping the character is displayed in a prioritized layer in front of the "2" symbol displayed in reduced size. Then, after the character rises from the falling position and the "2" pattern does not overlap with the character, the effect image gradually fades, and the background and "2" pattern corresponding to the second half of the SP reach A displayed faintly. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display from being not aesthetically pleasing due to the reduced decorative pattern being displayed during the action of the accessory. Also, the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object is displayed on the premise that the character object is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character object returns to the initial position, the display will not be aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the accessory completes the movement of returning to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the reduced decorative pattern is displayed in the middle of the movement of the character, it is possible to suitably switch the effects according to the movement of the character.

(Start 3)
As shown in FIG. 171, the character moves and displays an effect image before reaching the lowest point of the fall. According to this, it is possible to quickly hide the reduced decorative pattern, and it is possible to make a suitable changeover of the presentation including the character.

(Start 4)
It should be noted that an image related to the character object may be displayed when switching from the effect image to the image of the production in the second half. Specifically, in the scenes corresponding to (h7) to (h10) in FIG. 172, when the characters are raised, the characters "POWERFUL II" and the images of the main characters Yume-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan are displayed. may be displayed. According to this, it is possible to show a suitable switching of the performance with the use of the character by providing the interlocking property when the performance is switched.

[About epilogues 7, 8, 10 to 14, 20]
In FIGS. 173 and 174, characteristic parts in the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of role product actions in (r54) to (s4))
FIG. 173 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role product motions in (r54) to (s4). In the scene (r54) before the success/failure determination, a sound corresponding to the prompting of the operation is output, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. At this time, an operation image corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed on the screen together with the Bakuchu character. Further, below the operation image, a time gauge is displayed as an operation prompting display for prompting the operation. When the player performs an action of pulling the stick controller 31A within a predetermined period of time, or when the predetermined period of time elapses, the movable body 32 as the accessory moves. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the character falls from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen while tilting at an angle. Here, the time during which the character object falls in the success/fail notification scene is longer than the time during which the character object falls in the scene that develops in the second half of the SP.

As shown in (s1), a radial effect image is displayed for the character object on the screen when the character object starts falling. This effect image has a more flashy production mode than the effect image when developing into the second half of the SP reach. Specifically, the effect image in the success/fail notification scene such as (s1) is rainbow colored. Note that the effect image in the scene that develops in the second half of the SP is blue or red. In addition, due to the effect image, the Bakuchu character and the reduced “2” decorative pattern cannot be visually recognized. In addition, in the state of (s1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color in accordance with the falling of the accessory.

After that, in the state of (s2), the character object is dropped so that the character "P" of the characters of the character object is positioned so that it overlaps with the place where the reduced decoration pattern "2" was displayed. do. In the state of (s2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color. After that, in the state of (s3), the position of the role object is maintained at the falling position in the state of (s2). In the state of (s3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color.

After that, as shown in (s3-2), the accessory starts to rise (the accessory moves from the advanced position to the retracted position). In the state of (s3-2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Luminance output from the brightness data table for the performance of the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table for the winning epilogue of the winning epilogue part when the state (s3) changes to the retracting state (s3-2) Data table changes. After that, in the state of (s3-3), the role further rises. In the state of (s3-3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

FIG. 174 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role product motions in (r54) to (s4). After (s3-3), in the state of (s3-4), the character further rises. In the state of (s3-4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (s3-5), when the character further rises, the effect image displayed corresponding to the character becomes faint. By thinning the effect image (increasing the transmittance), the background corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach begins to be slightly visible. In the state of (s3-5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Also, a sound corresponding to the hit epilogue part, which is BGM corresponding to the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach, is output as a sound effect. After that, in the state of (s3-6), the role is further increased from the state of (s3-5). In the state of (s3-6), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (s3-5), so the background display is easier to see. In the state of (s3-6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

After that, in the state of (s3-7), the role further rises. In the state of (s3-7), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (s3-6), so the background display is easier to see. In the state of (s3-7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, in the state of (s3-8), the role further rises. In the state of (s3-8), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (s3-7), so the background display is easier to see. In the state of (s3-8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, in the state of (s4), a scene in which Mumu-chan caught Bakuchu is displayed. At this time, the sound at the time when the production is successful is output as a sound effect. In addition, subtitles are displayed along with Bakuchu's line "Uu, I got caught". In the state of (s4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

(Epilogue 7)
As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, an effect image corresponding to the motion of the character object is displayed according to the motion of the character object falling. After that, the accessory moves to the initial position according to a predetermined evacuation pattern. While the character is rising, the display is gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the movement of the character to the screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object is displayed on the premise that the character object is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character object returns to the initial position, the display will not be aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the accessory completes the movement to return to the initial position, it is possible to prevent spoiling the aesthetic appearance of the display.

(Epilogue 8)
On the premise that the accessory returns to its initial position, the timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue is the rising timing related to the timing of the start of the returning motion. According to this, since the display is switched to the display corresponding to the epilogue at the timing related to the start of the return motion, the display of the effect image corresponding to the character product motion ends before the character product returns to the initial position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect image from being displayed when the accessory returns to the initial position, and the aesthetic appearance of the production is not spoiled. The timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue may be the same timing as the timing when the accessory starts rising. Also, the accessory may perform a rotating motion or a moving motion at the drop position.

(Epilogue 10)
BGM corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue when the character returns to its initial position. According to this, by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by the BGM, the epilogue part can be suitably started.

(Epilogue 11)
A sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the start of display corresponding to the epilogue when the character returns to the initial position. According to this, by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by the sound effect, the epilogue part can be preferably started.

(Epilogue 12)
BGM and sound effects corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the start of display corresponding to the epilogue when the character returns to its initial position. According to this, the epilogue part can be preferably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by BGM and sound effects.

(Epilogue 13)
In the situation where the character returns to the initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, the dialogue sound is not output, and the epilogue display after the character returns to the initial position outputs the dialogue sound and subtitles. should be displayed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle from being displayed at a timing when the subtitle is difficult to see, and the epilogue part can be preferably executed.

(Epilogue 14)
At the timing when the character returns to the initial position, it is sufficient to output the dialogue sound and display the subtitles in the epilogue display. According to this, the lines can be recognized firmly, and the epilogue part can be suitably executed.

(Epilogue 20)
As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the mode of presentation is switched to the hit epilogue part by moving the character from the scene before the win/fail decision in the fanning part. In addition, an effect image corresponding to the character object motion is displayed according to the motion of the character object falling. After that, the display is gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the movement of the character object to the screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach while the character object is rising. In addition, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the action of the role product to the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part while the role product is rising. In addition, a sound corresponding to the hit epilogue part is output while the character is ascending. In addition, during the background display corresponding to the hit epilogue part that is displayed before the character changes to the initial position from (s3-5) to (s3-8), the dialog sound is not output. . After that, in the state (s4) in which movement of the character to the initial position is completed and display of the effect image is finished, dialogue sounds are output and subtitles are displayed. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object is displayed on the premise that the character object is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character object returns to the initial position, the display will not be aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the hit epilogue part before the character object completes the movement to return to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the winning epilogue part in the middle of the ascending of the character, the winning epilogue part can be preferably displayed. Furthermore, by displaying the subtitles after completing the operation of returning to the initial position, the winning epilogue part can be preferably displayed.

[About Epilogues 2, 3, and 5]
In FIG. 175, characteristic parts in the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(Relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines)
FIG. 175 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of captions and the number of lines. FIG. 175 shows the number of lines of the character being produced and the number of captions corresponding to the lines for each type of SP reach and the type of epilogue corresponding to each SP reach. For example, in the case of SP first half reach A, the number of captions is 5 for the number of lines of 8. Also, in the case of the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the number of captions is one for the number of dialogues. In the case of the missing epilogue part in the first half of the SP Reach A, there are no lines, so there are no subtitles.

Also, in the case of SP first half reach B, the number of subtitles is three for the number of lines of five. Also, in the case of the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the number of captions is three for the number of lines. In the case of the missing epilogue part in the first half of SP Reach B, there are no lines, so there are no subtitles. Also, in the case of SP latter half reach A, the number of captions is 14 for the number of lines of 16. Also, in the case of the hit epilogue part in the latter half of the SP reach A, the number of captions is one for the number of lines. In the case of the missing epilogue part of SP latter half reach A, the number of subtitles is one for the number of lines.

Also, in the case of SP latter half reach B, the number of captions is seven for nine lines. Also, in the case of the hit epilogue part in the SP latter half reach B, the number of subtitles is three for the number of lines. In the case of the missing epilogue part of SP latter half reach B, the number of subtitles is one for the number of lines. Also, in the case of the SP final reach, the number of subtitles is 19 for the number of lines of 27. Also, in the case of the epilogue part for the SP final reach, the number of subtitles is two for the number of dialogues. In the case of the missing epilogue part of the SP final reach, the number of subtitles is one for the number of lines.

(Epilogue 2)
As shown in FIG. 175, the ratio of displaying captions to characters' dialogues in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of displaying captions to characters during SP reach, which is the inciting part. According to this, by clearly displaying the subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. In addition, since there are more screen changes in the introductory part than in the epilogue part, even if subtitles are displayed, the display time will be shortened so that the display of auxiliary subtitles will not interfere with the production. , it is possible to give priority to conveying effects by switching images. Thereby, it is possible to execute a suitable effect in the fanning part.

(Epilogue 3)
As shown in FIG. 175, in the epilogue part, subtitles are always displayed for dialogue. According to this, it is possible to emphasize the feeling of blessing by clearly showing what the character is saying in the hit epilogue part.

(Epilogue 5)
As shown in FIG. 175, there are a plurality of types of SP reach, which is a fanning part, and each of them has a different presentation development and a different number of lines. However, in any SP reach, the ratio of displaying subtitles for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of displaying subtitles for characters during SP reach. According to this, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is saying by clearly displaying the subtitles in the epilogue part regardless of which SP reach is executed. Also, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. In addition, since there are more screen changes in the fanning part than in the epilogue part, it is possible to convey the effect by switching images first, so that the effect is not disturbed by the auxiliary subtitle display. . Thereby, it is possible to execute a suitable effect in the fanning part.

[Regarding re-lottery effects 1, 4, 5, 7-18]
In FIGS. 176 and 177, characteristic parts of the re-lottery part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanation of the re-lottery part)
FIG. 176 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (A1) to (A23) in the re-lottery part. FIG. 177 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the parts (A24) to (A46) in the re-lottery part.

When the big hit display result is derived, the symbols are enlarged and displayed as shown in (A1) and (A2), and then the symbols are reduced as shown in (A3) and (A4). After that, as shown in (A5), the pattern becomes the normal size. Then, as shown in (A6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect, and the re-lottery effect starts. Here, from the state (A5) to the state (A6), the period during which the pattern is shaking is omitted. Specifically, when the pattern is the normal size, the pattern is shaking. Then, after it becomes the normal size, the re-lottery part of the pattern swing will continue. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is lit at a timing related to the completion of the pattern display (including, for example, the timing immediately before the size becomes normal, the timing after the size becomes normal, and the timing at which the pattern swing starts). It switches from white blinking to rainbow colored smooth lighting. As a result, it is possible to perform smooth pattern display from pattern display to re-lottery performance, smooth transition to shaking period, and blessing by pattern matching by screen and lamp light emission.

After that, as shown in (A7) and (A8), it becomes a swinging period in which the pattern swings up and down. After that, as shown in (A9) and (A10), the central "2" pattern is once reduced. After that, all of the ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', ``6'', ``7'', and ``1'' used as decorative patterns are displayed from (A11) to (A23). A fast variation is performed at . After that, again, "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" used as decorative patterns are displayed from (A10') to (A23'). Fast variation is performed in a manner that

After that, as shown in (A24), after two cycles of all decorations, the initially displayed "2" pattern and the button image are faintly displayed. After that, from (A25) to (A46), the decoration pattern fluctuates at high speed to "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1", and the passage of time The time gauge displayed under the button image decreases accordingly. The time gauge is a display showing the effective period of button operation. If the push button 31B is operated within the operation effective period, or if the push button 31B is not operated within the operation effective period and the effective period of the button operation ends, odd numbers as shown in FIGS. Symbols or even-numbered symbols are derived and displayed, and the game shifts to a big win.

(Re-lottery production 1)
As shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the "2" symbol is used for the re-lottery. The performance begins. When the re-extraction effect is started, the "2" pattern is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" pattern. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feed performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started using the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed, and when the re-lottery performance is started, the symbol feed performance is executed using the temporarily stopped-displayed symbols. , the player can easily understand from which decorative pattern the re-lottery has started. As a result, it is possible to show the flow of a series of performances well.

(Re-lottery production 4)
At the start of the pattern feed effect in the re-lottery effect, the variation starts from the state where the decoration pattern that was displayed from the hit epilogue part is reduced. According to this, it is possible to show the flow of a series of presentations well without executing the process of changing to a different decoration pattern.

(Re-lottery production 5)
In the pattern feed effect, the reduced pattern starts to change, and the size of the pattern during the change is a uniform reduced size. According to this, it is possible to smoothen the appearance of the variation at the time of the pattern feeding effect, and to show the flow of the series of effects well.

(Re-lottery production 7)
As shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the "2" symbol is used for the re-lottery. The performance begins. When the re-extraction effect is started, the "2" pattern is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" pattern. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feed performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. And, during the re-lottery effect, "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1" and all the decorative patterns are sent in order, and then again "2" ” A symbol feed effect in which symbols are displayed is executed. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started by using the decoration patterns temporarily stopped and displayed, and the decoration patterns initially temporarily stopped and displayed are displayed again after a plurality of kinds of decoration patterns are varied. According to this, the flow of a series of presentations can be shown well by the design feeding presentation in which the final display result is not immediately displayed and all the decorative designs are shown.

(Re-lottery production 8)
In the pattern sending effect in the re-lottery effect, all the decorative patterns such as ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', ``6'', ``7'', and ``1'' are sent in order, and again, ``2''. , '3', '4', '5', '6', '7', '1', and all the decoration patterns are sent in order. In this way, since the numbers of the decoration patterns are sent in order, it is possible to clearly show the flow of the series of presentations.

(Re-lottery production 9)
In the pattern feed effect in the re-lottery effect, all the patterns are displayed with the degree of transparency of the pattern when temporarily stopped, and the degree of transparency is increased during fluctuation. Specifically, "2" pattern with 0% transparency, "2" pattern with 50% transparency, "3" pattern with 0% transparency, "3" pattern with 50% transparency, transparent Patterns are switched such as a "4" pattern with a degree of 0% and a "4" pattern with a transparency of 50%. According to this, all the patterns can be clearly displayed in a mode with low transparency during the pattern feed effect, so that it is possible to grasp what kind of pattern is being sent.

(Re-lottery production 10)
In the pattern sending effect in the re-lottery effect, all the decorative patterns such as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1" are sent in order, but each pattern is The times displayed are the same. According to this, all patterns can be displayed for a certain period of time, and the flow of a series of performances can be shown well.

(Re-lottery production 11)
During the pattern feed effect, a promotion display formed from the button image and the time gauge is displayed. The position at which the promotion display is displayed is a position that does not overlap with the position at which the variation of the decorative pattern during the pattern feeding effect is displayed. In this way, since the promotion display does not overlap with the decorative symbols during the symbol feeding effect, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the symbol feeding. It should be noted that a part of the promotion display may be partially overlapped with the decorative pattern during the pattern feed effect.

(Re-lottery production 12)
As shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the prompting display is started at (A24) and (A25) after repeating twice the variation of displaying all the decoration symbols during the symbol feed effect. Since the promotion image is not displayed until the predetermined symbol feeding pattern is repeated twice in this manner, the player can be made to firmly recognize the symbol feeding effect.

(Re-lottery production 13)
The symbol at the start of the re-lottery effect may be other than the 2 symbols. Even in such a case, the timing at which the button image as the action prompting display is displayed is constant. For example, in the case of 2 symbols, the timing at which the action prompting display was displayed was the timing at which 2 symbols were displayed again. Similarly, in the case of 5 symbols, the timing at which the action prompting display is displayed may be the timing at which 5 symbols are displayed again. That is, the number of symbols to be sent is the same regardless of which symbol the re-lottery effect is started. According to this, since control can be made constant, the processing load can be reduced.

(Re-lottery production 14)
In the lottery effect, there is a pattern that displays an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns) after displaying an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns), and a pattern that displays an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns) and then displays an odd numbered pattern (for example, 3 patterns). was established. In addition to this, a pattern may be provided in which odd numbered symbols (eg, 7 symbols) are displayed after displaying the odd numbered symbols (eg, 7 symbols). In the effect of sending patterns from odd-numbered patterns to odd-numbered patterns, all the same odd-numbered patterns should be sent at the time of pattern sending. However, regardless of the pattern, the length of the performance during the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery performance may be designed to be the same. According to this, a suitable re-lottery effect can be achieved in any pattern without increasing the data capacity.

(Re-lottery production 15)
In the lottery effect, a pattern to display an even numbered pattern (for example 2 patterns) after displaying an even numbered pattern (for example 2 patterns), a pattern to display an even numbered pattern (for example 2 patterns) and then an odd numbered pattern (for example 3 patterns), Common data is used in any of the patterns in which odd numbered symbols (eg, 7 symbols) are displayed and then odd numbered symbols (eg, 7 symbols) are displayed. In other words, the performance data is the same, and the design is such that the data relating to the decorative design is changed according to the pattern. According to this, since it is not necessary to provide a dedicated pattern, the amount of data can be reduced.

[About Inciting 21-27]
In FIGS. 178 to 181, characteristic parts of the fanning part are numbered and explained.

(fade effect)
FIG. 178 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the parts (b4) to (b6) in the fanning part and a comparison diagram during the jackpot round. In the teasing part, a fade effect is added to the subtitles for the lines. The fade effect is an effect composed of a fade-in in which the display gradually becomes clearer and a fade-out in which the display gradually disappears. In FIG. 178(A), part of the production with a fade effect in SP first half reach A, which is a fanning part, will be described.

In the state of (b4), a screen is displayed in which Mumu-chan and Bakuchu face each other. After that, as shown in (b4'), the caption "I found it" corresponding to Yume-chan's line is displayed with a transmittance of 70%. After that, as shown in (b5), the caption "I found it" corresponding to Yume-chan's lines is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. In this way, a fade-in effect is added when subtitles corresponding to dialogue are displayed. In the state (b4'), the dialogue sound "I found it" is not output, and the dialogue sound is output when the caption transparency is 0% as in the state (b5). .

After that, as shown in (b5'), a layer under the subtitle with a transparency of 0% for "I found it" corresponding to Bakuchu's dialogue is added to the layer below the subtitle with a transparency of "I found it" corresponding to Bakuchu's dialogue. Subtitles with a rate of 70% are displayed with a fade-in effect. After that, as shown in (b5''), the caption "I found it" and the caption "I found it" are both displayed with a transmittance of 40%. After that, as shown in (b6), the caption "Found" corresponding to Bakuchu's lines is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. In this way, the subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Yume-chan's line gradually fades out from (b5') to (b6). On the other hand, the subtitle of "Found" corresponding to Bakuchu's lines gradually fades in from (b5') to (b6). In states (b5′) and (b5″), the dialogue sound “found” is not output. is being output.

As shown in FIG. 178(B), during the jackpot round, an effect is performed in which the character sings along with the music. For example, in FIG. 178(B), subtitles (lyrics) are displayed along with the progress of the song sung by Nana-chan. Immediately after that, the subtitles (lyrics) are displayed according to the progress of the song, saying, "Grab it with this small hand." When such subtitles (lyrics) during the jackpot round are displayed continuously, the fade effect is not applied. This is because when the music is playing, the progress of the music can be understood by the rhythm, so even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without adding a fade effect, the switching timing is easy to understand.

(Provocation 21)
In the fanning part, as shown in FIG. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed in response to the characters' lines. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period during which the display period of the first subtitle displayed first overlaps the display period of the second subtitle displayed next. A fade effect is applied when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap each other. The fade effect causes the characters being displayed to change with different transparency. According to this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap each other, the change of the subtitles becomes easy to understand due to the fading effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be made easy to understand.

(Provocation 22)
As shown in FIG. 178(A), in a scene where characters face each other, a first subtitle corresponding to the dialogue of one character is displayed, followed by a second subtitle corresponding to the dialogue of another character. There is something. In this case, the second caption is displayed with a transmittance of 70% so as to overlap the portion where the first caption is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. After that, the first caption fades out, and the second caption fades in, resulting in display with a transmittance of 0%. According to this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap each other, it is easy to understand the switching of the subtitles due to the fading effect.

(Modified example of subtitle display)
When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed at the same timing, the fade effect may be applied to either one of the two subtitles instead of applying the fade effect to both of the two subtitles. . Specifically, a pattern in which no fade effect is applied to the first subtitle display and a fade effect is applied to the second subtitle display, a fade effect is applied to the first subtitle display, and a fade effect is applied to the second subtitle display. A pattern without . Either of the patterns may be applied by replacing the above-described pattern of adding a fade effect to the first caption display and adding a fade effect to the second caption display. Also, when adding a fade effect, the second subtitle display may be superimposed on the first subtitle display, or the second subtitle display may be superimposed under the first subtitle display.

In addition, the subtitles for the lines of the first character and the second character have been described for the case where the subtitles are displayed at the same timing. However, when the same character continuously utters lines, the subtitle display for the second line may overlap after the subtitle display for the first line. In such a case, a fade effect may be added to the caption display.

(Provocation 24)
As shown in FIG. 178(B), during the jackpot round, an effect is performed in which the character sings along with the music. Subtitles (lyrics) are displayed as the song progresses. However, during the jackpot round, even if subtitles (lyrics) are displayed continuously, the fade effect is not applied. This is because when the music is playing, the progress of the music can be understood by the rhythm, so even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without adding a fade effect, the switching timing is easy to understand. Also, since the music during the jackpot round is representative music of the contents installed in the pachinko game machine 1, the lyrics to be displayed next are easy for the player to understand without adding a fade effect. According to this, it is possible to omit the operation of applying the fade effect during the big win round, and the series of performances can be shown well.

(Regarding the relationship between subtitle transparency and sound output)
FIG. 179 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the transmittance of subtitles for dialogue and the output of sound. FIG. 179 shows the situation when Mumu-chan's line "I found it" and Bakuchu's line "I found it" in FIG. 178(A) are uttered. The horizontal axis of the graph in FIG. 179 indicates the number of frames. The caption "I found it" is displayed with a transmittance of 70% after one frame from the transmittance of 100%. Further, one frame later, the image is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. As a result, the caption "I found it" is displayed with a fade-in effect over a period of two frames. During this period, the sound of "I found it" is not output.

Thereafter, during the period in which the dialogue sound of "I found it" is output, the caption "I found it" is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. Then, during a period T1, which is a silent period of three frames after the output of the dialogue sound of "I found it", the caption "I found it" is continuously displayed with a transmittance of 0% for two frames. . Thereafter, the caption "I found it" is displayed with a transmittance of 0% to 100% for the remaining one frame period of T1. As a result, the caption "I found it" is displayed with a fade-out effect over a period of one frame.

Also, during the period of T1, the dialog sound of "found" is not output either, but the subtitle of "found" is faded in from one frame after the start of the period of T1. Is displayed. Specifically, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a transmittance of 70% after one frame from the transmittance of 100%. Further, one frame later, the image is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. As a result, the caption "Found" is displayed with a fade-in effect over a period of two frames.

After that, during the period in which the dialogue sound of "found" is output, the subtitle of "found" is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. Then, during a period T2, which is a three-frame silence period after the output of the dialogue sound "found", the caption "found" continues to be displayed with a transmittance of 0% for two frames. After that, the caption "Found" is displayed with a transmittance of 0% to 100% for the remaining one frame period of T2. As a result, the caption "Found" is displayed with a fade-out effect over a period of one frame.

As shown in FIG. 179, the first subtitle of "found" corresponding to the character of Yume-chan and the second subtitle of "found" corresponding to the character of Bakuchu have the same fade-in and fade-out. effect is applied. Also, the fade-in is performed over a period of two frames, whereas the fade-out is performed over a period of one frame.

(Provocation 23)
As shown in FIG. 179, the output timing of the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle of "Found" is such that the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap each other, and is output during the period in which the fade effect is applied. not. Then, the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is output when the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%. According to this, it is easy to understand the switching of subtitles due to the fade effect, and since the dialog sound is output after the second subtitle is displayed, it is possible to easily comprehend the contents of the presentation by sight and hearing.

(Comparison of subtitles between the provocation part and the epilogue part)
FIG. 180 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (b4) to (b6) and a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (o3) to (o5). FIG. 180(A) is a detailed explanatory diagram of the parts (b4) to (b6) in the fanning part. Also, FIG. 180(B) is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (o3) to (o5) portions. FIGS. 180(A) and 180(B) are common in that subtitles are continuously displayed for lines spoken by two characters. However, between FIG. 180(A) and FIG. 180(B), the period from when the first subtitle is displayed to when the second subtitle is displayed is different.

As shown in FIG. 180(A), in parts (b4) to (b7), in (b4), Mumu-chan and Bakuchu face each other. After that, in (b5), the first subtitle corresponding to Yume-chan's line "I found it" is displayed. After that, in (b6), a second subtitle corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Found" is displayed. After that, in (b6'), Mumu-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. After that, subtitles corresponding to Yume-chan's line "I'll catch you!" are displayed. The time t1 from the start of (b4) to the end of (b6) is about 3 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 180(B), in the portion (o3) to (o5), a shop is displayed whose signboard is the crab killed by Jam and Nana in (o3). A first subtitle corresponding to "Signboard" is displayed. After that, from (o3') to (o3''), the background of the shop with a signboard of a crab without subtitles is displayed. After that, at (o4), a second subtitle corresponding to Nana's line "Work hard" is displayed. After that, the background of the shop with the crab as its signboard becomes a still image. The time t1 from the start of (o3) to the end of (o5) is approximately 10 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 180(A) and (B), in the introductory part and the epilogue part, subtitles corresponding to the lines are displayed multiple times in one scene (period from 0 to t1 or period from 0 to t2). Sometimes. When subtitles are displayed multiple times, if there is enough time, it may be possible to make it easier to understand the switching of subtitle display by erasing the once displayed subtitle display. However, when there is no margin in the time scale, such as the period from 0 to t1, it is difficult to temporarily erase the caption display. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, by adding a fade effect to the caption display, it is possible to make the switching of captions easier to understand.

Here, in the pachinko game machine 1, an image is first created, and then sounds such as lines are added. Subtitles corresponding to each line are then added. If, for example, the period from 0 to t1, in which the time scale is not large enough, it would be troublesome to recreate the video by lengthening the period for temporarily erasing the caption display. Therefore, by adding a fade effect, it is possible to make it easier to understand the switching of subtitles without recreating the video. In addition, even if there is a margin in the time scale such as the epilogue part when the shop with the crab signboard is displayed, by uniformly applying the fade effect, the overall work load is reduced, and when switching the subtitles It is possible to prevent discomfort from occurring.

(Provocation 26)
As shown in FIG. 180, a fade effect is added to the caption display even in a predetermined scene in portions (o3) to (o5) where the first caption and the second caption do not overlap. As for the fade effect, at least one of fade-in and fade-out effects may be applied. In the subtitle display created after the video is created, it is troublesome to add a fade effect depending on whether the subtitle display is covered or not. Therefore, by uniformly adding a fade effect to the caption display, it is possible to prevent an increase in work load.

(Provocation 25)
Here, although not shown, the subtitle display timing may overlap even in the epilogue part. However, as shown in FIG. 180, in the epilogue part, there are many scenes in which the period from caption display to caption display is longer than in the introductory part. This is because the provocation part progresses quickly, and the epilogue part progresses less quickly than the provocation part. As a result, the introductory part is displayed more frequently than the epilogue part at the timing when the subtitle display overlaps. In such a case, by effectively adding a fade effect to the caption display, it is possible to avoid giving a sense of discomfort when switching the caption.

[About Inciting 27]
In FIG. 181, characteristic parts in the fanning part are numbered and explained.

(Provocation 27)
FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of caption display. For example, as shown in Comparative Example 1 of FIG. 181(A), subtitles for similar lines such as "I found it" and "I found it" may be displayed continuously. In such a case, if the subtitle display is switched without adding any fade effect and without a blank period, it becomes difficult to understand the switching of the subtitle display. Also, regarding subtitle display for long lines and subtitle display for fast-progressing lines, there is a possibility that a sense of incongruity may occur if subtitles are switched without providing a blank period. In such a case, the sense of incompatibility can be eliminated by adding a fade effect to the caption display. Further, as shown in Comparative Example 2 in FIG. 181(B), it is conceivable to superimpose "Found" on the subtitle display of "Found" and then display "Found". In such a case, the caption display becomes difficult to see without the fade effect. Further, as shown in Comparative Example 3 of FIG. 181(C), it is conceivable to display the subtitle display of "I found it" and the subtitle display of "I found it" in two stages above and below. In such a case, the subtitle display reduces the display area for the effect, which hinders the effect in areas other than the subtitle display area. On the other hand, such a problem can be solved by adding a fade effect to the caption display as in the present embodiment.

[About Epilogue 23]
In FIG. 182, characteristic parts in the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

FIG. 182 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (B4) to (B11). Referring to FIG. 182, the correspondence relationship between the effects using decorative patterns and small patterns on the screen and the effects using the game effect lamp 9 will be described. As shown in (B4), in the re-lottery pattern rendering effect, the enlarged "3" symbol is reduced. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Then, as shown in (B5), the "3" pattern is displayed in normal size. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color. Next, as shown in (B6), the "3" pattern is displayed with a slight up-and-down motion. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color.

Next, as shown in (B7), the screen changes from the background for the re-lottery to the normal background, and in this normal background, the "3" pattern continues to be displayed slightly shaking up and down. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color. After that, as shown in (B8), the decoration design and the small design are determined and stopped based on the reception of the design determination command. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color. As shown in (B9), the pattern fixing period continues for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 s), and the same display as in (B8) is maintained on the screen. At this time, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained to flash in rainbow colors.

Thereafter, based on the reception of the fanfare command, after about 10 msec, the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is switched to correspond to the fanfare. Also, based on the reception of the fanfare command, after about 33 msec, the screen is switched to display "FEVER". Specifically, as shown in (D1), the screen maintains the state of (B9) during the fanfare period after the fanfare command is received. On the other hand, the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is switched to support fanfare earlier than the mode of the screen. The state of the game effect lamp 9 in (D1) is off. Next, as shown in (D2), after the mode of the game effect lamp 9, the screen is switched to a screen on which the characters "FEVER" indicating the fanfare mode and Yume-chan are displayed. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is maintained in a lighting mode corresponding to the fanfare.

[About Epilogue 28-31]
In FIG. 183, characteristic parts in the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

FIG. 183 is a diagram for explaining a modification of designing. In a modified example, the pattern output may be executed in the order of (Y1) to (Y7). Specifically, as shown in (Y1), the decorative patterns (reduced patterns) reduced in the scene of catching Bakuchu are arranged in the state of "222" at the upper left of the screen. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is rainbow lighting (smooth). Then, as shown in (Y2), the screen becomes a still image and the reduced pattern slightly shakes up and down. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is rainbow lighting (smooth).

Then, as shown in (Y3), the reduced decoration pattern on the upper left of the screen is once erased. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is rainbow lighting (smooth). Next, as shown in (Y4), the decoration of "222" that has been erased from the center of the screen is enlarged in design and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is white flashing. Next, as shown in (Y5), the decoration pattern of "222" is enlarged from the state of (Y4) and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is white flashing. Next, as shown in (Y6), the decoration pattern of "222" is enlarged from the state of (Y5) and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is white flashing. Next, as shown in (Y7), the decoration pattern of "222" is enlarged from the state of (Y6) and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is white flashing.

In the pattern output of the modified example, the decorative symbols move to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach state at the start of the SP reach, and the symbols are aligned during the winning epilogue part as shown in (Y1). Then, the reduced pattern temporarily deleted after the reduced pattern shaking period as shown in (Y2) is enlarged from the position in the center of the screen, and the second design effect is executed.

(Epilogue 28)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (the video of the winning epilogue is flowing), the decoration pattern is positioned at the end of the screen display area (upper left corner of the screen). position). In relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the video of the winning epilogue is finished, the reduced pattern is erased and the design effect is executed in which the central area of the screen is used to enlarge and display the pattern. In addition, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table corresponding to the pattern display in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image. According to this, when the image of the winning epilogue part is displayed, the reduced pattern is positioned on the edge side of the screen so as not to interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and when the development of the winning epilogue part is completed, the pattern is displayed. At the time of playing, by enlarging and displaying the decoration patterns continuously using the screen end side and the screen center, the big winning patterns can be emphasized and shown to the player. Furthermore, by switching the brightness data table, it is possible to show the scene switching appropriately. In this way, the hit epilogue part can be shown favorably.

(Epilogue 29)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (the video of the winning epilogue is flowing), the decoration pattern is positioned at the end of the screen display area (upper left corner of the screen). position) are displayed with "222" aligned. According to this, even while the winning epilogue image is being displayed, the reduced decoration pattern allows the player to recognize that the big winning display result is displayed.

(Epilogue 30)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (the video of the winning epilogue is flowing), the decoration pattern is positioned at the end of the screen display area (upper left corner of the screen). position). In addition, in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue video ends, the subtitle display displayed at (Y1) is deleted, the reduced pattern at the upper left corner position is deleted, and the image at the center of the screen is deleted. The decoration pattern is enlarged and displayed using the area. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from being displayed overlapping with the decoration pattern and misunderstanding that some kind of message is being displayed when the pattern is displayed, and the epilogue part can be properly reproduced. I can show you.

(Epilogue 31)
In the modified example, the decoration pattern moves to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode at the start of the SP reach. According to this, by positioning from the start of the SP reach, it is possible not to interfere with the development of the performance even during the SP reach, and a series of performances can be favorably shown.

184 to 187 are diagrams for explaining modifications of the re-lottery. In the modified example, for example, the case where the re-lottery is executed in the order of (F1) to (F12) from the pattern output will be described. Specifically, after the pattern is enlarged and displayed as shown in (F1) and (F2), the pattern is reduced as shown in (F3) and (F4). After that, as shown in (F5), the pattern becomes the normal size. Then, as shown in (F6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect, and the re-lottery effect starts. After that, as shown in (F7), there is a shaking period in which the pattern swings up and down. After that, from (F8) to (F9), the "3" pattern is reduced and displayed.

After that, as shown in (F10), a button image and a time gauge are faintly displayed under the "3" pattern. After that, as shown in (F11), the button image and the time gauge are clearly displayed with the "3" symbol displayed. Then, as shown in (F12), the time gauge decreases with the lapse of time. The time gauge is a display showing the effective period of button operation.

FIG. 185 shows the case where the player operates the push button 31B from the state of (F12). In FIG. 185, the re-lottery effect executed in (G1) to (G27) will be explained. When the player operates the push button 31B from the state of (F12), "3", "4", "5", "6", which are used as decorative symbols from (G1) to (G13), A high-speed variation is performed in such a manner that "7", "1" and "2" are all displayed. After that, as shown in (G14), the "3" symbol displayed before the high speed variation is displayed.

After that, the pattern is enlarged and displayed as shown in (G15) and (G16), and then the pattern is reduced as shown in (G17) and (G18). After that, as shown in (G19), the pattern becomes the normal size. Then, the background is switched to the background for pattern shaking. Here, as the pattern shaking, the pattern swings by rotating the pattern on the screen to the back side and the front side. Specifically, after the pattern swings to the back side from (G20) to (G21), the pattern swings to the front side from (G22) to (G23) to change to the initial position. After that, after the pattern swings to the front side from (G24) to (G25), the pattern swings to the back side from (G26) to (G27) to change to the initial position.

FIG. 186 shows the case where the player does not operate the push button 31B from the state of (F12). In FIG. 186, the re-lottery effect executed in (H1) to (H27) will be described. When the player does not operate the push button 31B from the state of (F12), the "3" symbol remains displayed from (H1) to (H6), and the time gauge decreases with the passage of time. . After that, as shown in (H7), the button image is faintly displayed and the button image is erased. After that, all of "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1" and "2" used as decorative patterns are displayed from (H8) to (H20). A fast variation is performed at . After that, as shown in (H21), the "3" symbol displayed before the high speed fluctuation is displayed.

After that, the pattern is enlarged and displayed as shown in (H22) and (H23), and then the pattern is reduced as shown in (H24) and (H25). After that, as shown in (H26), the pattern becomes the normal size. Then, as shown in (H27), the background is switched to the background shown in (G20) to (G27). The movement of designing in (H22) to (H26) when the push button 31B is not operated is the same as the movement of designing in (G15) to (G19) when the push button 31B is operated. However, when the push button 31B is operated, the reduction time of the time gauge when the push button 31B is not operated is absorbed in the period during which the effect of shaking the three symbols is executed. In other words, no matter what timing the button is operated, the period until the button is operated is absorbed by the duration of the effect of shaking the three symbols.

After (G27) or (H27), an effect as shown in FIG. 187 is executed. In FIG. 187, the re-lottery effect executed in (J1) to (J18) will be explained. After (G27) or (H27), the screen is once whited out as shown in (J1). After that, the "3" symbol rotates once from (J2) to (J9). Specifically, from the state of (J2), (J3), (J4), (J5), (J6), (J7), (J8), (J8), ( J9) and rotate. The rotation movement is so fast that the pattern seems to rotate in an instant.

After that, as shown in (J10), after the "3" pattern is reduced and displayed, the pattern swings to the back side from (J11) to (J12), and then the pattern moves to the front side from (J13) to (J14). It changes to the initial position by swinging. After that, after the pattern swings to the front side from (J15) to (J16), the pattern swings to the back side from (J17) to (J18) to change to the initial position. The movement of the symbol shaking from (J11) to (J18) is the same as the movement of the symbol shaking from (G20) to (G27). Then, at (J18), the pattern stops neatly at the normal position.

[About loss 1 to 7]
Characteristic parts in the missing epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(Regarding the design confirmation period)
FIG. 188 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the symbol fixing period. (X1) in FIG. 188 is a diagram showing the timing of determination of success/failure corresponding to (r54) in FIG. (X2) to (X5) will be used to explain the details of the symbol determination period in the case of shifting from this state to the winning epilogue part. Also, the details of the pattern fixing period when the state of (X1) shifts to the missing epilogue part will be explained with reference to (X6) to (X9).

When transitioning from the state (X1) to the winning epilogue part, an image of the state (s5) in which the Bakuchu is caught is displayed as shown in (X2). After that, as shown in (X3), after being controlled to the normal screen, it becomes a pattern confirmation period such as (B8) in which the pattern is fixed and stopped. The symbol confirmation period continues for 0.5 seconds after receiving the symbol confirmation designation command. After that, as shown in (X4), there is a fanfare period like (B11). After that, as shown in (X5), it becomes a jackpot round period.

When transitioning from the state (X1) to the unsuccessful epilogue part, as shown in (X6), an image of the state of disappointment (u2) that Bakuchu was not caught is displayed. After that, as indicated by (X7), the background is blacked out, and the symbol combination indicating the result of the display of "232" being lost is displayed. After that, as indicated by (X8), an eye-catching image depicting a character image that has the effect of attracting the player's eye is displayed. After that, after being controlled to the normal screen, it becomes a symbol confirmation period such as (X9) during which symbol confirmation is stopped. The symbol confirmation period continues for 0.5 seconds after receiving the symbol confirmation designation command. If there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display after the pattern fixing period ends, the next variable display is started.

(detailed description of blackout)
FIG. 189 is a detailed explanatory diagram of blackout. Details of the blackout will be described in the order of FIGS. 189 (X10) to (X22). As shown in (X10), an image of the state of disappointment (u2) that Bakuchu was not caught is displayed. From this state, the background of the blackout is displayed with gradually decreasing transmittance, and the background of the middle pattern showing "3", which is one of the decorative symbols displayed in the center, gradually decreases transmittance. displayed. By decreasing the transmittance, the blackout background becomes gradually darker and the medium pattern becomes gradually clearer.

After (X10), as shown in (X11), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 70% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 100%. After that, as indicated by (X12), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 60% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 90%. After that, as indicated by (X13), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 50% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 80%. After that, as indicated by (X14), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 40% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 60%. After that, as indicated by (X15), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 30% and the medium pattern is displayed with a transmittance of 40%. After that, as indicated by (X16), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 20%, and the medium pattern is displayed with a transmittance of 20%. After that, as indicated by (X17), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 10% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 0%. After that, as indicated by (X18), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 0%, and the medium pattern is displayed with a transmittance of 0%.

After that, the period from (X19) to (X20) becomes a pattern swinging period in which the middle pattern "3" swings up and down. After the pattern shaking period, an eye-catching image is displayed as indicated by (X21). After that, as indicated by (X22), it becomes a symbol fixing period. As shown in FIG. 189, the blackout of the background starts earlier than the fade-in of the medium pattern, and the blackout of the background has more stages of switching of the transmittance than the fade-in of the medium pattern. .

(Loss 1)
As shown in FIG. 188, in the case of losing after determination of winning or losing, a losing pattern is displayed in the blackout background in the losing epilogue part. After that, after the switching image of the eye-catching screen is displayed, the screen switches to the normal background at the start of reach. According to this, it is possible to preferably show the switching of the screen at the time of failure by the eye-catching screen.

(Loss 2)
As shown in FIG. 189, in the losing epilogue part, the background at the time of losing gradually blacks out, while the middle pattern gradually fades in. According to this, since the image and the medium pattern at the time of failure are displayed in inverse proportion to each other in the relationship between blackout and fade-in, the display at the time of failure can be favorably displayed due to the relationship between the two.

(Loss 3)
As shown in FIG. 189, in the missing epilogue part, the number of steps required to black out the background at the time of failure from 100% to 0% transmittance is to fade the middle pattern from 100% to 0% transmittance. It has more steps than it takes to get in. Specifically, the blackout of the background has 8 stages from (X11) to (X18), whereas the fade-in of the middle pattern has 6 stages from (X12) to (X17). According to this, the image and the middle pattern at the time of failure are displayed in inverse proportion to each other in the relationship between blackout and fade-in, and the number of stages of change in transmittance is different, so the display at the time of failure is based on the relationship between the two. can be displayed appropriately.

(Loss 4)
As shown in FIG. 189, the change in which the background is blacked out at the time of losing starts earlier than the change in which the medium pattern fades in. According to this, the image at the time of loss and the medium pattern are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between blackout and fade-in, and moreover, the blackout is faster than the fade-in of the pattern. It is possible to make the display of the hour look good.

(Loss 5)
The displayed image of the lost image before blackout is switched, but the displayed image of the blackout image does not change. According to this, the blackout can be made to look good by starting the blackout in the state of the image without change. It should be noted that the switching of the image includes switching of the picture on the screen, switching of the angle of the video, and switching of the displayed scene itself. In addition, the fact that there is no change in the image includes the fact that it is the same still image, that even if it is a moving image, the angle of the image does not change, and even if it is moving, only a part of the image is slightly moving.

(Loss 6)
As a result of the middle pattern fading in as the background at the time of failure blacks out, as shown in (X18) to (X20), the middle pattern with a transmittance of 0% and the transmittance of 0%. is displayed for a predetermined period of time. This predetermined period includes a symbol fluctuation period as shown in (X19) to (X20). In the period of design fluctuation, the period of shifting the middle design from the central position to the upper position, the central position, the lower position, and the central position is defined as one period, and the fluctuation of the design may be repeated for at least two cycles. The predetermined period including such a period may be set longer than the period during which the medium pattern is faded in from 100% transmittance to 0% transmittance. Also, the predetermined period may be set longer than the period during which the eye catch is displayed. According to this, in the display in which the background is blacked out with a transmittance of 0%, there is a period during which the medium pattern is clearly displayed, so that it is possible to suitably show that it is a failure.

(Loss 7)
As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, on the eye-catching screen, the title "POWERFUL II" and images of main characters Yume-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan are displayed as information about the pachinko game machine 1. be done. According to this, the information of the pachinko game machine 1 can be accurately conveyed by the eye-catching image.

[About loss 8, 10 to 17]
Characteristic parts in the missing epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(About the game effect lamp when losing)
FIG. 190 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp at the time of losing and a diagram for explaining a modified example at the time of losing. FIG. 190 also describes the lighting mode of the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 . FIG. 190 (X30) to (X36) are detailed explanatory diagrams of the game effect lamp at the time of losing, and (X40) to (X46) are diagrams showing modified examples at the time of losing. The example shown in FIG. 190 shows the production at the time of loss in the SP final reach, but for the production at the time of loss in other reach such as SP first half reach A and B and SP second half reach A and B, The technique shown in FIG. 190 may be applied.

In the present embodiment, the luminance data table at the time of failure is used from the effect (X30) in which the six teammates are disappointed to the effect (X31) in which the background image is blacked out. 190 corresponds to the grandchild table specified by the times tu1 to tu3 of the child table WD17 in the missing epilogue part shown in FIG. 216 to be described later.

After the background image blacks out, the featured image is displayed. An eye-catching image is an image that attracts the player's attention. An image is displayed.

A brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the period of switching to the eye-catching screen (X32) to the display of the eye-catching screen (X33). After that, through the switching period to the normal screen of (X34) and the design confirmation period of (X35), the next variation of (X36) that is executed when the variation pattern command with hold is received, the background A luminance data table for is used. The background brightness data table shown in FIG. 190 corresponds to the grandchild table 26 specified at time tu4 of the child table WD17 in the missing epilogue part shown in FIG. 216 to be described later.

It should be noted that the luminance data table for the background is maintained even when the customer waiting command is received when there is no reservation after the pattern fixing period of (X35). Incidentally, in response to receiving the customer waiting command, the effect screen may be a demonstration display, and a luminance data table for demonstration may be used.

In relation to the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050, from (X30) to (X34), the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is blinking. And, by receiving the symbol decision command, the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is turned off in the state of (X35). After that, by receiving the variation pattern command when there is a hold, in the state of (X36), the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 becomes blinking. In addition, when there is no hold after the symbol determination period of (X35), even if the customer waiting command is received, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 maintains extinguishing.

Further, as a modified example for failure, the luminance data table in each state may be different from that of the present embodiment. Specifically, the luminance data table at the time of failure is used from the disappointment of (X40) to the background blackout of (X41). After that, during (X42) the eye-catching screen switching period, (X43) the eye-catching screen, (X44) the normal screen switching period, and (X45) the pattern confirmation period, the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is created. may be used. Then, the luminance data table for the background may be used in the next variation of (X36).

Here, the first luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher in luminance than the final luminance data (off) in the luminance data table before eye-catching display (at the time of failure). Also, the first luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher in luminance than the first luminance data in the luminance data table (not including turning off) corresponding to the background at the start of fluctuation.

(Loss 8)
Characteristic portions of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 at the time of losing will be described. The effect screen will be switched to the image at the time of losing after the effect of winning or failing. After that, after the display of the blackout where the result of the display of failure is displayed, it is switched to the eye-catching screen. Furthermore, after that, after switching to the normal screen, a screen is displayed in which the symbols are fixed and stopped. In addition, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table at the time of winning/failing determination to the brightness data table at the time of losing. After that, the table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching). After that, the table is switched to the luminance data table of the background at the start of fluctuation. Here, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen. Also, the luminance data table is switched to the background luminance data table at the timing of switching to the normal screen. Then, the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from flashing to extinguished by the reception of the symbol confirmation command, but the brightness data table for the background is not switched even by the reception of the symbol confirmation command. Also, the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from off to blinking by receiving the next variation variation pattern command, but the brightness data table for the background is not switched even by receiving the symbol confirmation command. According to this, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background at the end of the eye-catching screen, and the brightness data table is continued until the next change. is not necessary to separately prepare, the production by the lamp can be shown without discomfort from the production at the time of failure to the next change, and a series of productions can be suitably shown.

(Loss 10)
After the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background with the end of the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table for the background is continuously used even if there is no reserved memory and the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received. According to this, after switching to the brightness data table for the background, the same brightness data table can be continuously used, so that the performance by the lamps can be presented without any sense of incongruity, and the series of presentations can be favorably presented. can be done.

(Loss 11)
The special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from flashing to extinguished upon reception of a symbol confirmation command which triggers the production of symbol confirmation and stop. According to this, regarding the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050, the flow at the time of losing can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Loss 12)
The special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from extinguishing to blinking by receiving the variation pattern command of the next variation which is the trigger for the next variation to start. According to this, regarding the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050, the flow at the time of losing can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Loss 13)
A modified example at the time of losing will be described. The brightness data table at the time of failure is used from the rendering of (X40) in which the six teammates are disappointed to the rendering of (X41) in which the background image is blacked out. After the background image blacks out, the featured image is displayed. A luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the period of switching to the eye-catching screen (X42) to the pattern fixing period of (X45). After that, when the variation pattern command with hold is received, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background. In other words, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching), and the luminance data table is maintained during the pattern fixing period, and at the timing of switching to the next change, the background brightness data table. Further, in the pattern fixing period, the last luminance data of the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching), that is, turning off is used. According to this, after switching to the background luminance data table, the final luminance data of the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is maintained until the next variation pattern command is received, so that it is a failure. can be easily recognized, and as a result, the failure can be favorably shown.

(Loss 14)
The final luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is data for keeping the light off. In addition, the data for keeping the light off is not used in the luminance data table for the background. According to this, since the brightness data for maintaining the lights off is not used in the brightness data table for the background, turning off when the background is displayed is peculiar to the failure. It can be made easy to recognize that it is.

(Loss 15)
If there is no pending memory after design determination, the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is switched to the brightness data table for background by receiving a customer waiting designation command. According to this, by receiving the customer waiting designation command, the table is switched to the brightness data table for the background, so that it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the table is lost.

(Loss 16)
The first luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher in luminance than the final luminance data (off) in the luminance data table before displaying the eye-catching image (at the time of failure). According to this, the game effect lamp 9 can emit light with higher brightness than before switching to the eye-catching screen, so that the switching can be easily recognized by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9 .

(Loss 17)
The first brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher in brightness than the first brightness data in the brightness data table (not including off) corresponding to the background at the start of variation. According to this, since the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light with high brightness when switching to the eye-catching screen, the switching is easily recognized by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9 .

[Regarding 8-12]
Characteristic parts in the parts related to the determination of success or failure are numbered and explained.

(Detailed description of (r48) part)
FIG. 191 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r48) portion. FIG. 191 (r48) is a scene in which the final hype is performed before the winner is decided. FIG. 191A is an explanatory diagram showing screen switching, and FIG. 191B is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between screen switching and time. As shown in FIG. 191(A), in the (r48) part, after the explosive chu is displayed as in (r48-1), six allies are displayed as in (r48-2). After that, after the display of Bakuchu like (r48-1) is displayed again, the six allies like (r48-2) are displayed. After that, switching of still images between (r48-1) and (r48-2) is repeated, and the switching speed gradually increases as shown in FIG. 191(B). The image of the ally character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed as time elapses.

(Acceptability 8)
The scene before the propriety decision of (r48) in the fanning part is a slow motion period in which the movement of the video is slowed down. In addition, the effect executed before (r48) depicts the movement of the character from a plurality of image data, while the effect executed at (r48) is the image of Bakuchu and the six allies. image. The image of the ally character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed with the passage of time to make it appear as if the characters are moving. Here, if an image is created using the same amount of image data during the slow motion period as during the periods other than the slow motion period, the amount of data is small and the movement becomes awkward. On the other hand, if a large amount of data is used to smooth the movement during the slow motion period, the capacity becomes too large. Therefore, the amount of data can be reduced by reducing the number of images used in the slow motion period and by switching and enlarging the display to make it look as if the character is moving. Note that the number of images used during the slow motion period may be any number as long as the number of images is smaller than during the other periods.

(Acceptability 9)
As shown in FIG. 191(B), the image switching speed between the image of the friend character and the image of the enemy character gradually increases. According to this, after the image switching speed reaches the fastest, the promotion display prompting the trigger operation is displayed, so that a scene in which the friend character has an advantage or a scene in which the enemy character has an advantage is developed. It becomes possible to incite the development of the game, and the interest is improved. In addition, by alternately switching the images, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that one image is used for each of the friend character and the enemy character.

(Yes or No 10)
The effect of the slow motion period in (r48) may be executed at the timing of development from SP first half reach to SP last reach. According to this, it is possible to suitably execute the effect even at the timing of developing from the SP first half reach.

(Yes or No 11)
At least one of the friend character and the enemy character may be configured using two or more images during the slow motion period in (r48). For example, in the case of an ally character, four images such as image 1, image 2, image 3, image 4, image 1, . good. According to this, by changing only part of the data while using the data of the character itself, it is possible to more faithfully represent the state of movement while reducing the amount of data change work.

(Yes or No 12)
In the slow motion period in (r48), when the character's hair and clothes are shown to move gradually from a plurality of images, the hair and clothes move at the same speed as during periods other than the slow motion period. It may be designed to be visible. Here, if the number of images is increased in accordance with the motion of the slow motion in order to make the motion look smooth during the slow motion period, the capacity becomes large. However, by speeding up the movement during the slow motion period, even if the number of images used is reduced, the movement does not become awkward, and while reducing the data capacity, it is possible to express the movement more faithfully. can.

<Explanation about the game effect lamp>
Next, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 260. FIG.

[Regarding lamp control of game effect lamps using luminance data table]
The effect control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table stored in the ROM 121 and the RAM 122 to light/blink/extinguish one or more of the plurality of lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 124 sets the sub-variation time according to the variation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 105 mounted on the main board 11 . The sub-fluctuation time is a counter that is decremented by 1 in one frame (33 msec) of the displayed image. The display control unit 124 controls the ROM 121 and RAM 122 when the sub-variation time reaches the timing for starting the display corresponding to each part (for example, various displays (reach display, etc.) in each part such as the start part and the inflection part). The display control of the image display device 5 is performed based on the image data (moving image data, animation data) stored in the . The display control unit 124 sets an extension command corresponding to an effect display (effect scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the display control performed by itself, and transmits the extension command to the effect control CPU 120. do. The effect control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the effect display (effect scene) whose display is controlled by the display control unit 124 based on the extension command received from the display control unit 124 .

For example, FIG. 272 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 272, when the display control unit 124 performs display control in the winning epilogue of the SP first half reach A, it transmits an extension command for designating the winning epilogue of the SP first half reach A to the effect control CPU 120 . The effect control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the hit epilogue of the SP first half reach A based on the extension command received from the display control unit 124 .

In the parent table, information specifying a lamp (lighting position) to be subjected to lamp control among various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each lamp. , and information specifying a child table (a specified address of the child table) to be referred to during lamp control for each lamp. In the parent table, only lamps to be controlled are specified, and lamps not to be controlled are not specified. For example, in the parent table shown in FIG. 192, which will be described later, the frame lamp, the character lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the attack lamp 9E, the V attack lamp 9F, and the electric tuning lamp 9H are the objects of lamp control. 600000 msec is specified as the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each lamp. In the parent table shown in FIG. 192, the child table WD1 is designated for the frame lamp, the child table YD1 is designated for the character object lamp 9A, and the child table LD1 is designated for the board left lamp 9B. , the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric tuner lamp 9H.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 206, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the parent table for the epilogue per SP first half reach A, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for the frame lamp is 600000 msec (10 minutes). It is specified, and the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the counter every 10 msec in order to time this 600000 msec (10 minutes). That is, the effect control CPU 120 counts 600000 msec (10 minutes) by executing the counter subtraction process 60000 times. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600000 msec (10 minutes) is clocked. In the parent table for epilogue per SP first half reach A, WD3 is specified as a child table.

In the child table, information specifying a lamp (lighting position) to be subjected to lamp control among various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 and a grandchild table to be referenced at each time when lamp control is performed are specified. information (designated address of grandchild table). For example, in the child table for the frame lamp shown in FIG. 193, which will be described later, grandchild tables (W4, W11, W12, W21, etc.) are specified for each time ta1 to ta19.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 206, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the child table WD3 for the epilogue per SP first half reach A, 300 msec is specified as the time during which the frame lamp is subjected to lamp control. , The effect control CPU 120 measures 3000 msec by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and until the time reaches 3000 msec, the grandchild table specified by the child table WD3 is used to perform lamp control. ing. In the child table WD3 for epilogue per SP first half reach A, W4 is specified as a grandchild table.

The grandchild table stores information specifying a lamp (lighting position) to be subjected to lamp control among various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and luminance data used at each time when lamp control is performed. ing. For example, a grandchild table W4 shown in FIG. 230, which will be described later, stores luminance data corresponding to RGB used every 30 msec.

The luminance data value corresponds to the current value output to the lamp that is the object of lamp control. For example, the frame lamp is composed of LEDs consisting of three elements "R", "G", and "B", and the luminance data for each element corresponds to the current value output to each element. . Specifically, the luminance data is divided into 16 levels of current values from 0 to F. When the luminance data is 0, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0), and when the luminance data is F The current value becomes the maximum value. For example, when luminance data “A” is output to the “R” element, a current corresponding to the “A” luminance data flows through the “R” element, and “1” flows through the “G” element. When the luminance data is output, the current corresponding to the luminance data of "1" flows through the element of "G", and when the luminance data of "F" is output to the element of "G", the current corresponding to the luminance data of "F" is output. A current corresponding to the luminance data of 'G' flows through the element 'G'.

The frame lamp can emit light in various colors by applying a current corresponding to luminance data to each element of RGB. Also, the frame lamp can be illuminated in a color corresponding to each character described above by emitting light based on luminance data. As an example, in a production in which Yume-chan appears, data "F00" is output from the LED lamp as luminance data to the LED, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light red. . In an effect in which Maid A appears, data "00F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows to light the LED in blue. In an effect in which Maid B appears, data "0AC" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in Hawaiian blue. In an effect in which AD appears, data "FF0" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows to light the LED in yellow. In an effect in which Jam-chan appears, data "A5F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and the current corresponding to the data flows to light the LED in purple. In an effect in which Nana-chan appears, data "F3F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows to light the LED in pink. In an effect in which Bakuchu appears, data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows to light the LED in red. In an effect in which Boingo appears, data "FEA" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and current corresponding to the data flows to light the LED in a cream color.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 230, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the grandchild table W4, for each lamp, "000" and "AAA" are alternately set as luminance data (RGB data) at intervals of 30 msec. specified. The effect control CPU 120 counts 3000 msec, which is the time specified by the child table, by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and until the time reaches 300 msec, brightness data is generated at intervals of 30 msec based on the grandchild table W4. Output to the LED driver. Then, based on the received luminance data, the LED driver causes a current corresponding to the luminance data to flow through the designated LED. Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 can lamp-control each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 has a timer corresponding to each of the parent table, the child table, and the grandchild table. Lamp control is performed based on the table, child table, and grandchild table.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data from the first specified location of the grandchild table, and when the output of the luminance data is completed up to the last specified location of the grandchild table, the grandchild table is output. If the value of the timer corresponding to the specified child table still remains, output of luminance data is started again from the first specified location of the corresponding grandchild table. On the other hand, when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table designating the grandchild table becomes 0 while the luminance data is being output based on the grandchild table, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the child table. A timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying is set, and output of luminance data is started from the first specified location of the grandchild table specified by the child table. As a result, the grandchild table is switched, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table after switching.

The timer management of the child table by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 273 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of the child table. As shown in FIG. 273, in the child table for the epilogue per SP first half reach A, 3000 msec is specified as the time during which lamp control is performed for the frame lamp, and W4 is specified as the grandchild table. In the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are alternately specified at intervals of 30 msec as luminance data (RGB data) for each lamp. For convenience of explanation, the data "000" in the first 30 msec is data 1, the data "AAA" in the next 30 msec is data 2, the data "000" in the next 30 msec is data 3, and the data "AAA" in the next 30 msec. data 4, data "000" in the next 30 msec as data 5, data "AAA" in the next 30 msec as data 6, and data "000" in the next 30 msec as data 7.

The effect control CPU 120 counts 3000 msec specified by the child table WD3 by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and until the clock reaches 3000 msec, data 1 to data 7 are displayed at intervals of 30 msec based on the grandchild table W4. is output to the LED driver, but if the clock has not reached 3000 msec after outputting data 1 to data 7, the luminance data are again output to the LED driver in order from the first data 1. When the clock reaches 3000 msec, the effect control CPU 120 stops outputting luminance data based on the grandchild table W4 at that point, and starts outputting luminance data based on the next grandchild table W1 specified by the child table. do. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 loops the output of the brightness data until the time specified by the child table has passed.

Note that child data is specified over 600000 msec (10 minutes) like the parent table shown in FIG. 192, which will be described later. That is, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control by switching the parent table based on the effect control command from the CPU 103. Even when the CPU 120 does not receive the performance control command from the CPU 103, lamp control is performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, thereby preventing different lamp controls from being performed one after another from the point where trouble occurs. can do.

Also, as in the child table shown in FIG. 193, which will be described later, grandchild data is specified over 600000 msec (10 minutes) at the final specified location, and 10 minute data in such a child table corresponds to the child table. It plays the role of preventing the lamp control from being performed again from the first specified position in the child table due to the timer remaining in the parent table when the value of the timer to be set becomes 0.

Also, as in the grandchild table shown in FIG. 235, which will be described later, luminance data is specified over 600000 msec (10 minutes) at the final specified location, and 10 minute data in such a grandchild table corresponds to the grandchild table. When the value of the timer to be set becomes 0, it plays the role of preventing the lamp control from being performed again from the first specified position of the grandchild table due to the timer of the child table still remaining.

In this way, by setting the brightness data specified at the end of the grandchild table to be 10-minute data, the lamp is maintained with the determined single light emission, thereby preventing the problem that the lighting of the lamp continues to change. can be done. Furthermore, if the luminance data for 600000 msec (10 minutes) is specified at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, it is possible to more effectively prevent the problem that the lighting of the lamp continues to change. can.

As described above, the luminance data table consists of a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table. Of these, only characteristic tables are shown, and other tables may be omitted.

[Brightness data table used in the start part]
FIG. 192 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the start part. As shown in FIG. 192, in the parent table of the luminance data table used for the start part, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and the lamp for each game effect lamp 9 Information designating child tables (WD1, YD1, LD1, AD1) referred to during control are stored.

FIG. 193 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the start part. As shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the frame lamp, the time of the start part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time zone is specified. In this embodiment, only the grandchild tables that are particularly characteristic are described in the child tables, and the other grandchild tables are indicated as "omitted" and the description thereof is omitted.

For example, grandchild table W21 is specified at time ta1, time ta4, and time ta7. The grandchild table W21 is included in the normal background luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52, and corresponds to the frame lamp grandchild table W21 in the background luminance data table shown in FIG. 260, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 260, in the grandchild table W21, "550", "770", or "880" is specified as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21 to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the normal background (background yellow lighting pattern).

Grandchild table W4 is specified at time ta3 and time ta6. The grandchild table W4 corresponds to the grandchild table W4 for the frame lamp in the white blinking (white flash) luminance data table shown in FIG. 230 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at intervals of 30 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4. In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp twice in white by performing lamp control over 150 msec (30 msec×5) based on the grandchild table W4.

The grandchild table W11 is specified between times ta10 and ta12. The grandchild table W11 corresponds to the grandchild table W11 for the frame lamp in the shutter 1 brightness data table shown in FIG. 251 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 251, in the grandchild table W11, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, the luminance data is set to decrease stepwise from "A00" to "600" at intervals of 30 msec. specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W11 to reduce the brightness step by step in correspondence with the effect of closing the shutter as shown in FIGS. 58(a10) to (a12). The frame lamp lights up in red while

The grandchild table W12 is designated at times ta13 to ta18. The grandchild table W12 corresponds to the grandchild table W12 for the frame lamp in the shutter 2 luminance data table shown in FIG. 251 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 251, in the grandchild table W12, "600" is specified at 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. Effect control CPU120, by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W12, predetermined from the shutter closed state as shown in FIGS. The frame lamp is lit in red while maintaining the luminance in a reduced state corresponding to the effect of gradually opening after the time is maintained.

Thus, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamps change color and brightness, such as yellow background lighting, red blinking, white blinking, and red lighting. While the brightness data is switched so that it lights up/blinks while changing the brightness, in the time ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp is kept in a reduced brightness state and lit in red. maintains the luminance data. As a result, before the shutter closes, the effect in the start part is livened up by the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and when the shutter is closed, the lighting mode of the frame lamp is maintained, so that the player can enjoy the content of the effect when the shutter opens. , and as a result, it is possible to better show the performance in the subsequent fanning part to the player.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59(a13), the luminance data is set so that the frame lamp lights in red while maintaining the reduced luminance from the timing when the shutter is completely closed. It was maintained, but not limited to this. For example, even if the luminance data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights in red while maintaining the reduced luminance after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the shutter is completely closed. good. Alternatively, from the timing related to the shutter closing operation (for example, the timing when the shutter starts to close, the timing just before the shutter starts to close, etc.), the frame lamp is kept at a reduced luminance and the luminance is changed to red. Data may be maintained.

At time ta19, which is the last part of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off in response to the effect that the shutter is maintained in a completely open state as shown in FIG. 61(a19). As described with reference to FIG. 53, "lights out" means a state in which the luminance data is "0". You can become Also in the following description, the part of "extinguishing" may be "substantially extinguishing". At time ta19, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. The lamp remains off.

In this way, since the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully opened, the player can be easily informed of the timing when the shutter is fully opened, depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In addition, in the inflection part of SP first half reach A and the inflection part of SP first half reach B that are executed after the start part, the shutter is fully opened and the frame lamp is turned off, corresponding to each SP first half reach The frame lamps start lighting or blinking based on the brightness data table. In this way, after the shutter is fully opened and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp starts lighting in accordance with the progress of the effect in the SP first half reach. can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Brightness data table used in SP first half reach A fanning part]
FIG. 194 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the fanning part of SP first half reach A. FIG. As shown in FIG. 194, in the parent table in the brightness data table used for the fanning part of SP first half reach A, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and each game and information designating child tables (WD2, YD2, LD2, AD2) to be referenced during lamp control for the effect lamp 9 are stored.

FIG. 195 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the swing part of SP first half reach A. FIG. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD2 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 195, in the child table WD2 of the frame lamp, the time of the swing part of the SP first half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time zone is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W3 is specified for 1560 msec at time tb10. The grandchild table W3 corresponds to the grandchild table W3 for the frame lamp in the yellow haze luminance data table shown in FIG. 229 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, "440", "660", and "880" are sparsely specified at intervals of 180 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. . The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the SP reach background.

The grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec at time tb14 and for 210 msec at time tb17. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4.

Here, as shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at intervals of 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , the first 30 msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (lights on white), the next 30 msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (lights on white), the next The first 30 msec is "000" (lights out), the next 30 msecs is "AAA" (lights up in white), and the last 30 msecs is "000" (lights out). That is, the frame lamp alternates between "turning off" and "turning on" over one cycle of 210 msec (30 msec×7), thereby blinking the frame lamp in white (white flash) a plurality of times. For example, when the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 over one cycle of 210 msec (30 msec×7), the frame lamp flashes white three times, and the effect control CPU 120 performs 150 msec. When the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W4 for (30 msec×5), the frame lamp flashes white twice.

The grandchild table W4 is designated at both time tb14 and time tb17. The frame lamp flashes white twice, and at time tb17, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle of 210 msec, so that the frame lamp flashes white three times. Flashes.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD2, thereby blinking the frame lamp in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By differentiating the times for referring to the grandchild table W4 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be changed to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced, The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

At time tb18, which is the last part of the inciting part of the SP first half reach A, Yume-chan explodes before the success/failure decision (jackpot, loss, SP reach second half development) as shown in FIG. 67 (b18). The frame lamp lights up in white in response to the production that incites whether or not to catch the. At time tb18, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes. For example, the grandchild table W8 corresponds to the grandchild table W8 for the frame lamp in the tilt 2 luminance data table without operation prompting shown in FIG. 249 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and the timer value corresponding to the child table WD2 is Until it becomes 0, the frame lamp keeps lighting in white based on the grandchild table W8 for 10 minutes.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 67 (b18), the frame lamp is kept lit in white with the sound muted in the winning/failing branch in the swinging part of the first half of the SP reach A, and the player is notified whether the winning/failing Branching (decision timing) can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the child table WD2 of the SP first half reach A fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in a color corresponding to the character when the character speaks.

For example, at time tb4, the effect control CPU 120 responds to an effect in which Yume, who is located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, who is located on the right side of the screen, face each other as shown in FIG. 63(b4). , The left frame lamp is lit in green corresponding to Yume-chan, and the right frame lamp is lit in red corresponding to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the effect control CPU 120 displays a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to an effect in which Yume-chan, who is positioned on the left side of the screen as shown in FIG. 63(b5), speaks. Blink the left lamp. At time tb6, the effect control CPU 120 causes the Bakuchu positioned on the right side of the screen as shown in FIG. flash.

As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be favorably expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the effect in the fanning part can be favorably played. can show people.

In addition, in the child table WD2 of the SP first half reach A fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time tb11, the effect control CPU 120 responds to Yume-chan, who is positioned on the left side of the screen as shown in FIG. Flash the frame left lamp in green. Further, at time tb8 and time tb9, the effect control CPU 120 displays a frame with a color corresponding to the character when there is a character's dialogue but no caption as shown in FIGS. 63(b8) and (b9). Flash the lamp.

As shown in FIGS. 64(b8) and 64(b9), even if there is a character's dialogue but there is no caption, the frame lamp lights/blinks in a color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering a line by means of the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, so that the player can suitably see the production in the slamming part. can.

[Brightness data table used in epilogue part per SP first half reach A]
FIG. 196 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach A. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 196(a1), in the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information designating child tables (WD3, YD3, LD3, AD3) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 196(a2), in the winning epilogue child table WD3 used for the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach A is subdivided for the frame ramp. A grandchild table that is referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD3 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG.

For example, at time tc1, grandchild table W4 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that after the success/failure branch shown in FIG. to blink the frame lamp in white.

As described above, the white lighting at the win/fail branch (tb18) has the RGB data "FDC", whereas the white flashing at tc1 after the win is determined has the RGB data "FFF". At the time of winning, the frame lamp flickers in the same color (white) as the winning/failing branch and more brightly than the winning/failed branch, so that the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can easily inform the player of the winning.

Grandchild table W1 is specified at time tc2 and time tc3. The grandchild table W1 corresponds to the grandchild table W1 for frame lamps in the smooth rainbow luminance data table shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 225, in the grandchild table W1, various luminance data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at intervals of 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to correspond to the effect of catching an explosion as shown in FIGS. light up in rainbow colors corresponding to

As shown in FIG. 196(b1), in the parent table for common symbol output used in the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information designating a child table (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is stored.

As shown in FIG. 196(b2), in the child table WD0 for common pattern output used in the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the time for the pattern output part in the hit epilogue part of SP reach first half A for the frame lamp is It subdivides and specifies a grandchild table that is referenced in each time zone. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD0 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. Further, the common symbol drawing child table WD0 is commonly used in the first half of the SP reach A and B, the second half of the SP reach A and B, and the final reach of the SP.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified between time tc4 and time tc5 for 5000 msec. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to correspond to the effect of producing a winning pattern as shown in FIGS. Blink the corresponding bright white color.

At time tc6, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps are smoothed in rainbow colors to correspond to the effect that the final winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 69(c6). Light. At time tc6, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. The frame lamp keeps lighting in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is designated for time tc2 and time tc3, and based on the grandchild table W1, frame lamps are displayed corresponding to the effect of catching Bakuchu. is smoothly lit in rainbow colors, and furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time tc6, and based on the grandchild table W1, the winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen. lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing the winning and the grandchild table for displaying the symbols used when displaying the winning symbols are shared, so that different Without preparing a grandchild table, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control for lighting in rainbow colors, and to liven up each performance with a sense of unity. As a result, while reducing the amount of data, it is possible to make the performance in the winning epilogue part more visible to the player by using the frame lamp.

[Brightness data table used in SP first half reach A loss epilogue part]
FIG. 197 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the missing epilogue part of SP first half reach A. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 197(a1), in the parent table for the common losing epilogue used for the losing epilogue part of SP first half Reach A, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information designating child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 197 (a2), in the common losing epilogue child table WD4 used for the losing epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the time of the losing epilogue part in SP reach first half A is subdivided for the frame lamp , a grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD4 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. In addition, child table WD4 for common loss epilogue is commonly used in SP reach first half A, B, SP reach second half A, B, and SP final reach.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified during 200 msec of time td1. The grandchild table W13 corresponds to the grandchild table W13 for the frame lamp in the losing 1 luminance data table shown in FIG. 252 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified for the first 10 msec and "444" is specified for the next 190 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The effect control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W13, so that after the success/failure branch shown in FIG. Correspondingly, the frame lamp is lit in white.

As described above, the RGB data for the white lighting at the success/failure branch (tb18) is "FDC", whereas the white lighting at td1 after the failure notification has the RGB data for "888" or "444". . As a result, at the time of losing, the frame lamp can be lit more darkly in white while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting in the success/failure branch (tb18). can be notified to

A grandchild table W14 is specified for 5800 msec at time td2. The grandchild table W14 corresponds to the grandchild table W14 for frame lamps in the losing 2 luminance data table shown in FIG. 252 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at intervals of 250 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14 to correspond to the effect in which Yume-chan is disappointed as shown in FIG. lights up in dark white.

As mentioned above, the rainbow lighting at the time of winning (tc2, tc3) switches the RGB data at intervals of 30 msec, whereas the dark white lighting at the time of losing (td2) is 250 msec, which is longer than the time of winning. switch at intervals. Thus, when winning, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than when losing, so that the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can inform the player of winning in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, while the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more at the time of winning than at the time of losing, the lighting by the frame lamp can be made more calm at the time of losing, and as a result, the winning and losing are contrasted by the lamps. This can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time td3, grandchild table W15 is specified. The grandchild table W15 corresponds to the grandchild table W15 for the frame lamp in the three-loss luminance data table shown in FIG. 253 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 253, in the grandchild table W15, "444" is specified for the first 10 msec and "111" is specified for the next 550 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , “111” is specified in the last 600000 msec (10 minutes). The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to the effect that a failure is reported as shown in FIG. 70(d3) and the screen turns dark. .

At time td4, grandchild table W21 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, so as to correspond to the effect of displaying the normal screen as shown in FIG. to turn it on. That is, the grandchild table W21 that is used with the normal screen displayed at the time of failure has a lighting mode corresponding to the normal background, and is the grandchild table W21 specified by time ta1, time ta4, and time ta7 in the start part. Common.

At time td4, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data contained in the grandchild table W21. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120, based on the grandchild table W21 shown in FIG. Lamp control is performed while switching RGB data until a customer waiting command is received. If the fluctuation pattern command or customer waiting command is not received even after performing lamp control based on the final RGB data, the lamp is restarted. Lamp control is performed based on the first RGB data.

As shown in FIG. 190, the period from when the frame lamp is turned off at time td3 to when the frame lamp is turned on in a yellow background lighting pattern corresponding to the effect of displaying the normal screen at time td4. , an eye-catching screen is displayed and a frame lamp based on the luminance data table corresponding to the eye-catching screen is lit. As described above, in the lamp control of the frame lamp at the time of failure, after the luminance data table (grandchild table) corresponding to the eye-catching screen is used, the grandchild table which is also used in the start part as the luminance data table corresponding to the normal screen is used. Table W21 is used. As a result, after the eye-catching screen is displayed, there is no need to separately prepare a brightness data table that is used until the design is determined. , the performance by the frame lamp can be shown to the player without a sense of incongruity.

[Brightness data table used in SP first half reach B fanning part]
FIG. 198 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the backing part of SP first half reach B. FIG. As shown in FIG. 198, in the parent table in the brightness data table used for the fanning part of SP first half reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and each game and information designating child tables (WD5, YD5, LD5, AD5) to be referenced during lamp control for the effect lamp 9 are stored.

FIG. 199 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the swing part of the SP first half reach B. FIG. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD5 is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 199, in the child table WD5 of the frame lamp, the time of the swing part of the SP first half reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time zone is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec at time te8 and for 210 msec at time te12. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4. The grandchild table W4 is specified at both time te8 and time te12, but at time te8, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in a period of 150 msec, which is shorter than one cycle. The frame lamp flashes white twice, and at time te12, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle of 210 msec, so that the frame lamp flashes white three times. Flashes.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD5, thereby blinking the frame lamp in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By differentiating the times for referring to the grandchild table W4 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be changed to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced, The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

At time te17, which is the last part of the fanning part of the first half of the SP reach B, it is to fan whether or not Yume-chan will lose in the winning/failing branch (jackpot, losing, development of the second half of the SP reach) as shown in FIG. 77 (e17). The frame lamp lights up in white to correspond to the production. At time te18, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 77 (e17), the frame lamp is kept lit in white with the sound muted in the success/failure branching in the fanning part of the first half of the SP reach B, and the success/failure decision is made to the player. Branching (decision timing) can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the child table WD5 of the SP first half reach B fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in a color corresponding to the character when the character speaks.

For example, at time te4, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to an effect such that Yume, who is located on the left side of the screen, faces Boingo, who is located on the right side of the screen, as shown in FIG. 73(e4). The frame left lamp is lit in green corresponding to Yume-chan, and the frame right lamp is lit in cream color corresponding to Boingo. At time te5, the effect control CPU 120 displays a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to the effect that Yume-chan, who is positioned on the left side of the screen as shown in FIG. 73(e5), speaks. Blink the left lamp. At time te6, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the frame right lamp in a cream color corresponding to Boingo, corresponding to the effect that Boingo located on the right side of the screen emits lines as shown in FIG. 73(e6). blink.

As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be favorably expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the effect in the fanning part can be favorably played. can show people.

In addition, in the child table WD5 of the SP first half reach B fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when the character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time te11, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in a cream color corresponding to Boingo, corresponding to the effect that Boingo hits the puck as shown in FIG. 75 (e11). Furthermore, at time te7, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in green corresponding to Yume-chan when there is a line by Yume-chan but no caption as shown in FIG. 74(e7). Let

As shown in FIG. 74(e7), even if there is a character's dialogue but no caption, the luminance data (subscription data) is set so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. RGB data in the table) is specified. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering a line by means of the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, so that the player can suitably see the production in the slamming part. can.

[Brightness data table used in epilogue part per SP first half reach B]
FIG. 200 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach B. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 200(a1), in the winning epilogue parent table used for the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information designating child tables (WD6, YD6, LD6, AD6) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 200(a2), in the winning epilogue child table WD6 used for the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach B is subdivided for the frame ramp. A grandchild table that is referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD6 is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG.

For example, at time tf1, grandchild table W4 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that after the winning/failing branch shown in FIG. Corresponding to the production, the frame lamp blinks in white.

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (te17) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. The data is "FFF". Accordingly, at the time of winning, the frame lamp blinks in the same color (white) as the winning/failing branch and more brightly than the winning/failed branch. can be conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

The grandchild table W1 is specified at times tf2 to tf4. The production control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W1 to correspond to the production shown in FIGS. Then, the frame lamp is lighted smoothly in rainbow colors corresponding to the confirmation of winning.

As shown in FIG. 200(b1), in the parent table for common symbol output used in the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information designating a child table (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is stored.

As shown in FIG. 200(b2), in the child table WD0 for common pattern output used in the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the time for the pattern output part in the hit epilogue part of SP reach first half B is set for the frame lamp. It subdivides and specifies a grandchild table that is referenced in each time period.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified between time tf5 and time tf6 for 5000 msec. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to correspond to the effect of producing a winning pattern as shown in (f5) and (f6) of FIG. Blink the corresponding bright white color.

At the time tf7, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps are smoothly rainbow-colored in correspondence with the effect that the winning pattern is finally displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 80(f7). Light. At time tf7, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. The frame lamp keeps lighting in rainbow colors.

Thus, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is designated for the times tf2 to tf4, and based on the grandchild table W1, Boingo is attacked and Yume wins. Correspondingly, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, and the grandchild table W1 is also specified for time tf7, and based on the grandchild table W1, the winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen. Correspondingly, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing the winning and the grandchild table for displaying the symbols used when displaying the winning symbols are shared, so that different Without preparing a grandchild table, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control for lighting in rainbow colors, and to liven up each performance with a sense of unity. As a result, while reducing the amount of data, it is possible to make the performance in the winning epilogue part more visible to the player by using the frame lamp.

[Brightness data table used in SP first half reach B loss epilogue part]
FIG. 201 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the missing epilogue part of SP first half reach B. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 201(a1), in the parent table for the common losing epilogue used for the losing epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information designating child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 200 (a2), in the common losing epilogue child table WD4 used for the losing epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the time of the losing epilogue part in SP reach first half B is subdivided for the frame lamp , a grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified between time tg1 and time tg2 for 200 msec. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, so that after the success/failure branching shown in FIG. , the frame lamp is lit in white.

The white lighting at the success/fail branch (te17) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 252, and its RGB data are "888" and "444". As a result, in the event of a loss, the frame lamp can be illuminated in a darker white while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting at the success/fail branch (te17), so that the player can suitably indicate that the failure has occurred. can be notified to

A grandchild table W14 is specified for 5800 msec at time tg3. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14 to correspond to the production shown in FIGS. The lamp is illuminated with a white color darker than tg1.

The rainbow lighting at the time of winning (tf2 to tf4) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data are switched at intervals of 250 msec, which are longer than the hit. Thus, when winning, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than when losing, so that the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can inform the player of winning in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, while the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more at the time of winning than at the time of losing, the lighting by the frame lamp can be made more calm at the time of losing, and as a result, the winning and losing are contrasted by the lamps. This can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time tg4, grandchild table W15 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to the effect that a failure is reported as shown in FIG. 82 (g4) and the screen turns dark. .

At time tg5, grandchild table W21 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, so as to correspond to the effect of displaying a normal screen as shown in FIG. to turn it on. Further, at time tg5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data contained in the grandchild table W21.

[Luminance data table used in character action part at the time of SP latter half development]
FIG. 202 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a character action part in the latter half of SP development. The grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD8 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 202, in the child table WD8 of the frame lamp, the grandchild table referred to in the character action part is specified for the frame lamp. Further, the child table WD8 is used for lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the first half (falling portion) of the character object motion shown in FIGS. be done.

For example, the grandchild table W2 is designated for 7000 msec from time th1 to th3. The grandchild table W2 corresponds to the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp in the accessory action red blinking luminance data table shown in FIG. 228 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 228, in the grandchild table W2, "A00" is specified for the first 40 msec and "333" is specified for the next 30 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The effect control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W2, so that after the winning/failing branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17), the accessories shown in FIGS. Corresponding to such an effect, the frame lamp blinks in red.

Note that during the 7000 msec period from th1 to th3 when the role object falls, lamp control is also performed for the role object lamp 9A. For example, during the period of 7000 msec from time th1 to th3 when the character object falls, the effect control CPU 120 selects the child table corresponding to the character object falling motion on the character object lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table. Based on this, the role lamp 9A is flashed in red.

As a result, it is possible to more effectively draw the player's attention to the effect of the falling role by the lighting mode of the frame lamp and the role lamp 9A.

[Brightness data table used in SP second half reach A fanning part]
FIG. 203 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the backing part of reach A in the second half of SP. As shown in FIG. 203, in the parent table in the brightness data table used for the fanning part of the reach A in the second half of SP, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information designating child tables (WD9, YD9, LD9, AD9) to be referenced during lamp control for the effect lamp 9 are stored.

204 and 205 are diagrams for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the swing part of reach A in the second half of SP. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD9 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIGS. 204 and 205, in the child table WD9 of the frame lamp, the time of the swing part of the SP latter half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time zone is specified. there is

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 are used for lamp control of the frame lamps corresponding to the latter half (rising portion) of the accessory action shown in FIGS. 171(h4) to 172(h10). Specifically, at time th4 to th6, the frame lamp flashes in yellow corresponding to the effect that the character rises, and then at time th7 to th10, based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamp is SP reach. The yellow corresponding to the background of the background also appears to be hazy. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from blinking in yellow to lighting in yellow corresponding to the background of reach A in the latter half of the SP, thereby making it easy for the player to understand that the reach A has developed in the latter half of the SP. I can tell you.

Note that during the time th4 to th10 when the role product rises, lamp control is also performed for the role product lamp 9A. For example, during the time th4 to th10 when the character rises, the effect control CPU 120, based on the child table corresponding to the movement of the character on the character lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table, The brightness of the role product lamp 9A is reduced step by step so as to gradually turn off the role product lamp 9A.

As a result, the lighting mode of the role lamp 9A does not make the player conscious of the rise of the role, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp shows that the player has reached the second half reach A of the SP. It can draw the player's attention.

The grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec of time ti1, 1330 msec of time ti20, and 1560 msec of time ti11. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the SP reach background.

Here, as shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the brightness data of the frame lamp is switched over one period of 720 msec (180 msec×4). At time th7 to th10 and time ti1, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow over 1130 msec, and at time ti20, The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow over 1330 msec, and at time ti11, the effect control is performed for 1560 msec, which is more than two cycles. By the CPU 120 performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamp lights up in yellow over 1560 msec.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD9, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow can be changed. As a result, in one child table WD9, the common grandchild table W3 is used for lamp control without preparing different grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, but by changing the reference time. While reducing the data volume, it is possible to vary the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the SP reach background. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

A grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec between times ti15 and ti24 and for 210 msec between times ti14, ti23 and ti35. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4. At time ti15, time ti24, time ti14, time ti23, and time ti35, the grandchild table W4 is specified. performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the frame lamp flashes white twice, and at time ti14, time ti23, and time ti35, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the grandchild for one cycle of 210 msec. By performing lamp control based on the table W4, the frame lamp flashes white three times.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD9, thereby blinking the frame lamp in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By differentiating the times for referring to the grandchild table W4 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be changed to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced, The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

A grandchild table W7 is specified for 1000 msec from time ti36 to ti38. The grandchild table W7 corresponds to the grandchild table W7 for the frame lamp in the tilt 1 luminance data table without operation promotion shown in FIG. 249 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W7, "FDC" and "300" are specified alternately at intervals of 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W7.

At time ti39, which is the last part of the provocation part of reach A in the second half of SP, it is provoked whether or not Yume-chan and Jam-chan will catch Bakuchu in the success/fail branch (big hit, loss) as shown in FIG. 95 (i39). The frame lamp lights up in white to correspond to such an effect. At time ti39, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and the timer value corresponding to the child table WD2 is Until it becomes 0, the frame lamp keeps lighting in white based on the grandchild table W8 for 10 minutes.

In this way, the child table WD9 in reach A in the second half of the SP is a reach without operation prompt, and after the frame lamp flashes in white based on the grandchild table W7, the frame lamp lights up in white based on the grandchild table W8. Specifically, in the success/failure branching in the inflection part of the reach A in the second half of the SP where no operation promotion is performed, the last luminance data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W7, "FDC" (white lighting), is used. In addition, since the luminance data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the winning/failing branch (decision timing) without excessively increasing the data capacity used for lamp control. can.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 95 (i39), the frame lamp is maintained in white lighting with the sound muted, so that the player can easily understand the winner/failure branch (decision timing). .

Further, as shown in FIG. 249, “FDC” is specified for the last RGB data of the grandchild table W7 used for 1000 msec from the time ti36 to ti38, and further, the grandchild table W8 used at the subsequent time ti39 is "FDC" is also designated for the last RGB data. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 maintains the state of outputting the luminance data of "FDC" to the LED driver based on the grandchild table W7, and thereafter continues to output the luminance data of "FDC" based on the grandchild table W8 to the LED driver. Since the information is output to the driver, it is possible to favorably produce the timing for determining whether the decision is made by a simpler lamp control without excessively increasing the amount of data.

In addition, in the child table WD9 of the SP second half reach A fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in a color corresponding to the character when the character speaks.

For example, at time ti2, the effect control CPU 120 creates an effect such that Yume-chan and Jam-chan located on the left side of the screen and Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen face each other as shown in FIG. 84(i2). Correspondingly, the frame left lamp is lit in white corresponding to Mumu-chan and Jam-chan, and the frame right lamp is lit in red corresponding to Bakuchu. At time ti3, the effect control CPU 120 displays a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to an effect in which Yume-chan, who is positioned on the left side of the screen as shown in FIG. Blink the left lamp. At time ti4, the effect control CPU 120 displays a purple frame left lamp corresponding to Jam-chan in response to the effect that Jam-chan, who is positioned on the left side of the screen as shown in FIG. flash. At time ti5, the effect control CPU 120 displays the right frame lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu in response to the effect that Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen emits lines as shown in FIG. 85(i5). flash.

As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be favorably expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the effect in the fanning part can be favorably played. can show people.

In addition, in the child table WD9 of the SP latter half Reach A fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time ti21, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the effect that Yume-chan, who is positioned on the left side of the screen as shown in FIG. Flash the frame left lamp in green. Furthermore, at time ti32 and time ti34, the effect control CPU 120 determines the color corresponding to the character when there is a character's dialogue but no caption as shown in FIGS. 94(i32) and 95(i34). to make the frame lamp flash.

In this way, even if there is a character's dialogue but no caption as shown in FIGS. 94(i32) and 95(i34), the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character The luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified as follows. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering a line by means of the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, so that the player can suitably see the production in the slamming part. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach A in the second half of the SP]
FIG. 206 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the hit epilogue part of SP latter half reach A. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 206(a1), in the winning epilogue parent table used for the winning epilogue part of SP latter half reach A, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information designating child tables (WD10, YD10, LD10, AD10) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 206(a2), in the winning epilogue child table WD10 used for the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A is subdivided for the frame ramp. A grandchild table that is referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD10 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG.

For example, during times tj1 to tj3, grandchild table W4 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, and after the success/failure branch shown in FIG. to blink the frame lamp in white.

The white lighting at the win/fail branch (ti39) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. The data is "FFF". Accordingly, at the time of winning, the frame lamp blinks in the same color (white) as the winning/failing branch and more brightly than the winning/failed branch. can be conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Grandchild table W1 is specified at times tj2 and tj3. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to correspond to the effect of catching Bakuchu as shown in FIGS. Lights up smoothly in the rainbow colors that correspond to the

As shown in FIG. 206(b1), in the parent table for common symbol output used in the hit epilogue part of reach A in the second half of SP, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information designating a child table (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is stored.

As shown in FIG. 206(b2), in the child table WD0 for common pattern output used in the hit epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A, the pattern output part in the hit epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A is timed for the frame lamp. It subdivides and specifies a grandchild table that is referenced in each time period.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified between time tj4 and time tj5 for 5000 msec. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that the frame lamp is set to display a pattern in correspondence with the effect of producing a winning pattern as shown in FIGS. 98(j4) and (j5). Blink the corresponding bright white color.

At time tj6, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps are smoothly rainbow-colored in correspondence with the effect that the final winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 98 (j6). Light. At time tj6, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. The frame lamp keeps lighting in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for times tj2 and tj3, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamps are displayed in correspondence with the effect of catching Bakuchu. The frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, and furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is designated for time tj6, and the frame lamp is turned on to correspond to the effect that the winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. Lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing the winning and the grandchild table for displaying the symbols used when displaying the winning symbols are shared, so that different Without preparing a grandchild table, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control for lighting in rainbow colors, and to liven up each performance with a sense of unity. As a result, while reducing the amount of data, it is possible to make the performance in the winning epilogue part more visible to the player by using the frame lamp.

[Brightness data table used in SP second half reach A loss epilogue part]
FIG. 207 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the missing epilogue part of SP latter half reach A. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 207(a1), in the parent table for the common losing epilogue used for the losing epilogue part of SP latter half Reach A, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information designating child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 207 (a2), in the child table WD4 for common unsuccessful epilogues used for the unsuccessful epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A, the frame lamp subdivides the time of the unsuccessful epilogue part in the SP reach first half B , a grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified during 200 msec of time tk1. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, so that after the success/failure branch shown in FIG. Correspondingly, the frame lamp is lit in white.

The white lighting at the success/fail branch (ti39) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 252, and its RGB data are "888" and "444". As a result, at the time of losing, the frame lamp can be lit more darkly in white while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting at the success/fail branch (ti39). can be notified to

A grandchild table W14 is specified for 5800 msec between time tk2 and time tk3. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14 to correspond to the effect in which Yume-chan is disappointed as shown in FIGS. 99(k2) and (k3). The lamp is lit in a darker white than tk1.

The rainbow lighting at the time of winning (tj2, tj3) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. The white lighting is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which is longer than the hit. Thus, when winning, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than when losing, so that the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can inform the player of winning in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, while the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more at the time of winning than at the time of losing, the lighting by the frame lamp can be made more calm at the time of losing, and as a result, the winning and losing are contrasted by the lamps. This can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time tk4, grandchild table W15 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15 to turn off the frame lamp in response to the effect that a failure is reported as shown in FIG. 100 (k4) and the screen turns dark. .

At time tk5, grandchild table W21 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W21 to correspond to the effect that the normal screen as shown in FIG. to turn it on. Further, at time tk5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data contained in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in SP second half reach B fanning part]
FIG. 208 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the swing part of reach B in the second half of SP. As shown in FIG. 208, in the parent table in the luminance data table used for the swing part of SP latter half reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and each game and information designating child tables (WD12, YD12, LD12, AD12) referred to during lamp control for the effect lamp 9 are stored.

FIG. 209 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the swing part of the SP latter half reach B. FIG. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD12 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 209, in the child table WD12 of the frame lamp, the time of the swing part of the SP latter half reach B is subdivided, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time zone is specified for the frame lamp.

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 are used for lamp control of the frame lamps corresponding to the latter half (rising portion) of the accessory action shown in FIGS. 171(h4) to 172(h10). Specifically, at time th4 to th6, the frame lamp flashes in yellow corresponding to the effect that the character rises, and then at time th7 to th10, based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamp is SP reach. The yellow corresponding to the background of the background also appears to be hazy. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from blinking in yellow to lighting in yellow corresponding to the background of reach B in the latter half of SP, thereby making it easy for the player to understand that the reach B has developed in the latter half of SP. I can tell you.

Note that during the time th4 to th10 when the role product rises, lamp control is also performed for the role product lamp 9A. For example, during the time th4 to th10 when the character rises, the effect control CPU 120, based on the child table corresponding to the movement of the character on the character lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table, The brightness of the role product lamp 9A is reduced step by step so as to gradually turn off the role product lamp 9A.

As a result, the lighting mode of the role lamp 9A does not make the player conscious of the rise of the role, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp indicates that the player has progressed to reach B in the latter half of the SP. It can draw the player's attention.

The grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec at time tn5, 1330 msec at time tn14, and 1560 msec at time tn6. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the SP reach background.

Here, as shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the brightness data of the frame lamp is switched over one period of 720 msec (180 msec×4). Time th7 to th10, time tn1, and time tn5, by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 effect control CPU120 between 1130msec more than one cycle, the frame lamp is lit yellow over 1130msec, time At tn14, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp is lit yellow for 1330 msec, and at time tn6, for 1560 msec, which is more than two cycles The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow over 1560 msec.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD12, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow can be changed. As a result, in one child table WD12, the common grandchild table W3 is used for lamp control without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, but by changing the reference time. While reducing the data volume, it is possible to vary the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the SP reach background. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

A grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec between time tn3, time tn12 and time tn25 and for 210 msec between time tn4, tn13, time tn15, time tn19 and time tn22. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4. At time tn3, time tn12, time tn25, time tn4, time tn13, time tn15, time tn19, and time tn22, grandchild table W4 is specified, but at time tn3, time tn12, and time tn25, The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, so that the frame lamp blinks white twice, time tn4, time tn13, time tn15, time tn19, And at time tn22, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle of 210 msec, so that the frame lamp flashes white three times.

Thus, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD12, thereby blinking the frame lamp in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By differentiating the times for referring to the grandchild table W4 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be changed to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced, The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

At time tn27, which is the last part of the swaying part of reach B in the second half of SP, corresponding to the effect of swaying whether or not to catch the crab in the success/fail branch (big hit, loss) as shown in FIG. 109 (n27), The frame lamp lights up in white. At time tn27, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 109 (n27), the frame lamp is kept lit in white with the sound muted in the winning/failing branch in the swing part of the reach B in the second half of the SP. Branching (decision timing) can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the child table WD12 of the SP second half reach B fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in a color corresponding to the character when the character speaks.

For example, at time tn2, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to an effect such that Jam-chan and Nana located on the left side of the screen face each other as shown in FIG. Then, the frame left lamp blinks in white corresponding to Jam-chan and Nana-chan, and the frame right lamp lights in red corresponding to the crab. Furthermore, since Jam-chan and Nana-chan located on the left side of the screen are uttering lines, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in white.

As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be favorably expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the effect in the fanning part can be favorably played. can show people.

In addition, in the child table WD12 of the SP latter half reach B fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time tn18, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in pink corresponding to Nana-chan in response to Nana-chan praying effect as shown in FIG. 106 (n18). Further, at time tn10, the effect control CPU 120 displays the color (red) corresponding to the character (crab) when there is a character (crab) dialogue but no caption as shown in FIG. 104 (n10). to make the frame lamp flash.

As shown in FIG. 104 (n10), even if there is a character's dialogue but no caption, the luminance data (subscript n10) is set so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. RGB data in the table) is specified. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering a line by means of the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, so that the player can suitably see the production in the slamming part. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach B in the latter half of the SP]
FIG. 210 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the hit epilogue part of SP latter half reach B. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 210(a1), in the winning epilogue parent table used for the winning epilogue part of SP latter half reach B, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information designating child tables (WD13, YD13, LD13, AD13) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 210(a2), in the winning epilogue child table WD13 used for the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B is subdivided for the frame ramp. A grandchild table that is referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD13 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG.

For example, at time to1, grandchild table W4 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that after the success/failure branch shown in FIG. to blink the frame lamp in white.

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (tn27) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. The data is "FFF". Accordingly, at the time of winning, the frame lamp blinks in the same color (white) as the winning/failing branch and more brightly than the winning/failed branch. can be conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

The grandchild table W1 is specified at times to2 to to5. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, and makes the caught crabs as shown in FIGS. Corresponding to the pleasing performance, the frame lamp is lighted smoothly in rainbow colors corresponding to the confirmation of winning.

As shown in FIG. 210(b1), in the parent table for common symbol output used in the hit epilogue part of reach B in the second half of SP, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information designating a child table (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is stored.

As shown in FIG. 210(b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbol output used in the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B, the time of the symbol output part in the winning epilogue part of the SP reaching second half B is set for the frame lamp. It subdivides and specifies a grandchild table that is referenced in each time period.

For example, during 5000 msec between time to6 and time to7, grandchild table W4 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, thereby making the frame lamp correspond to the effect of producing a winning pattern as shown in FIGS. 111(o6) and 112(o7). Flashes in bright white corresponding to the output.

At time to8, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps are smoothed in rainbow color to correspond to the effect that the final winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 112 (o8). Light. At time to8, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. The frame lamp keeps lighting in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the hit epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for times to2 to to5. The frame lamps are smoothly illuminated in rainbow colors to correspond to the pleasing effect, and the grandchild table W1 is also specified for the time to8, and the winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. The frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the production that seems to be. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing the winning and the grandchild table for displaying the symbols used when displaying the winning symbols are shared, so that different Without preparing a grandchild table, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control for lighting in rainbow colors, and to liven up each performance with a sense of unity. As a result, while reducing the amount of data, it is possible to make the performance in the winning epilogue part more visible to the player by using the frame lamp.

[Brightness data table used in SP second half reach B loss epilogue part]
FIG. 211 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the missing epilogue part of SP latter half reach B. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 211(a1), in the parent table for the common losing epilogue used for the losing epilogue part of SP latter half reach B, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information designating child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 211 (a2), in the common losing epilogue child table WD4 used for the losing epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B, the time of the losing epilogue part in the SP reach latter half B is subdivided for the frame lamp , a grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified during 200 msec of time tp1. The effect control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W13, so as to correspond to the effect of failing to catch a crab as shown in FIG. to light the frame lamp in white.

The white lighting at the success/fail branch (tn27) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 252, and its RGB data are "888" and "444". As a result, at the time of losing, the frame lamp can be lit more darkly in white while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting at the success/fail branch (tn27). can be notified to

A grandchild table W14 is specified between time tp2 and time tp3 for 5800 msec. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14 to correspond to the effect that Jam-chan and Nana-chan are disappointed as shown in FIGS. 113(p2) and (p3). The frame lamp is lit in white that is darker than tp1.

The rainbow lighting at the time of winning (to2-to5) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. The white lighting is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which is longer than the hit. Thus, when winning, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than when losing, so that the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can inform the player of winning in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, while the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more at the time of winning than at the time of losing, the lighting by the frame lamp can be made more calm at the time of losing, and as a result, the winning and losing are contrasted by the lamps. This can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time tp4, grandchild table W15 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to the effect that a failure is reported as shown in FIG. 114 (p4) and the screen turns dark. .

At time tp5, grandchild table W21 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W21, so as to correspond to the effect that the normal screen as shown in FIG. 114 (p5) is displayed. to turn it on. Further, at time tp5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in SP final reach fanning part]
FIG. 212 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the backing part of the SP final reach. As shown in FIG. 212, in the parent table of the luminance data table used for the final reach part of the SP, the maximum time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and each game effect and information designating the child tables (WD15, YD15, LD15, AD15) referred to during lamp control for the lamp 9 are stored.

FIGS. 213 and 214 are diagrams for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the final reach part of the SP. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD15 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, in the frame lamp child table WD15, the frame lamp subdivides the time of the SP final reach part, and designates a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period. .

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 are used for lamp control of the frame lamps corresponding to the latter half (rising portion) of the accessory action shown in FIGS. 171(h4) to 172(h10). Specifically, at time th4 to th6, the frame lamp flashes in yellow corresponding to the effect that the character rises, and then at time th7 to th10, based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamp is SP reach. The yellow corresponding to the background of the background also appears to be hazy. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from blinking in yellow to glowing in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP final reach, so that the player can easily understand that the SP final reach has developed. can be done.

Note that during the time th4 to th10 when the role product rises, lamp control is also performed for the role product lamp 9A. For example, during the time th4 to th10 when the character rises, the effect control CPU 120, based on the child table corresponding to the movement of the character on the character lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table, The brightness of the role product lamp 9A is reduced step by step so as to gradually turn off the role product lamp 9A.

As a result, the lighting mode of the role lamp 9A does not make the player conscious of the rise of the role, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp allows the player to play the game on the screen indicating that the SP final reach has occurred. can draw people's attention.

The grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec of time tr1, 1330 msec of time tr19 and tr22, and 1560 msec of time tr15. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the SP reach background.

Here, as shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the brightness data of the frame lamp is switched over one period of 720 msec (180 msec×4). At time th7 to th10 and time tr1, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 during 1130msec exceeding one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights yellow over 1130msec, and time tr19 and time At tr22, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow over 1330 msec. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow over 1560 msec.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD15, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow can be changed. As a result, in one child table WD15, the common grandchild table W3 is used for lamp control without preparing different grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, but by changing the reference time. While reducing the data volume, it is possible to vary the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the SP reach background. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

Further, the child table WD9 used in the end part of the SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the end part of the SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the end part of the SP are different from each other. In order to change the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing another grandchild table for each of a plurality of timings, the amount of data used for ramp control is reduced in a plurality of ready-to-win performances, It is possible to vary the time of lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the SP reach background. In addition, in the child table WD2 used in the inflection part of the SP first half reach A and in the child table WD5 used in the inflection part of the SP first half reach B, a different grandchild table is similarly prepared for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be changed. good too.

A grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec at time tr36 and for 210 msec at time tr40 and tr47. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4. At time tr36, time tr40, and time tr47, the grandchild table W4 is specified, but at time tr36, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec. By doing so, the frame lamp flashes white twice, and at time tr40 and time tr47, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle of 210 msec, so that the frame lamp flashes white three times.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD15, thereby blinking the frame lamp in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By differentiating the times for referring to the grandchild table W4 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be changed to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced, The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

Furthermore, the child table WD2 used in the early part of the SP first half Reach A, the child table WD5 used in the first half SP Reach B part, the child table WD9 used in the SP second half Reach A part, and the SP second half Reach B part In both the child table WD12 used in the part and the child table WD15 used in the inflection part of the SP final reach, a common grandchild table W4 is used without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time while using it, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control and to vary the number of white flashes. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

At time tr41, grandchild table W5 or grandchild table W6 is specified. When the information for executing the red cut-in effect is set in the effect setting process, the grandchild table W5 is designated at time tr41, and when the information for executing the green cut-in effect is set in the effect setting process, Grandchild table W6 is specified at time tr41.

The grandchild table W5 corresponds to the grandchild tables W5a to W5e for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data tables shown in FIGS. 233 to 235, which will be described later. As shown in FIGS. 233 to 235, in the grandchild table W5 (W5a to W5e), as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, various values are first applied to only the R data at intervals of 30 msec. Then, at intervals of 20 msec, data indicating various luminance values are specified only for the R data, and finally, at intervals of 30 msec and 40 msec, various luminance values are specified only for the R data. is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W5 so as to correspond to the cut-in effect (red cut-in effect) shown in FIG. 128 (r41), and lights the frame lamp in red.

The grandchild table W6 corresponds to the grandchild tables W6a to W6e for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data tables shown in FIGS. 242 to 244, which will be described later. As shown in FIGS. 242 to 244, in the grandchild table W6 (W6a to W6e), as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, various data are first applied to only the G data at intervals of 30 msec. Then, at intervals of 20 msec, data indicating various luminance values are specified only for the G data, and finally, at intervals of 30 msec and 40 msec, various luminance values are specified only for the G data. is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W6 to light the frame lamp in green in correspondence with the cut-in effect (green cut-in effect) shown in FIG. 128 (r41).

As shown in FIGS. 128(r40) and (r41), when the push button 31B is displayed and the cut-in effect is executed, the character does not utter a line and subtitles are not displayed. Furthermore, frame lamps that are subject to lamp control in situations other than the cut-in effect in the SP final reach continue to be subject to lamp control even in the cut-in effect.

As a result, the display prompting the player to operate the push button 31B (the button display) and the subtitle display do not overlap each other when the cut-in effect is executed, and the overlapping of the two makes it difficult to recognize one of the displays. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding of the content of the display. Furthermore, the luminance data of the lamp control in the button display for the cut-in effect and the cut-in effect (RGB data in the grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) is the frame of the same place as the lamp control in the end part of the SP final reach By being designed to use the lamp, it is possible to prevent the lighting/blinking of the extra lamp from being mixed and spoiling the aesthetic appearance, and to provide a suitable effect in the fanning part.

In the present embodiment, the object of lamp control is common in that the button display and cut-in effect and the effect in the SP final reach are all using frame lamps. Not exclusively. For example, only one or more game effect lamps 9, such as a frame lamp, a character lamp 9A, and a board left lamp 9B, are used in button display and cut-in effect, and other SP final reach effects. The ramp control targets may be common in terms of point, or the ramp control targets may be common in that all the game effect lamps 9 are used.

A grandchild table W9 is specified at 860 msec at time tr49 and time tr50. The grandchild table W9 corresponds to the grandchild table W9 for frame lamps in the trigger display luminance data table shown in FIG. 250, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 250, in the grandchild table W9, "D00" is specified at 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W9 to correspond to effects such that the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed in the center as shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) and (r50). to light the frame lamp in red.

The grandchild table W10 is designated at the time tr51 to tr54, which is the end of the fanning part of the SP final reach. The grandchild table W10 corresponds to the grandchild table W10 for the frame lamp in the operation-promoting luminance data table shown in FIG. 250, which will be described later. As shown in Fig. 250, in the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified at intervals of 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W10, corresponding to an effect that prompts the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) as shown in FIGS. During the time tr51 to tr54, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10 for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD15 becomes 0. Until then, the frame lamp keeps blinking in red based on the grandchild table W10 for 10 minutes.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) to 132 (r54), the sound (BGM) corresponding to the operation promotion and the reach was output in the success/failure branching of the SP final reach part. In this state, the frame lamps are switched one after another such as white flashing, red lighting, red flashing, etc., and it is possible to enhance the effect of promoting the operation for the player at the winning/failing branch (decision timing).

Here, the child table WD2 used in the boost part of SP first half reach A, the child table WD5 used in the boost part of SP first half reach B, the child table WD9 used in the SP second half reach A boost part, and the SP second half reach B In the case where there is no operation promotion that urges the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) like the child table WD12 used in the fanning part, the frame lamp lights up at the last pass/fail branch of the fanning part. It remains lit in white, and then transitions to the winning epilogue part or the losing epilogue part. On the other hand, as in the child table WD15 used in the swaying part of the SP final reach, when an operation is promoted to urge the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger), as shown in FIG. 130 (r47). After flashing in white in an effect to agitate whether or not the ally character will catch Bakuchu, as shown in FIG. After the frame lamp lights up in red corresponding to such an effect, the switch is made to the grandchild table W9, and based on the grandchild table W9, the stick controller 31A (trigger) as shown in FIGS. The frame lamp lights up in red to correspond to the effect displayed in the center.

In this way, in the SP ready-to-win effect in which no operation promotion is performed to prompt the player to operate in the success/fail branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp is kept lit in white, so that the effect seems to have stopped. can be shown to the player, and the winner/failure branch (decision timing) can be conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. On the other hand, in the SP ready-to-win effect in which operation promotion is performed to prompt the player to operate at the success/fail branch, the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the sound (BGM) corresponding to the ready-to-win are output, and further, the operation promotion is performed. By switching the grandchild table a plurality of times to control the frame lamps so as to correspond to , the timing of deciding whether or not to win can be favorably produced by the lighting modes of the frame lamps. In this way, the decision timing of the success/failure branching can be favorably produced by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether the operation prompting is performed or not at the success/failure branching. Furthermore, in the SP final reach, in which an operation is promoted to prompt the player to perform an operation in the success/fail branch, based on the grandchild table W10, the luminance data (RGB data) is set to "500" and "D00" at intervals of 30 msec. As a result, it is possible to suitably produce the timing of deciding whether to decide whether the decision is true or not by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

In addition, in the child table WD15 of the SP final reach fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is designated so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the character when the character utters a line.

For example, at time tr2, the effect control CPU 120 responds to an effect such as shown in FIG. Then, the left frame lamp is blinked in white corresponding to the six ally characters, and the right frame lamp is lit in red corresponding to Bakuchu. Furthermore, since the six teammate characters positioned on the left side of the screen are speaking lines, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in white. In addition, at time tr3, the effect control CPU 120 creates a red frame corresponding to Bakuchu in response to the effect that Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen emits lines as shown in FIG. 115(r3). Flash the right lamp.

As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be favorably expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the effect in the fanning part can be favorably played. can show people.

In addition, in the child table WD15 of the SP final reach fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when the character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. there is

For example, at time tr11, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in blue corresponding to the maid A, corresponding to the effect that the maid A chases Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 118 (r11). Furthermore, at time tr25, time tr27, time tr29, time tr31, time tr33, and time tr35, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIGS. (r33) and when there is a character's dialogue but there is no caption as shown in FIG. 126 (r35), the frame lamp blinks in a color corresponding to the character.

123 (r25), (r27), 124 (r29), 125 (r31), (r33), and 126 (r35). Even if there is no such character, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering a line by means of the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, so that the player can suitably see the production in the slamming part. can.

[Brightness data table used in epilogue part per SP final reach]
FIG. 215 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the epilogue part of the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 215(a1), in the parent table for the character action used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WD 16a, YD 16a, LD 16a, AD 16a) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 215(a2), in the child table WD16a for character object actions used in the SP final reach winning epilogue part, the time of the character action part in the SP final reach winning epilogue part is subdivided for frame lamps. A grandchild table that is referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD16a is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG.

For example, the grandchild table W18 is designated for 10000 msec from time ts1 to ts3. The grandchild table W18 corresponds to the grandchild table W18 for the frame lamp in the winning determination luminance data table shown in FIG. 256, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 256, in the grandchild table W18, various luminance data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, and such RGB data is specified repeatedly. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, so that after the win/fail branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54), the accessories shown in FIGS. Corresponding to such a production, the frame lamp blinks in seven colors.

As shown in FIG. 215(b1), in the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time during which the ramp control is performed for each game effect ramp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). , and information specifying child tables (WD 16b, YD 16b, LD 16b, AD 16b) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 215(b2), in the winning epilogue child table WD16b used for the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame ramp. Along with this, a grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD16b is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG.

For example, at times ts3-2 to ts3-8, grandchild table W4 is specified. 173 (s3-2) to 174 (s3-8). The frame lamp is flashed in white corresponding to the rise of the role object, corresponding to the effect that the display appears.

The grandchild table W1 is specified at times ts4 to ts7. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, thereby making the frame lamp correspond to the effect of catching Bakuchu as shown in FIGS. 134(s4) to 135(s7). Lights up smoothly in rainbow colors corresponding to winning confirmation.

As shown in FIG. 215(c1), in the parent table for common symbol output used in the epilogue part for winning the SP final reach, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information designating child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 215(c2), in the child table WD0 for common pattern output used in the SP final reach winning epilogue part, the time of the pattern output portion in the SP final reach winning epilogue part is subdivided for frame lamps. In addition, a grandchild table to be referenced in each time zone is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified between time ts8 and time ts9 for 5000 msec. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to correspond to the effect of producing a winning pattern as shown in (s8) and (s9) in FIG. Blink the corresponding bright white color.

At the time ts10, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp is smoothly lit in rainbow color in correspondence with the effect that the winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 136 (s10). At time ts10, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. The frame lamp keeps lighting in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is designated for times ts4 to ts7, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamps are displayed in correspondence with the effect of catching Bakuchu. The frame lamp is illuminated smoothly in rainbow colors, and furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is specified at time ts10, and the frame lamp is displayed in correspondence with the effect that the winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. Lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table used at the time of notifying the winning and the grandchild table used at the time of displaying the winning pattern are shared, so that there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. , While reducing the data capacity used for lamp control for lighting in rainbow colors, it is possible to liven up each performance with a sense of unity. As a result, while reducing the amount of data, it is possible to make the performance in the winning epilogue part more visible to the player by using the frame lamp.

In addition, in the child table WD16 of the epilogue part per SP final reach, in the effect that the character is falling, the rainbow chromatic color and the achromatic color (RGB data of "333") are alternately switched. Frame lamps are lamp controlled. As a result, by interposing the achromatic colors between the chromatic colors of the rainbow, it is possible to emphasize the fact that the player has won a big hit and congratulate the player. After that, in the production that the ally character catches the bomb, the smooth rainbow color lighting without achromatic color is executed to congratulate the player for the big win in a calm manner. be able to. As a result, the effect in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be favorably shown to the player.

[Brightness data table used in SP final reach loss epilogue part]
FIG. 216 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the SP final reach losing epilogue part.

As shown in FIG. 216(a1), in the parent table for the losing epilogue used for the losing epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). , and information designating child tables (WD17, YD17, LD17, AD17) referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 216(a2), in the child table WD17 for the unsuccessful epilogue used for the unsuccessful epilogue part of the SP final reach, for the frame lamp, the time of the unsuccessful epilogue part in the SP final reach is subdivided, and each time A grandchild table referenced in the band is specified. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD17 is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified during 200 msec of the time tu1. The effect control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W13, so that after the success/failure branch shown in FIG. to light the frame lamp in white.

Red blinking in the success/failure branch (tr54) is based on the grandchild table W10 shown in FIG. 252, and its RGB data are "888" and "444". As a result, at the time of losing, the frame lamp can be lit in white, which is darker than the red flashing at the winning/failing branch (tr54), so that the player can be suitably notified of the losing.

The grandchild table W14 is specified for 3900 msec of the time tr2. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, so that the frame lamp is set to tu1 in response to the effect that the six teammate characters are disappointed as shown in FIG. 137(u2). Lights up in a darker white color.

The rainbow lighting at the time of winning (ts4 to ts7) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data are switched at intervals of 250 msec, which are longer than the hit. Thus, when winning, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than when losing, so that the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can inform the player of winning in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, while the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more at the time of winning than at the time of losing, the lighting by the frame lamp can be made more calm at the time of losing, and as a result, the winning and losing are contrasted by the lamps. This can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, the child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, the child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, the child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and the child table WD14 of SP second half reach B are the same as the SP final reach child table WD17. In addition, the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode at the time of losing based on the grandchild table W14. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W14 for 5800 msec in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, while in the SP final reach it takes 3900 msec. Meanwhile, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W14. In this way, while the grandchild table used for lamp control at the time of losing is shared among a plurality of different leeches, the time for lamp control can be varied by referring to the grandchild table. Thus, in the child table used for each of a plurality of different reaches, the reference time can be changed while using a common grandchild table W4 without preparing a grandchild table dedicated to failure in each of a plurality of different reaches. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control and to vary the time for which the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode corresponding to the failure. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the loss in a suitable manner in each of the plurality of reach.

At time tu3, grandchild table W15 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to the effect that a failure is reported as shown in FIG. 137 (u3) and the screen turns dark. .

At time tu4, grandchild table W21 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W21, so as to correspond to the effect that the normal screen as shown in FIG. 138 (u4) is displayed. to turn it on. Further, at time tu4, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in relief part]
FIG. 217 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the relief part. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD18 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 217, in the child table WD18 of the frame lamp, the time of the relief per part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time zone is specified.

For example, at time tv1 of 1980 msec, grandchild table W16 is specified. The grandchild table W16 corresponds to the grandchild table W16 for the frame lamp in the single luminance data table per remedy shown in FIG. 254, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 254, in the grandchild table W16, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, "D00" is specified for each lamp in the first 30 msec, and each lamp is specified in the next 30 msec. "B00" is specified for the lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W16 so as to correspond to the relief effect shown in FIG. 139 (v1), and lights the frame lamp in red.

In this way, from the lighting mode of the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W21 lastly specified in each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used at the time of failure, the child table WD18 used at the time of relief is displayed first. By switching to the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the designated grandchild table W16, the frame lamp lights up even brighter. As a result, since the frame lamp lights more brightly than the state after the notification of the loss at the time of the relief hit, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 makes it easier for the player to understand the notification of the loss and the subsequent notification of the relief hit. I can show you.

In the present embodiment, once the frame lamp lights up in yellow corresponding to the normal background after the loss is announced, and furthermore, at the time of the relief hit, the frame lamp lights up brighter in red corresponding to the relief effect. there were. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, at the end of each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used at the time of failure, the grandchild table W15 is designated, and "111" is designated as the last luminance data (RGB data). may be As a result, the frame lamp is turned off in the white system at the end of the losing time. Furthermore, "AAA" may be specified as the first luminance data (RGB data) in the grandchild table W16 specified first of the child table WD18 used at the time of repair. As a result, the frame lamp lights up brightly in the white system at the beginning of the relief hit after the loss notification. In this way, at the time of a relief hit, the frame lamp is lit in the same color (white) as the state after the loss notification and brighter than the state after the loss notification. It is possible to show the information and the subsequent relief winning information in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

At time tv2 of 700 msec, grandchild table W17 is specified. The grandchild table W17 corresponds to the grandchild table W17 for the frame lamp in the 2 luminance data table per remedy shown in FIG. 255 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 255, in the grandchild table W17, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, white-based data such as "AAA" and "DDD" are displayed for each lamp at intervals of 30 msec. is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W17 to light the frame lamp in white in correspondence with the white-out effect shown in FIG. 139 (v2).

A grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec between time tv3 and time tv4. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink in white in correspondence with the pattern output effects shown in FIGS. 140(v3) and (v4).

The grandchild table W1 is designated at time tv5, which is the last part of the repair per part. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, so as to correspond to the pattern output effect shown in FIG. . At time tv5, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. The frame lamp keeps lighting in rainbow colors.

[Brightness data table used in the re-lottery part]
FIG. 218 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the re-lottery part. As shown in FIG. 218, in the parent table of the luminance data table used for the re-lottery part, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). Information designating child tables (WD19, YD19, LD19, AD19) referred to during lamp control is stored.

(Luminance data table used before prompting)
FIG. 219 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (before prompting the operation). As shown in FIG. 219, as the child table WD19 of the frame lamp, a child table used before the pattern starts to move and a child table used after the pattern starts to move are prepared. In each child table of these re-lottery parts, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time zone is specified.

FIG. 219(a) shows a child table that is used before the pattern starts to move. For example, between times tA6 and tA8, a grandchild table is specified for turning off the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, so that as shown in FIGS. Before the moves, the frame lamp is turned off.

In this way, after the frame lamp is once extinguished, the frame lamp is lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the re-lottery performance in which the pattern starts to move. This can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

FIG. 219(b) shows a child table that is used after the pattern starts to move. Grandchild table W19 is specified at times tA9 and tA10. The grandchild table W19 corresponds to the grandchild table W19 for frame lamps in the re-lottery effect luminance data table shown in FIG. 257 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 257, in the grandchild table W19, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at intervals of 60 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19 to correspond to the effect that the symbol "2" is reduced as shown in FIGS. Flash the frame lamp in red.

The grandchild table W20 is specified at times tA11 to tA46. The grandchild table W20 corresponds to the grandchild table W20 for frame lamps in the re-lottery effect luminance data table shown in FIG. 258 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 258, in the grandchild table W20, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at intervals of 30 msec, which are shorter than those in the grandchild table W20, as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. It is The effect control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W20 to correspond to the effect that the symbols change at high speed as shown in FIGS. Makes the frame lamp flash rapidly in red.

(Brightness data table used when the design is promoted after the operation is promoted)
FIG. 220 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp in the brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (symbol promotion after operation promotion). The frame lamp child table WD20 shown in FIG. 220 is a continuation of the frame lamp child table WD19 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 220, in the child table WD20 of the frame lamp, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time zone is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified during 5000 msec from time tB1 to tB4. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, and as shown in FIGS. The frame lamp is flashed in white in correspondence with the performance of the pattern output such that the pattern of is enlarged and displayed.

The grandchild table W18 is specified at times tB5 to tB9. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, so that the symbol "3" as shown in FIGS. The frame lamp is blinked in rainbow colors in correspondence with the effect that the pattern of "3" is determined after the pattern is shaken and displayed.

Note that the flashing of the rainbow color by lamp control during the time tB5 to tB9 is more intense than the smooth rainbow color lighting by the lamp control based on the grandchild table W1. For example, during times tB5 to tB9, the light flashes more violently than the rainbow-colored smooth lighting. During time tB5 to tB9, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. Based on this, the frame lamp keeps blinking in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table WD20 of the re-lottery part, as a ramp control when the pattern is finally decided after the re-lottery, the rainbow The frame lamp lights up in color, but when the pattern of “2” is promoted by a re-lottery and replaced by the pattern of “3”, the blinking of the rainbow color at time tB5 to tB9 is once in the epilogue part of the winning “2”. The lighting mode is more intense than the smooth rainbow-colored lighting when the symbol is temporarily stopped. As a result, the player can effectively congratulate the promotion of winning symbols in the re-lottery by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

In addition, when the pattern starts to move due to the re-lottery effect with the light off, and the pattern is displayed in a swinging manner, the smooth rainbow color is displayed based on the luminance data (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild table W19) corresponding to the re-lottery effect. has a different lighting mode, and the frame lamp blinks in red. This prevents the player from misunderstanding that the temporarily stopped winning pattern in the winning epilogue part has been decided due to the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 159(B7) to (B9), the frame lamp is designed to blink in rainbow color when the effect is started such that the symbol "3" is shaken and then the symbol is confirmed. Therefore, it is easy for the designer to decide when to start blinking the frame lamp in rainbow colors.

159(B7), the blinking of the rainbow color when the symbol "3" is shaken is shown in FIGS. 159(B8) and (B9). is also taken over. In this way, during the design confirmation period, which is performed in a short period of time, it is designed so that the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as it is without preparing a luminance data table for special lamp control. Do not add extra capacity.

(Luminance data table used when the pattern is not promoted after the operation is promoted)
FIG. 221 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the luminance data table used in the re-lottery part (after operation promotion). The frame lamp child table WD21 shown in FIG. 221 is a continuation of the frame lamp child table WD19 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 221, in the frame lamp child table WD21, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified during 5000 msec from time tC1 to tC4. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, and as shown in FIGS. The frame lamp is flashed in white in correspondence with the performance of the pattern output such that the pattern of is enlarged and displayed.

The grandchild table W1 is specified at times tC5 to tC9. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, thereby producing effects such that the symbol "2" as shown in FIGS. , the frame lamp is lit smoothly in rainbow colors. During the time tC5 to tC9, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. Based on this, the frame lamp keeps lighting in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part, the grandchild table WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part is used as ramp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery part. Table W1 is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare a separate grandchild table for lighting the rainbow color for the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part, thereby reducing the amount of data used for lamp control and providing a sense of unity even for different parts (timings). A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, while reducing the data volume, the effects in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player.

Also, in the winning epilogue part, when the winning symbols are temporarily stopped, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, and after turning off the lights, the symbols start to move due to a re-lottery effect, and the symbols sway. When there is, the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow color based on the luminance data corresponding to the re-lottery effect (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild tables W19 and W20). As a result, the player is not misunderstood that the temporarily stopped winning pattern in the winning epilogue part has been determined due to the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

Also, when the symbol "2" is promoted by the re-lottery and replaced by the symbol "3", the lighting of the rainbow color during the time tB5 to tB9 is "2" without being promoted from the symbol "2" by the re-lottery. The lighting mode is more intense than the rainbow-colored smooth lighting at times tC5 to tC9 in the case where the pattern is maintained. Thus, when the winning pattern is promoted by the re-lottery, the player can effectively celebrate the promotion of the winning pattern by the re-lottery by the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and the winning pattern is promoted by the re-lottery. If not, the grandchild table W1 used in the epilogue part and common to the grandchild table W1 can be used to reduce the data volume.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 163(C7) to 163(C9), after the pattern output of the "2" pattern is completed, the "2" pattern becomes the normal size and the pattern is confirmed. Since the frame lamp is designed to light up in rainbow colors, it is easy for the designer to decide when to start lighting the frame lamp in rainbow colors.

163(C7), the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbol "3" is shaken is shown in FIGS. 163(C8) and 163(C9). is also carried over. In this way, during the design confirmation period, which is performed in a short period of time, it is designed so that the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as it is without preparing a luminance data table for special lamp control. Do not add extra capacity.

[Luminance data table used in fanfare part]
FIG. 222 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the fanfare repertoire. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD22 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 222, in the child table WD22 of the frame lamp, the time of the fanfare part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time zone is specified.

For example, at times tD1 and tE1, a grandchild table is specified for turning off the frame lamp. 160 (D1) or 164 (E1), by performing lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, the effect control CPU 120 once turns on the frame lamp before the fanfare display is performed. turn off the light.

At times tD2 and tE2, a grandchild table is specified for lighting the frame lamps in a fanfare manner. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, so that the frame lamps are displayed in a fanfare manner in correspondence with the fanfare effect as shown in FIG. 160 (D2) or FIG. 164 (E2). It is lit in the lighting mode. At times tD2 and tE2, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. Based on this, the frame lamp maintains lighting in a fanfare manner.

[Smooth rainbow luminance data table]
FIG. 223 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 223, in the parent table of the smooth rainbow luminance data table, the maximum time for lamp control of each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WS1, YS1, LS1, AS1) to be used.

FIG. 224 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 224, in the child table of the smooth rainbow luminance data table, for each game effect lamp 9, grandchild tables (W1, Y1, L1, A1) that are referenced in a predetermined time period are specified.

FIG. 225 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 225, in the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp, as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, various luminance values corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are displayed at intervals of 30 msec. Data is sparsely specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, thereby smoothly lighting the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to the determination of winning.

FIG. 226 is a diagram for explaining an example of the grandchild table for the accessory lamp and the grandchild table for the board left lamp in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 226, in the grandchild table Y1 for the role product lamp, "FFFF" data is specified for 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the "RRRR" data to be output to the role product lamp 9A. there is The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table Y1 to light the role lamp 9A in red. In the grandchild table L1 for the board left lamp, "FFFFF" data is specified for 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the "WWWWW" data to be output to the board left lamp 9B. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table L1 to light the board left lamp 9B in white.

FIG. 227 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for attacker lamps in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 227, in the grandchild table A1 for the attacker lamp, "RGB" data is output to the attacker lamp 9E, "WWW" data is output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and output is to the electric tuning lamp 9H. Various luminance data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at intervals of 30 msec as the "RGB" data. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table A1 to smoothly light each of the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric tuning lamp 9H in rainbow colors corresponding to winning determination.

[Accessory movement red flashing brightness data table]
FIG. 228 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the accessory action red blinking luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 228, in the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp, "A00" is specified in the first 40 msec as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and in the next 30 msec. "333" is specified. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W2.

[Yellow Haze Luminance Data Table]
FIG. 229 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the yellow haze luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, "440", "660", and "880" are sparsely specified at intervals of 180 msec as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3, thereby lighting the frame lamp in a yellow and hazy manner.

[Blinking white (flash white) luminance data table]
FIG. 230 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the white blinking (white flash) luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at intervals of 30 msec as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The first 30msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30msec is "AAA" (lights in white), the next 30msec is "000" (lights out), the next 30msec is "AAA" (lights in white), the next 30 msec is "000" (lights out), the next 30 msecs is "AAA" (lights up in white), and the last 30 msecs is "000" (lights out). That is, the frame lamp alternates between "turning off" and "turning on" over one cycle of 210 msec (30 msec×7), thereby blinking the frame lamp in white (white flash) a plurality of times. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4.

[Common red cut-in luminance data table]
FIG. 231 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 231, in the parent table of the common red cut-in luminance data table, the time for lamp control of each game effect lamp 9 is 3970 msec, and the child lamp control time for each game effect lamp 9 is 3970 msec. Information specifying the table (WS5, YS5, LS5, AS5) is stored.

FIG. 232 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 232, in the child table of the common red cut-in brightness data table, the grandchild tables (W5 (W5a to W5e) and Y5 (Y5a to Y5e) referenced in a predetermined time period for each game effect lamp 9 , L5 (L5a to L5e) and A5 (A5a to A5e)) are specified.

233 to 235 are diagrams for explaining an example of the grandchild table for the frame lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 233 to 235, in the grandchild tables W5a, W5b, and W5c, as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, various data are displayed only for the R data at intervals of 30 msec. Data indicating luminance is specified. In the grandchild table W5d, as the "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data indicating various luminances is specified only for the R data at intervals of 20 msec. In the grandchild table W5e, as the "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data indicating various brightnesses for only the R data is designated alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec intervals. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W5 (W5a to W5e) to light the frame lamp in red.

FIG. 236 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 236, in the grandchild tables Y5a, Y5b, and Y5c for the role-product lamp, data representing various luminances at intervals of 30 msec are specified as the data of "RRRR" to be output to the role-product lamp 9A. there is In the grandchild table Y5d, data representing various luminances at intervals of 20 msec are designated as the data of "RRRR" to be output to the role lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y5e, data indicating various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec are designated as the data of "RRRR" to be output to the character lamp 9A. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table Y5 (Y5a to Y5e) to light or blink the character lamp 9A in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in.

FIG. 237 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the board left lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 237, in the grandchild tables L5a, L5b, and L5c for the board left lamp, data representing various luminances at intervals of 30 msec are designated as the data of "WWWWW" to be output to the board left lamp 9B. there is In the grandchild table L5d, data representing various luminances at intervals of 20 msec are specified as data of "WWWW" to be output to the board left lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L5e, data indicating various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec are designated as the data of "WWWW" to be output to the panel left lamp 9B. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table L5 (L5a to L5e) to light or blink the board left lamp 9B in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in.

238 and 239 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacker lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 238 and 239, in the attacker lamp grandchild tables A5a, A5b, and A5c, "RGB" data is output to the attacker lamp 9E, and "WWW" data is output to the V attacker lamp 9F. , and as the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various luminances at intervals of 30 msec are designated. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric tuning lamp 9H, data indicating various luminances are designated only for the R data. In the grandchild table A5d, the "RGB" data output to the attack lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attack lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tuning lamp 9H are stored for 20 msec. Data are specified that indicate different intensities at intervals. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric tuning lamp 9H, data indicating various luminances are designated only for the R data. In the grandchild table A5e, the "RGB" data output to the attack lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attack lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tuning lamp 9H are stored for 30 msec. and 40 msec alternately specify data indicating various luminances. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric tuning lamp 9H, data indicating various luminances are designated only for the R data. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table A5 (A5a to A5e) to light each of the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric tuning lamp 9H in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in. or blink.

[Common green cut-in luminance data table]
FIG. 240 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 240, in the parent table of the common green cut-in luminance data table, 3970 msec is the time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and child Information specifying the table (WS6, YS6, LS6, AS6) is stored.

FIG. 241 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 241, in the child table of the common green cut-in luminance data table, the grandchild tables (W6 (W6a to W6e) and Y6 (Y6a to Y6e) referenced in a predetermined time period for each game effect lamp 9 , L6 (L6a to L6e) and A6 (A6a to A6e)) are specified.

242 to 244 are diagrams for explaining an example of the grandchild table for the frame lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 242 to 244, in the grandchild tables W6a, W6b, and W6c, as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, various data are generated for only the G data at intervals of 30 msec. Data indicating luminance is specified. In the grandchild table W6d, as the "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data indicating various luminances is specified only for the G data at intervals of 20 msec. In the grandchild table W6e, as the "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data representing various luminances are designated for only the G data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec intervals. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W6 (W6a to W6e) to light the frame lamp in green.

FIG. 245 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 245, in the grandchild tables Y6a, Y6b, and Y6c for the role-product lamps, data representing various luminances at intervals of 30 msec are designated as data of "RRRR" to be output to the role-product lamp 9A. there is In the grandchild table Y6d, data representing various luminances at intervals of 20 msec are specified as the data of "RRRR" to be output to the character lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y6e, data indicating various luminances alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec are designated as the data of "RRRR" to be output to the character lamp 9A. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table Y6 (Y6a to Y6e) to light or blink the character lamp 9A in a color corresponding to the common green cut-in.

FIG. 246 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the board left lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 246, in the grandchild tables L6a, L6b, and L6c for the left panel lamp, data representing various luminances at intervals of 30 msec are designated as data of "WWWWW" to be output to the left panel lamp 9B. there is In the grandchild table L6d, data representing various luminances at intervals of 20 msec are specified as the data of "WWWW" to be output to the board left lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L6e, data indicating various luminances alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec are designated as data of "WWWW" output to the left lamp 9B. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table L6 (L6a to L6e) to light or blink the board left lamp 9B in a color corresponding to the common 6 cut-ins.

247 and 248 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for attacker lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, in the attacker lamp grandchild tables A6a, A6b, and A6c, "RGB" data is output to the attacker lamp 9E, and "WWW" data is output to the V attacker lamp 9F. , and as the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various luminances at intervals of 30 msec are specified. In particular, as the "RGB" data to be output to the attack lamp 9E and the "RGB" data to be output to the electric tuning lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are designated only for the G data. In the grandchild table A6d, the "RGB" data output to the attack lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attack lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tuning lamp 9H are stored for 20 msec. Data are specified that indicate different intensities at intervals. In particular, as the "RGB" data to be output to the attack lamp 9E and the "RGB" data to be output to the electric tuning lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are designated only for the G data. In the grandchild table A6e, the "RGB" data output to the attack lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attack lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tuning lamp 9H are stored for 30 msec. and 40 msec alternately specify data indicating various luminances. In particular, as the "RGB" data to be output to the attack lamp 9E and the "RGB" data to be output to the electric tuning lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are designated only for the G data. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table A6 (A6a to A6e) to light each of the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric tuning lamp 9H in a color corresponding to the common green cut-in. or blink.

[Incline brightness data table without operation prompt]
FIG. 249 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the tilt luminance data table without operation prompt. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W7, "FDC" and "300" are specified alternately at intervals of 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W7.

In the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W8.

[Incline luminance data table with operation prompt]
FIG. 250 is a diagram for explaining an example of a frame lamp grandchild table in the trigger display luminance data table and the operation promotion luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 250, in the grandchild table W9, "D00" is specified at 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W9.

In the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified at intervals of 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By controlling, the frame lamp blinks in red.

[Shutter luminance data table]
FIG. 251 is a diagram for explaining an example of a frame lamp grandchild table in the shutter luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 251, in the grandchild table W11, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, the luminance data is set to decrease stepwise from "A00" to "600" at intervals of 30 msec. specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W11 to light the frame lamp in red while decreasing the luminance stepwise.

In the grandchild table W12, "600" is specified for 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W12.

[Bad brightness data table]
252 and 253 are diagrams for explaining an example of the grandchild table for the frame lamp in the missing luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified for the first 10 msec and "444" is specified for the next 190 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13.

In the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at intervals of 250 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14 to light the frame lamp in a white color darker than td1.

As shown in FIG. 253, in the grandchild table W15, "444" is specified for the first 10 msec and "111" is specified for the next 550 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , “111” is specified in the last 600000 msec (10 minutes). The effect control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamp by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W15.

[Brightness data table per remedy]
254 and 255 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the per-relief luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 254, in the grandchild table W16, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, "D00" is specified for each lamp in the first 30 msec, and each lamp is specified in the next 30 msec. "B00" is specified for the lamp. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W17.

As shown in FIG. 255, in the grandchild table W17, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, white-based data such as "AAA" and "DDD" are displayed for each lamp at intervals of 30 msec. is specified. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W18.

[Hit Confirmed Brightness Data Table]
FIG. 256 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the winning determination luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 256, in the grandchild table W18, various luminance data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, and such RGB data is specified repeatedly. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in seven colors by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W18.

[Re-lottery effect luminance data table]
257 and 258 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the re-lottery effect luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 257, in the grandchild table W19, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at intervals of 60 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W19.

As shown in FIG. 258, in the grandchild table W20, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at intervals of 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in red. Thus, the grandchild table W20 is designed to blink the frame lamp in red while switching the luminance data faster than the grandchild table W19.

[Background luminance data table]
259 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background luminance data table; FIG. As shown in FIG. 259, in the child table of the background luminance data table, for each game effect lamp 9, the grandchild table (W21 (W21a, W21b), Y21 (Y21a, Y21b), L21 ( L21a, L21b) and A21 (A21a, A21b)) are specified.

FIG. 260 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the background luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 260, in the grandchild table W21a, "550" or "880" is specified as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21a to light the frame lamp in yellow (background yellow lighting pattern).

In the grandchild table W21b, "550", "770", or "880" is specified as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21b to light the frame lamp in yellow (background yellow lighting pattern).

<Referring to luminance data>
Although the brightness data table has been described above, the brightness data table used for lamp control after the winning epilogue part will be described below while arranging it for each effect content.

268 to 271 are diagrams for explaining reference to the brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 268, during the times ts1 to ts3 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for character object actions in the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table 18 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, and after the success/failure branching shown in FIG. The frame lamp flashes in seven colors in response to the effect of falling.

During times ts3-2 to ts3-8 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the winning epilogue in the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table 4 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, thereby raising the character as shown in FIGS. The frame lamp is flashed in white corresponding to the rise of the role object, corresponding to the effect that the display that seems to have caught appears.

During the times ts4 to ts7 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the winning epilogue in the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table 1 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to correspond to effects such as catching Bakuchu as shown in FIGS. A frame lamp is lighted smoothly in rainbow colors corresponding to winning determination.

As shown in FIG. 269, during times tA1 to tA4 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for designing in the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table 4 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 so as to correspond to the effects of producing winning symbols as shown in FIGS. Flash the lamp in a bright white color corresponding to the design.

At time tA5 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for designing in the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 so as to correspond to the effect that the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

As shown in FIG. 270, during the time tA6 to tA8 of the re-lottery part, the child table before the start of movement of the symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table for extinguishing is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the designated grandchild table, and as shown in FIGS. The frame lamp is turned off once before the pattern starts to move by the production.

At times tA9 and tA10 of the re-lottery part, the child table after the start of movement of symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and ramp control based on the grandchild table W19 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19, thereby responding to effects such that the symbol "2" is reduced as shown in FIGS. 143(A9) and 144(A10). so that the frame lamp flashes in red.

During the time tA11 to tA46 of the re-lottery part, the child table after the beginning of movement of the symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and the ramp control based on the grandchild table W20 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W20, thereby responding to effects such as those shown in FIGS. to make the frame lamp flash rapidly in red.

As shown in FIG. 271, during the time tC1 to tC4 of the re-lottery part, the child table for designing in the re-lottery part is used, and the ramp control based on the grandchild table 4 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, and as shown in FIGS. The frame lamp is blinked in white in correspondence with the effect of displaying the pattern such that the pattern of "2" is displayed in an enlarged manner.

During the time tC5 to tC9 of the re-lottery part, the child table for designing in the re-lottery part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table 1 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, and after the symbol "2" as shown in FIGS. In response to such a production, the frame lamp is lit smoothly in rainbow colors.

At time tE1 of the fanfare part, the child table for the fanfare part is used, and the grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is designated. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and once before the fanfare display is performed, as shown in FIG. 160 (D1) or FIG. Turn off the frame lamp.

At time tE2 of the fanfare part, a child table for the fanfare part is used, and a grandchild table for lighting the frame lamps in a fanfare manner is specified. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and as shown in FIG. 160 (D2) or FIG. It is lit in a fanfare lighting mode.

Thus, at each timing of each production part, a predetermined child table is set, and the production control CPU 120 refers to the child table set at each timing of each production part, Luminance data (for example, RGB data) included in a designated grandchild table (luminance data table) is used to perform lamp control corresponding to the effect.

In FIGS. 268 to 271, the child table from the winning epilogue to the fanfare part via the re-lottery part when the symbol is not promoted is illustrated, but other routes, for example, the symbol from the winning epilogue is shown. 192 to 260, a predetermined child table is set at each timing of each performance part, as shown in FIGS. there is

<Description of Characteristic Portions in Ramp Control of Pachinko Game Machine 1>
Next, the features and modifications of the ramp control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be described in detail.

(Start 9)
As shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully open. I can tell you. In addition, in the inflection part of SP first half reach A and the inflection part of SP first half reach B that are executed after the start part, the shutter is fully opened and the frame lamp is turned off, corresponding to each SP first half reach The frame lamps start lighting or blinking based on the brightness data table. In this way, after the shutter is fully opened and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp starts lighting in accordance with the progress of the effect in the SP first half reach. can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Start 11, Start 14)
As shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamps are lit in yellow, blinking red, blinking white, and lighting red. While the brightness data is switched so that it lights up/blinks while changing the color and brightness, in the time ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp is red while maintaining the brightness in a reduced state. Luminance data is maintained to light. As a result, before the shutter closes, the effect in the start part is livened up by the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and when the shutter is closed, the lighting mode of the frame lamp is maintained, so that the player can enjoy the content of the effect when the shutter opens. , and as a result, it is possible to better show the performance in the subsequent fanning part to the player.

(Inciting 7, Inciting 9)
64 (b8), (b9), FIG. 74 (e7), FIG. 94 (i32), FIG. 95 (i34), FIG. 104 (n10), FIG. 123 (r25), (r27), FIG. 124 (r29), As shown in FIGS. 125 (r31), (r33), and 126 (r35), even if there is a character's dialogue but there is no caption, the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character. / Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified to blink. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering a line by means of the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, so that the player can suitably see the effect in the slamming part. can.

(Provocation 10)
When a character appears, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks. For example, as shown in FIG. 63(b4), Mumu-chan on the left side of the screen and Baku-chuu on the right side of the screen face each other. Light the left lamp and light the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the effect control CPU 120 displays a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to an effect in which Yume-chan, who is positioned on the left side of the screen as shown in FIG. 63(b5), speaks. Blink the left lamp. At time tb6, the effect control CPU 120 causes the Bakuchu positioned on the right side of the screen as shown in FIG. flash. As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be favorably expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the effect in the fanning part can be favorably played. can show people.

(Provocation 17)
The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table used in the fanning part, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow can be changed. As a result, in one child table WD9, it is possible to use the common grandchild table W3 for lamp control without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, but by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3. While reducing the data capacity, it is possible to vary the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the SP reach background. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

(Provocation 18)
The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table used in the fanning part, thereby blinking the frame lamp in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By differentiating the times for referring to the grandchild table W4 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be changed to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

(Provocation 19)
In any of the child table WD9 used in the backing part of the SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the backing part of the SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the backing part of the SP final reach, a plurality of mutually different In order to change the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing another grandchild table for each timing, SP reach is achieved while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control in a plurality of reach performances. It is possible to change the time to turn on the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of . Similarly, in the child table WD2 used in the inflection part of the SP first half reach A and the child table WD5 used in the inflection part of the SP first half reach B, different grandchild tables may be prepared for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be changed. good too.

(Provocation 20)
Child table WD2 used in the first half of the SP Reach A boost part, Child table WD5 used in the first half SP Reach B boost part, Child table WD9 used in the SP second half Reach A boost part, SP second half Reach B boost part In both the child table WD12 used and the child table WD15 used in the final reach part of the SP, a common grandchild table W4 is used without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control and change the number of white flashes. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

(Inciting cut-in 1)
The luminance data of the lamp control in the button display for the cut-in effect and the cut-in effect (RGB data in the grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) is the frame lamp in the same place as the lamp control in the fanning part of the SP final reach. Designed to use. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lighting/blinking of unnecessary lamps from being mixed in, and to prevent the beauty from being spoiled, and to provide a suitable effect in the fanning part.

(Yes or No 13)
In the SP ready-to-win performance in which no operation promotion is performed to prompt the player to operate in the win/fail branch, the player is presented with a performance as if the performance had stopped by keeping the sound muted and the frame lamps lit in white. This allows the player to easily understand the success/fail branch (decision timing). On the other hand, in the SP ready-to-win effect in which operation promotion is performed to prompt the player to operate at the success/fail branch, the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the sound (BGM) corresponding to the ready-to-win are output, and further, the operation promotion is performed. By switching the grandchild table a plurality of times to control the frame lamps so as to correspond to , the timing of deciding whether or not to win can be favorably produced by the lighting modes of the frame lamps. In this way, the decision timing of the success/failure branching can be favorably produced by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether the operation prompting is performed or not at the success/failure branching.

(Yes or No 15)
In the child table WD9 in reach A in the second half of the SP, there is no operation prompt, and after the frame lamp blinks in white based on the grandchild table W7, the frame lamp lights up in white based on the grandchild table W8. Specifically, in the success/failure branching in the inflection part of the reach A in the second half of the SP where no operation promotion is performed, the last luminance data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W7, "FDC" (white lighting), is used. In addition, since the luminance data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the winning/failing branch (decision timing) without excessively increasing the data capacity used for lamp control. can.

(Yes or No 17)
In the child table WD15 in the SP final reach, as shown in FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. is switched one after another such as white flashing, red lighting, red flashing, etc., and it is possible to liven up the effect of promoting the operation for the player at the winning/failing branch (decision timing).

(Yes or No 20)
In the child table WD4 of the SP first half reach A, the child table WD7 of the SP first half reach B, the child table WD11 of the SP second half reach A, and the child table WD14 of the SP second half reach B, similarly to the SP final reach child table WD17, Based on the grandchild table W14, the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode at the time of losing. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W14 for 5800 msec in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, while in the SP final reach it takes 3900 msec. Meanwhile, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W14. In this way, while the grandchild table used for lamp control at the time of losing is shared among a plurality of different leeches, the time for lamp control can be varied by referring to the grandchild table. Thus, in the child table used for each of a plurality of different reaches, the reference time is changed while using a common grandchild table W4 without preparing a grandchild table dedicated to failure in each of a plurality of different reaches. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control and to vary the time for which the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode corresponding to the failure. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the loss in a suitable manner in each of the plurality of reach.

(Yes or No 21)
From the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W26 lastly specified in each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used at the time of failure, the grandchild first specified in the child table WD18 used for each remedy By switching to the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the table W16, the frame lamp lights in the same color (yellow) and brighter. As a result, at the time of the relief hit, the frame lamp lights in the same color (yellow) as the state after the loss notification and brighter than the state after the loss notification. It is possible to show the subsequent relief winning notification in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

(Epilogue 9)
When the character object rises, the effect control CPU 120 gradually raises the character object lamp 9A based on the child table corresponding to the movement of the character object on the character object lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table. The brightness of the character lamp 9A is lowered stepwise so as to turn off the lamp immediately. As a result, the lighting mode of the role lamp 9A does not make the player conscious of the rise of the role, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp shows that the player has reached the second half reach A of the SP. It is possible to draw the player's attention.

(Epilogue 26)
In the winning epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table used when announcing a win and the grandchild table used when displaying a winning pattern, rainbow color While reducing the data capacity used for lamp control for lighting with , each performance can be livened up by a performance with a sense of unity. As a result, while reducing the amount of data, it is possible to make the performance in the winning epilogue part more visible to the player by using the frame lamp.

(Epilogue 27)
In the child tables WD21 and WD22 of the re-lottery part, a grandchild table W1 is used in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13 and WD16 of the winning epilogue part as ramp control when the symbols are finally determined after the re-lottery. is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare a separate grandchild table for lighting the rainbow color for the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part, and while reducing the data volume used for lamp control, there is a sense of unity even in different parts (timings). A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, while reducing the data volume, the effects in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player.

(Re-lottery production 2)
As shown in FIG. 142 (tA6), in the winning epilogue part, when the winning pattern is temporarily stopped while the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color, before executing the re-lottery effect, the frame lamp is once turned off. Since the frame lamp is lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the re-lottery performance after it is turned off, the player can be easily informed of the start of the re-lottery performance by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

(Re-lottery effect 7, re-lottery effect 14, re-lottery effect 16)
In the winning epilogue part, when the winning pattern is temporarily stopped, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color, the re-lottery effect is executed after turning off, and when the pattern is swaying, the re-lottery effect is performed. (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp flashes in red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow color. As a result, the player is not misunderstood that the temporarily stopped winning pattern in the winning epilogue part has been determined due to the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbols "3" and "2" are displayed in a swinging manner is carried over during the period in which the symbols are confirmed. In this way, during the design confirmation period, which is performed in a short period of time, it is designed so that the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as it is without preparing a luminance data table for special lamp control. Do not add extra capacity.

(Re-lottery production 19)
In the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part, the grandchild table W1 is used in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part for ramp control when the symbols are finally determined after the re-lottery. be done. As a result, there is no need to prepare a separate grandchild table for lighting the rainbow color for the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part, and while reducing the data volume used for lamp control, there is a sense of unity even in different parts (timings). A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, while reducing the data volume, the effects in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player.

(Re-lottery production 20)
In the child table WD20 of the re-lottery part, frame lamps are lit in the same rainbow color as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part as lamp control when the pattern is finally determined after the re-lottery. However, when the symbol "2" is promoted to the symbol "3" by a re-lottery, the lighting of the rainbow color from time tB7 to tB9 is temporarily suspended in the symbol "2" during the winning epilogue part. The lighting mode is more intense than the smooth rainbow-colored lighting in the case. As a result, the player can effectively congratulate the promotion of winning symbols in the re-lottery by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

<Detailed description of lamp control>
Next, with regard to the above-described lamp control, features that should be mentioned in particular will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263. FIG.

[Comparison of lamp control between winning and losing]
261 to 263 are diagrams for explaining the comparison of the lamps at the time of winning and at the time of losing.

First, with reference to FIG. 261, ramp control at the time of failure will be described. As shown in FIG. 261, the ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 at the end of the fanning part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B. In the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W8, so that the frame lamp is lit in white in correspondence with the effect of the win/fail branch (decision timing). Also, at the end of the fanning part in the SP final reach, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10. In the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp.The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W10. By doing so, the frame lamp is flashed in red in correspondence with the performance of the success/failure branch (decision timing).

After that, in the losing epilogue part via the inflection part in each of the SP first half reach A, B, SP second half reach A, B, and SP final reach, first, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W13. . In the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified for the first 10 msec and "444" is specified for the next 190 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, and after the winning/failing branch, illuminates the frame lamp in white in correspondence with the effect that the friend character is defeated in the ready-to-win effect.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W13, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W14. In the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at intervals of 250 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, so that the frame lamp is lit in a darker white color than the white light based on the grandchild table W13, corresponding to the effect that the ally characters are disappointed. Let

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W14, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W15. In the grandchild table W15, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, "444" is specified in the first 10 msec, "111" is specified in the next 550 msec, and the last 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) specifies “111”. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15 to turn off the frame lamp in response to the effect that a failure is reported and the screen turns dark.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W15, as described with reference to FIG. Lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W26 that was also used in . In the grandchild table W26, data corresponding to a yellow pattern corresponding to the normal background is designated as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W26 to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the normal background (background yellow lighting pattern), similarly to the start part before reach.

Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the ramp control at the time of winning will be described in the case of transitioning to the winning epilogue part via the swing parts in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP latter half reach A and B.

As shown in FIG. 262, the ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 at the end of the fanning part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W8, so that the frame lamp is lit in white in correspondence with the effect of the win/fail branch (decision timing).

After that, in the hit epilogue part via the fanning part in each of the SP first half reach A, B and the SP second half reach A, B, first, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W19. In the grandchild table W19, "FFF" is specified for the first 40 msec, and "333" is specified for the next 30 msec, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19 to make the frame lamp flash in white in correspondence with the effect that the teammate character wins.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W19, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1. In the grandchild table W1, various luminance data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at intervals of 30 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, thereby smoothly lighting the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to the determination of winning.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21. In the grandchild table W21, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, "AAA" is specified for each lamp in turn at intervals of 20 msec, and finally for each lamp at 600000 msec (10 minutes). "000" is specified. A performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21 to correspond to the performance of giving a winning pattern, and lights the frame lamp in bright white corresponding to the appearance of the pattern.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21, the lamp control is performed again based on the grandchild table W1. A performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on a grandchild table W1 to smoothly light a frame lamp in rainbow colors in correspondence with performance such that a winning pattern is finally displayed in the center of the screen.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the ramp control at the time of winning will be described in the case of transitioning to the winning epilogue part via the backing part in the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 263, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10 at the end of the fanning part in the SP final reach. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W10 to make the frame lamp blink in red in correspondence with the effect of the winning/failing branch (decision timing).

After that, in the winning epilogue part via the fanning part in the SP final reach, first, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W20. In the grandchild table W20, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec. 333” is designated, and such RGB data is repeatedly designated. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W20 to make the frame lamp blink in seven colors in correspondence with the effect that the accessory falls.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W20, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, thereby smoothly lighting the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to the determination of winning.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21. A performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21 to correspond to the performance of giving a winning pattern, and lights the frame lamp in bright white corresponding to the appearance of the pattern.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21, the lamp control is performed again based on the grandchild table W1. A performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on a grandchild table W1 to smoothly light a frame lamp in rainbow colors in correspondence with performance such that a winning pattern is finally displayed in the center of the screen.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263, characteristic portions will be described below.

(Yes or No 19)
As shown in FIG. 261, in the case of moving to the missing epilogue part via the fanning part in each of the SP first half reach A, B and SP latter half reach A, B, the final luminance data (RGB data) in the fanning part is In contrast to "FDC", the first luminance data (RGB data) in the missing epilogue part are "888" and "444". As a result, when losing in each of SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, it is possible to light the frame lamp in white more darkly while maintaining the same color using white lighting in the success/fail branch. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately inform the player that the game has been lost. Also, when transitioning to the missing epilogue part via the fanning part in the SP final reach, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the fanning part contains "D00", whereas the first brightness in the missing epilogue part Data (RGB data) is "888" or "444". As a result, when the SP final reach is lost, the frame lamp can be illuminated in white, which is darker than the red flashing in the success/fail branch, so that the player can be suitably notified of the loss.

(Accessory action 1)
As shown in FIGS. 262 and 263, in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps are smoothly illuminated in rainbow color based on the grandchild table W1, and the RGB data thereof are switched at intervals of 30 msec. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 261, at the time of losing, the frame lamp lights up in white and dimly based on the grandchild table W14, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which is longer than at the time of winning. Thus, when winning, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than when losing, so that the lighting mode of the frame lamp can inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the win has been achieved. Furthermore, while the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more at the time of winning than at the time of losing, the lighting by the frame lamp can be made more calm at the time of losing, and as a result, the winning and losing are contrasted by the lamps. This can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Accessory action 2)
As shown in FIG. 263, in the SP final reach hit epilogue part, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W20 in the effect that the character is falling, and the rainbow chromatic color and achromatic color (" 333” RGB data) are alternately lit. As a result, by interposing the achromatic colors between the chromatic colors of the rainbow, it is possible to emphasize the fact that the player has won a big hit and to congratulate the player. After that, in the effect that the ally character wins, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W21, and the frame lamp lights up in a smooth rainbow color without achromatic colors to indicate that a big hit has been achieved. It is possible to execute an effect that congratulates the player in a calm manner. As a result, the effect in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be favorably shown to the player.

(Regarding the shaking pattern of the design)
Here, with reference to FIG. 264, a detailed description will be given of how the pattern swings. FIG. 264 is a diagram for explaining how the pattern swings. During the pattern fluctuation period in the fanning part and the re-lottery part described above, the decorative patterns move like the first to third modes shown in FIG. It moves like 3 modes. Specifically, the first mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decoration pattern is positioned at the center position of the screen. The second mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative design is positioned above the first mode. The third mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decoration design is located on the lower side than the first mode.

In addition, the first mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decoration pattern is positioned at the center position of the screen when viewed from the front. The second mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is positioned to face left more than in the first mode by rotating rightward about the center of the decorative pattern as the vertical axis. The third mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is positioned more rightward than in the first mode by rotating left about the center of the decorative pattern as the vertical axis.

(Modified example of re-lottery effect)
FIG. 265 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the re-lottery effect. FIG. 265(A) is a detailed explanatory diagram of the re-lottery effect with 7 symbols. Also, FIG. 265(B) is a timing chart of each re-lottery effect. As shown in FIG. 265(A), after the pattern is enlarged and displayed as shown in (D1) and (D2), the pattern is reduced as shown in (D3) and (D4). After that, as shown in (D5), the pattern becomes the normal size. Then, as shown in (D6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect, and the re-lottery effect starts. After that, as shown in (D7), there is a swinging period in which the pattern swings up and down. After that, the "7" pattern is reduced and displayed from (D8) to (D9).

After that, as shown in (D10), a button image and a time gauge are faintly displayed under the "7" symbol. After that, as shown in (D11), the button image and the time gauge are clearly displayed with the symbol "7" displayed. Then, as shown in (F12), the time gauge decreases with the lapse of time. The time gauge is a display showing the effective period of button operation. When the player operates the push button 31B from the state of (D12), as shown in (D13) to (D20), "7" fluctuates at high speed, and the light display and sharp display are repeated. After (D20), similar high-speed fluctuations are repeated.

As shown in FIG. 265(B), as shown in the timing chart of each re-lottery effect, the pattern feeding period when the re-lottery effect in which the symbols fluctuate at high speed by button operation is executed is the same in any re-lottery effect. be. Here, the re-lottery effect includes a first re-lottery effect that changes from even-numbered patterns to odd-numbered patterns, a second re-lottery effect that does not change from even-numbered patterns to even-numbered patterns, and a third re-lottery effect that does not change from 7 patterns to 7 patterns. There is a production. For example, in the first re-lottery effect, when the symbol feed effect is started immediately after the button can be operated, there is a period (t1) during which the decorative pattern sways after the symbol feed period ends, and then the pattern is determined. do.

In addition, in the second re-lottery effect, when the button is operated after t2 from the timing when the button can be operated and the pattern feed effect is started, there is a swing period (t1-t2) of the decorative pattern after the pattern feed period ends, The design is then finalized. In addition, in the third re-lottery performance, when the button is operated after t1 from the timing when the button can be operated and the pattern feed performance is started, there is no fluctuation period of the decorative pattern after the pattern feed period ends, and the pattern is fixed as it is. . In this way, no matter what timing the button is operated, the pattern feeding period is constant, and the period from the pattern shaking period to the finalization of the pattern absorbs the time until the button operation. . Such a relationship is the same when the button operation is executed in any of the first re-lottery effect to the third re-lottery effect.

[Regarding re-lottery effects 26-28]
Characteristic parts in the re-lottery part are numbered and explained.

(Modified example of re-lottery effect)
FIG. 266 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the re-lottery effect. As shown in (K1) to (K3) in FIG. 266, even if the button is operated at any timing of the success/failure determination scene, the decoration pattern behaves in the same manner after the whiteout. Specifically, as shown in (K1), when the button is operated immediately after the promotion display is displayed, the character movement and hit epilogue part are executed, and the epilogue part as shown in (K4) is executed. Designing is done. After that, after 5 seconds in the pattern shaking period, as shown in (K5), the three patterns are facing the front.

In addition, as shown in (K2), when the button is operated one second after the promotion display is displayed in the win/fail decision scene, the character movement and winning epilogue part are executed, and as shown in (K4) The pattern is drawn in the epilogue part. After that, after 4 seconds in the pattern shaking period, as shown in (K6), the three patterns are turned leftward from the front. In addition, as shown in (K3), when the button is operated 2 seconds after the promotion display is displayed in the win/fail decision scene, the character movement and winning epilogue part are executed, and as shown in (K4) The pattern is drawn in the epilogue part. After that, after 3 seconds in the pattern shaking period, as shown in (K7), the three patterns are turned to the right side from the front.

In this way, at the first operation timing, the symbol is in the front position after the symbol shaking period, at the second operation timing, after the symbol shaking period, the symbol is at the leftward position, and at the third operation timing, After the swinging period of the pattern, the pattern may be in a position facing the right side. However, even if the direction of the pattern changes during the swinging period of the pattern depending on the operation timing, after that, as shown in (K8) to (K17) as a common effect, the pattern is rotated and reduced after the whiteout. A lottery production is executed. Then, after (K17), the symbol feed effect is executed. In addition, in FIG. 266, the description is made using odd-numbered symbols, but even-numbered symbols are also given the same effect.

(Re-lottery production 26)
As shown in FIG. 266, when the image showing the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, regardless of the timing of the operation, the re-lottery effect is executed thereafter. In the time until a predetermined timing is reached, there may be provided a period of symbol fluctuation for absorbing the scale (symbol fluctuation period from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect accompanied by a whiteout as shown from (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, even if the stick controller 31A is operated at any timing, the pattern is once displayed in a swinging manner, and then the common effect accompanied by the whiteout is executed, and then the re-lottery effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the movement of the pattern from giving a sense of incompatibility, and it is possible to suitably show a series of presentations.

(Re-lottery production 27)
From the whiteout screen until the re-lottery effect is executed, any reach may be common. According to this, the data capacity of the effect data can be reduced.

(Re-lottery production 28)
The movement of the symbol after the whiteout screen may be an extension of the movement of the symbol before the whiteout screen. For example, if the movement of the pattern in front of the white-out screen is a swinging movement on the spot on the front side and the back side with the axis rotation centered on the vertical direction of the pattern, the movement after the white-out screen is It may be a motion of rotating clockwise around the vertical direction of the pattern while enlarging it. According to this, by displaying the whiteout between the extended movements of the same axis rotation, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the movement of the pattern from being uncomfortable, and the series of performances can be shown favorably. be able to.

(Re-lottery production 29)
Among the plurality of SP reach, there are those that are not notified of operation promotion such as button operation in the branch at the time of determining whether or not to be controlled in an advantageous state. With such SP reach, there is no scale deviation associated with the operation. However, even in such an SP ready-to-win game, a re-lottery effect similar to that for an SP ready-to-win game in which scale deviation occurs may be executed. According to this, even if there is only one re-lottery effect, it is possible to prevent discomfort from being caused by the common effect regardless of the presence or absence of scale deviation. In addition, the data capacity can be reduced by using one re-lottery effect.

(Re-lottery production 30)
As shown in FIG. 266, the timing is set so that the movement of the pattern after the white-out screen is an extension of the movement of the pattern before the white-out screen. For example, the movement of the symbol in front of the whiteout screen is one of a series of movements in which the symbol moves from the right position (K3) via the front position (K5) to the left position (K6). is designed to be In other words, when the swing of the pattern is one of a series of actions in which it rotates clockwise, a white-out is executed by a re-lottery effect, and then the pattern is enlarged and rotated clockwise. According to this, it is possible to prevent the movement of the symbols from giving a sense of incompatibility by a series of movements of the symbols rotating to the right from the period of the fluctuation of the symbols to the re-lottery effect.

[Regarding re-lottery effects 21-25]
Characteristic parts in the re-lottery part are numbered and explained.

(Modified example of re-lottery effect)
FIG. 267 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the re-lottery effect. (L1) is a diagram in which the operation is performed at an early timing after the display of the action prompt is displayed during the symbol feeding period. (L2) is a diagram when the operation is performed at a timing later than (L1) after the action prompting display is displayed. (L3) is a diagram when the operation is performed at a later timing than (L2) after the action prompting display is displayed. Then, as shown in (L1) to (L3) in FIG. 267, during the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery effect, the symbols are drawn out in the same way regardless of the timing of the button operation. After that, the whiteout is sandwiched between the decorative patterns, and then the decorative pattern stops after making the same movement. Specifically, as shown in (L1), when the button is operated immediately after the action prompting display is displayed, the pattern output is executed as shown in (L4) to (L5), and then the pattern is displayed. is the normal size. After that, as shown in (L6), the symbols start to sway, and after a predetermined period of time, the three symbols turn to the right rather than the front as shown in (L7).

Further, as shown in (L2), when the button is operated at a timing later than (L1) after the action prompting display is displayed, the patterns shown in (L4) to (L5) are executed. After that, the pattern becomes the normal size. After that, as shown in (L6), the symbols begin to sway, and after the lapse of a shorter symbol sway period than in (L1), the three symbols are in a state in which the 3 symbols are directed more to the right than the front as shown in (L8). Become. Further, as shown in (L3), when the button is operated at a timing later than (L2) after the action prompting display is displayed, the patterns shown in (L4) to (L5) are executed. After that, the pattern becomes the normal size. After that, as shown in (L6), the swinging of the pattern is started, and after the lapse of a shorter pattern swinging period than in (L2), the three patterns as shown in (L9) face the front.

In this way, at the first operation timing, the symbol faces right after the symbol shaking period, and at the second operation timing, the symbol faces left after the symbol shaking period, and at the third operation timing. In this case, the pattern may be positioned facing the front after the swinging period of the pattern. However, even if the direction of the pattern changes during the swinging period of the pattern depending on the operation timing, as shown in (J1) to (J10), the pattern is rotated and reduced after the whiteout as a common effect. is executed. After that, as shown in (J11) to (J17), the symbols stop after a period of fluctuation of the symbols. In addition, in FIG. 267, the description is made using the odd-numbered symbols, but the same effects are executed even in the even-numbered symbols.

(Re-lottery production 21)
In the modified example, as shown in (L1) to (L3) in FIG. 267, an action prompting display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed during symbol feeding of the re-lottery effect. When the player operates the push button 31B during the period in which the action prompting display is displayed, the common symbol appearance effects shown in (L4) to (L6) are executed. Regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, a common design effect is executed by enlarging and reducing the design as shown in (L4) to (L5). After that, during the period of design fluctuation, the design is shaken. The swinging period of the pattern differs depending on the operation timing of the button. Therefore, after the swinging period of the symbol, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbol faces right, at the second operation timing, the symbol faces left, and at the third operation timing. , The pattern may be in a position facing the front. However, at any operation timing, a white-out effect is interposed as a common effect from (J1) to (J18) thereafter, and the effect of swinging the pattern after rotating the pattern and reducing the pattern is executed. According to this, the pattern can be neatly stopped by performing a common performance regardless of when the push button 31B is operated at any timing, and a series of performances can be shown favorably.

(Re-lottery production 22)
When the push button 31B is operated at the first timing during the valid period of operation, after notification of whether or not to be promoted is executed, a display with a swinging decorative pattern is displayed (example of no operation in FIG. 267 (L3) ). When the push button 31B was operated at the second timing earlier than the first timing during the operation effective period, the display of the swinging decorative pattern was earlier than the first timing after the notification of whether or not to be promoted. (The operation in FIG. 267 (L2) is an example of the second timing). When the push button 31B was operated at the third timing earlier than the second timing during the valid period of operation, the display of the swinging decorative pattern was earlier than the second timing after the notification of whether or not to be promoted. (The operation in FIG. 267 (L1) is an example of the first timing). In this way, even if the push button 31B is operated at any timing, the length of the performance can be absorbed by the fluctuation time of the pattern. By performing a common performance after that, the pattern can be neatly stopped, and a series of performances can be favorably shown.

(Re-lottery production 23)
As shown in FIG. 267, as a common effect, after the white-out is executed, a different effect from the previous patterns is executed in which the swinging decorative pattern is rotated while being enlarged. According to this, regardless of the position of the pattern in the shaking of the pattern of the scale absorption, by executing a different mode of production after the whiteout is interposed, the flow of the production until the pattern is stopped. It can be made not to give a sense of incongruity.

(Re-lottery production 24)
As shown in FIG. 267, during the swinging period of the pattern, after the pattern swings to the back side from (J10) to (J12), the pattern swings to the front side from (J13) to (J14) to return to the initial position. Change. After that, after the pattern swings to the front side from (J15) to (J16), the pattern swings to the back side from (J17) to (J18) to change to the initial position. Such a series of movements may be repeated multiple times. However, during the period in which the pattern is determined, it is designed so that the pattern is always positioned at the initial position in which the pattern faces the front as shown in (J18). According to this, the symbols can be determined and stopped in a manner that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

(Re-lottery production 25)
It is designed so that the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow color at the white-out timing of (J1) in FIG. 267 . The timing of (J1) is an effect executed as a common effect regardless of the operation timing. By setting the location where such a common effect is executed as the starting point for changing the game effect lamp 9, the designer can easily determine the start timing. Note that the timing (J2) at which the common start display is started may be used as the start opportunity instead of the timing (J1), and the start opportunity may be any timing of the commonly executed effects.

<Main configuration and effects>
Technical effects obtained by various configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are individually listed below.

(F2019-116)
A game machine (for example, a game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a movable body (for example, a character, a movable body 32);
a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
It is possible to execute a notification effect (for example, a notification effect to notify whether or not a big hit will be achieved) for informing whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification effect includes an introduction part (for example, a fanning part) until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and a success/failure notification part (for example, a winning epilogue part) in which the success or failure is notified. a winning/failure notification part that notifies a big hit by moving the role object), and an epilogue part (for example, a winning epilogue part) that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state after the winning/failure notification. consists of
In the introductory part, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and the first character whose dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to the dialogue sound is an ally character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 115 (r2)),
The display means preferentially displays the introductory display of the prompting display that prompts a specific action to the effect display in the introductory part at the timing of transition from the introductory part to the win/fail notification part, thereby making the effect display difficult to see. state, and then perform a promotion display in a state where the effect display is visible (for example, examples shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) to 132 (r54)),
In the success/failure reporting part of the reporting effect, which is executed when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body moves from a first position (for example, a retracted position) to a second position on the front side of the display means. advance to a position (e.g., advance position) (e.g., the example shown in FIG. 133);
The display means is
displaying an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, ending the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position; Display corresponding to the epilogue part (for example, examples shown in FIGS. 173 and 174),
In the epilogue part, the final dialogue subtitle is displayed for the final dialogue sound emitted by the character. Examples shown in FIGS. 134 to 136),
In the epilogue part, the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sounds emitted by the characters is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sounds emitted by the characters in the introductory part (for example, the example shown in FIG. 175). .

Specifically, in each SP reach as a fanning part, the first character to say a line is an ally character (for example, FIG. 115 (r2)). According to this, it is possible for the player to accurately recognize the teammate character at the start of the SP reach. In addition, at the timing of transition from the fanning part to the success/failure notification part, the introduction image of the trigger display prompting the trigger operation is preferentially displayed with respect to the display of the fanning part, so that the fanning part's effect display becomes invisible after that. The image of operating the trigger button and the effect in the fanning part can be visually recognized (for example, FIG. 131 (r48) to (r51)). According to this, the introductory image gives an impact, and the introductory image becomes the image of the trigger button, so that the effect of the fanning part can be confirmed, so that the player can be excited. In addition, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the display from being spoiled in the production flow of the background display of the hit epilogue part until the evacuation of the character is completed. In addition, since the pattern is enlarged and displayed after the display of the final dialogue subtitle in the hit epilogue part is completed, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from overlapping the pattern and misunderstanding that it is a message for the design. In addition, the above-mentioned agitation part for inciting the right or wrong has a production that is updated by the development in which the friendly characters and the enemy characters alternately fight (for example, SP first half reach B, SP second half reach B, etc.). In the production of such a teasing part, there is a scene in which a friendly character takes damage. In addition, in the effect of such a rousing part, the image display switching interval is shorter than that of the epilogue part, and the number of image display switching is large. According to this, it is possible to suitably show the fanning part by making the fanning part develop faster than the epilogue part. In addition, since the epilogue part, which develops slowly, is properly subtitled, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is saying and to emphasize the feeling of blessing. In addition, it is possible to convey the content of the fast moving part by changing the video first, and to prevent the development of the video from being disturbed by the auxiliary caption display. As a result, a series of presentations can be favorably shown.

(F2019-117)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, a dialog sound emitted by the character is output,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by characters and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed,
The number of lines emitted by the character differs between the first notification effect and the second notification effect,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the epilogue part of the first notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introductory part of the first notification effect. high,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the epilogue part of the second notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introductory part of the second notification effect. expensive.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, the ratio of displaying subtitles to characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of displaying subtitles to characters during SP reach, which is the inciting part. ing. According to this, by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. In addition, since there are more screen changes in the introductory part than in the epilogue part, even if subtitles are displayed, the display time will be shortened so that the display of auxiliary subtitles will not interfere with the production. , it is possible to give priority to conveying effects by switching images. Thereby, it is possible to execute a suitable effect in the fanning part.

(F2019-118)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a performance execution means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
The effect execution means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The production executing means is
A first re-lottery for displaying a first pattern in the first half part and then displaying a second pattern in the second half part among a plurality of types of re-lottery performances when it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state. It is possible to perform the production,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part after the first pattern is displayed in the first half part of the plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances. A second re-lottery effect can be executed,
Using the first pattern displayed in the epilogue part, the first re-lottery effect or the second re-lottery effect is executed,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode even during the subsequent pattern fixing period,
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol, which was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery, is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. is used to start the re-lottery effect. When the re-extraction effect is started, the "2" pattern is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" pattern. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feed performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started using the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed, and when the re-lottery performance is started, the symbol feed performance is executed using the temporarily stopped-displayed symbols. , the player can easily understand from which decorative pattern the re-lottery has started. As a result, it is possible to show the flow of a series of performances well.

(F2019-119)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a performance execution means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
The effect execution means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The production executing means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery effects, a replacement display for replacing the first pattern with another pattern after displaying the first pattern in the first half part. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect to display the second pattern in the second half part,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is to be controlled, the replacement display is performed in the first half of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first pattern is displayed again in the second half. It is possible to execute a re-lottery effect,
The first re-lottery effect is a effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the second pattern in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the first symbol in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode even during the subsequent pattern fixing period,
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol, which was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery, is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the "2" symbol is displayed. is used to start the re-lottery effect. When the re-extraction effect is started, the "2" pattern is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" pattern. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feed performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. And, during the re-lottery effect, "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1" and all the decorative patterns are sent in order, and then again "2" ” A symbol feed effect in which symbols are displayed is executed. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started by using the temporarily stopped and displayed decorative patterns, and the initially temporarily stopped and displayed decorative patterns are displayed again after the plurality of types of decorative patterns are varied. According to this, the flow of a series of presentations can be shown well by the design feeding presentation in which the final display result is not immediately displayed and all the decorative designs are shown.

(F2019-120)
A game machine (for example, a game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120),
a light emitting means (for example, a frame lamp, etc.);
A light emission control means (for example, a production control CPU 120) that controls the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data (for example, controls a frame lamp or the like using the luminance data table),
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a notification effect of notifying whether or not a big hit will be achieved) for informing whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, a normal jackpot game state without promotion) and a second advantageous state (for example, a certain variable jackpot game state with promotion) that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
It is determined that the notification effect is controlled to the advantageous state after the introductory part (for example, a fanning part) until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and after the success or failure is notified. An epilogue part (for example, a winning epilogue part) that is executed when the
The re-lottery part consists of the first half part (Figs. 142 (A6) to 156 (A46)) and the second half part (for example, Figs. 157 (B1) to 158 (B6) or Figs. 161 (C1) to 161 (C6)). and
The production executing means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, after the first pattern (for example, two patterns) is displayed in the first half of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, the first pattern is displayed in another A first re-lottery effect (for example, FIG. 142 (A6) to FIG. 156 (A46), FIG. 157 (B1 ) to FIG. 158 (B6)) can be executed,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, the replacement display is performed in the first half of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first symbol (for example, two symbols) is displayed in the second half. The second re-lottery effect (for example, FIGS. 142 (A6) to 156 (A46), FIGS. 161 (C1) to 161 (C6)) can be executed,
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, after the second pattern (for example, 7 patterns) is displayed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, the second pattern is displayed. A third re-lottery effect (for example, FIGS. 142 (A6) to 156 (A46) and FIGS. 265 (D6) to (D20)) in which repeated display is performed and the second pattern is displayed again in the second half part. is executable and
The first re-lottery effect, the second re-lottery effect and the third re-lottery effect are configured to have the same effect scale (for example, the effect scale is the same as shown in FIG. 265 (B)),
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode (for example, the frame lamp is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the smooth rainbow color lighting shown in FIG. 142 (A5). etc.),
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. The light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect (for example, switching to the brightness data table corresponding to the re-lottery effect shown in FIG. 144 (A6), and the re-lottery effect Control the frame lamp etc. using the luminance data table for lottery production),
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. (For example, from FIG. 158 (B5) onwards, from FIG. 162 (C5) onwards, the frame lamps, etc. control), and the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is continuously used to control the light emission means (for example, from FIG. 159 (B8), from FIG. In addition, the frame lamp etc. are controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the smooth rainbow color lighting),
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. (For example, after FIG. 160 (D1) and after FIG. 164 (E1), the brightness data table corresponding to the smooth rainbow lighting is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the lighting corresponding to the fanfare, and the lighting corresponding to the fanfare is switched. frame lamps and the like are controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to ).

Specifically, a pattern in which an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns) is displayed after displaying an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns), and a pattern in which an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns) is displayed and then an odd numbered pattern (for example, 3 patterns) is displayed. was provided. In addition to this, a pattern may be provided in which odd numbered symbols (eg, 7 symbols) are displayed after displaying the odd numbered symbols (eg, 7 symbols). In the effect of sending patterns from odd-numbered patterns to odd-numbered patterns, all the same odd-numbered patterns should be sent at the time of pattern sending. However, regardless of the pattern, the length of the performance during the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery performance may be designed to be the same. According to this, a suitable re-lottery effect can be achieved in any pattern without increasing the data capacity.

(F2019-121)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a performance execution means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
The effect execution means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The production executing means is
A first re-lottery for displaying a first pattern in the first half part and then displaying a second pattern in the second half part among a plurality of types of re-lottery performances when it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state. It is possible to perform the production,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part after the first pattern is displayed in the first half part of the plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances. A second re-lottery effect can be executed,
displaying the first pattern with the same or substantially the same animation when the first pattern is displayed once in the epilogue part and when the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part of the second re-lottery effect;
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode even during the subsequent pattern fixing period,
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. do.

Specifically, the designing in the parts of FIGS. 141(A1) to 142(A5) and the designing in the parts of FIGS. 161(C1) to 162(C5) are executed using substantially the same image. be done. Concretely, the same image is used for the pattern output by the "2" pattern and the effect image, and the pattern output is executed in such a manner that the background portion is different. According to this, it is possible to make the image of the pattern output substantially the same, so that it is possible to clearly show to the player that the game has not been promoted to the definite variable pattern. It should be noted that the image of the patterned portion including the background may be completely the same.

(F2019-122)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a performance execution means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
The effect execution means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The production executing means is
A first re-lottery for displaying a first pattern in the first half part and then displaying a second pattern in the second half part among a plurality of types of re-lottery performances when it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state. It is possible to perform the production,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part after the first pattern is displayed in the first half part of the plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances. A second re-lottery effect can be executed,
By changing the display mode of the first pattern to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode from the time when the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part to the time when the pattern is fixed, the first pattern is displayed. Perform a shaking display that displays the first pattern as if it is shaking,
By changing the display mode of the second symbol to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode from the display of the second symbol in the second half until the symbol confirmation period, the second symbol is displayed. Perform a shaking display that displays the second pattern as if the two patterns were shaking,
The first mode is a mode in which the player can more easily see the pattern than either the second mode or the third mode,
The production executing means is
In the re-lottery part, it is possible to execute an action prompting display that prompts the player to act,
When an action is performed at a first timing while the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-lottery effect, when a predetermined timing is reached after the effect corresponding to the first re-lottery effect is executed. displaying the second pattern in a swinging display while maintaining the swinging speed of the swinging display of the second pattern so that the second pattern is in the second mode;
When an action is performed at a second timing different from the first timing while the action promotion display is being executed in the first re-lottery effect, after the effect corresponding to the first re-lottery effect is executed. displaying the second pattern in a swinging display while maintaining the swinging speed of the swinging display of the second pattern so that the second pattern is in the third mode when the predetermined timing is reached;
When the action prompting display is executed in the first re-lottery effect, whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing, the shaking display of the second pattern is started from the predetermined timing. Display to make it difficult to see is performed, then the second pattern is again displayed in a shaking display, and then when the pattern fixing period comes, the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second pattern is maintained while the second pattern is displayed. 2 symbols are stopped and displayed in the first mode,
When the action prompting display is executed in the second re-lottery effect, if the action is performed at the first timing, the predetermined timing is reached after the effect corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is executed. displaying the first pattern in a swinging display while maintaining the swinging speed of the swinging display of the first pattern so that the first pattern is in the second mode when the first pattern is pressed,
When the action prompting display is executed in the second re-lottery effect, if the action is performed at the second timing, the predetermined timing is reached after the effect corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is executed. displaying the first pattern in a swinging display while maintaining the swinging speed of the swinging display of the first pattern so that the first pattern is in the third mode when the first pattern is pressed,
When the action prompting display is executed in the second re-lottery effect, the shaking display of the first pattern is started from the predetermined timing regardless of whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing. A display that makes it difficult to see is performed, and then the first pattern is displayed again in a shaking display, and then, when the pattern fixing period comes, the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first pattern is maintained while the first pattern is displayed. 1 pattern is stopped and displayed in the first mode,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode even during the subsequent pattern fixing period,
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. do.

Specifically, as shown in (L1) to (L3) in FIG. 267, an action promotion display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed during symbol feeding of the re-lottery effect. When the player operates the push button 31B during the period in which the action prompting display is displayed, the common symbol appearance effects shown in (L4) to (L6) are executed. Regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, a common design effect is executed by enlarging and reducing the design as shown in (L4) to (L5). After that, during the period of design fluctuation, the design is shaken. The swinging period of the pattern differs depending on the operation timing of the button. Therefore, after the swinging period of the symbol, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbol faces right, at the second operation timing, the symbol faces left, and at the third operation timing. , The pattern may be in a position facing the front. However, at any operation timing, a white-out effect is interposed as a common effect from (J1) to (J18) thereafter, and the effect of swinging the pattern after rotating the pattern and reducing the pattern is executed. According to this, the pattern can be neatly stopped by performing a common performance regardless of when the push button 31B is operated at any timing, and a series of performances can be shown favorably.

(F2019-126)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
The introductory part is
a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are displayed;
a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed;
The luminance data table used in a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed is such that the luminance data using the luminescent color corresponding to the character is switched according to the action of the character. configured to

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, there are scenes in which the character utters lines in the introductory part but no subtitles are added (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35). ). However, even in such a specific scene, the brightness data of the game effect lamp 9 (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can emphasize the presentation. As a result, an effect corresponding to the character can be suitably executed, and the fanning part can be suitably shown to the player. 64 (b8), (b9), FIG. 74 (e7), FIG. 94 (i32), FIG. 95 (i34), FIG. 104 (n10), FIG. 123 (r25), (r27), FIG. 124 (r29 ), FIG. 125 (r31), (r33), and FIG. 126 (r35), even if there is a character's dialogue but no caption, the frame lamp is displayed in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the lights up/blinks. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering a line by means of the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, so that the player can suitably see the production in the slamming part. can.

(F2019-127)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
sound output means;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
Up to the win/fail notification part, the change of scene is notified by moving the movable body from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the effect during the movement of the movable body from the second position to the first position. End the display, display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, so that the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. switching from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and switches the sound while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to the later scene.

Specifically, the effect may be switched from the effect at the start of the ready-to-win game to the effect in the first half of the SP ready-to-win game by the movement of the accessory. Also, an effect image corresponding to the character object motion may be displayed according to the motion of the character object falling. After that, the display may be gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object to the screen corresponding to the first half reach of the SP while the character object is rising. Further, the brightness data table may be switched from the brightness data table of the role product action part to the brightness data table of the SP first half reach while the role product is rising. Also, a sound corresponding to the SP first half reach may be output while the accessory is rising. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object is displayed on the premise that the character object is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character object returns to the initial position, the display will not be aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the accessory completes the movement to return to the initial position, it is possible to prevent spoiling the aesthetic appearance of the display. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the first half of the SP halfway through the rise of the character, it is possible to preferably display the rousing part of the first half of the SP.

(F2019-128)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
The display means is
In the introductory part, a promotional display prompting the player to perform a specific action is performed, and when the specific action is performed, a cut-in display is performed,
In the introductory part, a dialogue sound emitted by a character is output, and dialogue subtitles are displayed in a specific area of the display means in response to the dialogue sound,
At the timing of the promotional display in the introduction part, the dialogue subtitles are not displayed in the specific area,
The luminance data table includes a cut-in display luminance data table corresponding to the cut-in display and an introductory part luminance data table corresponding to the introductory part,
The light-emitting means for which luminance data is set in the cut-in display luminance data table includes at least the same locations as the light-emitting means for which luminance data is set in the introductory part luminance data table.

Specifically, the cut-in effect and the brightness data of the lamp control in the button display for the cut-in effect (RGB data in the grandchild tables W4, W5, and W6) are the same as the lamp control in the fanning part of the SP final reach. Designed to work with station frame lamps. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lighting/blinking of unnecessary lamps from being mixed in, and to prevent the beauty from being spoiled, and to provide a suitable effect in the fanning part.

(F2019-129)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
sound output means;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
In the period before transitioning from the introduction part in the first notification effect to the success/failure notification part,
The display means performs a prompt display prompting the player to perform a specific action,
The sound output means continues sound output,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table for a first notification effect,
In the period before the transition from the introduction part in the second notification effect to the success/failure notification part,
The display means does not perform the promotion display prompting the specific action, but performs a win-or-fail display,
The sound output means does not output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a second notification effect luminance data table,
The luminance data table for the first notification effect is configured so that the luminance data is switched,
The brightness data table for the second notification effect is configured so that the brightness data is not switched.

Specifically, in the SP ready-to-win production, in which no operation promotion is performed to prompt the player to operate at the win-or-fail branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp is kept lit in white, so that the production seems to have stopped. The performance can be shown to the player, and the winner/failure branch (decision timing) can be easily understood by the player. On the other hand, in the SP ready-to-win effect in which operation promotion is performed to prompt the player to operate at the success/fail branch, the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the sound (BGM) corresponding to the ready-to-win are output, and further, the operation promotion is performed. By switching the grandchild table a plurality of times to control the frame lamps so as to correspond to , the timing of deciding whether or not to win can be favorably produced by the lighting modes of the frame lamps. In this way, the decision timing of the success/failure branching can be favorably produced by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether the operation prompting is performed or not at the success/failure branching.

(F2019-130)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
The introductory part includes a first scene and a second scene after the first scene,
In the first scene, the first moving image data is used,
In the second scene, the second moving image data is used,
The progress speed of the production in the second scene is slower than that in the first scene,
The first moving image data is moving image data in which movement of a specific character is represented by a plurality of specific character images,
The second moving image data is moving image data in which movement of the specific character is represented by one specific character image and effect image.

Specifically, the scene before the determination of whether (r48) in the fanning part is a slow motion period in which the movement of the video is slowed down. In addition, the effect executed before (r48) depicts the movement of the character from a plurality of image data, while the effect executed at (r48) is the image of Bakuchu and the six allies. image. The image of the ally character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed with the passage of time to make it appear as if the characters are moving. Here, if an image is created using the same amount of image data during the slow motion period as during the periods other than the slow motion period, the amount of data is small and the movement becomes awkward. On the other hand, if a large amount of data is used to smooth the movement during the slow motion period, the capacity becomes too large. Therefore, the amount of data can be reduced by reducing the number of images used in the slow motion period and by switching and enlarging the display to make it look as if the character is moving. Note that the number of images used during the slow motion period may be any number as long as the number of images is smaller than during the other periods.

(F2019-131)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
There is a shielding display that makes the effect display invisible by going into the closed mode after the closing action, and makes the effect display visible by performing the opening action after going into the closed mode,
The masking display can be executed at a timing related to the introductory part,
When the shielding display performs a closing action, the brightness of the effect display decreases as the visible area of the effect display becomes smaller,
When the shielding display performs the opening operation, the brightness of the effect display increases as the area in which the effect display is visible increases.

Specifically, the aforementioned shutter is an image that, when closed, renders the image of the effect being executed behind invisible, and when it is opened after being closed, the image of the effect being executed becomes visible. Also, the shutter is executed at a timing related to the fan part before the start of the fan part. Then, when the shutter is closed, the screen brightness is reduced as the area where the effect is visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter is open, the screen brightness is decreased as the area where the effect is visible becomes wider. becomes higher. According to this, the flow of production can be favorably shown by making the closure and opening of the shutter realistic. In addition, although the image of the shutter is used to make the image of the effect executed in the background invisible or visible, it may be an image other than the shutter, and the same effect can be executed with a character. may

(F2019-132)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character and the action sound corresponding to the action of the character are output,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound is output louder than the operation sound.

Specifically, in the fanning part, SP reach BGM is output, and there is a scene where dialogue sound and physical sound (also referred to as action sound) overlap with each other. When the dialogue sound and the physical sound are output at the timing when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap each other, the dialogue sound is output with a louder volume than the physical sound when output from the speakers 8L and 8R. According to this, by outputting the physical sound as a part of the production, the reality of the production is brought out, and when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap, the dialogue sound is output loudly, so that the contents of the production are conveyed to the player. It can be easily transmitted. Therefore, as a result, it is possible to show the performance in the fanning part better.

(F2019-133)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a performance execution means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
The effect execution means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The production executing means is
A first re-lottery for displaying a first pattern in the first half part and then displaying a second pattern in the second half part among a plurality of types of re-lottery performances when it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state. It is possible to perform the production,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part after the first pattern is displayed in the first half part of the plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances. A second re-lottery effect can be executed,
In the epilogue part, when the first pattern is once displayed, the display mode of the first pattern is changed to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode so that the first pattern is swaying. It displays the first pattern,
When shifting from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, when shifting from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the first mode, and when the first pattern is in the second mode There is a transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when it is displayed, and a transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third mode,
The effect executing means, at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the first mode and the transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, and at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the second mode. The first pattern is visually recognized both when shifting from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part and when shifting from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the third mode. Performing a specific display to be difficult, displaying the first pattern in a common display mode, and executing the first re-lottery effect or the second re-lottery effect,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode even during the subsequent pattern fixing period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare effect, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, when the image showing the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, regardless of the timing of the operation, after that, During the time up to the predetermined timing when the re-lottery effect is executed, there may be provided a period of symbol fluctuation for absorbing the scale (symbol fluctuation period from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect accompanied by a whiteout as shown from (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, even if the stick controller 31A is operated at any timing, the pattern is once displayed in a swinging manner, and then the common effect accompanied by the whiteout is executed, and then the re-lottery effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the movement of the pattern from giving a sense of incompatibility, and it is possible to suitably show a series of presentations.

(F2020-005)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character,
In the specific scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle is started while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. and
A fade effect is applied to at least one of when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed in response to the character's lines in the teasing part. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period during which the display period of the first subtitle displayed first overlaps the display period of the second subtitle displayed next. A fade effect is applied when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap each other. The fade effect causes a change in the transparency of the characters being displayed. According to this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap each other, the change of the subtitles becomes easy to understand due to the fading effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be made easy to understand.

(F2020-006)
A game machine (for example, a game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a display means (for example, an image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (for example, frame lamps, etc.);
A light emission control means (for example, a production control CPU 120) that controls the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data (for example, controls a frame lamp or the like using the luminance data table),
It is possible to execute a notification effect (for example, a notification effect to notify whether or not a big hit will be achieved) for informing whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification effect for notifying that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed includes an introductory part (for example, a fanning part) until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the control to the advantageous state. A first epilogue part (for example, a hit epilogue part) that is notified to that effect,
The notification effect that notifies that the control is not performed to the advantageous state includes an introductory part (for example, a fanning part) until the propriety of whether or not the control is performed to the advantageous state is notified, and the fact that the control is not performed to the advantageous state. A second epilogue part (for example, a lost epilogue part) to be notified,
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is displayed to notify that the control will not be in the advantageous state (for example, the disappointing display in FIG. 190 (X30)),
After that, a switching display is performed (for example, an eye-catching display in FIG. 190 (X33)),
After that, the background is displayed (for example, normal background display in Fig. 190 (X34) (X35)),
After that, with the design confirmation command as a trigger, the design is stopped and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 190 (X35), the design is confirmed and stopped by receiving the design confirmation command),
After that, with the variation command as a trigger, the variable display of the pattern is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 190 (X36), the pattern is fixed and stopped by receiving the pattern confirmation command),
The plurality of light emitting means includes light emitting means for effect and light emitting means for the fourth symbol (for example, frame lamps, LEDs of the fourth symbol unit),
The light emission control means is
In the second epilogue part, the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part is used to control the effect light emitting means (for example, in the missing epilogue part, the brightness data table at the time of failure is used to control the frame lamp, etc. do),
When the switching display is performed, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the switching display, and the lighting means for effect is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the switching display (for example, when the eye-catching display is performed). When it is performed, the frame lamp etc. are controlled using the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching)),
When the background display is performed, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the background display, and the lighting means for effect is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the background display (for example, when the background is normally displayed, is performed, the luminance data table for the background is used to control frame lamps, etc.),
When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table for the fourth symbol change to the brightness data table for the fourth symbol stop, and the brightness data table for the fourth symbol stop is used. The fourth symbol light emitting means is controlled (for example, when the symbols are stopped and displayed, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table for fourth symbol variation to the brightness data table for stopping the fourth symbol, and the brightness data table for the fourth symbol is switched. Control the light emission of the LED of the 4th symbol using the brightness data table for 4 symbol stop),
When the symbols are statically displayed, the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used to control the effect light emitting means (for example, when the symbols are statically displayed, the background luminance data continue to use the table to control frame lamps, etc.),
When the symbol variation display is started, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the fourth symbol variation, and the fourth symbol light emission means is controlled using the luminance data table for the fourth symbol variation. (For example, when the pattern variation display is started, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the fourth pattern variation, and the brightness data table for the fourth pattern is used to cause the LED of the fourth pattern to emit light. Control),
When the variable display of patterns is started, the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used to control the light emitting means for effect (for example, when the variable display of patterns is started, the background light is continue to use the luminance data table to control frame lamps, etc.).

Specifically, the characterizing portion of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 at the time of losing will be described. The effect screen will be switched to the image at the time of losing after the effect of winning or failing. After that, after the display of the blackout where the result of the display of failure is displayed, it is switched to the eye-catching screen. Furthermore, after that, after switching to the normal screen, a screen is displayed in which the symbols are fixed and stopped. In addition, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table at the time of winning/failing determination to the brightness data table at the time of losing. After that, the table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching). After that, the table is switched to the luminance data table of the background at the start of fluctuation. Here, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen. Also, the luminance data table is switched to the background luminance data table at the timing of switching to the normal screen. Then, the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from flashing to extinguished by the reception of the symbol confirmation command, but the brightness data table for the background is not switched even by the reception of the symbol confirmation command. Also, the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from off to blinking by receiving the next variation variation pattern command, but the brightness data table for the background is not switched even by receiving the symbol confirmation command. According to this, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background at the end of the eye-catching screen, and the brightness data table is continued until the next change. is not necessary to separately prepare, the production by the lamp can be shown without discomfort from the production at the time of failure to the next change, and a series of productions can be suitably shown.

[Start 1]
Up to the win/fail notification part, the change of scene is notified by moving the movable body from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means performs an effect display for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. , display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and controls the light emitting means while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. switching from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and in the course of the movable body retreating from the second position to the first position, the scene after switching is output. Output the corresponding sound.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the effect is switched from the SP first half reach A effect to the SP second half reach A effect by the action of the character. In addition, an effect image corresponding to the character object motion is displayed according to the motion of the character object falling. After that, the display is gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the movement of the character object to the screen corresponding to reach A in the latter half of the SP while the character object is rising. In addition, while the role product is rising, the brightness data table of the role product action part (child table WD8 shown in FIG. 202 to be described later) is changed to the brightness data table of SP latter half reach A (child table WD9 shown in FIGS. 204 and 205 to be described later). ) is switched to the luminance data table. Also, a sound corresponding to the latter half of the SP (for example, BGM in the latter half of the SP) is output while the character is rising. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object is displayed on the premise that the character object is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character object returns to the initial position, the display will not be aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the accessory completes the movement of returning to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the brightness data table of the sound effect and the game effect lamp 9 is switched to one corresponding to the latter half of the SP while the accessory is returning to the initial position, the rousing part of the latter half of the SP can be preferably displayed.

[Start 2]
Before moving the movable body, a reduced pattern is displayed at a specific display position,
By moving the movable body, the movable body covers a specific display position,
According to the movement of the movable body, an effect display corresponding to the movement of the movable body is performed in a layer that is prioritized over the display layer of the reduced display pattern,
After the movable body starts to retreat and is no longer positioned at the specific display position, the effect display is switched to display corresponding to the performance after switching the state in which the reduced pattern is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the effect is switched from the SP first half reach A effect to the SP second half reach A effect by the action of the character. Also, before the action of the role object, the "2" pattern is reduced and displayed at the left and right lower corners of the screen. When the role object moves, the role object falls so that the character "P" among the characters of the role object is positioned so that it overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern "2" was displayed. do. In addition, an effect image corresponding to the action of dropping the character is displayed in a prioritized layer in front of the "2" symbol displayed in reduced size. Then, after the character rises from the falling position and the "2" pattern does not overlap with the character, the effect image gradually fades, and the background and "2" pattern corresponding to the second half of the SP reach A displayed faintly. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display from being not aesthetically pleasing due to the reduced decorative pattern being displayed during the action of the accessory. Also, the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object is displayed on the premise that the character object is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character object returns to the initial position, the display will not be aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the accessory completes the movement of returning to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the reduced decorative pattern is displayed in the middle of the movement of the character, it is possible to suitably switch the effects according to the movement of the character.

[Start 3]
The effect display is performed before the movable body moves and reaches the specific display position.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171, the role object moves and an effect image is displayed before reaching the lowest position of the drop. According to this, it is possible to quickly hide the reduced decorative pattern, and it is possible to make a suitable changeover of the presentation including the character.

[Start 4]
When switching from the effect display to the display of the developed presentation, the effect display is switched using an image related to the movable body.

Specifically, an image related to the character may be displayed when switching from the effect image to the image of the effect that develops in the second half. Specifically, in the scenes corresponding to (h7) to (h10) of FIG. 172, when the characters are raised, the characters "POWERFUL II" and the images of the main characters Yume-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan are displayed. may be displayed. According to this, it is possible to show a suitable switching of the performance with the use of the character by providing the interlocking property when the performance is switched.

[Start 5]
There is a shielding display that makes the effect display invisible by going into the closed mode after the closing action, and makes the effect display visible by performing the opening action after going into the closed mode,
The occlusion display can be executed at the timing related to the introductory part,
When the shielding display performs the closing action, the brightness of the effect display decreases as the visible area of the effect display becomes smaller,
When the shielding display performs the opening operation, the brightness of the effect display increases as the area in which the effect display is visible increases.

Specifically, the aforementioned shutter is an image that, when closed, renders the image of the effect being executed behind invisible, and when it is opened after being closed, the image of the effect being executed becomes visible. Also, the shutter is executed at a timing related to the fan part before the start of the fan part. Then, when the shutter is closed, the screen brightness is reduced as the area where the effect is visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter is open, the screen brightness is decreased as the area where the effect is visible becomes wider. becomes higher. According to this, the flow of production can be favorably shown by making the closure and opening of the shutter realistic. In addition, although the image of the shutter is used to make the image of the effect executed in the back invisible or visible, it may be an image other than the shutter, and the same effect can be executed with a character. may

[Start 6]
The image corresponding to the shield display has a shape in which a door closes from both ends of the screen at the center of the screen, or a shape in which a door closes from one end to the other end of the screen.

Specifically, the shutter described above is in a form in which it closes from the upper and lower ends of the screen toward the center of the screen. According to this, it is possible to favorably show an effect in which the screen brightness gradually changes. Also, the shutters may be closed from both ends of the screen toward the center like a fusuma (sliding door). Alternatively, the shutter may be closed from the upper end of the screen toward the lower end of the screen.

[Start 7]
In the shielding display, the color of the edge between the facing doors that makes the effect display invisible is expressed in black.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 described above, the image of the edge of the shutter is expressed in black. According to this, just before the shutter closes completely as shown in FIG. 58(a12), the boundary between the effect executed when the screen luminance is lowered and the edge of the shutter can be blurred, and the sense of incongruity can be eliminated. . When the shutter begins to open as shown in FIG. 60(a16), it is possible to eliminate the discomfort.

[Start 8]
After the shielding display performs the opening operation after the closing operation, the display corresponding to the introduction part is performed,
The display corresponding to the introductory part is performed in the middle of the opening operation of the shielding display, and the brightness of the display corresponding to the introductory part gradually increases. , the display corresponding to the introductory part does not progress, and the display corresponding to the introductory part begins to progress after the operation of releasing the shield display is completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 described above, the SP first half reach is started after the shutter is opened. Until the shutter is fully opened, the effect of the SP first half reach is not started and the screen brightness is gradually increased, and after the shutter is opened, the SP first half effect proceeds. According to this, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction due to execution of the effect before the shutter is opened because the effect of the SP first half reach is the effect that the player wants to pay attention to.

[Start 9]
extinguishing the light emitting means when the operation of releasing the shielding display is completed;
After the release operation of the shielding display is finished and one frame of image is displayed, the display corresponding to the introductory part progresses and the light emitting means starts to emit light.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully open. It is possible to convey to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, in the inflection part of SP first half reach A and the inflection part of SP first half reach B that are executed after the start part, the shutter is fully opened and the frame lamp is turned off, corresponding to each SP first half reach The frame lamps start lighting or blinking based on the brightness data table. In this way, after the shutter is fully opened and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp starts lighting in accordance with the progress of the effect in the SP first half reach. can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Start 10]
The effect display starts to darken before the closing motion of the shielding display starts, and the closing motion ends at the timing when the effect display completely turns dark.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57(a9) described above, before the shutter starts to close, the brightness of the screen decreases first, and the shutter is completely closed at the timing when the shutter is completely closed. It's becoming Here, if the brightness of the screen is lowered in conjunction with the shutter closing timing, the speed of the screen darkening may become too fast. Therefore, by starting to lower the screen brightness in advance, the speed of screen darkening can be made appropriate, and a series of presentations can be favorably shown.

[Start 11]
If the effect display becomes invisible due to the occlusion display,
The brightness data has a scenario configuration in which the brightness is switched until the occlusion display is performed.
Scenario configuration in which the brightness data is maintained from the time when the performance display is invisible due to the closed display to the timing related to the visual recognition of the performance display due to the open display. It has become.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the background lights yellow, blinks red, blinks white, and lights red. In addition, the luminance data is switched so that the frame lamp lights/blinks while changing the color and luminance. Luminance data is maintained so that it lights up red while maintaining. As a result, before the shutter closes, the effect in the start part is livened up by the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and when the shutter is closed, the lighting mode of the frame lamp is maintained, so that the player can enjoy the content of the effect when the shutter opens. , and as a result, it is possible to better show the performance in the subsequent fanning part to the player.

[Start 12]
The effect display includes a display before the introductory part starts and a display during the introductory part,
While the display corresponding to the predetermined effect is being performed in the start part, the shielding display performs the closing action, and then the shielding display performs the release action, thereby starting the introduction part,
There are a plurality of types of introductory parts, and it is not possible to recognize which introductory part is to be executed until the operation of releasing the hidden display is completed.

Specifically, until the shutter is opened, the player does not know which SP first half reach is to be started. According to this, it is possible to have expectations about which production will be executed.

[Start 13]
The shielding display may be performed at timings other than the timing of shifting to the introductory part.

Specifically, the effect by the shutter described above may be executed at a timing other than the timing that develops in the first half of the SP. For example, it may be the timing from the second re-variation to the third re-variation in the pseudo-run. In addition, when the shutter is closed and then opened, an icon image (for example, a green pending image) that suggests a change in active pending, which is a pending display of the change, is displayed, and active pending is displayed in response to the icon image. It may be changed (for example, from blue to green). In addition, the effect by the shutter may be executed at the timing of developing from the SP first half reach to the SP second half reach. According to this, it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation by the shutter.

[Start 14]
The timing at which the luminance data is maintained is the timing at which the closing operation of the shielded display is completed, the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed after the closing operation of the shielded display is completed, or the timing related to the closing operation of the shielded display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the background lights yellow, blinks red, blinks white, and lights red. In addition, while the luminance data is switched so that the frame lamp lights/blinks while changing the color and luminance, in the time ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp is in a state where the luminance is reduced. Luminance data is maintained so that it lights up red while maintaining. As a result, before the shutter closes, the effect in the start part is livened up by the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and when the shutter is closed, the lighting mode of the frame lamp is maintained, so that the content of the effect when the shutter opens can be enjoyed by the player. , and as a result, it is possible to better show the performance in the subsequent fanning part to the player.

[Start 15]
The period during which the luminance data is maintained is the period until the release operation is performed after the shielding display is in the closed mode, or until the prompting display for prompting the player's action is performed after the shielding display is in the closed mode. is the period of

Specifically, in addition to the above-described pattern in which the shutter is closed and automatically opened, a pattern in which a button image is displayed after the shutter is closed and the shutter is opened by executing a button operation may be provided. According to this, since a plurality of kinds of effects by the shutter are provided, the attraction of the effects by the shutter is improved.

[Start 16]
At the timing when the occluding display becomes the closed mode and the promoting display is performed, the brightness data that is maintained is switched to the changing brightness data, and after the promoting display is performed, the brightness data is switched to the maintained brightness data again.

Specifically, in the effect using the shutter display as shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, after the shutter is displayed in the closed mode, the player's action (for example, the action of pressing the button, the infrared sensor A promotional display prompting the user to perform a motion such as holding a hand over the player may be performed, and when the player's motion corresponding to the promotional display is detected, an effect such as opening the shutter may be performed. While the shutter display is in the closed state, lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table in which the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 (for example, the frame lamp) is maintained, while the shutter display is closed. At the timing when the promotional display is performed in the mode, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is switched to a brightness data table in which the lighting mode changes, the lamp is controlled based on the brightness data table, and then after the promotional display is performed ( In the state where the promotion display continues), lamp control may be performed again based on the brightness data table in which the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained. Note that the brightness data table for maintaining the lighting mode used again after the promotion display is performed may be the same as the brightness data table for maintaining the lighting mode used before the promotion display is performed. and may be different. According to this, while the shutter display is in the closed state, the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained. can be made easier to draw attention to.

[Start 17]
The prompting display is a display including a button image and a prompting character for prompting the action of the player,
A sound corresponding to the promotion character is output when the promotion character is displayed, and brightness data is incorporated in which the brightness data changes in association with the sound.

Specifically, in the effect using the shutter display as shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, after the shutter is displayed in the closed mode, the player's action (for example, the action of pressing the button, the infrared sensor A promotional display prompting the user to perform a motion such as holding a hand over the player may be performed, and when the player's motion corresponding to the promotional display is detected, an effect such as opening the shutter may be performed. In the promotion display, a voice prompting the player to act (for example, the voice of "press") is output, and characters prompting the player to act (for example, the letters "press") are displayed. good. Furthermore, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 may be performed based on a brightness data table that changes the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 (eg, frame lamp) in response to a voice prompting the player to act. In this way, since the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes in response to the voice prompting the action of the player, the motion of the player is determined by the voice prompting the action of the player and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. can be emphasized, and the player can be made to more effectively perform an action corresponding to the prompting display.

[Provocation 1]
The introductory part is
The part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled in an advantageous state is notified,
Including a scene in which the display is updated as the ally character and the enemy character fight, and a scene in which the ally character takes damage,
The display switching interval is faster than the epilogue part,
The number of display changes is more than the epilogue part.

Specifically, the above-mentioned agitation part, in which the agitation of whether or not the character is right or wrong, has a production that is updated in the development in which the friendly characters and the enemy characters alternately fight (for example, SP first half reach B, SP second half reach B, etc.). . In the production of such a teasing part, there is a scene in which a friendly character takes damage. In addition, in the effect of such a rousing part, the image display switching interval is shorter than that of the epilogue part, and the number of image display switching is large. According to this, it is possible to suitably show the fanning part by making the fanning part develop faster than the epilogue part.

[Provocation 2]
In the introductory part, first, the dialogue sound of the ally character is output, and the dialogue caption corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(b5) and the like described above, in the fanning part, the lines of the ally character appear first, and subtitles corresponding to the lines are displayed. According to this, the teammate character can be favorably recognized in the teasing part.

[Provocation 3]
In the introductory part, the display length of the first dialogue subtitle is set longer.

Specifically, the subtitle display of the teammate character that is displayed first may be set to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display in another scene of the teasing part. According to this, the ally character can be recognized firmly.

[Provocation 4]
There is a scene in which the dialogue sound of the friendly character is output, but the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67(b17) and the like described above, there is a scene in which subtitles are not displayed when an ally character utters a line. According to this, it is possible to preferably show the caption display of the teammate character that is displayed first, and to show the screen display more preferably than adding the caption display to all the lines.

[Provocation 5]
It may be expanded from the first introductory part to the second introductory part,
Allied characters are active in both the first introduction part and the second introduction part,
In the first introductory part, the dialogue sound of the friendly character is first output, and the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed,
In the second introductory part, the dialogue sound of the teammate character is first output, and the dialogue caption corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, in the agitation part described above, SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B as the first agitation part executed at the timing of the first half, and SP as the second agitation part executed at the timing of the second half There was a second half reach A, SP second half reach B, and SP final reach. In addition, there is a scene in which the ally character plays an active role in both the first and second teasing parts. Also, in any of the teasing parts, the lines of the ally character are generated first, and subtitles corresponding to the lines are displayed. According to this, the teammate character can be favorably recognized in any of the fanning parts.

[Provocation 6]
The first character is active in the first introduction part,
The second character is active in the second introduction part,
In the first introductory part, first the dialogue sound of the first character is output, the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed,
In the second introductory part, the dialogue sound of the second character is first output, and the dialogue caption corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, in the agitation part mentioned above, in the agitation part corresponding to Reach B in the first half of the SP, Yume-chan's character is active, and in the agitation part corresponding to Reach B in the latter half of the SP, Jam-chan and Nana-chan There was a scene where the character of was active. Then, in Reach B in the first half of the SP, a line was generated by Yume-chan, the ally character who played an active part first, and subtitles corresponding to the line were displayed. In addition, in reach B in the second half of the SP, dialogues by Jam-chan and Nana-chan, who are the friendly characters who are active first, were generated, and subtitles corresponding to the dialogues were displayed. According to this, the friendly character can be favorably recognized in any of the fanning parts. In addition, the number of active characters may be one or two or more. Also, the same character may play an active role in the first half and the second half of the excitement part.

[Provocation 7]
The introductory part is
a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are displayed;
a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed;
The luminance data table used in a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed is such that the luminance data using the luminescent color corresponding to the character is switched according to the action of the character. configured to

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, there are scenes in which the character utters lines in the introductory part but no subtitles are added (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35). ). In such a specific scene, since sounds that are difficult to express with subtitles are output as lines, subtitles are set not to be displayed. However, even in such a specific scene, the brightness data of the game effect lamp 9 (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can emphasize the presentation. As a result, an effect corresponding to the character can be suitably executed, and the fanning part can be suitably shown to the player. 64 (b8), (b9), FIG. 74 (e7), FIG. 94 (i32), FIG. 95 (i34), FIG. 104 (n10), FIG. 123 (r25), (r27), FIG. 124 (r29 ), FIG. 125 (r31), (r33), and FIG. 126 (r35), even if there is a character's dialogue but no caption, the frame lamp is displayed in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the lights up/blinks. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering a line by means of the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, so that the player can suitably see the production in the slamming part. can.

[Provocation 8]
In a character appearance scene, the light emitting means emits light in a color other than the color corresponding to the character.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, in scenes where characters appear (for example, r24, r26, r28, r30, r32, and r34), colors corresponding to the corresponding characters in the preceding scene are displayed. Control is performed to light the game effect lamp 9 in a color other than the color. Specifically, before the scene (r24), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in yellow (r22) or red (r23), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange corresponding to the AD character. It becomes a lit scenario. Also, before the scene (r26), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in orange (r25) or white (r25'), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue corresponding to the character of Maid A. scenario. Also, before the scene (r28), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in blue (r27) or white (r27'), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in Hawaiian blue corresponding to the character of Maid B. It becomes a lit scenario. Also, before the scene (r30), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in Hawaiian blue (r29) or white (r29'), the game effect lamp 9 is displayed in pink corresponding to Nana's character. becomes a scenario that lights up. Also, before the scene (r32), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in pink (r31) or white (r31'), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character. scenario. Also, before the scene of (r34), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple of (r33) or white of (r33'), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. becomes. In this way, before the character appears, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a color different from the color corresponding to the character, after which the game effect lamp 9 is lit in the color corresponding to the character. control is performed. Therefore, it is possible to express in the form of lamps that the displayed character changes and that the player can easily understand which character is the character that has changed, and it is possible to make a suitable fanning part.

[Provocation 9]
The light emitting means emits light in a color corresponding to the character positioned on one side of the screen, and the light emitting means emits light in a color corresponding to the character positioned on the other side of the screen.

64 (b8), (b9), FIG. 74 (e7), FIG. 94 (i32), FIG. 95 (i34), FIG. 104 (n10), FIG. 123 (r25), (r27), FIG. 124 (r29), FIGS. 125 (r31), (r33), and FIG. 126 (r35), even if there is a character's dialogue but no caption, the color corresponding to the character is Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering a line by means of the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, so that the player can suitably see the effect in the slamming part. can.

[Provocation 10]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
The introductory part is
a first scene in which a first character and a second character are displayed and a dialogue sound emitted by the first character is output;
a second scene in which a first character and a second character are displayed, and a dialogue sound emitted by the second character is output;
The light emission control means is
In the first scene, controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the first scene,
In the second scene, controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the second scene,
In the luminance data table corresponding to the first scene, the light emission means on the side where the first character is displayed among the plurality of types of light emission means is set to the light emission color corresponding to the first character, and the second light emission means among the plurality of types of light emission means is displayed. When the luminance data of the luminous means on the side where the character is displayed is set to the luminous color corresponding to the second character is switched in accordance with the dialogue sound emitted by the first character, the first character among the plurality of types of luminous means The brightness of the light emitting means on the side where is displayed is switched, and the brightness of the light emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of types of light emitting means is configured not to switch,
In the luminance data table corresponding to the second scene, the light-emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed among the plurality of types of light-emitting means is set to the light-emitting color corresponding to the first character, and the second light-emitting means among the plurality of types of light-emitting means. When the luminance data of the light emitting means on the side where the character is displayed is set to the light emitting color corresponding to the second character is switched in accordance with the dialogue sound emitted by the second character, the first character among the plurality of types of light emitting means The brightness of the light emitting means on the side where is displayed is not switched, but the brightness of the light emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of types of light emitting means is switched.

Specifically, when a character appears, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in a color corresponding to . For example, as shown in FIG. 63(b4), Mumu-chan on the left side of the screen faces Baku-chu on the right side of the screen. Light the left lamp and light the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the effect control CPU 120 displays a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to an effect in which Yume-chan, who is positioned on the left side of the screen as shown in FIG. 63(b5), speaks. Blink the left lamp. At time tb6, the effect control CPU 120 causes the Bakuchu positioned on the right side of the screen as shown in FIG. flash. As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be favorably expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the effect in the fanning part can be favorably played. can show people.

[Provocation 11]
In a state where the first character and the second character are displayed, dialogue subtitles are displayed in each of a scene in which dialogue sounds of the first character are output and a scene in which dialogue sounds of the second character are output. , the dialogue subtitle is displayed in a fixed font and at a fixed position.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 63(b5) and (b6), there is a scene in which each character speaks a line under a situation in which an ally character and an enemy character are displayed. Under such circumstances, the subtitle display for the dialogue is displayed in a fixed size and at a fixed display position. According to this, by not changing the display mode of the lines for each character, it is possible to reduce the chances of bugs getting angry.

[Provocation 12]
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character and the action sound corresponding to the action of the character are output,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound is output louder than the operation sound.

Specifically, in the fanning part, SP reach BGM is output, and there is a scene where dialogue sound and physical sound (also referred to as action sound) overlap with each other. When the dialogue sound and the physical sound are output at the timing when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap each other, the dialogue sound is output with a louder volume than the physical sound when output from the speakers 8L and 8R. According to this, by outputting the physical sound as a part of the production, the reality of the production is brought out, and when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap, the dialogue sound is output loudly, so that the contents of the production are conveyed to the player. It can be easily transmitted. Therefore, as a result, it is possible to show the performance in the fanning part better.

[Provocation 13]
Various sounds such as BGM, action sounds, sound effects, and dialogue sounds are output according to the production performed in the introductory part.
At the design stage, various sounds are output together with displays corresponding to the presentation performed in the introductory part, and the volume of the various sounds is adjusted.

Specifically, a work process for actually creating various effects in the pachinko game machine 1 will be described. First, in the pachinko game machine 1, images for each effect corresponding to the variable time such as SP reach are created. In accordance with this video, special software is used to add production sounds such as BGM, physical sounds, onomatopoeia, sound effects, and dialogue sounds one by one. The finished image and sound are played, and the strength of the sound is added. In such a series of work processes, rather than outputting sound with reality while maintaining the actual sense of distance on the image, sound is output that ignores the actual sense of distance that is easily conveyed to the player by throwing away reality. Sound data is set as follows. As a result, a series of presentations can be shown favorably.

[Provocation 14]
When the output of the action sound and the output of the dialogue sound corresponding to one character overlap, the volume of the dialogue sound is adjusted so that the volume of the dialogue sound is louder than the volume of the movement sound.

Specifically, when the physical sound of the character and the dialogue sound are output while being superimposed, the dialogue sound is adjusted and output so that it sounds louder than the physical sound. For example, when the physical sound and the dialogue sound are output together, as shown in FIG. 166(B), the SP reach BGM is adjusted to be smaller in accordance with the output period of the dialogue sound. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation while presenting reality.

[Provocation 15]
In the front view of the screen, when the output of the dialogue sound of the first character with a far sense of distance and the output of the movement sound of the second character with a close sense of distance overlap, the volume of the dialogue sound is higher than the volume of the movement sound. The volume is adjusted so that the

Specifically, when the dialog sound of a character whose sense of distance is far from the player overlaps with the physical sound of which the player has a close sense of distance, the sound is adjusted so that the dialog sound is louder than the physical sound. Data is set. As a result, a sound is output that discards reality and ignores the actual sense of distance that is easily conveyed to the player, so that the content of the presentation can be easily conveyed to the player.

[Provocation 16]
In the case where the operation sound and dialogue sound output overlap and subtitle display is not performed, and the case where the operation sound and dialogue sound output overlap and subtitle display is performed, the volume of dialogue sound that does not display subtitles The volume is adjusted so that the volume of the dialogue sound for subtitle display is louder than the volume.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 166(B) and 166(C), when there is a subtitle for the dialogue sound overlapping the physical sound and when there is no subtitle for the dialogue sound overlapping the physical sound, When subtitles are present, the volume of SP reach BGM is adjusted so that it sounds louder. Dialogue sounds with subtitles are more relevant to SP reach content than dialogue sounds without subtitles. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation by outputting loudly the dialogue sound with subtitles related to the content of the SP reach.

[Provocation 17]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data in accordance with time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The brightness data table includes a specific brightness data table,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
The light emission control means is
In the first scene in the introductory part, controlling the light emitting means using the first upper table and the specific luminance data table,
In the second scene in the introductory part, controlling the light emitting means using the second upper table and the specific luminance data table,
The specific luminance data table used in the first scene in the introductory part and the specific luminance data table used in the second scene in the introductory part are common luminance data tables,
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and is constructed so that the total time of using each of the plurality of luminance data is the specific time,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data using the specific brightness data table for a first time longer than the specific time,
The second upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data using the specific brightness data table for a second time longer than the specific time.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table used in the fanning part, thereby turning on the frame lamps at a plurality of mutually different timings. While lighting the frame lamp in yellow, it is possible to change the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow by changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings. As a result, in one child table WD9, the common grandchild table W3 is used for lamp control without preparing different grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, but by changing the reference time. While reducing the data volume, it is possible to vary the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the SP reach background. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

[Provocation 18]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data in accordance with time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The brightness data table includes a specific brightness data table,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
The light emission control means is
In the first scene in the introductory part, controlling the light emitting means using the first upper table and the specific luminance data table,
In the second scene in the introductory part, controlling the light emitting means using the second upper table and the specific luminance data table,
The specific luminance data table used in the first scene in the introductory part and the specific luminance data table used in the second scene in the introductory part are common luminance data tables,
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and is constructed so that the total time of using each of the plurality of luminance data is the specific time,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data using the specific brightness data table for a specific time,
The second upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data using the specific brightness data table for a predetermined time shorter than the specific time.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table used in the fanning part, thereby turning on the frame lamps at a plurality of mutually different timings. While blinking in white, the time for referring to the grandchild table W4 is changed by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, so that the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be changed to 2 or 3 times. can be done. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

[Provocation 19]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data in accordance with time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The brightness data table includes a specific brightness data table,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
The light emission control means is
In one scene of the introductory part in the first notification effect, controlling the light emitting means using the first upper table and the specific luminance data table,
In one scene of the introductory part in the second notification effect, controlling the light emitting means using the second upper table and the specific luminance data table,
The specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introductory part in the first notification effect and the specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introductory part in the second notification effect are common luminance data tables,
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and is constructed so that the total time of using each of the plurality of luminance data is the specific time,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data using the specific brightness data table for a first time longer than the specific time,
The second upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data using the specific brightness data table for a second time longer than the specific time.

Specifically, in any of the child table WD9 used in the backing part of SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the backing part of SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the backing part of SP final reach In order to change the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of timings different from each other, the amount of data used for lamp control is reduced in a plurality of ready-to-win performances. In addition, it is possible to change the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach. In addition, in the child table WD2 used in the inflection part of the SP first half reach A and in the child table WD5 used in the inflection part of the SP first half reach B, a different grandchild table is similarly prepared for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be changed. good too.

[Provocation 20]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data in accordance with time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The brightness data table includes a specific brightness data table,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
The light emission control means is
In one scene of the introductory part in the first notification effect, controlling the light emitting means using the first upper table and the specific luminance data table,
In one scene of the introductory part in the second notification effect, controlling the light emitting means using the second upper table and the specific luminance data table,
The specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introductory part in the first notification effect and the specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introductory part in the second notification effect are common luminance data tables,
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and is constructed so that the total time of using each of the plurality of luminance data is the specific time,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data using the specific brightness data table for a specific time,
The second upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data using the specific brightness data table for a predetermined time shorter than the specific time.

[Provocation 21]
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character,
In a specific scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle is started while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended, and the second dialogue subtitle is being displayed. becomes,
A fade effect is applied to at least one of when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed in response to the character's lines in the teasing part. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period during which the display period of the first subtitle displayed first overlaps the display period of the second subtitle displayed next. A fade effect is applied when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap each other. The fade effect causes the characters being displayed to change with different transparency. According to this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap each other, the change of the subtitles becomes easy to understand due to the fading effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be made easy to understand.

[Provocation 22]
In the scene where multiple characters confront each other,
When the dialogue sound of one character is output, the first subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed, and thereafter, when the dialogue sound of the other character is output, the second subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed. is,
The second caption is displayed with a transmittance of 50% so as to overlap the portion where the first caption is displayed with a transmittance of 0%, and then the first caption is displayed when the second caption is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178(A), in a scene where characters face each other, a first caption corresponding to the lines of one character is displayed, followed by a second caption corresponding to the lines of another character. subtitles may be displayed. In this case, the second caption is displayed with a transmittance of 70% so as to overlap the portion where the first caption is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. After that, the first caption fades out, and the second caption fades in, resulting in display with a transmittance of 0%. According to this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap each other, it is easy to understand the switching of the subtitles due to the fading effect.

[Provocation 23]
The dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is
not output when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap and at least one of them has a fade effect,
Output when only the secondary subtitle is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 179, the output timing of the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle of “Found” is displayed so that the first subtitle and the second subtitle overlap each other, and a fade effect is applied. is not output during the period. Then, the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is output when the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%. According to this, it is easy to understand the switching of subtitles due to the fade effect, and since the dialog sound is output after the second subtitle is displayed, it is possible to easily grasp the contents of the presentation by sight and hearing.

[Provocation 24]
In the advantageous state, the music is output and the lyrics are displayed,
When the display of the first subtitle in the lyrics display is switched to the display of the second subtitle, the display of none of the subtitles is given a fade effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178(B), during the jackpot round, an effect is performed in which the character sings along with the music. Subtitles (lyrics) are displayed as the song progresses. However, during the jackpot round, even if subtitles (lyrics) are displayed continuously, the fade effect is not applied. This is because when the music is playing, the progression of the music can be understood by the rhythm, so even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without adding a fade effect, the switching timing is easy to understand. Also, since the music during the jackpot round is representative music of the contents installed in the pachinko game machine 1, the lyrics to be displayed next are easy for the player to understand without adding a fade effect. According to this, it is possible to omit the operation of applying the fade effect during the big winning round, and the series of performances can be shown well.

[Provocation 25]
In both the introductory part and the epilogue part, the character's dialogue sound may overlap,
The introductory part has a higher ratio of overlapping dialogue sounds than the epilogue part.

Specifically, although not shown, the subtitle display timing may overlap even in the epilogue part. However, as shown in FIG. 180, in the epilogue part, there are many scenes in which the period from caption display to caption display is longer than in the introductory part. This is because the provocation part progresses quickly, and the epilogue part progresses less quickly than the provocation part. As a result, the introductory part is displayed at a higher rate than the epilogue part at the timing when the subtitle display overlaps. In such a case, by effectively adding a fade effect to the caption display, it is possible to avoid giving a sense of discomfort when switching captions.

[Provocation 26]
Even in certain scenes where subtitles do not overlap,
A fade effect is applied when the subtitle is displayed or when the display of the subtitle disappears.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 180, a fade effect is added to the subtitle display even in a predetermined scene in portions (o3) to (o5) where the first subtitle and the second subtitle do not overlap. As for the fade effect, at least one of fade-in and fade-out effects may be added. In subtitle display created after video is created, it takes time and effort to add a fade effect depending on whether the subtitle display is covered or not. Therefore, by uniformly adding a fade effect to the caption display, it is possible to prevent an increase in work load.

[Provocation 27]
The display of the first subtitle without the fade effect and the display of the second subtitle may be interchanged.
Between the display of the first subtitle and the display of the second subtitle, it is conceivable to provide a blank period in which nothing is displayed, but if a long dialogue sound or a fast-paced dialogue sound is output, a sense of incongruity will appear. Therefore, the blank period is not provided.

Specifically, FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of caption display. For example, as shown in Comparative Example 1 of FIG. 181(A), subtitles for similar lines such as "I found it" and "I found it" may be displayed continuously. In such a case, if the subtitle display is switched without adding any fade effect and without a blank period, it becomes difficult to understand the switching of the subtitle display. Also, regarding subtitle display for long lines and subtitle display for fast-progressing lines, there is a possibility that a sense of incongruity may occur if subtitles are switched without providing a blank period. In such a case, the sense of incompatibility can be eliminated by adding a fade effect to the caption display. Further, as shown in Comparative Example 2 in FIG. 181(B), it is conceivable to superimpose "Found" on the subtitle display of "Found" and then display "Found". In such a case, the caption display becomes difficult to see without the fade effect. Further, as shown in Comparative Example 3 of FIG. 181(C), it is conceivable to display the subtitle display of "I found it" and the subtitle display of "I found it" in two stages above and below. In such a case, the subtitle display reduces the display area for the effect, which hinders the effect in areas other than the subtitle display area. On the other hand, such a problem can be solved by adding a fade effect to the caption display as in the present embodiment.

[Inciting cut-in 1]
The display means
In the introductory part, a promotional display prompting the player to perform a specific action is performed, and when the specific action is performed, a cut-in display is performed,
In the introductory part, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and the dialogue subtitle is displayed in a specific area of the display means in response to the dialogue sound,
At the timing of the promotional display in the introduction part, dialogue subtitles are not displayed in a specific area,
The luminance data table includes a cut-in display luminance data table corresponding to the cut-in display and an introductory part luminance data table corresponding to the introductory part,
The light-emitting means for which luminance data is set in the cut-in display luminance data table includes at least the same locations as the light-emitting means for which luminance data is set in the introductory part luminance data table.

Specifically, the cut-in effect and the luminance data of the lamp control in the button display for the cut-in effect (RGB data in the grandchild tables W4, W5, and W6) are the same as the lamp control in the fanning part of the SP final reach. Designed to work with station frame lamps. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lighting/blinking of unnecessary lamps from being mixed, thereby preventing the appearance from being spoiled, and providing a suitable effect in the fanning part.

[Inciting cut-in 2]
Dialogue subtitles are displayed in the scene before the button where the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127 (r39) to FIG. 128 (r42), at the timing when the cut-in display is executed, the caption display is displayed before the prompt display of the button image is displayed. . According to this, since the button image can be continuously shown to the player who is watching the screen while paying attention to the subtitle display, the button image can be prevented from being overlooked, and the cut-in display can be suitably executed. can be done.

[Inciting cut-in 3]
At the timing when the cut-in display ends, subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed, and after a period during which the dialogue sounds are not output, the dialogue sounds are output and the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 128 (r41) to FIG. 130 (r47), there is no dialogue for a predetermined period after the cut-in display ends. Then, after a predetermined period of time without words has passed, a line is issued, and caption display is added to the line. According to this, the player can concentrate on the effect during the period after the cut-in display, and a suitable cut-in display can be performed.

[Yes or No 1]
In the success/failure notification part,
The player is notified of whether the control is to be in an advantageous state or not,
A prompting display prompting the player to perform a specific action is performed,
Executed between the introductory part and the epilogue part,
The movable body moves after the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132 (r54) described above, the success/failure determination scene was between the introductory part and the epilogue part. Then, in the scene of winning/failing determination, the player is informed whether or not the player has won a big hit after operating the trigger as the operating means. In addition, in the scene of winning or failing, the accessory was moved after the trigger operation in the case of a big hit. According to this, the attraction of the presentation is improved by making it a suitable scene for deciding whether to use the operating means.

[Yes or No 2]
In the success/failure notification part that is executed after the introduction part,
In the state where the expanded display is being performed before the promotional display is performed, the introduction display of the promotional display is performed, so that the expanded display becomes invisible, and after that, the expanded display is performed in a state where the expanded display is visible. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) to FIG. 132 (r54), before the image corresponding to the operation means is displayed, subtitles are displayed by the teammate character, and then the characters corresponding to the operation means are displayed. Due to the screen, the effect that was being executed becomes invisible. Then, the effect executed after that becomes recognizable again together with the image of the operating means. According to this, it is possible to give an impact by displaying the introduction of the operation means on the entire screen, and to display the performance that has been firmly executed at the timing when the operation means can be operated, so that the progress of the performance can be favorably shown. .

[Yes or No 3]
The expanded display is behind the introductory display.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r48) to 131 (r51), introduction images (images (r49) to (r50)) for enabling operation of the operating means are displayed. A performance is in progress during the performance. According to this, by advancing the effect behind the scenes, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the image (the image of (r51)) in which the operation means can be operated, and also to make the player pay attention to the development of the effect.

[Yes or No 4]
The expanded display is performed while the prompt display is being performed.

Specifically, in FIG. 132 (r51) to FIG. 132 (r54) described above, when the trigger image as the promotion display is displayed, the tail slightly moves each time the image changes in the Bakuchu image. was In this way, the effect may proceed while the promotion display is being displayed. Here, the progress of the presentation may include a scene change or a character action instead of just moving the tail. According to this, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the development of the presentation during the promotion display.

[Yes or No 5]
Expanded display progresses slower than before the prompt display when performed while the prompt display is performed.

Specifically, the effect progressing while the promotion display is displayed is slower than the effect executed before the promotion display was displayed. According to this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the prompting display for operating the operation means, and to balance the prompting display and the progress of the effect. It should be noted that the effect that progresses while the promotion display is displayed may be slower than the effect that progresses while the introductory image is displayed. According to this, it is possible to make a difference in the progress speed of the effect during display of the promotion display and during display of the introductory image.

[Yes or No 6]
An echo is applied to the dialogue sound before the introductory display.

Specifically, it is preferable to echo the dialogue before the introductory image is displayed as shown in FIG. 130 (r47). According to this, the player can be excited before the introductory image is displayed.

[Yes or No 7]
After ending the output of the dialogue sound that was displayed while the expansion display was performed before the promotion display was performed, the introduction display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) to FIG. 131 (r49), the introductory image is displayed after the subtitle display before the introductory image is displayed is deleted. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display timings of the introductory image and the caption display from overlapping.

[Yes or No 8]
The introductory part consists of a predetermined period and a slow motion period after the predetermined period and before the success or failure notification,
In a predetermined period, a plurality of image data are used to describe the movement of the character,
During the slow motion period, one piece of image data is rendered with effects to depict the movement of the character.

Specifically, the scene before the determination of whether (r48) in the fanning part is a slow motion period in which the movement of the video is slowed down. In addition, the effect executed before (r48) depicts the movement of the character from a plurality of image data, while the effect executed at (r48) is the image of Bakuchu and the six allies. image. The image of the ally character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed with the passage of time to make it appear as if the characters are moving. Here, if an image is created using the same amount of image data during the slow motion period as during the periods other than the slow motion period, the amount of data is small and the movement becomes awkward. On the other hand, if a large amount of data is used to smooth the movement during the slow motion period, the capacity becomes too large. Therefore, the amount of data can be reduced by reducing the number of images used in the slow motion period and by switching and enlarging the display to make it look as if the character is moving. Note that the number of images used during the slow motion period may be any number as long as the number of images is smaller than during the other periods.

[Yes or No 9]
There is a production that includes an introductory part in which allied characters and enemy characters appear, and a final part after the introductory part.
In the introductory part, there is a predetermined period in which the scene where allies are displayed and the scene where enemies are displayed alternately.
It is possible to shift to the ending part by performing the action of the player while the promotion display is being performed during the predetermined period,
For a predetermined period of time, the speed at which the scene in which allies are displayed and the scene in which enemies are displayed alternately increases gradually, and after the speed reaches the maximum, the promotion display is performed,
As for the depiction in which the scene in which the ally is displayed and the scene in which the enemy is displayed alternately, each of the enemy and the ally is reproduced with one image data.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 191(B), the image switching speed between the image of the friend character and the image of the enemy character gradually increases. According to this, after the image switching speed reaches the fastest, the promotion display prompting the trigger operation is displayed, so that a scene in which the friend character has an advantage or a scene in which the enemy character has an advantage is developed. It becomes possible to incite the development of the game, and the interest is improved. In addition, by alternately switching the images, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that one image is used for each of the friend character and the enemy character.

[Yes or No 10]
The predetermined period in which the scene in which the ally is displayed and the scene in which the enemy is displayed are alternately applied is also applied to the scene in which the ready-to-win performance develops from one ready-to-win performance to another ready-to-win performance.

Specifically, the effect of the slow motion period in (r48) may be executed at the timing of development from SP first half reach to SP last reach. According to this, it is possible to suitably execute the effect even at the timing of developing from the SP first half reach.

[Right or wrong 11]
The enemy character is depicted using a plurality of image data in order to change a portion of the enemy character, but the image data of the enemy character itself is diverted to change only the portion.

Specifically, during the slow motion period in (r48), at least one of the friend character and the enemy character may be configured using two or more images. For example, in the case of an ally character, four images such as image 1, image 2, image 3, image 4, image 1, . good. According to this, by changing only part of the data while using the data of the character itself, it is possible to more faithfully represent the state of movement while reducing the amount of data change work.

[Yes or No 12]
A portion of the character changes during the slow motion period.

Specifically, in the slow motion period of (r48), when the character's hair and clothes are shown to move gradually from a plurality of images, the movement of the hair and clothes is approximately the same as during periods other than the slow motion period. It may be designed to appear to move at speed. Here, if the number of images is increased in accordance with the motion of the slow motion in order to make the motion look smooth during the slow motion period, the capacity becomes large. However, by speeding up the movement during the slow motion period, even if the number of images used is reduced, the movement does not become awkward, and while reducing the data capacity, it is possible to express the movement more faithfully. can.

[Right or wrong 13]
During the period before transitioning from the introductory part to the success/failure notification part in the first notification effect,
The display means performs a promotion display for prompting the player to perform a specific action,
The sound output means continues sound output,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the luminance data table for the first notification effect,
During the period before the transition from the introductory part to the success/failure notification part in the second notification effect,
The display means does not display a prompt to prompt a specific action, but displays a propriety display,
The sound output means does not output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the luminance data table for the second notification effect,
The luminance data table for the first notification effect is configured so that the luminance data is switched,
The brightness data table for the second notification effect is configured so that the brightness data is not switched.

Specifically, in the SP ready-to-win production, in which no operation promotion is performed to prompt the player to operate at the win-or-fail branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp is kept lit in white, so that the production seems to have stopped. The performance can be shown to the player, and the winner/failure branch (decision timing) can be easily understood by the player. On the other hand, in the SP ready-to-win effect in which operation promotion is performed to prompt the player to operate at the success/fail branch, the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the sound (BGM) corresponding to the ready-to-win are output, and further, the operation promotion is performed. By switching the grandchild table a plurality of times to control the frame lamps so as to correspond to , the timing of deciding whether or not to win can be favorably produced by the lighting modes of the frame lamps. In this way, the decision timing of the success/failure branching can be favorably produced by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether the operation prompting is performed or not at the success/failure branching.

[Yes or No 14]
When promotion display is not performed, the display transitions in the order of a first display period consisting of a moving image, a second display period consisting of a still image, and a third display period consisting of a moving image that branches depending on whether the display is correct or not.

Specifically, in FIG. 95 (i36) to FIG. 96 (i39), the image displaying the two characters, Yume-chan and Jam-chan, is gradually enlarged and displayed, and at the timing of (i39) Then, one image is displayed still for a predetermined period. After that, if it is a big hit, the video of the winning epilogue part will be played, and if it is a loss, the video of the losing epilogue part will be played. During the period in which one image is statically displayed for a predetermined period of time, one image can be reused for use, so it is possible to reduce the amount of data and favorably promote the success/failure decision scene. It should be noted that during the period in which the images in which the two characters are displayed are gradually enlarged and displayed, as many images (for example, 10) as shown in FIGS. may be used.

[Yes or No 15]
A scenario for controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data when no promotional display is performed is as follows:
a first scenario corresponding to the first display period;
a second scenario corresponding to a second display period;
a third scenario corresponding to a third display period;
The first scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched,
A second scenario is a scenario in which predetermined luminance data is maintained,
A third scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched.

Specifically, in the child table WD9 in reach A in the second half of the SP, it is a reach without operation prompt, and after the frame lamp blinks in white based on the grandchild table W7, the frame lamp lights up in white based on the grandchild table W8. . Specifically, in the success/failure branching in the inflection part of the reach A in the second half of the SP where no operation promotion is performed, the last luminance data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W7, "FDC" (white lighting), is used. In addition, since the luminance data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the winning/failing branch (decision timing) without excessively increasing the data capacity used for lamp control. can.

[Yes or No 16]
When the promotional display is performed, the display transitions in the order of the first display period in which the introductory display before the promotional display is performed, the second display period consisting of the moving image, and the third display period consisting of the moving image that branches depending on whether the display is correct or not. do.

Specifically, in FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54), the display period of the introductory image in which the images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are gathered in the center of the screen is be. Afterwards, there is a period of time during which prompts for activating the trigger are displayed. During the display period of the prompt display, a plurality of images are gradually moved to make it appear as if the character is moving. After that, by operating the trigger at the branching scene of winning/failing determination, if the game is a big hit, the image of the winning epilogue part is played, and if the game is lost, the video of the losing epilogue part is played. These periods are periods during which dynamic display is performed in which images appear to be moving. According to this, a series of effects can be executed in a dynamic flow, and a suitable flow of effects can be obtained.

[Yes or No 17]
A scenario for controlling the light-emitting means using luminance data in the case of prompt display is as follows:
a first scenario corresponding to the first display period;
a second scenario corresponding to a second display period;
a third scenario corresponding to a third display period;
The first scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched,
The second scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched,
A third scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched.

Specifically, in the child table WD15 in the SP final reach, as shown in FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. In this state, the frame lamps are switched one after another such as blinking white, lighting red, and blinking red, so that the effect of prompting the player to operate the player at the winning/failing branch (decision timing) can be enhanced.

[Yes or No 18]
As a flow from the success report part,
When it is determined not to be controlled to an advantageous state, the display when it is determined not to be controlled to an advantageous state is performed, and then a display corresponding to the normal background is performed.

Specifically, the winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part after the success/failure determination scene shown in FIGS. 133(s1) to 136(s10) and FIGS. In the winning epilogue part, an image corresponding to the winning epilogue part is played after the performance of the character action. Also, in the unsuccessful epilogue part, the screen turns black after the production corresponding to the unsuccessful epilogue part, and then returns to the normal screen. According to this, since it is a flow of switching a plurality of images after the scene of winning/failing determination, it is possible to make a flow of suitable presentation.

[Yes or No 19]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect to be executed when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state consists of an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the control is to be performed to the advantageous state, and after the notification is made. and a first epilogue part in which it is notified that it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the propriety notification and a second epilogue part that informs that it is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means is
In the introductory part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the introductory part,
In the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The brightness data first used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part is set to a lower brightness than the brightness data last used in the brightness data table corresponding to the introductory part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 261, when transitioning to the missing epilogue part via the inflection parts in each of the SP first half reach A and B and SP second half reach A and B, the final luminance data in the inflection part ( RGB data) is "FDC", whereas the first luminance data (RGB data) in the missing epilogue part is "888" or "444". As a result, when losing in each of SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, it is possible to light the frame lamp in white more darkly while maintaining the same color using white lighting in the success/fail branch. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately inform the player that the game has been lost. Also, when transitioning to the missing epilogue part via the fanning part in the SP final reach, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the fanning part contains "D00", whereas the first brightness in the missing epilogue part Data (RGB data) is "888" or "444". As a result, when the SP final reach is lost, the frame lamp can be lit in white, which is darker than the red blinking in the success/fail branch, so that the player can be suitably notified of the loss.

[Yes or No 20]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
The first notification effect that notifies that the control to the advantageous state is performed includes an introduction part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the advantageous state after the propriety notification. and an epilogue part that informs that it will be controlled,
The first notification effect for notifying that the control to the advantageous state will not be performed includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and the control to the advantageous state after the success or failure notification. It is composed of an epilogue part that informs that it will not be done,
The second notification effect, which notifies that the control is to be performed in the advantageous state, includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state, and the advantageous state after the notification. and an epilogue part that informs that it will be controlled,
The second notification effect for notifying that the control to the advantageous state will not be performed includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the control is to be performed to the advantageous state, and the control to the advantageous state after the notification is given. It is composed of an epilogue part that informs that it will not be done,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data in accordance with time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table, a second upper table, a third upper table, and a fourth upper table,
The luminance data table includes a first notification effect luminance data table, a second notification effect luminance data table, and a specific luminance data table,
The light emission control means is
In the introductory part of the first notification effect that notifies that the advantageous state is not controlled, the light emitting means is controlled using the first upper table and the luminance data table for the first notification effect,
In the introductory part of the second notification effect that notifies that the advantageous state is not controlled, the light emitting means is controlled using the second upper table and the luminance data table for the second notification effect,
In the epilogue part in the first notification effect that notifies that the advantageous state is not controlled, the light emitting means is controlled using a third upper table and a specific luminance data table,
In the epilogue part in the second notification effect that notifies that the advantageous state is not controlled, the light emitting means is controlled using the fourth upper table and the specific luminance data table,
A specific luminance data table used in the epilogue part of the first notification effect that notifies that the control is not performed to the advantageous state, and a specific luminance data table that is used in the epilogue part of the second notification effect that notifies that the control is not performed to the advantageous state. is a common luminance data table,
The third upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data using the specific luminance data table for the first time period,
The fourth upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data using the specific brightness data table for a second time different from the first time.

Specifically, in the child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, the child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, the child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and the child table WD14 of SP second half reach B, the SP final reach child table Similar to WD17, the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode at the time of losing based on grandchild table W14. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W14 for 5800 msec in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, while in the SP final reach it takes 3900 msec. Meanwhile, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W14. In this way, while the grandchild table used for lamp control at the time of losing is common among different reaches, the time for lamp control can be varied by referring to the grandchild table. Thus, in the child table used for each of a plurality of different reaches, the reference time can be changed while using a common grandchild table W4 without preparing a grandchild table dedicated to failure in each of a plurality of different reaches. Thus, while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, it is possible to vary the time for which the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode corresponding to the failure. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the loss in a suitable manner in each of the plurality of reach.

[Yes or No 21]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is
It includes an introductory part until the propriety of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and a first epilogue part in which the control to the advantageous state is notified after the propriety notification. a first pattern to be
The notification effect to be executed when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state consists of an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the control is to be performed to the advantageous state, and after the notification is made. A second pattern comprising a second epilogue part that notifies that the control to the advantageous state is not achieved after the second epilogue part, and a relief notification part that is executed after the second epilogue part and notifies that the control to the advantageous state is performed. and there is
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the propriety notification and a second epilogue part that informs that it is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means is
In the second epilogue part in the notification effect of the second pattern, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part,
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the relief notification part in the relief notification part in the notification effect of the second pattern;
The brightness data first used in the brightness data table corresponding to the relief notification part is set to have a higher brightness than the brightness data last used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.

[Loss 1]
As a flow from the success report part,
When it is determined not to be controlled to an advantageous state, an image is displayed when it is determined not to be controlled to an advantageous state, and the decision not to be controlled to an advantageous state is notified by decorative symbols. When the epilogue part is executed,
After that, a switching display is performed to switch to an image corresponding to the background at the start of reach.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 188, in the case of a loss after determination of success or failure, a loss pattern is displayed in the blackout background in the loss epilogue part. After that, after the switching image of the eye-catching screen is displayed, the screen switches to the normal background at the start of reach. According to this, it is possible to preferably show the switching of the screen at the time of failure by the eye-catching screen.

[Loss 2]
In the epilogue part at the time of failure, the image when it is determined that the control is not in an advantageous state is displayed in blackout, and the middle pattern of the decorative pattern is displayed in fade-in.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, in the losing epilogue part, the background at the time of losing gradually blacks out, while the middle pattern gradually fades in. As shown in FIG. According to this, the image and the medium pattern at the time of failure are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between blackout and fade-in.

[Loss 3]
The number of steps from 100% to 0% for the transmittance of one image when blacking out the image when it is determined that it is not controlled to an advantageous state is the transmittance of the image with the medium pattern of 100%. more than the number of steps from % to 0%.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, in the lost epilogue part, the number of stages required to black out the background at the time of failure from 100% transmittance to 0% is This is more than the number of steps required to fade in from 0% to 0%. Specifically, the blackout of the background has 8 stages from (X11) to (X18), whereas the fade-in of the middle pattern has 6 stages from (X12) to (X17). According to this, the image and the middle pattern at the time of failure are displayed in inverse proportion to each other in the relationship between blackout and fade-in, and the number of stages of change in transmittance is different, so the display at the time of failure is based on the relationship between the two. can be displayed appropriately.

[Loss 4]
The blacking out of the image when it is determined that it is not controlled to be in an advantageous state is performed before the fade-in of the middle pattern of the decoration pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, the change in which the background is blacked out at the time of losing starts earlier than the change in which the medium pattern fades in. According to this, the image at the time of loss and the medium pattern are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between blackout and fade-in, and moreover, the blackout is faster than the fade-in of the pattern. It is possible to make the display of the hour look good.

[Loss 5]
The cut of the image displayed when it is determined that it is not controlled to the advantageous state before blackout changes,
When it is determined that the image is not controlled to be in an advantageous state when blacking out, the cut of the displayed image does not change.

Specifically, the displayed image of the lost video before the blackout is switched, whereas the displayed image of the blackout does not change. According to this, the blackout can be made to look good by starting the blackout in the state of the image without change. It should be noted that the switching of the image includes switching of the picture on the screen, switching of the angle of the video, and switching of the displayed scene itself. In addition, the fact that there is no change in the image includes the fact that it is the same still image, that even if it is a moving image, the angle of the image does not change, and even if it is moving, only a part of the image is slightly moving.

[Loss 6]
The image when it is determined not to be controlled in an advantageous state is blacked out, and as a result of the middle pattern of the decorative pattern fading in, the transmittance of the middle pattern becomes 0%, and the blackout requires 1. A period in which the transmittance of the image is 0% is maintained for a predetermined period of time,
In a predetermined period, the pattern itself is shaken for at least two cycles,
The predetermined period is longer than the period during which the medium pattern image changes from a state with a transmittance of 100% to a state with a transmittance of 0%, and is longer than the period during which the switching display is performed.

Specifically, as a result of the blackout of the background at the time of failure and the fade-in of the middle pattern, as shown in (X18) to (X20), the middle pattern with a transmittance of 0%, A blacked out background with a transmittance of 0% is displayed for a predetermined period. This predetermined period includes a symbol fluctuation period as shown in (X19) to (X20). In the period of design fluctuation, the period of shifting the middle design from the central position to the upper position, the central position, the lower position, and the central position is defined as one period, and the fluctuation of the design may be repeated for at least two cycles. The predetermined period including such a period may be set longer than the period during which the medium pattern fades in from 100% transmittance to 0% transmittance. Also, the predetermined period may be set longer than the period during which the eye catch is displayed. According to this, in the display in which the background is blacked out with a transmittance of 0%, there is a predetermined period of time during which the middle pattern is clearly displayed, so that it is possible to suitably show that it is a failure.

[Loss 7]
The switching display is a display including information about the gaming machine.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, on the eye-catching screen, the information about the pachinko machine 1 includes the title "POWERFUL II" and the main characters Yume-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan. image is displayed. According to this, the information of the pachinko game machine 1 can be accurately conveyed by the eye-catching image.

[Loss 8]
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined to be controlled in an advantageous state consists of an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the control is to be in an advantageous state, and an advantageous part after the notification A first epilogue part that is notified that the state is controlled,
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to an advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the control is to be controlled to an advantageous state, and an advantageous state after the success or failure is notified. and a second epilogue part that is notified that it is not controlled by
The display means
In the second epilogue part, display to notify that it is not controlled in an advantageous state,
After that, the switching display is performed,
After that, display the background,
After that, with the design confirmation command as a trigger, the design is stopped and displayed,
After that, with the variation command as a trigger, the variation display of the pattern is started,
The light emission control means is
In the second epilogue part, using the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part, controlling the lighting means for effect,
switching the luminance data table to a luminance data table corresponding to the switching display when the switching display is performed, and controlling the lighting means for presentation;
switching the luminance data table to a luminance data table corresponding to the background display when the background display is performed, and controlling the lighting means for effect;
When the symbols are stopped and displayed, the brightness data table is switched to the fourth symbol stop brightness data table, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol is controlled, and the brightness data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used. to control the light emitting means for production,
When the pattern variable display is started, the luminance data table is switched to the fourth pattern variable luminance data table, the light emitting means for the fourth pattern is controlled, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continued. is used to control the light emitting means for presentation.

Specifically, the characterizing portion of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 at the time of losing will be described. The effect screen will be switched to the image at the time of losing after the effect of winning or failing. After that, after the display of the blackout where the result of the display of failure is displayed, it is switched to the eye-catching screen. Furthermore, after that, after switching to the normal screen, a screen is displayed in which the symbols are fixed and stopped. In addition, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table at the time of winning/failing determination to the brightness data table at the time of losing. After that, the table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching). After that, the table is switched to the luminance data table of the background at the start of fluctuation. Here, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen. Also, the luminance data table is switched to the background luminance data table at the timing of switching to the normal screen. Then, the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from flashing to extinguished by the reception of the symbol confirmation command, but the brightness data table for the background is not switched even by the reception of the symbol confirmation command. Also, the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from off to blinking by receiving the next variation variation pattern command, but the brightness data table for the background is not switched even by receiving the symbol confirmation command. According to this, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background at the end of the eye-catching screen, and the brightness data table is continued until the next change. is not necessary to separately prepare, the production by the lamp can be shown without discomfort from the production at the time of failure to the next change, and a series of productions can be suitably shown.

[Loss 9]
The luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of reach is to refer to the luminance data by looping until the change condition is satisfied,
In the introductory part, the luminance data corresponding to the background is not used, but the luminance data corresponding to the background has been updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52, the lamp control based on the background brightness data table corresponds to the effect of the SP reach after the change when a specific change condition such as development of the SP reach is established. After that, the lamp control is performed based on the SP reach brightness data table. In this case, while the effect of SP reach is being executed, in the background of lamp control based on the luminance data table for SP reach, the switching of luminance data in the luminance data table for background stops over time. continue without Further, the lamp control based on the background brightness data table is switched to the error brightness data table corresponding to the error state when a specific change condition such as an error occurs. Lamp control based on the data table is performed. In this case, in the error state, in the background of lamp control based on the error luminance data table, switching of luminance data in the background luminance data table continues without stopping over time. This makes it possible to make the series of effects to be executed look more suitable.

[Loss 10]
After switching to the luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introductory part, even if a pattern confirmation command is received, the luminance data table corresponding to the background is used, and after that, even if there is no pending customer waiting command The luminance data table corresponding to the background is used continuously.

Specifically, after the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background at the end of the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table for the background continues even if there is no pending memory and the command specifying the customer waiting demo is received. used for According to this, after switching to the brightness data table for the background, the same brightness data table can be continuously used, so that the performance by the lamp can be shown without discomfort, and the series of performances can be suitably shown. can be done.

[Loss 11]
When the design is confirmed, the light emitting means of the special figure stops,
By receiving the symbol determination command, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol switches from blinking to extinguishing.

Specifically, the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from flashing to extinguished upon reception of a symbol determination command that triggers the effect of symbol determination and stop. According to this, regarding the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050, the flow at the time of losing can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Loss 12]
When the next change starts, the special light emitting means flashes,
By receiving the next variation command, the lighting means for the fourth symbol is switched from off to blinking.

Specifically, the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from extinguishing to blinking by receiving the variation pattern command of the next variation which triggers the next variation to start. According to this, regarding the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050, the flow at the time of losing can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Loss 13]
Switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the winning/failure notification part to the brightness data table corresponding to the determination that control is not to be performed in an advantageous state,
Switching to the brightness data table corresponding to the switching display according to the switching display,
After switching to the background at the start of reach, the final luminance data of the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is used, and even if the pattern confirmation command is received, the luminance data is not switched, and the luminance data is used during the pattern confirmation period. Subsequently, when the next variation command is received, the brightness data table corresponding to the next variation is switched to.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 190, the luminance data table at the time of failure is used from the effect of (X40) in which the six teammates are disappointed to the effect of (X41) in which the background image is blacked out. . After the background image blacks out, the featured image is displayed. A luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the period of switching to the eye-catching screen (X42) to the pattern fixing period of (X45). After that, when the variation pattern command with hold is received, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background. In other words, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching), and the luminance data table is maintained during the pattern fixing period, and at the timing of switching to the next change, the background brightness data table. Further, in the pattern fixing period, the last luminance data of the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching), that is, turning off is used. According to this, after switching to the background luminance data table, the final luminance data of the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is maintained until the next variation pattern command is received, so that it is a failure. can be easily recognized, and as a result, the failure can be favorably shown.

[Loss 14]
The final luminance data is turned off data, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introductory part does not include luminance data for maintaining the turned off.

Specifically, the final luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is data for maintaining the light off. In addition, the data for keeping the light off is not used in the luminance data table for the background. According to this, since the brightness data for maintaining the lights off is not used in the brightness data table for the background, turning off when the background is displayed is peculiar to the failure. It can be made easy to recognize that it is.

[Loss 15]
By receiving the customer waiting command, the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the customer waiting command.

Specifically, if there is no pending memory after design determination, the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is switched to the brightness data table for background by receiving a customer waiting designation command. According to this, by receiving the customer waiting designation command, the table is switched to the brightness data table for the background, so that it is possible to make it easier for the user to recognize that the table has failed.

[Loss 16]
The first brightness data in the brightness data table corresponding to the switching display is set to a higher brightness than the last brightness data in the brightness data table corresponding to the determination not to control to the advantageous state.

Specifically, the first luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher in luminance than the final luminance data (off) in the luminance data table before displaying the eye-catching image (at the time of failure). It's becoming According to this, the game effect lamp 9 can emit light with higher brightness than before switching to the eye-catching screen, so that the switching can be easily recognized by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9 .

[Loss 17]
The first brightness data in the brightness data table corresponding to the switching display is set to a higher brightness than the first brightness data in the brightness data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introduction part.

Specifically, the first luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher in luminance than the first luminance data in the luminance data table (not including lights off) corresponding to the background at the start of the fluctuation. ing. According to this, since the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light with high brightness when switching to the eye-catching screen, the switching can be easily recognized by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9 .

[Accessory action 1]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that control is to be performed in the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the control is to be in the advantageous state, and whether or not to notify the appropriateness. A notification part, and a first epilogue part in which it is notified that it will be controlled to the advantageous state after the success or failure notification,
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the control is to be performed to the advantageous state, and a success or failure notification that notifies the appropriateness. part, and a second epilogue part in which it is notified that it will not be controlled to the advantageous state after the success or failure notification,
The light emission control means is
In both the introductory part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state and the introductory part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introductory part;
Controlling the light emitting means using the winning luminance data table after the success/failure notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed,
Controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for losing after the success/failure notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined not to be controlled to the advantageous state,
The average time for switching to the next brightness data after 1 brightness data is used in the winning brightness data table is longer than the average time for switching to the next brightness data after 1 brightness data is used in the losing brightness data table. set short.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 262 and 263, in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps are smoothly illuminated in rainbow color based on the grandchild table W1, and the RGB data thereof are switched at intervals of 30 msec. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 261, at the time of losing, the frame lamp lights up in white and dimly based on the grandchild table W14, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which is longer than at the time of winning. Thus, when winning, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than when losing, so that the lighting mode of the frame lamp can inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the win has been achieved. Furthermore, while the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more at the time of winning than at the time of losing, the lighting by the frame lamp can be made more calm at the time of losing, and as a result, the winning and losing are contrasted by the lamps. This can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Accessory action 2]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
in the success/failure notification part of the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means is
In the win/fail notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body,
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using the epilogue part brightness data table,
The luminance data table for moving the movable body is configured such that luminance data representing chromatic colors and luminance data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
The epilogue part luminance data table is configured such that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color are used in sequence.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 263, in the SP final reach hit epilogue part, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W20 in the effect that the character is falling, and the rainbow chromatic color is displayed. , and achromatic colors (RGB data of “333”) alternately. As a result, by interposing the achromatic colors between the chromatic colors of the rainbow, it is possible to emphasize the fact that the player has won a big hit and to congratulate the player. After that, in the effect that the ally character wins, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W21, and the frame lamp lights up in a smooth rainbow color without achromatic colors to indicate that a big hit has been achieved. It is possible to execute an effect that congratulates the player in a calm manner. As a result, the effect in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be favorably shown to the player.

[Epilogue 1]
The epilogue part is the celebration part after the decision to control to an advantageous state is announced, there is a scene where the enemy character is defeated, there is no scene where the friendly character takes damage, and the number of display changes is the introduction part. less parts than

Specifically, the hit epilogue part described above is a part that does not transition when the game is lost, and is a part that has a scene in which the enemy character is at a disadvantage and a scene in which the ally character is at an advantage. Also, in the hit epilogue part, the number of image display switches in the production is smaller than in the fanning part. According to this, an appropriate effect can be executed in each part, and the flow of a series of effects can be favorably shown.

[Epilogue 2]
In the epilogue part, the ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed with respect to the characters' dialogues is higher than the ratio of the dialogue subtitles displayed with respect to the characters' dialogues in the introductory part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, the ratio of displaying subtitles to characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of displaying subtitles to characters during the SP reach, which is the inciting part. ing. According to this, by clearly displaying the subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. In addition, since there are more screen changes in the introductory part than in the epilogue part, even if subtitles are displayed, the display time will be shortened so that the display of auxiliary subtitles will not interfere with the production. , it is possible to give priority to conveying effects by switching images. Thereby, it is possible to execute a suitable effect in the fanning part.

[Epilogue 3]
Dialogue subtitles are always displayed in the epilogue part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, in the epilogue part, subtitles are always displayed for dialogue. According to this, it is possible to emphasize the feeling of blessing by clearly showing what the character is saying in the hit epilogue part.

[Epilogue 4]
In the introductory part, if dialogue sound is output in the scene where the enemy character takes damage, dialogue subtitles will not be displayed,
In the epilogue part, dialogue subtitles are displayed when a dialogue sound is output in a scene in which an enemy character takes damage.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10) described above, subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the teasing part. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 110(o1), subtitles are added to the dialogue of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character takes damage (scene of catching crabs) in the winning epilogue part. According to this, in the hit epilogue part, the subtitle display that was not displayed in the inciting part is displayed, so that the feeling of blessing can be emphasized.

[Epilogue 5]
There are a first introductory part and a second introductory part, each with a different development and a different number of dialogues. It is higher than the ratio at which dialog subtitles are displayed relative to the character's dialog sound output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, there are a plurality of types of SP reach, which is a fanning part. However, in any SP reach, the ratio of displaying subtitles for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of displaying subtitles for characters during SP reach. According to this, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is saying by clearly displaying the subtitles in the epilogue part regardless of which SP reach is executed. Also, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. In addition, since there are more screen changes in the fanning part than in the epilogue part, it is possible to convey the effect by switching images first, so that the effect is not disturbed by the auxiliary subtitle display. . Thereby, it is possible to execute a suitable effect in the fanning part.

[Epilogue 6]
The dialog subtitles that are finally displayed in the epilogue part are displayed longer than the dialog subtitles of the same number of characters that are displayed in other scenes.

Specifically, as shown in Figs. 134 (s5) to (s6) described above, the subtitle display displayed in the winning epilogue part is designed to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display displayed in the introductory part. ing. According to this, by displaying the subtitle display in the final winning epilogue part for a long period of time, the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the big win and the feeling of blessing can be emphasized. It should be noted that, when the caption display is displayed, it may be arranged such that characters with a larger number of characters are displayed longer than those with a smaller number of characters. Even in such a case, if the same number of subtitles (for example, 5 characters) are displayed in the winning epilogue part and the introductory part, the period during which the subtitles are displayed is longer in the winning epilogue part. should be designed as

[Epilogue 7]
When the movable body is positioned at the advanced position, the background display for the movable body is performed,
The movable body moves according to a retraction pattern in which the movable body retracts, and the background display for the movable body is switched to an epilogue display by the time the retraction pattern ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, an effect image corresponding to the motion of the character object is displayed according to the motion of the character object falling. After that, the accessory moves to the initial position according to a predetermined evacuation pattern. While the character is rising, the display is gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the movement of the character to the screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object is displayed on the premise that the character object is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character object returns to the initial position, the display will not be aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the accessory completes the movement to return to the initial position, it is possible to prevent spoiling the aesthetic appearance of the display.

[Epilogue 8]
The deformed member retracts and returns,
The timing of switching to the epilogue display is interlocked with the timing of starting the return operation.

Specifically, on the premise that the accessory returns to its initial position, the timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue is the timing during the rise related to the timing of the start of the returning motion. According to this, since the display is switched to the display corresponding to the epilogue at the timing related to the start of the return motion, the display of the effect image corresponding to the character product motion ends before the character product returns to the initial position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect image from being displayed when the accessory returns to the initial position, and the aesthetic appearance of the production is not spoiled. The timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue may be the same timing as the timing when the accessory starts rising. Also, the accessory may perform a rotating motion or a moving motion at the drop position.

[Epilogue 9]
During the return operation, the light emitting means of the movable body fades out and approaches the extinguishment.

Specifically, when the role product rises, the effect control CPU 120 determines the role based on the child table corresponding to the action of the role product rising on the role product lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table. The brightness of the character object lamp 9A is reduced step by step so as to gradually turn off the object lamp 9A. As a result, the lighting mode of the role lamp 9A does not make the player conscious of the rise of the role, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp indicates that the player has developed into the second half reach A of the SP. It is possible to draw the player's attention.

[Epilogue 10]
The BGM linked to the image corresponding to the epilogue suggests a switch,
BGM is output in conjunction with the start of the epilogue display.

Specifically, the BGM corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue as the character returns to its initial position. According to this, by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by the BGM, the epilogue part can be suitably started.

[Epilogue 11]
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, a sound effect suggesting a change is output.

Specifically, sound effects corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue as the character returns to its initial position. According to this, by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by the sound effect, the epilogue part can be preferably started.

[Epilogue 12]
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, BGM and a sound effect suggesting switching are output.

Specifically, BGM and sound effects corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the start of display corresponding to the epilogue as the character returns to its initial position. According to this, the epilogue part can be preferably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by BGM and sound effects.

[Epilogue 13]
In the epilogue display during the return movement of the movable body, the dialogue sound is not output,
In the epilogue display after the movable body is retracted, a dialog sound is output and a dialog caption corresponding to the dialog sound is displayed.

Specifically, when the role object returns to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, the dialogue sound is not output, and the dialogue sound is not output in the epilogue display after the character object returns to the initial position. Subtitles should be displayed while outputting. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle from being displayed at a timing when it is difficult to see the subtitle, and the epilogue part can be preferably executed.

[Epilogue 14]
A dialogue sound is output at the timing of the evacuation of the movable body,
At the timing when the movable body is completely retracted, a dialog sound is output, and a dialog subtitle corresponding to the dialog sound is displayed.

Specifically, at the timing when the character returns to the initial position, it is sufficient to output the dialogue sound and display the subtitles in the epilogue display. According to this, it is possible to make the dialogue clearly recognized, and the epilogue part can be suitably executed.

[Epilogue 15]
The display of the dialogue caption corresponding to the dialogue sound output at the end of the epilogue part ends at the start timing of the pattern output.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 134(s6) to 135(s8) described above, the final caption display for the final line in the winning epilogue part is erased before the design effect is executed. It is designed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the caption display from being covered with the decoration pattern and misunderstanding that it is a message in the effect of the pattern display. Therefore, it is possible to suitably show the effect in the winning epilogue part.

[Epilogue 17]
The moving image that was played during the epilogue becomes a still image at the timing when the symbol display is completed and the player recognizes the finally aligned symbols.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, at the timing when the effect of designing is completed and the player can recognize the decorative design, the decorative design and the image such as the character displayed as the background are displayed. It is a still image. According to this, it is possible to prevent the decoration pattern from becoming difficult to see because the background of the decoration pattern is a moving image.

[Epilogue 18]
A moving image that is flowing before the start of designing is taken as a still image.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7) described above, the image that was playing in the winning epilogue part becomes a still image at the timing before the symbol presentation effect is executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the pattern from becoming difficult to see from the timing of the start of drawing out the pattern.

[Epilogue 19]
A special effect is added at the same time as the stillness.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135(s7) described above, the still image displayed in the winning epilogue part has a special graphic style. According to this, by adding a special mode effect to the still image, it is possible to make a suitable epilogue part by emphasizing that the image is still and suggesting that the scene has changed.

[Epilogue 20]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
sound output means;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
in the success/failure notification part of the notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the effect during the movement of the movable body from the second position to the first position. Ending the display, performing display corresponding to the epilogue part, after the movable body has retreated to the first position, displaying dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, so that the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. switching from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs an epilogue while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the part.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the performance mode is switched to the hit epilogue part by moving the character object from the scene before the win/fail decision in the fanning part. In addition, an effect image corresponding to the character object motion is displayed according to the motion of the character object falling. After that, the display is gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the movement of the character object to the screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach while the character object is rising. In addition, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the action of the role product to the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part while the role product is rising. In addition, a sound corresponding to the hit epilogue part is output while the character is ascending. In addition, during the background display corresponding to the hit epilogue part that is displayed before the character changes to the initial position from (s3-5) to (s3-8), the dialog sound is not output. . After that, in the state (s4) in which movement of the character to the initial position is completed and display of the effect image is finished, dialogue sounds are output and subtitles are displayed. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object is displayed on the premise that the character object is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character object returns to the initial position, the display will not be aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the hit epilogue part before the character object completes the movement to return to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the winning epilogue part in the middle of the ascending of the character, the winning epilogue part can be preferably displayed. Furthermore, by displaying the subtitles after completing the operation of returning to the initial position, the winning epilogue part can be preferably displayed.

[Epilogue 21]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed in an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the success or failure, when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed. is composed of an epilogue part and
In the introductory part, a first scene in which dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character;
a second scene in which, in the epilogue part, the final dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to the final dialogue sound emitted by the character; there is
In the second scene, no switching effect is applied when ending the display of the final dialogue subtitle, while in the first scene the switching effect is applied when ending the display of the dialogue subtitle.

[Epilogue 22]
At the time of designing, both decorative patterns and small patterns are displayed,
Although an effect is applied to the decorative pattern, since the display layer of the small pattern is displayed with priority, the small pattern is not hindered by the effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the ornamental pattern and the small pattern are displayed during the design effect. An effect image with concentrated lines is added to the decoration pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decoration pattern has a higher priority than the decoration pattern and the effect image, and is displayed on the near side. According to this, it is possible to make it possible to make it possible to recognize that the small symbols are being displayed in a variable manner while enhancing the production effect of the effect image with respect to the decoration symbols, and to make a suitable winning epilogue part.

[Epilogue 23]
At the time of designing, both decorative patterns and small patterns are displayed,
Movements of the decorative pattern and the small pattern are synchronized at the timing when the pattern output of the decorative pattern is completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the ornamental pattern and the small pattern are displayed during the design effect. Here, the movement of the decorative design and the small design may be synchronized at the timing when the design of the decorative design is completed. Concretely, during the period when the pattern is shaken up and down after the completion of the decoration design, the small design may be shaken up and down in the same motion as the decoration design. According to this, by synchronizing the movement of the decoration pattern and the small pattern, it is possible to suitably show the flow of the effect in the winning epilogue part.

[Epilogue 24]
At the time of design drawing in the re-lottery part, both decorative patterns and small patterns are displayed,
Although an effect is applied to the decorative pattern, since the display layer of the small pattern is displayed with priority, the visual recognition of the small pattern is not hindered by the effect.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 157(B1) to 158(B5) described above, both decorative patterns and small patterns are displayed during the design effect in the re-lottery part. An effect image with concentrated lines is added to the decoration pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decoration pattern has a higher priority than the decoration pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the near side. According to this, it is possible to make it possible to recognize that the small symbols are being changed and displayed while enhancing the performance effect of the effect image regarding the decorative symbols.

[Epilogue 25]
Before the re-lottery part, the small patterns are determined to be controlled in an advantageous state, and interlocked with the transition to the re-lottery part, the small patterns fluctuate again.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, when the design is produced, both the decorative design and the small design may be displayed in a state where the design is once aligned. good. Then, in conjunction with the shift to the re-lottery part, both the decoration design and the small design may change again. According to this, the decoration pattern and the small pattern can be displayed in a suitable manner in synchronization.

[Epilogue 26]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using an upper table configured with storage destination data indicating a storage location of the brightness data table and a brightness data table configured with brightness data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed in an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the success or failure, when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed. is composed of an epilogue part and
The epilogue part is
a first scene in which the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed;
a second scene that enlarges and displays the decorative pattern using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means is
In the first scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using the first upper table,
In the second scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using the second upper table,
In the first scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using the first luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and at a specific timing, the first luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is used for the rainbow light emission mode. Switching to the luminance data table, controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode,
In the second scene of the epilogue part, the brightness data table for enlarged display is used to control the light emitting means, and at the timing related to the end of the enlarged display of the decoration pattern, the brightness data table for enlarged display is used to change the rainbow light emission mode. controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table of
The brightness data table for the rainbow emission mode used in the first scene of the epilogue part and the brightness data table for the rainbow emission mode used in the second scene of the epilogue part are common brightness data tables. can be,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part and storage destination data of the luminance data table for the rainbow emission mode,
The second upper table is composed of storage destination data of the luminance data table for enlarged display and storage destination data of the luminance data table for the rainbow emission mode.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table used for the winning notification effect and the grandchild table used for displaying the winning pattern, different grandchild tables are prepared for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. Each performance can be livened up by a performance with a sense of unity, while reducing the data volume used for lamp control for lighting in rainbow colors. As a result, while reducing the amount of data, it is possible to make the performance in the winning epilogue part more visible to the player by using the frame lamp.

[Epilogue 27]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using an upper table configured with storage destination data indicating a storage location of the brightness data table and a brightness data table configured with brightness data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. and an epilogue part to be executed and a re-lottery part to be executed after the epilogue part,
The epilogue part includes a result notification scene in which the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area and the result of the notification effect is notified,
The re-lottery part includes a re-lottery result notification scene in which the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area and the result of the re-lottery is notified,
The light emission control means is
In the result notification scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using the first upper table,
In the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part, controlling the light emitting means using the second upper table,
In the result notification scene in the epilogue part, the brightness data table for result notification scene enlarged display is used to control the light emitting means, and at the timing related to the end of the enlarged display of the decoration pattern, the result notification scene enlarged display brightness data table is used. controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for a rainbow light emission mode;
In the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part, the re-lottery result notification scene is performed by controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for re-lottery result notification scene enlarged display, and at the timing related to the end of the enlarged display of the decorative pattern. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for obtaining a rainbow light emission mode from the brightness data table for enlarged display;
The brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the result notification scene in the epilogue part and the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part have the same brightness. is a data table,
The first upper table is composed of storage location data of the brightness data table for enlarging the display of the result notification scene and storage location data of the brightness data table for the rainbow emission mode,
The second upper table is composed of storage location data of the brightness data table for enlarged display of the re-lottery result notification scene and storage location data of the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode.

Specifically, in the child tables WD21 and WD22 of the re-lottery part, the ramp control when the pattern is finally determined after the re-lottery part is common to the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13 and WD16 of the winning epilogue part. Then the grandchild table W1 is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare a separate grandchild table for lighting the rainbow color for the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part, and while reducing the data volume used for lamp control, there is a sense of unity even in different parts (timings). A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, while reducing the data volume, the effects in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player.

[Epilogue 28]
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
The display means is
In the epilogue part, while displaying the decoration pattern at the end of the display area, display the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
After that, end the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
At the timing related to ending the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
When the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to the brightness data table for enlarged display, and the brightness data table for enlarged display is used to control the light emitting means. .

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed sequentially (the video of the winning epilogue is flowing), the decoration pattern is positioned at the end of the display area of the screen. (located in the upper left corner of the screen). In relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the video of the winning epilogue is finished, the reduced pattern is erased and the design effect is executed in which the central area of the screen is used to enlarge and display the pattern. In addition, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table corresponding to the pattern display in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image. According to this, when the image of the winning epilogue part is displayed, the reduced pattern is positioned on the edge side of the screen so as not to interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and when the development of the winning epilogue part is completed, the pattern is displayed. At the time of playing, by enlarging and displaying the decoration patterns continuously using the screen end side and the screen center, the big winning patterns can be emphasized and shown to the player. Furthermore, by switching the brightness data table, it is possible to show the scene switching appropriately. In this way, the hit epilogue part can be shown favorably.

[Epilogue 29]
In the epilogue part,
While the image corresponding to the epilogue is being displayed, it is positioned at the end of the display area in a state in which the decorative patterns are aligned.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed sequentially (the video of the winning epilogue is flowing), the decoration pattern is positioned at the end of the display area of the screen. (the position of the upper left corner of the screen) is displayed with "222" aligned. According to this, even while the winning epilogue image is being played, the reduced decoration pattern allows the player to recognize that the big winning display result is displayed.

[Epilogue 30]
In the epilogue part,
While the image corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, the decorative pattern is positioned at the end of the display area,
In relation to the timing when the display of the image corresponding to the epilogue ends, the output of the displayed dialogue sound ends, the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed on the edge of the display area ends, and the decorative pattern is displayed. Zoom in using the center of the region.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed sequentially (the video of the winning epilogue is flowing), the decoration pattern is positioned at the end of the display area of the screen. (position in the upper left corner of the screen). In addition, in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue video ends, the subtitle display displayed at (Y1) is deleted, the reduced pattern at the upper left corner position is deleted, and the image at the center of the screen is deleted. The decoration pattern is enlarged and displayed using the area. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from being displayed overlapping the decoration pattern, and to prevent misunderstanding that some kind of message is being displayed when the pattern is displayed, and the epilogue part can be properly reproduced. I can show you.

[Epilogue 31]
At the start of the introductory part, the decoration pattern is positioned at the end of the display area.

Specifically, the decoration pattern may be moved to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach state at the start of the SP reach. According to this, by positioning from the start of the SP reach, it is possible not to interfere with the development of the performance even during the SP reach, and a series of performances can be favorably shown.

[Re-lottery production 1]
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect for notifying whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect consists of an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to be controlled to an advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part to which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success or failure is notified. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
A first re-lottery performance of displaying a first pattern in the first half part and then displaying a second pattern in the second half part among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances when it is determined to be controlled in a second advantageous state. is executable and
When it is determined to be controlled in a first advantageous state, a second mode of displaying the first pattern again in the second half part after displaying the first pattern in the first half part among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery effects. It is possible to execute a re-lottery effect,
Using the first pattern displayed in the epilogue part, execute the first re-lottery effect or the second re-lottery effect,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect,
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol, which was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery, is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. is used to start the re-lottery effect. When the re-extraction effect is started, the "2" pattern is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" pattern. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feed performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started using the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed, and when the re-lottery performance is started, the symbol feed performance is executed using the temporarily stopped-displayed symbols. , the player can easily understand from which decorative pattern the re-lottery has started. As a result, it is possible to show the flow of a series of performances well.

[Re-lottery production 2]
When the image corresponding to the background temporarily stopping the decorative pattern alignment is displayed, the light emitting means is extinguished, and when shifting to the re-lottery screen, the light-emitting means emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the re-lottery. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (tA6), in the winning epilogue part, when the frame lamp is smoothly illuminated in rainbow color and the winning symbols are temporarily stopped, before executing the re-lottery effect, After the frame lamp is turned off once, the frame lamp is lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the re-lottery performance, so that the start of the re-lottery performance can be informed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

[Re-lottery production 3]
When moving to the re-lottery screen, temporarily stop the decoration pattern alignment,
While the display is temporarily stopped, the decorative pattern arrangement is displayed with a shaking effect, but while the shaking display with the effect is maintained, the image corresponding to the background and the light emitting mode of the light emitting means are reproduced. Switch to lottery.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (A5) described above, in the final state of the effect of the pattern display in the winning epilogue part, the ornamental pattern is swayed and an effect image with concentrated lines is added. Even when the background is switched from that state to the background of the re-lottery effect as shown in (A6), the effect image with the concentrated lines is continuously added. Also, the game effect lamp 9 is switched from smooth rainbow lighting to extinguished. In other words, from the design to the re-lottery production, the pattern fluctuation and effect mode continue, and the background and the lamp are designed to switch. According to this, it is possible to make it easy to understand from which decoration pattern the re-lottery effect started.

[Re-lottery production 4]
At the start of pattern feeding, the decorative patterns that have been displayed since the epilogue are reduced, and after the pattern feeding is started, the pattern feeding is started.

Specifically, at the start of the pattern feeding effect in the re-lottery effect, the variation starts from the reduced state of the decorative pattern that has been displayed from the hit epilogue part. According to this, it is possible to show the flow of a series of presentations well without executing the process of changing to a different decoration pattern.

[Re-lottery production 5]
Pattern feeding is started with a reduced size, and the reduced sizes of other patterns are all uniform.

Specifically, in the symbol feed effect, variation is started by a reduced symbol, and the size of the symbol during variation is a uniform reduced size. According to this, it is possible to smoothen the appearance of the variation at the time of the pattern feeding effect, and to show the flow of the series of effects well.

[Re-lottery production 6]
While a plurality of types of decorative patterns are being sent in a reduced size, transitions are made in the order of motion promotion display, acceptance of motion, display of a decorative pattern slightly larger than the reduced size, and display of an enlarged decorative pattern.

Specifically, as in the flow shown in FIGS. 144 (A10) to 156 (A46) and 157 (B1) to 158 (B5) described above, in the re-lottery effect, the pattern is sent by the reduced size decorative pattern. is executed, and a button prompt is displayed. Then, when the player operates the button, an effect of displaying a symbol is executed in which the symbol is enlarged and displayed. In other words, from the moment the pattern is put out, the decoration pattern that is finally notified is displayed in an enlarged manner. According to this, since the symbol is finally announced from the start of enlargement, it is possible to show the player what the final notification symbol is in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Re-lottery production 7]
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect for notifying whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect consists of an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to be controlled to an advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part to which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success or failure is notified. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances, in the first half part, after the first pattern is displayed, a replacement display is performed in which the first pattern is replaced with another pattern. , it is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect to display the second pattern in the second half part,
A second re-lottery performance in which, among a plurality of types of re-lottery performances, replacement display is performed in the first half part and the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part when it is determined that the first advantageous state is to be controlled. is executable and
The first re-lottery effect is a effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the second symbol in the second half part,
The second re-lottery effect is a effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the first symbol in the second half part,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect,
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol, which was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery, is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. is used to start the re-lottery effect. When the re-extraction effect is started, the "2" pattern is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" pattern. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feed performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. And, during the re-lottery effect, "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1" and all the decorative patterns are sent in order, and then again "2" ” A symbol feed effect in which symbols are displayed is executed. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started by using the decoration patterns temporarily stopped and displayed, and the decoration patterns initially temporarily stopped and displayed are displayed again after a plurality of kinds of decoration patterns are varied. According to this, the flow of a series of presentations can be shown well by the design feeding presentation in which the final display result is not immediately displayed and all the decorative designs are shown. Also, in the winning epilogue part, when the winning pattern is temporarily stopped, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color, the re-lottery effect is executed after turning off, and when the pattern is shaking and displayed, Based on the luminance data corresponding to the lottery effect (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow color. As a result, the player is not misunderstood that the temporarily stopped winning pattern in the winning epilogue part has been determined due to the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbols "3" and "2" are displayed in a swinging manner is carried over during the period in which the symbols are confirmed. In this way, during the design confirmation period, which is performed in a short period of time, it is designed so that the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as it is without preparing a luminance data table for special lamp control. Do not add extra capacity.

[Re-lottery production 8]
The pattern feeding according to a predetermined pattern is carried out in order from the temporarily stopped pattern to the next pattern. It is a production that sends to
The predetermined pattern is a pattern in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and looping it.

Specifically, in the symbol forwarding effect in the re-lottery effect, all decorative patterns such as ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', ``6'', ``7'', and ``1'' are sent in order. , again, "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1" and all the decoration patterns are sent in order. In this way, since the numbers of the decoration patterns are sent in order, it is possible to clearly show the flow of the series of presentations.

[Re-lottery production 9]
While the pattern is being fed in a predetermined pattern, all the decorative patterns to be sent are once displayed with the same resolution as when the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped.

Specifically, in the symbol feed effect in the re-lottery effect, all the symbols are displayed with the degree of transparency of the symbols when temporarily stopped, and the degree of transparency is increased during fluctuation. Specifically, "2" pattern with 0% transparency, "2" pattern with 50% transparency, "3" pattern with 0% transparency, "3" pattern with 50% transparency, transparent Patterns are switched such as a "4" pattern with a degree of 0% and a "4" pattern with a transparency of 50%. According to this, all the patterns can be clearly displayed in a mode with low transparency during the pattern feed effect, so that it is possible to grasp what kind of pattern is being sent.

[Re-lottery production 10]
After the symbol feeding is started, the display times of the plurality of types of decorative symbols are the same until notification is given as to whether or not the player will be promoted.

Specifically, in the symbol forwarding effect in the re-lottery effect, all decorative patterns such as ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', ``6'', ``7'', and ``1'' are sent in order. However, the time that each symbol is displayed is the same. According to this, all patterns can be displayed for a certain period of time, and the flow of a series of performances can be shown well.

[Re-lottery production 11]
The action promotion display is performed during pattern feeding,
The position where the action prompting display is performed is a position that does not overlap with the pattern being sent.

Specifically, during the symbol feed effect, a promotion display formed from the button image and the time gauge is displayed. The position where the prompting display is displayed is a position that does not overlap with the position where the variation of the decorative pattern during the pattern feed effect is displayed. In this way, since the promotion display does not overlap the decorative symbols during the symbol feeding effect, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the symbol feeding. It should be noted that a part of the promotion display may be partially overlapped with the decorative pattern during the pattern feed effect.

[Re-lottery production 12]
The action-promoting display is started during pattern feeding, and is started during the second loop of the predetermined pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the promotion display is displayed at (A24) and (A25) after repeating twice the fluctuation of displaying all the decorative symbols during the symbol feed effect. be started. Since the promotion image is not displayed until the predetermined symbol feeding pattern is repeated twice in this manner, the player can be made to firmly recognize the symbol feeding effect.

[Re-lottery production 13]
When pattern feeding is started from the symbol "1", the timing at which the action promotion display is performed is, for example, the symbol "5",
When the symbol feed is started from the symbol "4", the timing at which the action promotion display is performed is, for example, the symbol "8".

Specifically, the symbol at the start of the re-lottery effect may be other than 2 symbols. Even in such a case, the timing at which the button image as the action prompting display is displayed is constant. For example, in the case of 2 symbols, the timing at which the action prompting display was displayed was the timing at which 2 symbols were displayed again. Similarly, in the case of 5 symbols, the timing at which the action prompting display is displayed may be the timing at which 5 symbols are displayed again. That is, the number of symbols to be sent is the same regardless of which symbol the re-lottery effect is started. According to this, since control can be made constant, the processing load can be reduced.

[Re-lottery production 14]
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect for notifying whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect consists of an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to be controlled to an advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part to which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success or failure is notified. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances, in the first half part, after the first pattern is displayed, a replacement display is performed in which the first pattern is replaced with another pattern. , it is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect to display the second pattern in the second half part,
A second re-lottery performance in which the replacement display is performed in the first half part and the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part among a plurality of types of re-lottery performances when it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state. is executable and
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, the second pattern is repeatedly displayed after the second pattern is displayed in the first half part, and the second pattern is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to execute a third re-lottery effect to
The first re-lottery performance, the second re-lottery performance and the third re-lottery performance are configured to have the same performance scale,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, a pattern in which an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns) is displayed after displaying an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns), and a pattern in which an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns) is displayed and then an odd numbered pattern (for example, 3 patterns) is displayed. was provided. In addition to this, a pattern may be provided in which odd numbered symbols (eg, 7 symbols) are displayed after displaying the odd numbered symbols (eg, 7 symbols). In the effect of sending patterns from odd-numbered patterns to odd-numbered patterns, all the same odd-numbered patterns should be sent at the time of pattern sending. However, regardless of the pattern, the length of the performance during the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery performance may be designed to be the same. According to this, a suitable re-lottery effect can be achieved in any pattern without increasing the data capacity. Also, in the winning epilogue part, when the winning pattern is temporarily stopped, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color, the re-lottery effect is executed after turning off, and when the pattern is shaking and displayed, Based on the luminance data corresponding to the lottery effect (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow color. As a result, the player is not misunderstood that the temporarily stopped winning pattern in the winning epilogue part has been determined due to the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbols "3" and "2" are displayed in a swinging manner is carried over during the period in which the symbols are confirmed. In this way, during the design confirmation period, which is performed in a short period of time, it is designed so that the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as it is without preparing a luminance data table for special lamp control. Do not add extra capacity.

[Re-lottery production 15]
The re-lottery effect is displayed by combining display data other than decorative patterns and display data of various decorative patterns, reproducing each pattern of multiple types of re-lottery effects.
By using common display data in each re-lottery effect, the effect scale between each re-lottery effect becomes common, and only the type of pattern sent and the pattern issued in the pattern output are each re-lottery. It differs in the lottery production.

Specifically, in the lottery effect, a pattern of displaying an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns) after displaying an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns), and an odd numbered pattern (for example, 3 patterns) after displaying an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns). , and a pattern in which odd numbered symbols (eg, 7 symbols) are displayed after odd numbered symbols (eg, 7 symbols) are displayed, common data is used. In other words, the performance data is the same, and the design is such that the data relating to the decorative design is changed according to the pattern. According to this, since it is not necessary to provide a dedicated pattern, the amount of data can be reduced.

[Re-lottery production 16]
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect for notifying whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect consists of an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to be controlled to an advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part to which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success or failure is notified. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
A first re-lottery performance of displaying a first pattern in the first half part and then displaying a second pattern in the second half part among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances when it is determined to be controlled in a second advantageous state. is executable and
When it is determined to be controlled to a first advantageous state, a second re-lottery display of a plurality of types of re-lottery effects, in which the first pattern is displayed in the first half part and then the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part. Lottery production can be executed,
Displaying the first pattern with the same or substantially the same animation when the first pattern is displayed once in the epilogue part and when the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part of the second re-lottery effect,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect,
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, the designing in the parts of FIGS. 141(A1) to 142(A5) and the designing in the parts of FIGS. 161(C1) to 162(C5) are executed using substantially the same image. be done. Concretely, the same image is used for the pattern output by the "2" pattern and the effect image, and the pattern output is executed in such a manner that the background portion is different. According to this, it is possible to make the image of the pattern output substantially the same, so that it is possible to clearly show to the player that the game has not been promoted to the definite variable pattern. It should be noted that the image of the patterned portion including the background may be completely the same. Also, in the winning epilogue part, when the winning pattern is temporarily stopped, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color, the re-lottery effect is executed after turning off, and when the pattern is shaking and displayed, Based on the luminance data corresponding to the lottery effect (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow color. As a result, the player is not misunderstood that the temporarily stopped winning pattern in the winning epilogue part has been determined due to the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbols "3" and "2" are displayed in a swinging manner is carried over during the period in which the symbols are confirmed. In this way, during the design confirmation period, which is performed in a short period of time, it is designed so that the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as it is without preparing a luminance data table for special lamp control. Do not add extra capacity.

[Re-lottery production 17]
The animation when displaying the first identification information includes an animation from when the pattern is displayed to when it reaches the first position while expanding.

Specifically, in the above-described pattern display effect, a series of effects are executed in which the pattern is once displayed in an enlarged size and then displayed in the normal size at the center of the screen. According to this, it is possible to favorably show a series of design effects by enlarging and reducing the design.

[Re-lottery production 18]
When the decorative pattern matching is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is executed, and when informing whether or not the decorative pattern matching is promoted in the notification part, the display means refers to common display data,
By combining the common display data and the display data of a plurality of types of decorative patterns, display of a plurality of types of patterns is performed.

Specifically, in the above-described pattern presentation effect, common pattern presentation data may be used in the pattern presentation presentation data in the winning epilogue part and the pattern presentation presentation data in the re-lottery presentation. Then, a series of pattern presentation effects may be executed by combining common pattern presentation data and a plurality of decorative designs. According to this, it is possible to reduce the data volume while favorably displaying the design effect. It should be noted that substantially the same data may be used for the symbol appearance effect data in the winning epilogue part and the symbol appearance effect data in the re-lottery effect.

[Re-lottery production 19]
If you do not get promoted in the re-lottery production,
When the decoration pattern matching is temporarily stopped before execution of the re-lottery and when the notification that the decoration pattern matching is not promoted in the re-lottery is performed, the light emission mode in the pattern output is the same.

Specifically, in the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part, as ramp control when the pattern is finally determined after the re-lottery, it is common to the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part. A grandchild table W1 is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare a separate grandchild table for lighting the rainbow color for the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part, and while reducing the data volume used for lamp control, there is a sense of unity even in different parts (timings). A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, while reducing the data volume, the effects in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player.

[Re-lottery effect 20]
In the case of promotion in the re-lottery production,
When the decoration pattern matching is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is executed, and when the promotion of the decoration pattern matching is notified by the re-lottery, the lighting mode in the pattern output is different,
The light emitting mode in the pattern output is more intense when the decorative pattern matching is notified to be promoted by the re-lottery than when the decorative pattern matching is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is executed.

Specifically, in the child table WD20 of the re-lottery part, the same rainbow color as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part is used as lamp control when the pattern is finally determined after the re-lottery. The frame lamp lights up, but when the symbol of "2" is promoted by a re-lottery and replaced by the symbol of "3", the lighting of the rainbow color at time tB5 to tB9 is once in the epilogue part of "2". The lighting mode is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting when the pattern is temporarily stopped. As a result, the player can effectively congratulate the promotion of winning symbols in the re-lottery by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

[Re-lottery production 21]
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect for notifying whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect consists of an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to be controlled to an advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part to which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success or failure is notified. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
A first re-lottery performance of displaying a first pattern in the first half part and then displaying a second pattern in the second half part among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances when it is determined to be controlled in a second advantageous state. is executable and
When it is determined to be controlled to a first advantageous state, a second re-lottery display of a plurality of types of re-lottery effects, in which the first pattern is displayed in the first half part and then the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part. Lottery production can be executed,
The first pattern is shaken by changing the display mode of the first pattern to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode from when the first pattern is displayed again in the second half until the pattern confirmation period. perform a shaking display that displays the first pattern as if
The second pattern is shaken by changing the display mode of the second pattern to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode from the time when the second pattern is displayed in the second half part to the time when the pattern is fixed. Perform a shaking display that displays the second pattern as if it were there,
The first mode is a mode in which the player can more easily see the pattern than either the second mode or the third mode,
The performance execution means is
In the re-lottery part, it is possible to execute an action prompting display that prompts the player to act,
When the action is performed at the first timing while the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-lottery performance, the second re-lottery performance is performed at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the first re-lottery performance is executed. displaying the second pattern in a swaying display while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the second pattern so that the pattern is in the second mode;
When an action prompting display is executed in the first re-lottery performance and the action is performed at a second timing different from the first timing, a predetermined timing is reached after the performance corresponding to the first re-lottery performance is executed. displaying the second pattern in a swinging display while maintaining the swinging speed of the swinging display of the second pattern so that the second pattern is in the third mode when the second pattern is pressed,
When the action prompting display is executed in the first re-lottery performance, display is made to make the second pattern shaking display difficult to see from a predetermined timing regardless of whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing. After that, the second pattern is again displayed in a shaking display, and after that, when the pattern fixing period comes, the second pattern is displayed in the first mode while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second pattern. display stop,
When the action is performed at the first timing while the action prompting display is executed in the second re-lottery performance, the first re-lottery performance is performed at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the second re-lottery performance is executed. displaying the first pattern in a swaying display while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the first pattern so that the pattern is in the second mode;
When the action is performed at the second timing while the action prompting display is executed in the second re-lottery performance, the first re-lottery performance is performed at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the second re-lottery performance is executed. displaying the first pattern in a swaying display while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the first pattern so that the pattern is in the third mode;
When the action prompting display is executed in the second re-lottery performance, display is made to make the shaking display of the first pattern difficult to see from a predetermined timing regardless of whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing. After that, the first pattern is again displayed in a shaking display, and then, when the pattern fixing period comes, the first pattern is displayed in the first mode while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first pattern. display stop,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect,
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in (L1) to (L3) in FIG. 267, an action promotion display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed during symbol feeding of the re-lottery effect. When the player operates the push button 31B during the period in which the action prompting display is displayed, the common symbol appearance effects shown in (L4) to (L6) are executed. Regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, a common design effect is executed by enlarging and reducing the design as shown in (L4) to (L5). After that, during the period of design fluctuation, the design is shaken. The swinging period of the pattern differs depending on the operation timing of the button. Therefore, after the swinging period of the symbol, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbol faces right, at the second operation timing, the symbol faces left, and at the third operation timing. , The pattern may be in a position facing the front. However, at any operation timing, a white-out effect is interposed as a common effect from (J1) to (J18) thereafter, and the effect of swinging the pattern after rotating the pattern and reducing the pattern is executed. According to this, the pattern can be neatly stopped by performing a common performance regardless of when the push button 31B is operated at any timing, and a series of performances can be shown favorably.

[Re-lottery effect 22]
When the action is performed at the first timing of the effective period of the operation, after notification of whether or not promotion is performed, the decorative pattern is displayed in a swaying manner until the predetermined timing of the change comes.
When the action is performed at the second timing, which is earlier than the first timing of the effective period of the action, the action is performed earlier than the first timing until the predetermined timing of the change after notification of whether or not promotion is performed. The decoration pattern is displayed swaying as much as it is early, and the scale is absorbed.

Specifically, when the push button 31B is operated at the first timing during the valid period of operation, after notification of whether or not to be promoted is executed, a display with a swinging decorative pattern is displayed (FIG. 267 (L3)). without operation). When the push button 31B was operated at the second timing earlier than the first timing during the operation effective period, the display of the swinging decorative pattern was earlier than the first timing after the notification of whether or not to be promoted. (The operation in FIG. 267 (L2) is an example of the second timing). When the push button 31B was operated at the third timing earlier than the second timing during the valid period of operation, the display of the swinging decorative pattern was earlier than the second timing after the notification of whether or not to be promoted. (The operation in FIG. 267 (L1) is an example of the first timing). In this way, even if the push button 31B is operated at any timing, the length of the performance can be absorbed by the fluctuation time of the pattern. By performing a common performance after that, the pattern can be neatly stopped, and a series of performances can be favorably shown.

[Re-lottery effect 23]
The predetermined effect is started after the flickering decorative pattern is rotated while being enlarged while blinking in white.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, after performing a white-out as a common effect, a different effect from the previous patterns is executed in which the swaying decorative pattern is rotated while being enlarged. According to this, regardless of the position of the pattern in the shaking of the pattern of the scale absorption, by executing a different mode of production after the whiteout is interposed, the flow of the production until the pattern is stopped. It can be made not to give a sense of incongruity.

[Re-lottery effect 24]
The swaying display of the decorative pattern is displayed with the first position as the axis,
The sway display has decorative patterns in the order of 1st position, 2nd position, 3rd position, 2nd position, 1st position, 4th position, 5th position, 4th position, 1st position, and 2nd position. A predetermined effect is designed so that when the fixed period comes, the decorative patterns are always displayed in the order of the second position, the first position, and so on.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, during the swing period of the pattern, the pattern swings to the back side from (J10) to (J12), and then swings to the front side from (J13) to (J14). changes to the initial position by After that, after the pattern swings to the front side from (J15) to (J16), the pattern swings to the back side from (J17) to (J18) to change to the initial position. Such a series of movements may be repeated multiple times. However, during the period in which the pattern is determined, the pattern is designed to always be positioned at the initial position in which the pattern faces the front as shown in (J18). According to this, the symbols can be determined and stopped in a manner that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

[Re-lottery effect 25]
The starting point for causing the light emitting means to emit rainbow light during the second part is to emit light in rainbow at the start of a predetermined effect.

Specifically, it is designed so that the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow colors at the timing of the white-out of (J1) in FIG. 267 . The timing of (J1) is an effect executed as a common effect regardless of the operation timing. By setting the location where such a common effect is executed as the starting point for changing the game effect lamp 9, the designer can easily determine the start timing. Note that the timing (J2) at which the common start display is started may be used as the start opportunity instead of the timing (J1).

[Re-lottery production 26]
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect for notifying whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect consists of an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to be controlled to an advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part to which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success or failure is notified. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
A first re-lottery performance of displaying a first pattern in the first half part and then displaying a second pattern in the second half part among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances when it is determined to be controlled in a second advantageous state. is executable and
When it is determined to be controlled to a first advantageous state, a second re-lottery display of a plurality of types of re-lottery effects, in which the first pattern is displayed in the first half part and then the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part. Lottery production can be executed,
In the epilogue part, when the first pattern is once displayed, the display mode of the first pattern is changed to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode so that the first pattern is shaken. It displays the first pattern,
When transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, when transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the first mode, the first pattern is displayed in the second mode. There is a timing to shift from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, and a timing to shift from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third mode,
The effect executing means performs re-lottery from the epilogue part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the first mode and the transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the second mode. When shifting to the part, and when shifting from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the third mode, a specific display is performed to make the first pattern difficult to see, Display the first pattern in a common display mode to execute the first re-lottery effect or the second re-lottery effect,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect,
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, when the image showing the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, regardless of the timing of the operation, after that, During the time up to the predetermined timing when the re-lottery effect is executed, there may be provided a period of symbol fluctuation for absorbing the scale (symbol fluctuation period from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect accompanied by a whiteout as shown from (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, even if the stick controller 31A is operated at any timing, the pattern is once displayed in a swinging manner, and then the common effect accompanied by the whiteout is executed, and then the re-lottery effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the movement of the pattern from giving a sense of incompatibility, and it is possible to suitably show a series of presentations.

[Re-lottery effect 27]
The re-lottery effect is common regardless of which of the introduction parts of the plurality of types of introduction parts wins.

Specifically, any of a plurality of ready-to-wins may be used in common from the white-out screen until the re-lottery effect is executed. According to this, the data capacity of the effect data can be reduced.

[Re-lottery effect 28]
The movement of the decorative pattern after the specific display is an extension of the movement of the decorative pattern that was once shaken before the specific display.

Specifically, the movement of the pattern after the whiteout screen may be an extension of the movement of the pattern before the whiteout screen. For example, if the movement of the pattern in front of the white-out screen is a movement that sways on the spot on the front side and the back side on the axis rotation centered on the vertical direction of the pattern, the movement after the white-out screen is It may be a motion of rotating clockwise around the vertical direction of the pattern while enlarging. According to this, by displaying the whiteout between the extended movements of the same axis rotation, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the movement of the pattern from being uncomfortable, and the series of effects can be shown favorably. be able to.

[Re-lottery production 29]
The plurality of types of introductory parts include a predetermined introductory part that is not notified when the operation of the operating means is triggered by branching the notification of whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
In the predetermined introductory part, there is no point where the scale is shifted, so if it is decided that the control will be in an advantageous state in the predetermined introductory part, the decoration pattern will be temporarily stopped until the re-lottery effect is executed. There is no blurring in the shaking display, but the same re-lottery effect as the reach that causes the scale deviation is executed.

Specifically, among the plurality of SP reach, there are those in which the promotion of operation such as button operation is not notified in the branch at the time of determining whether or not to be controlled in an advantageous state. In such SP reach, there is no scale shift associated with the operation. However, even in such an SP ready-to-win game, a re-lottery effect similar to that for an SP ready-to-win game in which scale deviation occurs may be executed. According to this, even if there is only one re-lottery effect, it is possible to prevent discomfort from being caused by the common effect regardless of the presence or absence of scale deviation. In addition, the data capacity can be reduced by using one re-lottery effect.

[Re-lottery effect 30]
In the flow that goes to the re-lottery effect after the shaking display of the decorative pattern in the big hit in the predetermined introduction part,
The timing of shifting to the re-lottery effect is designed so that it will be an extension of the decorative pattern after the specific display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, the timing is set so that the movement of the pattern after the white-out screen is an extension of the movement of the pattern before the white-out screen. For example, the movement of the symbol in front of the whiteout screen is one of a series of movements in which the symbol moves from the right position (K3) via the front position (K5) to the left position (K6). is designed to be In other words, when the swing of the pattern is one of a series of actions in which it rotates clockwise, a white-out is executed by a re-lottery effect, and then the pattern is enlarged and rotated clockwise. According to this, it is possible to prevent the movement of the symbols from giving a sense of incompatibility by a series of movements of the symbols rotating to the right from the period of the fluctuation of the symbols to the re-lottery effect.

<Description of terms>
The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has been described above. Some terms used in this specification are explained below.

"Variable display" (variable display) includes variably displaying multiple types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), multiple types of normal symbols, and multiple types of decorative symbols.

The "fluctuation" of the design is the update display of multiple types of designs, such as multiple types of special designs (1st special design, 2nd special design), multiple types of normal designs, and multiple types of decorative designs. Scroll display, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, lamp (4th symbol unit 9050, special figure 1 variable display part 9053, special figure 2 variable display part 9054 etc.) lighting / flashing / extinguishing and so on.

The "decorative symbol" includes symbols variably displayed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game.

The "reduced pattern" is a pattern in which the decorative pattern is reduced, and includes a pattern smaller than the decorative pattern. When the reduced patterns are stopped and displayed, the same number pattern as the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the screen in a smaller size than the decorative pattern.

The "small pattern" includes patterns corresponding to the variable display of decorative patterns displayed in a size smaller than the decorative patterns. The small patterns are displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L, the "middle" decorative design display area 5C, and the "right" decorative design display area 5R. Patterns corresponding to each of the decorative patterns are arranged in the horizontal direction.

"Pattern determination" is the 4th pattern unit 9050, the special figure 1 variable display portion 9053, the special figure 2 variable display portion 9054, and the variation of the decoration pattern etc., which has been fluctuating, finally stops, and finally the special figure game Including that the design in is confirmed. For example, a state in which each of the decorative patterns fluctuating in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern fluctuating in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative pattern fluctuating in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is stopped. include.

In the "design determination period", the display result is determined by stopping the fluctuation of the 4th design unit 9050, the special figure 1 variable display part 9053, the special figure 2 variable display part 9054, and the decoration design. Including duration. For example, the decorative patterns fluctuating in the left decorative design display area 5L, the decorative patterns fluctuating in the middle decorative design display area 5C, and the decorative patterns fluctuating in the right decorative design display area 5R are stopped and displayed. Including the state in which the result was displayed deterministically.

"Reach" means that, when the decoration symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination, the decoration symbols that are not still stopped and displayed continue to be displayed in a variable manner. For example, the left decorative design display area 5L stops the "2" decorative design, the right decorative design display area 5R stops the "2" decorative design, but the middle decorative design display area 5C This includes the state in which the variable display of the decoration pattern is still continuing.

"Lighting off" of the lighting means (light emitting means) includes a state in which the value of luminance data for lighting (lighting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is "0" (a value indicating the lowest luminance). It should be noted that the "turning off" of the lighting means (light emitting means) is luminance data corresponding to turning off, such as "1" or "2", for lighting (lighting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means). It may include a state with a value close to "0". The state in which the value of the luminance data for lighting (lighting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is close to the luminance data "0" corresponding to turning off, such as "1" or "2", is " It may be included in "turn on" or "substantially turn off".

"Lighting" or "light emission" of the lighting means (light emitting means) is a state in which the value of luminance data for lighting (lighting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is higher than when the lamp is turned off. This includes a state in which the value is equal to or greater than the luminance data value (“0”) corresponding to “lights off” described above. "Lighting" includes constant lighting in which the lamp is always lit, wave lighting in which a plurality of lamps are switched from off to lighting in order, and haze lighting in which the lamp is dimly lit while changing luminance.

"Flashing" of the lighting means (light emitting means) means that the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is in a state other than "extinguishing", "substantially extinguished" or "lit", and the lamp is in a state of "lit" and "extinguishing". is repeated over time. Also, "blinking" of the lighting means (light emitting means) includes that the lamp repeats "turning on" and "substantially turning off" over time.

"Luminance" is a value indicating brightness of a lamp (lighting means, light emitting means), and in the present embodiment, luminance data is expressed in hexadecimal as data corresponding to luminance. For example, when the luminance data used to control a predetermined lamp is "0", the lamp is controlled so that the predetermined lamp has the lowest luminance (the lamp is darkest), and the predetermined lamp is controlled. If the luminance data used for the calculation is "F", the lamp is controlled so that the predetermined lamp has the highest luminance (the lamp is bright). As described above, the luminance data corresponds to the value of the current flowing through the lamp. When the luminance data used to control a given lamp is "0", the current flowing through the given lamp is the smallest. , when the luminance data used to control a given lamp is "F", the current flowing through the given lamp is the largest. Note that the “lamp” is not limited to LED (light emitting diode) lamps, and includes any kind of lamps such as EL (electroluminescence) lamps and incandescent lamps.

The "lighting color" or "luminous color" of a lamp includes the color represented by the light emitted by one or more light emitting elements included in the lamp. For example, if the lamp is composed of an LED consisting of three light-emitting elements "R" (red), "G" (green), and "B" (blue), then the three light-emitting elements are adjusted by the LED driver based on the luminance data. A current to one light emitting element causes the three light emitting elements to emit light, thereby lighting the LED in various colors. The "lighting color" of the lamp varies depending on the color of the light-emitting element. For example, in the case of an LED consisting of only "W" (white) light-emitting elements, the lamp lights in white, although the brightness varies depending on the current that flows. In the case of an LED composed of only R (red) light-emitting elements, the lamp lights up in red although the brightness varies depending on the current that flows.

The "rainbow colors" (seven colors) of the lighting colors of the lamp include colors composed of seven kinds of colors. For example, "rainbow colors" include red, orange (orange), yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet. Note that the “rainbow colors” are not limited to the colors described above, and may be composed of seven other colors. Even with the same "rainbow color", the lighting mode is different between smooth lighting based on the luminance data table (grandchild table) shown in FIG. 225 and blinking based on the luminance data table (grandchild table) shown in FIG. In addition, the lighting mode of rainbow colors may vary depending on the set luminance data.

The "color corresponding to the character" includes a predetermined color for each character appearing in the performance of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, there are colors set for each character, such as green for Mumu-chan, purple for Jam-chan, and red for Bakuchu.

The "light emission color corresponding to the character" is the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9, and includes a predetermined color for each character appearing in the performance of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加For example, the "light emission color corresponding to the character" is the green lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 corresponding to the character of Yume-chan, and the purple lighting color of the game effect lamp 9 corresponding to Jam-chan. (light emission color), lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in red corresponding to Bakuchu, and the like.

The "speech sound" includes a sound corresponding to a word output in accordance with the timing when a character appearing in the pachinko game machine 1 utters a word. In the pachinko game machine 1, sounds (speech sounds) corresponding to the words uttered by the character are output in accordance with the image of the character appearing in the performance.

The “dialogue caption” includes characters corresponding to the dialogue sound displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 when the dialogue sound is output. Dialogue subtitles are also referred to as subtitle display.

"Physical sounds" include physical sounds generated by actions of objects such as characters and objects appearing in the production. In the pachinko game machine 1, physical sounds (physical sounds) that are likely to be produced by the actions of the objects, such as characters and objects appearing in the performance, are output in accordance with the images of the objects.

"Onomatopoeia" includes pseudo sounds that express the actions of objects such as characters and objects appearing in the presentation. In the pachinko game machine 1, a pseudo sound (onomatopoeic sound) representing the action of an object such as a character or an object appearing in the performance is output in accordance with the image of the object.

"Character action" includes an effect in which a character appearing in the effect of the pachinko game machine 1 performs some action. For example, Mumu-chan's character chasing Bakuchu's character.

In the "re-lottery effect", after temporarily stopping and displaying a normal jackpot pattern (for example, an even number pattern such as "2" pattern) that does not become a probability variable jackpot in the variable display of decorative patterns, the normal jackpot pattern is a probability variable jackpot. Including an effect that is executed before design determination in order to arouse whether or not to be promoted to a symbol (for example, an odd number symbol such as "3" symbol).

The ``replacement display'' is a presentation included in the ``re-lottery presentation'', and includes the display of images such that the temporarily stopped decoration patterns are sequentially replaced with other patterns, so that the decoration patterns are successively switched. In the present embodiment, the "replacement display" is a display in which the symbol "2" changes at high speed and is sequentially replaced with other symbols, and finally the symbol "2" or "3" stops. include.

“Repeated display” means to repeat the same display, and to repeat the display using the same animation. This is an effect included in the "re-lottery effect" and includes a display of repeatedly displaying the temporarily stopped decorative pattern with the same animation. As an example, the "repeating display" includes a display in which the symbol "7" changes at high speed and is successively replaced by other symbols, and finally the symbol "7" stops.

The "shaking display" is to display the ornamental pattern while shaking it, indicating that the variation is not finished and is in the process of being varied.

"Still display" is to display the decoration pattern stationary without moving it, indicating that the variation has ended.

"Swaying speed" is the speed at which the decorative pattern moves from the first position to the second position while the design is swinging.

The "first mode of design", "second mode of design", and "third mode of design" are modes indicating the position of the decorative design. For example, in the case of vertically swinging display of decorative patterns, if the first mode is the center position, the second mode is the upper position, and the third mode is the lower position. Further, in the case where the decorative pattern is displayed to sway in the front-rear direction, if the first mode is the front position, the second mode is the left-facing position, and the third mode is the right-facing position.

"Fanfare effect" is an effect that is executed at the start of the big win game state and notifies that the big win game state has been entered.

“Advancement” of a movable body (accessory) is an action in which a movable body (accessory) moves from its initial position. The position of the end of the movable area where the accessory moves is the advanced position.

“Retraction” of the movable body (accessory) is an action of moving the accessory as the movable body from the advanced position to the initial position. The initial position of the movable area in which the accessory moves is the retreat position.

The "effect display for moving the movable body" is a display for enhancing the visual effect of the surroundings of the character on the screen in accordance with the movement of the character as the movable body to the advanced position. For example, an effect image is displayed for making the character action stand out in accordance with the character action when the reach develops in the second half or when a big hit is announced.

"Story development" refers to the progress of a story or a series of productions. In other words, the story is continuously displayed to the player without interruption of a series of stories or the like due to scene changes or the like.

"Part, scene" refers to a group that constitutes an effect, and a part is a larger group than a scene. Parts are divided according to roles.

“Scene switching” mainly refers to switching of display, and particularly to switching of displayed backgrounds, characters, and the like.

"Cut-in display" is an effect in which another image is displayed as an interrupting image in the displayed image. Also, the cut-in display can indicate the degree of expectation for a big hit by the color of the cut-in display. For example, when the cut-in display is red, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when it is green.

"Switching display (eye-catching display)" is an effect displayed at the time of scene change. In the present embodiment, the eye-catching display is used when changing the scene from the state indicating the loss to the normal game state. The eye-catching display has a role to make it easy to understand that the super reach has ended.

In the "shielding display (shutter display)", the image display device 5 displays an image such as a shutter so as to cover the entire area displayed by the image display device 5, and the image displayed before the shielding display is displayed. is a display that shields the The shield display may shield the image by displaying something other than a shutter.

"The brightness data is switched" means that the brightness data timer defined in the grandchild table becomes 0 and the next brightness data is used. Switching the luminance data switches the light emission mode of the lamp. By switching the light emission mode of the lamp, the player is given an impression that the story development of the currently displayed scene is being updated.

"The brightness data is not switched" means that the brightness data timer defined in the grandchild table does not become 0 and the brightness data continues to be used. Since the luminance data is not switched, the lighting mode of the lamp becomes constant. Since the light emission mode of the lamp becomes constant, the player is given the impression that the story development of the currently displayed scene has stopped without being updated.

“Moving image data” is data for displaying a moving image including animation. Images displayed on an image display device 5 are switched at high speed by several tens of images per second to make them look like they are moving. The moving image data may be compressed and held.

The “first moving image data” is moving image data created using many images in order to move a character out of the moving image data.

“Second moving image data” is moving image data created using a small number of images in order to move a character out of the moving image data.

A "movement of a specific character" is a movement corresponding to a specific character among a plurality of characters appearing in the production.

“Blackout” is an effect that darkens (blacks out) by displaying a black image in the display area in order to make the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 invisible. The blackout may be arranged such that the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big win varies depending on the duration of the blackout state.

“White-out” is an effect in which a white image is displayed (white-out) in the display area of the image display device 5 in order to make the image displayed in the display area invisible. The whiteout may be arranged such that the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big win varies depending on the duration of the white image being displayed.

"Specific display that makes it difficult to see" means that an image is displayed on the screen to make the displayed decoration pattern invisible to the player. For example, by displaying a white image on the entire screen (whitening out), the decoration pattern becomes invisible to the player.

"Fade effect" refers to fade-in and fade-out used in video technology. Fade-in means that a state in which a background image or the like is displayed gradually changes to a state in which a predetermined image is visible. In the present embodiment, for example, images showing words are gradually displayed from a state in which the room background is being displayed. Gradual display means that the transparency of the image showing the words is gradually lowered. For example, after the dialogue image is displayed with a transparency of 100%, the transparency is decreased by 10% every 0.1 second and displayed, so that the dialogue image is displayed after one second. Contrary to fade-in, fade-out means gradually changing from a state in which a predetermined image is visible overlapping a background image to only the background image. In this embodiment, for example, the image showing the dialogue is gradually hidden from the state in which the image showing the dialogue is displayed on the room background. Gradual hiding means gradually increasing the transparency of the image showing the dialogue. For example, after the dialog image is displayed with a transparency of 0%, the transparency is increased by 10% every 0.1 seconds, so that the dialog image disappears after 1 second. Further, the fade effect includes cross-fade in which fade-in and fade-out are performed simultaneously and images are replaced.

<Example of time saving control without hitting>
Next, as a time saving state, an example of executing time saving control that does not go through a hit (big hit, small hit, etc.) will be described.
(Example of time saving control using time saving pattern)

(A1) In each of the characteristic portions and modifications described above, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is a form in which the transition is made via the big hit state or small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7A always operates. , the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the time saving state (high base state). That is, as a time saving state, a time saving control that does not pass through a hit (big hit, small hit, etc.) may be executed.

(A2) In addition, as the above-described time-saving patterns, these time-saving patterns may be part of the losing patterns or may be part of the small winning patterns.

(A3) In addition, when performing a lottery process related to the derivation display of the time saving pattern, the lottery may be executed using a random number dedicated to the time saving pattern lottery in these lottery processes, or the lottery random number of the losing pattern The lottery may be performed using random numbers for other lotteries, such as lottery random numbers for big win patterns, lottery random numbers for small win patterns, random numbers for judging big win lotteries, and random numbers for fall lottery.

(A4) In addition, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as a small winning symbol or a losing symbol. In addition, in this case, the presence or absence of transition to the time saving state may be determined according to the small winning pattern to be used together. However, when the time-saving pattern is won, the lottery for the presence or absence of transition to the time-saving state is not performed by lottery, and the number of times of time-saving is not drawn.

(A5) In addition, when the lottery of the time saving pattern is performed and the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time saving pattern does not change according to the setting value, that is, the time saving pattern in all the setting values Although the lottery probability is the same, the lottery probability of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special figure and the second special figure.

(A6) In addition, regarding the timing of random number acquisition in the case of lottery for time-saving symbols, even when using a dedicated random number or when using another random number, the starting port (first starting Prize-winning opening, 2nd starting prize-winning opening).

(A7) In addition, regarding the winning of the time-saving design lottery, when using a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) will be the winning value, and the time-saving design lottery When using a small winning pattern random number, a specific small winning pattern random number is used as a winning value, and when using a random number for a falling lottery judgment value in a time-saving design lottery, the random number for a falling lottery judgment value can be used as a winning value. A lottery using a structure, for example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the game ball passing through the time-saving area may be selected as a time-saving design.

(A8) In addition, when the lottery for the time saving pattern is performed using a structure, when the small winning pattern is used in combination with the time saving pattern, the number of variable display times of the time saving state (time saving number) depends on whether or not the time saving area is passed. keep it from changing.

(A9) In addition, regarding the winning in the case of lottery of time-saving patterns, when using random numbers for time-saving patterns, a specific losing pattern random number is used as the winning value, and the random number of jackpot patterns is used for lottery of time-saving patterns. In that case, a specific jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performances other than the big hit probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the setting value cannot be changed.

(A10) Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be performed at the timing after the big hit determination. In addition, the time-saving design lottery is executed only in the low-probability low-base state, without executing it in the time-saving state (high base) or high probability, regardless of which random value is used for the lottery. . However, when the time-saving pattern is derived and displayed in the state of the time-saving state, even if the number of times of time-saving is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each game machine.

(A11) In addition, regarding the number of times of time saving when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of times of time saving according to the winning value (symbol) and each game state. In addition, it is also possible to make the condition for providing time saving different for each time saving pattern.

(A12) In addition, when the number of times of time reduction is different according to the time reduction design, it is possible to change the allocation lottery of the time reduction design with the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

(A13) Also, even when the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time saving given may differ according to the game state at that time. However, it is required that it is predetermined for the game state.

(A14) In addition, the lottery result of “0 times of time saving” can be included as the lottery result of the time saving pattern in the low probability low base state.

(A15) In addition, a derivation lottery for the time saving end pattern (time saving end lottery) is executed, and the number of times of time saving is the number of times until the time saving end pattern is derived and displayed after the start of time saving, or until the big hit pattern is derived and displayed. good. In other words, without setting the number of times of time saving, in principle, it may be unlimited.

(A16) In addition, the number of times of time saving and the provision conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving pattern and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of the big hit.

(A17) In addition, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the timing when the time saving pattern is controlled to the time saving state is the time when the pattern fixing time of the time saving pattern has passed. However, when a small winning pattern random number is used for the lottery for the time saving pattern, and when the small winning is won and shifts to the time saving state, the timing of controlling to the time saving state is the end of the small winning operation.

(A18) In addition, in the case of lottery using structures, the timing to be controlled to the time-saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the game state (for example, small win state) in which the structure is operated.

(A19) In addition, in the case of a game machine that is controlled to a high-probability low-base state over a predetermined number of variable display times after a big hit (so-called specified number of times probability variable machine (ST machine)), a high probability It is a low base state, and after the high probability low base state has been executed a specified number of times of variable display and ended, the time saving state may be controlled.

(A20) In addition, when the time saving limiter function is installed and the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated.

(A21) Also, the symbol confirmation time for the time saving symbol may be different from the symbol confirmation time for the other symbols.

(Other time-saving control examples using time-saving patterns)
As other time-saving control using the time-saving design, the control described below may be executed.

(B1) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving design is displayed in the special design in the normal state, the game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and the special design is in the time-saving state. Based on the fact that the variable display result of the time saving pattern is displayed, there is no game control to further shift from the time saving state to the same time saving state (even if the time saving pattern is displayed, the time saving state is overwritten (such as the time saving state may occur again) without controlling the switching of the game state). Then, when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed in the normal state with the special pattern, and when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed in the special pattern in the time-saving state, different effects may be performed (decorative pattern Regarding, in the normal state, a special pattern is displayed as a time-saving pattern, and in the time-saving state, a general lost pattern is displayed, etc.). As a result, suitable control can be performed according to the state when the variable display result of the time saving pattern is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by executing an effect according to the presence or absence of state transition).

(B2) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), when the display result of the special pattern is a time saving pattern, the special pattern is a common time saving pattern in the normal state and the time saving state, and the decoration pattern is the normal state. It may be possible to display different patterns as display results in the time saving state and the time saving state (for example, the decorative pattern displays a special pattern corresponding to the time saving pattern in the normal state, but in the time saving state, it displays a simple lost pattern, etc.) For example, do not display the symbol corresponding to the symbol). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he/she has lost money due to the display result of the decoration pattern in the time saving state, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

(B3) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), in the normal state, an effect is executed to suggest whether or not the display result of the decorative pattern will be a special pattern (time saving pattern), but in the time saving state, the decorative pattern is executed. It is also possible not to execute an effect that suggests whether or not the display result of . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he/she has lost money due to the display result of the decoration pattern by the performance in the time-saving state, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

(B4) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), the fixed display time of the decoration pattern (the time to maintain the display state after displaying the fixed surface result) is different between the normal state and the time saving state. may be controlled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he or she has lost money due to the performance of the decoration pattern in the time-saving state, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

(B5) After performing the first variable display with the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display with the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state for the player, and the normal state. Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving design is displayed in the special design, the game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and in the time-saving state, the time-saving design is variable with the special design. Based on the fact that the display result is displayed, there is no game control to move from the time saving state to the same time saving state (even if the time saving pattern is displayed, the time saving state is overwritten (so that the time saving state occurs again) N) It may be arranged such that switching control of the game state is not performed. The second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the result of the variable display of the time saving pattern than the first variable display, stores information on the variable display as reserved storage information, and holds the reserved storage when the time saving state ends. Depending on whether or not information is stored, different effects can be executed (when shifting to time-saving control, continuous display of time-saving control, and when not shifting to time-saving control, it is possible to specify that time-saving control is not executed. During the time-saving state, the right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification (notification to instruct right-handed hitting), and when the time-saving state ends, the variable display based on the pending storage information is stored. until all finished. Left-handed notification (notification for instructing left-handed hitting) may be omitted. As a result, suitable control can be performed according to the state when the variable display result of the time saving pattern is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by executing an effect according to the presence or absence of state transition).

(B6) After performing the first variable display with the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display with the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state for the player, and the normal state. Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving design is displayed in the special design, the game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and in the time-saving state, the time-saving design is variable with the special design. Based on the fact that the display result is displayed, there is no game control to move from the time saving state to the same time saving state (even if the time saving pattern is displayed, the time saving state is overwritten (so that the time saving state occurs again) N) It may be arranged such that switching control of the game state is not performed. The second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the result of the variable display of the time saving pattern than the first variable display, stores information on the variable display as reserved storage information, and holds the reserved storage when the time saving state ends. Depending on whether or not information is stored, different effects can be executed (when shifting to time-saving control, continuous display of time-saving control, and when not shifting to time-saving control, it is possible to specify that time-saving control is not executed. During the time-saving state, the right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification, and until the variable display based on the remaining retention storage information stored when the time-saving state ends. Left-handed notification (notification for instructing left-handed hitting) may be omitted. As a result, suitable control can be performed according to the state when the variable display result of the time saving pattern is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by executing an effect according to the presence or absence of state transition).

(B7) Execute the left-handed notification in the variable display (first variable display) executed after the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved storage information stored when the time saving state ends. may As a result, the game can be progressed smoothly, and the interest in the game can be improved because the instruction of how to beat is suitably issued.

(B8) When the display result of the time saving pattern is displayed in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved storage information stored when the time saving state ends, and the variable display based on the remaining reserved storage information In the case of winning (small hit, big win) in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed, the notification mode of the right-handed notification executed in response to the winning It can be different. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he or she has lost money due to the display result of the decoration pattern by the performance of the notification mode of the right-handed notification, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

(B9) In the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time saving state ends, common production when there is reserved memory information in which the display result of the time saving pattern is displayed and when there is no such reserved memory information (For example, when there is pending memory information in which the display result of the time saving pattern is displayed in the fourth pending memory information among the four remaining pending memories, the third pending memory Until the variable display based on the information, a common performance suggesting whether or not to return to the time saving state is executed, and in the variable display based on the fourth reserved storage information, a time saving state return performance different from the common performance is executed. possible). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he or she has lost money due to the display result of the decoration pattern by the performance of the notification mode of the right-handed notification, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

(B10) Production at the time of transition to the time saving state based on the display result of the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends and the variable display based on the remaining hold storage information The notification mode of the right-handed notification to be executed according to the hit is different from the production at the time of the time-saving state transition based on the display result of the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed. You may do so. As a result, since the presentation changes according to the game state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(B11) Fixed display time of the display result in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining pending storage information stored when the time saving state ends (maintain the display state after displaying the fixed surface result The fixed display time of the display result in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining reserved storage information is executed may be common. Thereby, an increase in control data can be suppressed.

(B12) In the period in which the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends is executed, the right-handed notification is not executed, and the variable based on the remaining hold storage information When the display result of the time saving pattern is displayed in the display, the right hitting notification may be executed in the initial period of the start of the next variable display. As a result, the game can be progressed smoothly, and the interest in the game can be improved because the instruction of how to beat is suitably issued.

(B13) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time saving pattern is displayed in the special pattern in the normal state, the game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time saving state (special state), and the variable display result is small. It is possible to execute a common specific effect (reach effect, notice effect) in the case of winning patterns (specific display results) such as winning patterns and big winning patterns and the case of reducing time patterns (special display results). Depending on which common specific effect is executed among the common specific effects provided in types, the ratio of the time saving pattern (special display result) may be different. Then, when the display result of the time saving pattern is displayed in the variable display, the right hitting notification may be executed in the initial period of the start of the next variable display. Thereby, according to the game state when the time saving pattern (special display result) is displayed, it is possible to suitably control the effect.

(B14) After the common specific effect is executed, the display result may be a winning pattern (specific display result) or a time saving pattern (special display result). As a result, the variation of the effect result of the variable display is enriched, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(B15) The CPU 103 for game control creates a common variation pattern for the winning pattern (specific display result), the time saving pattern (special display result), and the losing pattern (predetermined display result). can be selected, and the effect control CPU 120 receives a command specifying the same variation pattern from the game control CPU 103, depending on the type of the symbol specification command specifying the display result, Different effects in the variable display may be executable. As a result, the variety of variable display effects can be increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(B16) After executing the common specific effect, it is possible to execute a special effect that can be executed when the time saving pattern (special display result) is obtained. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved by the special effect after execution of the common specific effect.

(B17) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, there may be cases where a special effect that can be executed when the time saving pattern (special display result) is executed and a case where it is not executed (for example, multiple types (e.g., do not execute a special effect when executing the effect with a high degree of expectation that it will be a hit among the super reach effects). As a result, the sense of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of the performance that excessively agitates only the time-saving state, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, the degree of expectation (proportion) of the time saving pattern (special display result) when the special effect is executed may differ. As a result, the sense of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of the performance that excessively agitates only the time-saving state, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, the degree of expectation (proportion) of the time saving pattern (special display result) when the special effect is executed may differ. As a result, the sense of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of the performance that excessively agitates only the time-saving state, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

(B19) A predetermined effect different from the common specific effect (for example, an active display whose display mode can be changed depending on the degree of expectation for winning (a display that has moved from the display position of the pending display to another display position, and is currently being executed) Depending on the production mode of (display) that can suggest the expectation level of the hit corresponding to the variable display), the expectation level (ratio) that will be the time saving pattern (special display result) will be different. good too. As a result, the sense of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of the performance that excessively agitates only the time-saving state, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

(B20) In the special effect that can be executed when the time saving pattern (special display result) occurs, after executing the effect (such as time saving suggesting effect) that suggests that the time saving pattern (special display result) will be performed, the winning pattern (specified It may be possible to execute an effect (such as a special jackpot with a higher game value than the time saving state) that notifies the display result). As a result, the sense of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of the performance that excessively agitates only the time-saving state, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

(B21) The CPU 103 for game control can be controlled in a time saving state (special state) with a different number of time saving times (time saving duration) according to the type of time saving pattern (special display result) provided in a plurality of types (for example, the 1 hour-shortening pattern: 50 hour-shortening patterns, 2nd hour-shortening pattern: 100 hour-shortening patterns, etc.), the effect control CPU 120 is given when the time-shortening pattern stops depending on the type of effect executed (for example, the type of reach effect). You may perform the production|presentation from which the number of times of time saving (duration) differs. As a result, depending on the type of performance, the player's attention can be focused on the number of subsequent time-saving times, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(B22) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time saving pattern is displayed in the special pattern in the normal state, the game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time saving state (special state), and the progress of the game is controlled. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means), and an effect based on the command can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) that receives the command. And, the command to be transmitted includes a special command that can be specified to shift (control) from the normal state to the time saving state (special state), and the production control CPU 120 sends a plurality of types of commands including the special command. When receiving, based on the pre-reading of the reserved memory information, the pre-reading notice effect for the reserved memory information that occurred after the reserved memory information specified that the variable display that can shift to the time saving state (special state) is executed Execution may be restricted (not executed at all, allowed rarely, etc.). As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the effect control according to the game state when the time saving pattern (special display result) is displayed.

(B23) Based on the prefetching of the pending storage information, the prefetching of the pending storage information generated after the specified holding storage information that the variable display capable of shifting (controlling) to the jackpot game state (specific game state) is executed You may make it restrict|limit execution of an advance notice production. Then, as the pre-reading foretelling effect during execution restriction of such a foreseeing foretelling effect, a common mode effect may be executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game by restricting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state with the transition of the game state.

(B24) If the variable display based on the pending memory information is the variable display in which the time saving pattern (special display result) is displayed, and if the time saving pattern (special display result) is displayed, it is not displayed as if it is a variable For both the display and the display, the execution of the pre-reading announcement effect for the reserved memory information generated after the reserved memory information may be restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game by restricting the execution of the performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state with the transition of the game state.

(B25) The pre-reading notice effect during execution restriction of the pre-reading notice effect does not execute an effect with a higher expectation than a specific expectation (for example, if the color expectation of the reserved display is blue < green < red such as not changing the display color to red). As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game by restricting the execution of the performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state with the transition of the game state.

(B26) The pre-reading notice effect during execution restriction of the pre-reading notice effect does not execute a specific type of effect (for example, if the degree of expectation of the color of the reserved display is blue < green < red not change). As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game by restricting the execution of the performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state with the transition of the game state.

(Example of time-saving control using the number of variable display times that resulted in a predetermined display result such as the number of variable display times of loss)
Next, an example of time-saving control using the number of times of variable display (number of continuations of variable display with loss) that has given a predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not result in a big hit, etc.) in the normal state will be described. As described below, the time-saving state (special state) is that the number of continuations of variable display that has become a predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not become a big hit, etc.) has reached a special number (for example, 1000 times) may be made executable as a condition. As the predetermined result, the time-saving state (special state) may be executed on the condition that the number of continuations of the variable display resulting in the display failure reaches the special number of times.

(C1) After performing the first variable display by the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display by the second special symbol, the game is played based on the variable display result becoming the specific display result. It is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and in the normal state, update the numerical information of the number of executions of the variable display that has resulted in a predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not become a big hit, etc.), and update the numerical information. Based on, when a special condition is established that the number of times the variable display that has resulted in the predetermined display result (the number of continuations) has reached a special number of times (for example, 1000 times, etc.) is established, the normal state is changed to a time-saving state (special state). You may do game control to shift. The numerical information may be updated both when the predetermined display result is obtained in the first variable display and when the predetermined display result is obtained in the second variable display. As a result, even in a situation where either the first variable display or the second variable display can be executed, the update of the numerical information of the number of times the predetermined display result is obtained is continued, so that the player can be easily relieved due to the time-saving state. , the player's desire to play can be enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize the relief of the player due to the time-saving state.

(C2) The special condition is established when it is determined, based on the numerical information, that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result has been displayed continuously a special number of times (for example, 1000 times). can be As a result, when display results disadvantageous to the player continue, the player can be relieved by shifting to the time-saving state (special state), so that the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

(C3) The numerical information may be updated when the variable display is executed even in a state (probability variable state, time saving state) different from the normal state. As a result, the player can be favorably relieved when display results disadvantageous to the player continue.

(C4) The numerical information may be initialized when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied. Such an initialization condition may be established by being controlled to the advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rescue of the player when it becomes unnecessary to rescue the player, such as when the player is in an advantageous state, and it is possible to prevent the gambling property from being increased more than necessary.

(C5) When a special display result (time saving pattern) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, control to shift to the time saving state (special state) can be executed, and the predetermined condition may be established when the special display result is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rescue of the player when it becomes unnecessary to rescue the player, such as when the player becomes in a time-saving state (special state) advantageous to the player, and to prevent the gambling property from being increased more than necessary. can be done.

(C6) The predetermined condition may be satisfied when the variable display is performed a special number of times. As a result, it is possible to substantially control the time-saving state (special state) until the next advantageous state occurs, so that the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

(C7) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the backed up stored data can be backed up when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is satisfied. Data can be initialized, and the numerical information may be initialized when the specific condition is established. As a result, the numerical information backed up at the time of power failure is initialized at the time of initialization of the data and does not remain, so that the game arcade side is prevented from being disadvantaged.

(C8) Based on the numerical information becoming the special number of times (for example, 1000 times, etc.), it is possible to control the time saving state (special state) for the period of the special number of times or more (for example, 1000 times or more, etc.), During the time-saving state (special state), it is possible to control the time-saving state (special state) again based on the numerical information becoming the special number of times, and the first time-saving state (special state); A different production may be executed in the second time saving state (special state). As a result, in a game in which the second time reduction state (special state) is in an extremely disadvantageous state, the second time reduction state shortens the variable display time more than the first time reduction state. Thus, it becomes possible to change the appearance of the presentation, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, without executing such an effect, the same effect may be executed in the first time saving state (special state) and the second time saving state (special state). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily conscious of being in an extremely disadvantageous state such as being controlled to the second time-saving state (special state), thereby suppressing the decline in the interest in the game. be able to.

(C9) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first processing regarding variable display is performed, and the value of the special figure process flag is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value (4 or later ), the second processing relating to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is executed, and the special condition is established when the value of the special process flag is the third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value. The 3rd process for controlling to the time saving state based on (special state) is performed. Also. A game ball can be hit separately in a first path (left game area) and a second path (right game area), and in a normal state, a game ball is hit in the first path, and in a time-saving state (special state), the second path. A game is played by hitting a game ball into the path. And, during the execution of the third process, it is not controlled to the time saving state (special state), but it is notified that it should be fired on the second path (for example, right-handed notification by right-handed lamp etc.) can be Further, during the execution of the third process, a notification effect of shifting to a time-saving state (special state) may be performed. As a result, even if new functions are installed in the game machine and the specifications become complicated, it is possible to perform suitable control. For example, by lighting the right-handed lamp by the CPU 103 for game control, it is possible to execute the production of the notification of the firing direction early (before the actual time-saving fluctuation starts) when actually shifting to the time-saving state (special state). becomes.

(C10) When the specific display result is displayed in the variable display that satisfies the special condition, the second process may be executed after the first process is executed, and the third process may not be executed. . As a result, since controlling to an advantageous state is given priority over controlling to a time saving state (special state) based on the establishment of a special condition, the result is not more advantageous for the player, and the game interest of the player is reduced. Decrease can be suppressed.

(C11) The numerical information is updated when the variable display is started, and the numerical information becomes the specific value based on the updated numerical information becoming the specific value corresponding to the special number of times. After the variable display ends (start of next fluctuation, customer waiting), control to a time saving state (special state), and when the numerical information after updating reaches a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, special information (special number of times reached flag) is changed from the first numerical value to the second numerical value (flag set), and when controlling to the time saving state (special state), the special information is changed from the second numerical value to the first numerical value (flag reset) may Thereby, the control which transfers to a time saving state (special state) can be suitably performed by managing special information.

(C12) The CPU 103 for game control selects and determines the variation pattern of the variable display, and selects and determines the variation pattern of the symbol fixation time that differs between when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information. You may do so. As a result, when the variable display of the special number of times is executed, it is possible to suitably execute the effect.

(C13) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first processing regarding variable display is performed, and the value of the special figure process flag is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value (4 or later ), the second processing relating to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and when the value of the special process flag is the third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the special condition is satisfied The 3rd process for controlling to the based time saving state (special state) is performed. Also. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect based on the command can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) that received the command. Then, when the value of the special figure process flag is the second numerical value when the special state, it may be possible to transmit specific information (background designation, variation pattern) according to when it is the third numerical value . As a result, even if new functions are installed in the game machine and the specifications become complicated, it is possible to perform suitable control. For example, since different game states can be preferably identified, game control becomes easier. And if a command is changed according to the game state identified at that time, suitable effect control can be executed according to the game state by the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means).

(C14) During the time saving state (special state), when the special condition is established, the value of the special figure process flag is set to the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the fourth numerical value different from the third numerical value By doing so, it may be possible to control the time saving state (special state) again. As a result, even if new functions are installed in the game machine and the specifications become complicated, it is possible to perform suitable control.

(C15) In the time saving state (special state), when it is controlled to the time saving state (special state) based on the display of the specific display result (hit pattern), the special condition (variable display count Condition) is established and it is controlled to the time saving state (special state), and it may be possible to execute different effects When the time is short, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is reduced after the end of the jackpot game state, etc.). As a result, it becomes possible to execute the effect of the time saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and the game interest can be improved.

(C16) In the time saving state (special state), when it is controlled to the time saving state (special state) based on the display of the specific display result (hit pattern), the special condition (variable display count Condition) is established and the time saving state (special state) is controlled, and the same effect may be executed (for example, the variable display number becomes the time saving state under the condition of the special number of times or more When it hits and when it becomes a time-saving state after the end of the big hit, the time-saving state production with the same fluctuation time is used). This eliminates the need for new performance data and the like, so that development costs do not increase, and the player is not confused, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(C17) In the time saving state (special state), when it is controlled to the time saving state (special state) based on the fact that the special display result (time saving pattern) is displayed, the special condition (the number of times of variable display Condition) is established and it is controlled to the time saving state (special state), and it may be possible to execute different effects When the time is reduced, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is reduced after the end of the big hit, etc.). As a result, it becomes possible to execute the effect of the time saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and the game interest can be improved.

(C18) In the time saving state (special state), when it is controlled to the time saving state (special state) based on the fact that the special display result (time saving pattern) is displayed, the special condition (the number of times of variable display Condition) is established and the time saving state (special state) is controlled, and the same effect may be executed (for example, the variable display number becomes the time saving state under the condition of the special number of times or more When the time is shortened, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the big hit ends, etc.). This eliminates the need for new performance data and the like, so that development costs do not increase, and the player is not confused, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(C19) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. A ram clear command at the time of cold start, a command for notifying the number of variable displays until the end of the time saving state at the time of hot start) can be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120, and the effect control CPU 120 receives the predetermined information. Suggestion effect regarding the number of times the variable display has been executed in a predetermined period after the power is turned on (so-called effect that suggests that the first run in the morning is different, the background image is different, and whether it is far or near within 100 rotation fluctuations is performed) ) may be executable. By giving the player a first game motivation in the morning, the operation rate of the game machine can be increased and the processing load can be prevented from increasing.

(C20) The game control CPU 103 can transmit specific information (a command that can specify information about the time saving state) to the effect control CPU 120 in relation to the execution of the variable display, and the effect control CPU 120 Based on the specific information, it may be possible to execute a special effect related to being controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (such as the effect of suggesting the end of the time-saving state). As the specific information, first specific information (first background designation, dedicated countdown effect information), and second specific information (such as a command to count down every 100 rotations) that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is performed and the special number of times is greater than a predetermined value (for example, 127). good too. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of making a player lose money without realizing it by periodically suggesting a function to the player, and to suitably implement the command processing.

(C21) The effect control CPU 120 enters a time saving state (special state) when a special condition is established based on the fact that the variable display is executed a first predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times, etc.) less than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestive effect (for time saving state suggestive effect control) that suggests being controlled, and before the variable display of the special number of times is executed, a second predetermined number of times less than the first predetermined number of times (for example 100 times), the suggestion effect can be executed each time the variable display is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of causing a loss by periodically suggesting functions to the player.

(C22) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. , the backup-stored data can be initialized, and the effect control CPU 120 sets the special condition (variable When the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the condition of the number of times of display), and after the backup-stored data is initialized, the specific display result (hit pattern) is displayed, and then the special Different performances (such as different performances when transitioning to the time saving state) are executed when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the conditions and when the working time saving state (special state) is controlled. As a result, even if new functions are installed in the game machine and the specifications become complicated, it is possible to perform suitable control. In addition, since the player can grasp whether or not the backup-stored data has been initialized due to the difference in the presentation, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the setting of the probability of a big hit can be changed, the setting can be changed. Since it is possible to comprehend that there is a possibility that the game has been played, the number of elements for guessing the setting increases, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(C23) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. , the backup-stored data can be initialized, and the effect control CPU 120 sets the special condition (variable When the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the condition of the number of times of display), and after the backup-stored data is initialized, the specific display result (hit pattern) is displayed, and then the special Different performances are executed when being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of conditions and after being controlled to a time saving state (special state) (different performances after shifting to the time saving state, etc.). As a result, even if new functions are installed in the game machine and the specifications become complicated, it is possible to perform suitable control. In addition, since the player can grasp whether or not the backup-stored data has been initialized due to the difference in the presentation, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the setting of the probability of a big hit can be changed, the setting can be changed. Since it is possible to comprehend that there is a possibility that the game has been played, the number of elements for guessing the setting increases, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(D1) The execution ratio of the group notice effect may be changed depending on whether the result of the variable display is the result of deriving the time-saving symbol, the case of a big hit, or the case of a loss.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. Each configuration relating to the features of the pachinko game machine 1 may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features. Features that are combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine 1 described above was a payout type game machine that paid out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning. It may be a game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, Big Bonus, The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus).

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, it includes a ratio of "0%" for one and a ratio of "100%" or less than "100%" for the other.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. , a notification effect (for example, a notification effect of notifying whether or not a big hit will be achieved) for informing whether or not the control is to be in the advantageous state, and whether the notification effect is to be controlled in the advantageous state An introductory part (for example, a fanning part) until the propriety of whether or not is notified, and an epilogue part (for example, hit epilogue part), and the notification effect includes the first notification effect (for example, the notification effect of SP latter half reach A) and the second notification effect (for example, the notification effect of SP final reach), In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, a dialog sound emitted by a character is output, and in both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, subtitles are added to the dialog sound emitted by the character. There are times when subtitles are displayed and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 175, there are times when subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds and times when subtitles are not displayed). The second notification effect differs in the number of lines emitted by the character (for example, the number of lines shown in FIG. 175), and the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the sound of the lines emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification effect is , higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introductory part of the first notification effect (higher than the ratio of subtitles in the provocation part of reach A), the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the characters in the epilogue part of the second notification effect is the same as that of the characters in the introduction part of the second notification effect. (For example, the ratio of subtitles in the epilogue part per SP final reach in FIG. 175 is higher than the ratio of subtitles in the SP final reach part. ), further, light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F), and specific display corresponding to variable display (for example, hold display and display means (e.g., image display device 5) capable of displaying an active display) and specific display effects (e.g., pending A part that displays a display or an active display in any one of the display patterns α to γ) and a specific light emission effect that causes the light emitting means to emit light (for example, a flash effect at the time of winning). , effect control CPU 120), and the effect executing means is configured to allow the player to recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect. 283-28, FIGS. 283-29 (A) to 283-32 (H), FIGS. 283-49 (A) to 283-50 (D), The winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on before the display of the pending display is completed), and the control is performed in a more advantageous state when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 283-24, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed), The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d), wherein the first light emitting means emits a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, after the start of the previous winning flash effect, the first winning flash effect end timing) and a second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, after the start of the late winning flash effect, the flash effect is the target of the winning flash effect). During the period until the ready-to-win effect start timing of the variable display), light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. During the execution period, it blinks with the brightness C1 and the period T1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, it blinks with the brightness C2 and the period T2). It emits light in a manner corresponding to the lighting effect, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-28, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker The lamp 9c and the movable lamp 9d flash at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, and flash at the brightness C2 and the period T0 during the period of execution of the flash effect at the time of the latter period). Game machines are mentioned.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the series of effects to be executed look more suitable. In addition, since the light emitting means emits light before the completion of the display of the specific display, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and during the first period of the specific light emission effect, the By causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous, so that the specific display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect. becomes even easier for the player to recognize.

In other words, in both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, in the epilogue part, the dialogue subtitles are firmly attached, making it easy to understand what the character is saying, emphasizing the feeling of blessing and introducing Since there are many picture changes in the part, it is possible to make a suitable production by firstly conveying with pictures and not to get in the way with supplementary caption display, and also light emitting means With the light emission mode of (1), the game machine can be made such that the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can more preferably show a series of performances in the notification performance when installed in a game arcade, and that the performances are easy for the player to understand.

Furthermore, the variable display is executed as an example of the form of the game machine that can make the series of effects to be executed more suitable and make it easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. A game machine (for example, pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and that can emit light (for example, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp) 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F), and display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific display corresponding to variable display (for example, pending display and active display) Then, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a start prize), a specific display effect for displaying the specific display (for example, a pending display or an active display is displayed in one of the display patterns α to γ and a specific lighting effect (e.g., winning flash effect) for causing the light emitting means to emit light (e.g., effect control CPU 120). In the specific display effect, the specific light emission effect is executed so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed (for example, FIGS. 283-28 and 283- 29 (A) to Figure 283-32 (H), Figure 283-49 (A) to Figure 283-50 (D), before the display of the pending display is completed, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is lit), and the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-24, winning a prize When the time flash effect is executed, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the win flash effect is not executed), the light emitting means is a first light emitting means (for example, a winning flash lamp) 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d), wherein the first light emitting means A first period from the start of the light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term to the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term), and the specific light effect from the predetermined time. In the second period up to the specific timing of the target variable display (for example, the period from the start of the late winning flash effect to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display targeted for the winning flash effect), the specific light emitting effect is applied. (For example, as shown in FIG. 283-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first winning, and the second winning During the time flash effect execution period, the second light emitting means flashes at the brightness C2 and the period T2), the second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the first period, and is executed during the second period. (For example, as shown in FIG. 283-28, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a manner corresponding to the variable display in the previous term. The middle portion flashes with a brightness of C1 and a period of T1, and flashes with a brightness of C2 and a period of T0 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the latter stage) game machine. An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

(form)
The game machine of form 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display;
A specific display effect for displaying the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a portion in which a pending display or an active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ) , a specific display display start effect) and a specific light emission effect (for example, a winning flash effect) that causes the light emitting means to emit light (for example, effect control CPU 120);
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 283). -28, Figures 283-29(A) to 283-32(H), Figures 283-49(A) to 283-50(D), prior to completion of display of pending indications The part that lights the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning),
The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-24, when the winning flash effect is executed) In the case of winning, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning),
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means has a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect). A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. period) in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. A part that flashes at cycle T1 and flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of late winning),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, FIGS. 283-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink with the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, and the flash effect at the time of the second prize is executed. It is characterized by a portion that flashes at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0 during the period) and @.
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the completion of display of the specific display, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect. , not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means can emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous. This makes it even easier for the player to recognize the specified display.

The gaming machine of form 2 is the gaming machine according to form 1,
The specific display effect is performed by an appearance effect unit (for example, FIGS. As shown in FIG. 283-50(D), the effect control CPU 120 executes the specific display display start effect execution process, thereby displaying an appearance animation in which the pending display and the active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top. part), and a periodic effect section (for example, FIG. 283-15, FIG. 283-30 (D) to As shown in Figure 283-32 (H), Figure 283-49 (B) to Figure 283-50 (D), the effect control CPU 120 executes a specific display rotation display effect execution process, so that pending display and active The part where the display is displayed as a rotating animation) and
The timing at which the display of the specific display is completed is the timing at which the periodic effect is started (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part where the rotation animation of these pending display and active display starts)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the specific display.

The gaming machine of form 3 is the gaming machine according to form 1 or form 2,
The effect executing means can start the specific light emission effect before starting the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 283-29(A) to 283-32(H), When the display start effect B is executed, the win flash lamp 135SG009F as the win flash effect, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attack lamp 9c are movable from the timing before the display start of the pending display or the active display. The part where the body lamp 9d emits light)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the specific light emission effect is started before the start of the specific display effect, the specific light emission effect can be made more conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 3,
The specific display effect includes an appearance effect in which the specific display appears (for example, a specific display display start effect),
The display means displays the specific display in a plurality of different display modes (for example, a specific display display start effect A that only executes an appearance animation in which a pending display or an active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top, and a character A is the first display mode). After acting on the reserved memory display area 135SG005D and the active display area 135SG005A, it can be displayed in a specific display display start effect B) that executes an appearance animation in which the reserved display and the active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top,
The period of the appearance effect varies depending on the display mode of the specific display (for example, the specific display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, and the specific display start effect B is 1.2 seconds),
The specific light emission effect is started before the end timing of the shortest appearance effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 283-28 and 283-49 (A) to 283-50 (D) , The part where the flash effect at the time of winning starts before the end timing of the specific display display start effect A)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of the display mode of the specific display, the specific light emission effect can be started before the appearance effect ends, so that the player can reliably see the specific display targeted for the specific light emission effect. recognizable.

The gaming machine of form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 4,
The effect executing means once controls the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to a low luminance state and then starts the specific light emitting effect (for example, FIGS. 283-28, 283-29 (A), FIG. As shown in 283-29(B), FIG. 283-49(A), and FIG. , main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission effect.
It should be noted that the "low luminance state" in the present invention includes not only a state in which light is emitted at low luminance, but also a state in which light is not emitted.

The gaming machine of form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 5,
The effect execution means starts the specific light emission effect after once controlling the display means to a low visibility state (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-11, when executing the flash effect at the time of winning, the image Part where the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is lowered by lowering the brightness of the backlight built into the display device 5, and then the flash effect at the time of winning is started)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission effect.
In addition, the "low visibility state" in the present invention is a state in which the visibility of the display means is lower than the previous state, and the visibility of the display is improved by a method other than lowering the brightness of the display means. Including degraded state.

The gaming machine of form 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 6,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, an advance notice effect) suggesting that the variable display is controlled to be in an advantageous state, and when the suggestive effect is being executed and when the suggestive effect is executed. is not executed (for example, FIGS. 283-29 (A) to 283-48 (n), FIGS. 283-49 (A) to 283-68 ( As shown in n), the part where the flash effect at the time of winning can be executed depending on whether the advance notice effect is being executed or not),
A variable display corresponding sound corresponding to the variable display (variable display corresponding sound shown in FIG. 283-28), a suggestive effect corresponding sound corresponding to the suggestive effect (notice effect corresponding sound shown in FIG. 283-29 (A)), A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a specific light emission effect corresponding sound (a winning flash effect corresponding sound shown in FIG. 283-29 (B)) corresponding to the specific light emission effect,
The sound output means is
When the specific light emission effect is executed while the sound corresponding to the variable display is being output, the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the variable display being output (for example, As shown in FIG. 283-29(B), when the winning flash effect is executed during the execution of the variable display, the sound corresponding to the variable display is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, while the winning flash effect is supported. The part that outputs sound at volume V1 (V1>V2)),
When the specific light-emitting effect is executed while the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect is being output, the sound corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect can be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect being output (for example, As shown in FIG. 283-29(B), when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed during the execution of the notice effect, the sound corresponding to the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, while the flash effect at the time of winning is supported. Part that outputs sound at volume V1 (V1>V2))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the sound corresponding to the variable display or the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect is output, the sound corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect can be easily heard, and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect allows the player to execute the specific light-emitting effect. easier to recognize.

The gaming machine of form 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 7,
Equipped with sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L and 8R),
In the specific light emission effect, the effect execution means outputs a sound corresponding to the specific light effect from the sound output means before any of the display completion of the specific display and the light emission of the light emitting means (for example, FIGS. 283-28 , Figures 283-29(A) to 283-32(H), and Figures 283-49(A) to 283-50(D), the execution of the winning flash effect is determined according to the starting winning. If this is the case, after the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect starts to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display completes)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize that the predetermined condition is established, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 7,
Equipped with sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L and 8R),
The effect execution means, in the specific light emission effect,
A sound corresponding to a specific light emission effect can be output from the sound output means (for example, a portion capable of outputting a sound corresponding to a winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R),
The light emitting means is caused to emit light before the completion of the display of the specific display and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-12, execution of flash effect at the time of winning in response to start winning) is determined, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the speaker 8L, 8R will output the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display will be completed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize the establishment of the predetermined condition by the light emission of the light emitting means, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 9,
In the specific light emitting effect, the first light emitting means emits light in a predetermined mode corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and the first light emitting means emits light more than the predetermined mode during the second period. It is an effect that emits light in a specific mode with a low degree (for example, as shown in FIG. During the execution period of the hour flash effect, the part that blinks the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 (C1>C2))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by causing at least the first light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined manner, the player can recognize the start of the specific light emitting effect, and the first light emitting means continues in the predetermined manner even during the second period. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of amusement in the game due to the hindrance of other performances caused by the light emission.
Note that the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" in the present invention includes a low-speed blinking mode with a low degree of emphasis due to a slow blinking speed.

The gaming machine of form 11 is the gaming machine according to form 10,
The second period includes a period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is executed, and a period during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, FIGS. 283-28 , the execution period of the late winning flash effect is the period during which the variable display before the variable display targeted for the winning flash effect is executed, and the execution period of the variable display targeted for the winning flash effect. the part containing the period and
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first light emitting means emits light in a specific manner before and after the start of the variable display, which is the target of the specific light emission effect, the player can easily recognize that the target is the variable display. Therefore, the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 12 is the gaming machine according to form 10 or 11,
The first light emitting means emits light in the predetermined manner when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13, the target of the winning flash effect is A portion that blinks the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F with a brightness of C1 and a period of T1 when a certain variable display is started)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 12,
The display means displays the specific light emission effect corresponding image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first display mode during the first period, and displays the specific light emission effect corresponding image in the first display mode during the second period. is also displayed in a second display mode with a low degree of emphasis (for example, as shown in FIG. During the execution period of the time flash effect, the part where the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by displaying the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first display mode on the display means during the first period, the player can be made to recognize the start of the specific light effect effect, and the image is displayed during the second period. By displaying the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the second display mode by the means, the display means continues to display the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first display mode, thereby hindering other displays and increasing the enjoyment of the game. You can prevent it from dropping.

The gaming machine of form 14 is the gaming machine according to form 13,
The display means displays the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in a first display mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13, A portion for displaying an effect image 135SG005E in the image display device 5 when the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 14,
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a specific light emission effect corresponding sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect,
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in a first output mode during the first period, and does not output the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect or has a higher intensity than the first output mode during the second period. Output in a second output mode with a low degree (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 During the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period, the part that outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 81 and 8R at a volume V2 (V1>V2)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode, it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize that the specific light emission effect has started, and at the same time, the specific light effect effect is started. During the execution of , the sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect is not output or is output in the second output mode, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the game interest due to the other effects being hindered by the sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. .

The gaming machine of form 16 is the gaming machine according to form 15,
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light effect is started (for example, as shown in Modification 135SG-13 (2) a portion for outputting a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect at volume V1 from the speakers 8L and 8R when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect starts;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 16,
The first light emitting means stops emitting light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 283-69 as modification 135SG-1, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation command during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period. stop the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, turn off the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, hide the silhouette image 135SG005S in the image display device 5, clear the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning, etc. During the period, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound as the late winning flash effect, the emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S are not executed, and the first variable display start command is received. Based on this, by selecting the late winning flash effect process table and resetting and starting the process timer for the late winning flash effect process table, the late winning flash effect (the winning flash Output of sound corresponding to production, light emission of flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, display of silhouette image 135SG005S)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by temporarily stopping the light emission of the light emitting means, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that the variable display is continuing.

The gaming machine of form 18 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 17,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a temporary stop is made until a display result is derived from the start of variable display, and then variable display is performed again,
The first light emitting means responds to the specific light emission effect during a temporary stop when the re-variable display effect is executed during the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 283-69, 283-70 (A) to 283-89 (n) as modification 135SG-1, it is the object of flash production at the time of winning During the temporary stop period of the decoration pattern in the variable display executed before the variable display, the part where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink with the brightness C2 and the period T2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable display has ended despite the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 18,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a temporary stop is made until a display result is derived from the start of variable display, and then variable display is performed again,
The first light emitting means is
Even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect as the second period (for example, as modification 135SG-1, FIGS. 283-69 and 283-70 (A ) to FIG. 283-89(n), even during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the win flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at a brightness of C1 and a period of T2),
Even in the temporary stop when the re-variable display effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, light emission is continued in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as modification 135SG-1 As shown in Figures 283-69 and 283-70 (A) to Figure 283-89 (n), during the temporary stop period of the variable display of decorative symbols that are the targets of the winning flash effect, the winning flash The part where the lamp 135SG009F continues blinking with a brightness of C2 and a period of T2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable display has ended despite the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 16,
The first light emitting means continues light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 283-29(A) to 283-48(n), during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is started. In the previous variable display pattern fixing period, the part where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emission is continued during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period, so that the player's expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is the object of the specific light emission effect. The variable display can be accurately maintained until the start of the variable display, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 21 is the gaming machine according to form 20,
The display means can variably display the first effect identification information (for example, decoration pattern) and variably display the second effect identification information (for example, small pattern) having lower visibility than the first effect identification information. is a game machine,
During the result display period, the second effect identification information in a stopped state is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. is displayed when stopped),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if light emission continues during the result display period, the second effect identification information in the stopped state is displayed, so that the player can be made to recognize that it is the result display period.

The gaming machine of form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 21,
The display means can display the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the second period so as not to overlap the display of the second effect identification information (for example, FIG. 283-33 (J) , etc., during execution of the winning flash effect, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the image display device 5. 1 The part displayed at the left end of the display area 135SG005F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in recognizing the end of the variable display due to the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect overlapping the display of the second effect identification information.

The gaming machine of form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 22,
The effect execution means can execute a specific effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach) that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
When the specific effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect, the first light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect until the specific effect is started. When the effect is started, light emission is started in a manner corresponding to the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. In the display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2 before the start of the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at the brightness C2 from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win. part to light up),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the specific performance is started, the light emitting means emits light in a mode corresponding to the specific performance instead of the mode corresponding to the specific lighting performance, so that the game amusement of the specific performance can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 24 is the gaming machine according to form 23,
The display means can display a specific effect start image corresponding to the start of the specific effect when the specific effect is started (for example, FIGS. 283-96 (K) to 283-98 (O) , as shown in FIGS. 283-104(K) to 283-106(O), a portion where the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (white out)),
The first light emitting means enters a low-luminance state when the display of the display means switches to the specific effect start image, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific effect after entering the low-luminance state (for example, FIG. As shown in 283-90, during the white-out period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit at the brightness C2 from the subsequent start timing of the reach effect of super reach). ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emission mode of the first light emission means changes across a low-luminance state that accompanies the switching to the specific effect start image, the change in the light emission mode does not make the player feel uncomfortable. Since it can be prevented, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine according to form 23 or 24,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) is provided,
The effect executing means suggests, as the specific effect, an action effect to move the movable body at the start of the specific effect (for example, the movable body action effect shown in FIGS. 283-90) and execution of the action effect. A motion suggestive effect (for example, a movable body motion suggestive effect shown in FIG. 283-90) can be executed,
The first light emitting means enters a low-luminance state when executing the action-suggestion effect, and after entering the low-luminance state, emits light in a mode corresponding to the action effect, which is a mode corresponding to the specific effect (for example, As shown in FIG. 283-90, during the execution period of the movable body operation suggesting effect during the whiteout period, the win flash lamp 135SG009F is extinguished, and after that, the winning flash is started from the start timing of the reach effect of super reach. The part that lights the lamp 135SG009F for the display with the brightness C2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emission mode of the first light emission means changes across the low-luminance state associated with the execution of the suggestive effect, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the change in the light emission mode. Since it can be done, a game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 25,
The first light emitting means is
When a special effect different from the specific light emission effect is executed by the effect execution means, light can be emitted in a manner corresponding to the special effect (for example, modification 135SG-3 shown in FIG. 283-108 (A) , when the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F can be lit in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect),
When the specific light emission effect is started during execution of the special effect, light is emitted in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect in preference to a mode corresponding to the special effect (for example, modification 135SG-3 As shown in FIG. 283-108(B), when the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the lamp for the flash at the time of winning in a manner corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning The part where the lighting (blinking) of 135SG009F continues),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect from being started at an inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the special effect.

The gaming machine of form 27 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 26,
The light emission of the first light emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at a first timing during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect and at a second timing after the first timing. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 283-119 (A) and 283-119 (B) as a modification 135SG-4, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F corresponds to the winning flash effect The timing to end the lighting mode includes the timing to start the movable object action effect during variable display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, and the timing to start the ready-to-reach effect of super reach).
When the light emission of the first light emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at the first timing, and when the light emission of the first light emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at the second timing The ratio of control to an advantageous state differs depending on when it ends (for example, as shown in FIG. The degree of expectation for a big hit in a case where the light emission mode is changed from the start timing of the movable body action production to the light emission mode according to the movable body action production and the case where the light emission mode is changed according to the ready-to-win production from the start timing of the ready-to-win production. are different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 28 is the gaming machine according to form 27,
The effect executed by the effect execution means at the end of the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect is different between when the light emission ends at the first timing and when the light emission ends at the second timing. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 283-119 as a modification 135SG-4, according to the timing of ending the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, during the execution period of the movable body operation effect There are cases where it is during the execution period of the reach production of super reach),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize whether the end timing is the first timing or the second timing.

The gaming machine of form 29 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 28,
The effect execution means provides a first effect (for example, a movable body motion effect shown in FIGS. 283-119 as modified example 135SG-4) and a second effect (for example, modified example 135SG) different from the first effect during variable display. -4 as a super reach performance shown in Figure 283-119) can be executed,
The first light emitting means is
With the execution of the first effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light effect can be changed to the light emission in the mode according to the first effect (for example, As shown in FIG. 283-119(A) as a modified example 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the start timing of the movable body motion effect. The part that changes the light emission mode according to the action production),
With the execution of the second effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it is possible to change from light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a manner according to the second effect (for example, As shown in FIG. 283-119(B) as a modified example 135SG-4, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect to the light-emitting mode according to the ready-to-win effect),
When changing from light emission in a mode according to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a mode according to the first effect, and when light emission in a mode according to the specific light emission effect changes to light emission in a mode according to the second effect The ratio of control to an advantageous state differs depending on the time (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-119 (C) as modification 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed according to the winning flash effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit is different between a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body motion performance from the start timing of the movable body motion performance and a light emission mode corresponding to the ready-to-win performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect that is being executed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 30 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 28,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) is provided,
The effect executing means controls an action effect to move the movable body (for example, a movable body action effect), an action suggestion effect to suggest execution of the action effect (for example, a movable body action suggestion effect), and an advantageous state. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, reach effect of super reach) that suggests that
The first light emitting means is
It is possible to change from a mode of light emission corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode corresponding to the action suggestion effect as the action suggestion effect is executed during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, a modification As shown in 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode according to the movable body motion suggesting effect from the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect. part to change),
It is possible to change from light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a mode according to the specific effect along with the execution of the specific effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, a modification As shown in 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. ),
A rate of controlling to an advantageous state differs between when light emission changes from a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode corresponding to the action suggesting effect and when light emission changes to a mode corresponding to the specific light effect (e.g. , as shown in modification 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is changed from the light emission mode according to the flash performance at the time of winning, from the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion performance to the movable body motion suggestion performance. A part where the expectation of a big hit is different between when the lighting mode is used and when the lighting mode is set according to the ready-to-win effect from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect that is being executed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 31 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 30,
The display mode of the specific display is a normal mode (eg, display pattern α), a special mode (eg, display pattern δ and display pattern ε shown in FIGS. 283-120 as modification 135SG-5) and a special mode (eg, display pattern β and display pattern γ),
The special mode includes a first special mode (e.g., display pattern γ) and a second special mode (e.g., display pattern β) different from the first special mode,
When the specific display is displayed in the first special mode, the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the second special mode (for example, FIG. 283-17 As shown in , when the pending display or active display is displayed in the display pattern γ, the portion that is controlled to the jackpot game state at a higher rate than when displayed in the display pattern β),
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. 283-120 as modification 135SG-5, display pattern δ and A portion where the suspended display or active display displayed in the display pattern ε can be changed to the suspended display or active display in the display pattern β or γ),
When the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the ratio of execution of the specific light emission effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the special mode (for example, as a modification 135SG-5, the As shown in 120, when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, both the winning display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern β and the display pattern γ. The part where the flash effect is executed at a high rate),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the special mode is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode by executing the specific light emission effect at a high rate. It is possible to attract the player's attention to the game and improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of form 32 is the gaming machine according to form 31,
The special mode is a mode of a specific color (for example, blinking white as shown in FIGS. 283-120 as modification 135SG-5),
The special mode is a mode of a special color different from the specific color (for example, blue or red, as shown in FIG. 283-17),
The normal aspect is an aspect of a color (for example, white) other than the specific color and the special color,
The specific display of the specific color has a higher rate of changing to the special color when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, modification 135SG-5 As shown in , when the pending display or the active display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display is displayed depending on whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed. part where the ratio of change to pattern β and display pattern γ is different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the difference in the mode of the specific display can be easily grasped by the difference in color, and when the specific display of the specific color is displayed, the player's attention is focused on whether or not the specific light emission effect is being executed. It is possible to make it possible to improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of form 33 is the gaming machine according to form 31 or 32,
The effect executing means can execute a change suggesting effect suggesting that the specific display displayed in the special mode changes to the special mode in a first mode and in a second mode different from the first mode. (for example, a part that can execute the first effect effect and the second effect effect shown in the modification 135SG-5),
The special mode changes to the special mode at a higher rate when the change suggesting effect is executed in the second mode than when it is executed in the first mode (for example, modification 135SG-5 , the second effect effect can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first effect effect by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ. The part that is the production),
When the change suggestive effect is executed in the second mode, the ratio of execution of the specific light emission effect is higher than when the change suggestive effect is executed in the first mode (for example, in the modification 135SG-5 As shown, when the second action effect is executed, the winning flash effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first effect effect is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the change suggesting effect is executed in the first mode or the second mode, and the execution of the specific light emission effect causes the change suggesting effect to be executed in the second mode. It is possible to increase the expectation of being executed in two modes.

The gaming machine of form 34 is the gaming machine according to form 33,
The special mode is a first special mode in which the change suggesting effect is executed in the second mode and the rate of change to the special mode is low (for example, the display pattern δ shown in Figs. ), and a second special mode in which the change suggesting effect is executed in the second mode and the rate of change to the special mode is higher than that in the first special mode (for example, variations 135SG-5 shown in FIGS. 283-120 including the display pattern ε) shown in
When the specific display is displayed in the second special mode, the ratio of execution of the specific light emission effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the first special mode (for example, when the specific display is displayed When the display pattern is displayed with the display pattern ε, the portion where the winning flash effect is executed is higher than when the specific display is displayed with the display pattern δ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the specific display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode, and in the case of the second special mode in which the rate of change to the special mode is high. Since the specific light emission effect is executed at a high rate, the execution of the specific light emission effect can increase expectations for the specific display to be displayed in the second special mode.

The gaming machine of form 35 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 34,
The display means is capable of displaying, during the specific light emission effect, a specific light emission effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emission effect so as to overlap a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, As shown in modification 135SG-7, a silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning can be displayed so as to overlap the active display in the active display area 135SG005A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, and the specific display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect. can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 36 is the gaming machine according to form 35,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of the specific light-emitting effect corresponding displays of different types (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-7, the image display device 5 has different sizes as a winning flash effect). The part where the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed),
The mode of overlapping with the specific display differs depending on the type of display corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 283-129 (L) and 283-130 (N) etc. , a portion where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap differently depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S to be displayed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a plurality of displays corresponding to the specific light emission effect are displayed, and the manner of overlap with the specific display changes depending on the displayed display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 37 is the gaming machine according to form 35 or 36,
The specific display includes a first specific display (e.g., pending display) corresponding to a variable display that has not yet been executed, and a second variable display (e.g., active display) that corresponds to a variable display that is being executed,
The display means is capable of displaying the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect so as to overlap the first specific display corresponding to the specific light effect before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started. In addition, during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it can be displayed so as to overlap the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-7, A silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the pending display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D before the variable display as the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is started. , During the execution of the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the active display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning displayed in the active display area 135SG005A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the first specific display and the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, and not only the first specific display but also the second specific display are hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with more unexpectedness and improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of form 38 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 37,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a variable display is temporarily stopped after a variable display is started and a display result is derived, and then the variable display is performed again,
The display means is capable of displaying a re-variable related display related to the re-variable display effect, and overlapping the re-variable related display with the specific light emission effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the specific light emission effect. (For example, in the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the variable display during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, when the decorative symbol temporarily stops, it stops in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C A part where the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning can be displayed overlapping the special pattern (see Fig. 283-40 etc.),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the re-variable related display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, it is possible to add surprise to the player and improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of form 39 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 35 to 38,
The display means can display the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light effect (for example, FIGS. 283-28, 283-42(a) to 283-47 ( As shown in l), the part where the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the interest of the variable display, which is the target of the specific light emission effect, can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 40 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 39,
The production executing means is
Even during the variable display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, the first light emission means is continuously caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect, and the predetermined end before the end of the variable display corresponding to the specific light emission effect. It is possible to control the effect to end the light emission at the timing (for example, as shown in FIG. flashes at a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off at the start timing of the ready-to-win effect),
When light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect of the first light emitting means is not finished at the predetermined end timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event, the first light emitting device at a specific end timing after the predetermined end timing. Perform special end control to end the light emission of the light emitting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-22, the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the effect target due to the generation of static electricity etc. If it is not possible, at the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the pattern confirmation command), which is the timing after the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, the flash effect at the time of winning including the flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning again. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce discomfort when light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect does not end normally.

The gaming machine of form 41 is the gaming machine according to form 40,
Equipped with game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game,
The game control means can transmit variable display end information for notifying the end of variable display to the effect execution means when the variable display ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-4 (A) , a part where the CPU 103 can transmit a design determination command that designates the stop of the variable display of the decoration design),
The effect execution means performs the specific end control based on the reception of the variable display end information as the specific end timing (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that terminates the flash effect at the time of winning the late prize based on the receipt of the command),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further reduce the sense of incongruity when terminating the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect.

The gaming machine of form 42 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 39 to 41,
The predetermined end timing includes a first predetermined end timing and a second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-4, when winning a prize at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the ready-to-win effect) The part that can end the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F),
The specific end timing is a timing later than the predetermined end timing and the second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-4, the effect control CPU 120 may not flash when winning due to the generation of static electricity, etc.). If the blinking of the lamp 135SG009F cannot be stopped, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is included again at the end timing of the variable display, which is the timing after the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion effect and the start timing of the ready-to-win effect. The part that ends the flash effect at the time of the late winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even when the light emission cannot be ended at the second predetermined end timing, light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be ended at the specific end timing.

The gaming machine of form 43 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 42,
The production executing means is
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, reach effect of super reach) that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied while the specific effect is being executed, the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-21, the first start Part that does not determine the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning when the start winning to the mouth occurs),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of form 44 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 43,
The effect executing means does not execute the specific light emission effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied when the remaining period of the variable display is equal to or shorter than the predetermined period, and the remaining period of the variable display is the above-mentioned. When the predetermined condition is established when the predetermined period is longer than the predetermined period, the specific light emission effect can be executed (for example, as shown in the modification 135SG-8, the first start port is operated during the execution of the variable display. When a start winning occurs, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is equal to or shorter than the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is not determined),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific display of the target of the specific light emission effect from becoming difficult to understand due to the execution of the specific light emission effect when the remaining period of the variable display is short.

The gaming machine of form 45 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 44,
The production executing means is
A specific effect suggesting control to an advantageous state can be executed even in a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 283-9, even in a variable display where the variable display result The part that can execute reach production of super reach),
When the predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect in a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state, the specific light emission effect can be executed in response to the start of the next variable display of the variable display (for example, deformation As shown in Example 135SG-8, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is the first winning flash effect. If it is less than the execution period, on the condition that the variable display result of the variable display is lost, the part where the winning flash effect can be executed from the start timing of the next variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the specific effect and the specific light emitting effect from deteriorating due to the overlapping execution of the specific effect and the specific light emitting effect.

The gaming machine of form 46 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 45,
a specific area (for example, a winning ball device 6A forming a first starting winning hole) in which the predetermined condition is satisfied by passing the game medium;
a specific light-emitting means (for example, a starting port lamp 135SG009S) provided around the specific region and capable of emitting light in different light-emitting modes;
with
The display means can display in any one of a plurality of display modes in which the ratio of controlling the specific display to an advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIG. The part where the display can be displayed in any of the display patterns α to display patterns γ with different jackpot expectations),
The specific light emission means can emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the display mode of the specific display regardless of whether or not the specific light emission effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 283-28, When the display in the display pattern β or the display pattern γ is determined, the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S is started regardless of the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect or the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9 or the like. A part that emits light in a color corresponding to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ from the occurrence of the winning to the end of the variable display based on the starting winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display mode of the specific display can also be recognized by the light emission mode of the specific light emitting means provided around the specific area, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 47 is the gaming machine according to form 46,
The number of light emitting modes in which the specific light emitting means can emit light is greater than the number of light emitting modes in which the first light emitting means can emit light in the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in Modification 135SG-9, A part where the number of light emission modes of the starter lamp 135SG009S in the light emission effect of the starter lamp is greater than the number of light emission modes of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning in the flash effect at the time of winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emission variations of the specific light emitting means are increased, the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 48 is the gaming machine according to form 46 or 47,
The light emission area of the first light emission means is larger than the light emission area of the specific light emission means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-10, the light emission area in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as the winning flash effect is , A portion provided larger than the light emitting area where the starting port lamp 135SG009S emits light as a starting port lamp light emission effect),
In the period in which the specific light emitting means emits light according to the display mode of the specific display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition in 1, the first light emitting means emits light according to the specific light emission effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. (In the case where execution of both the winning flash effect and the hold display notice effect is determined based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off after the starting winning. While emitting light until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the starting winning flash effect, the starting port lamp 135SG009S is the target of the holding display notice effect after the starting winning is generated. The part that emits light until the end of the variable display)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to excessively long execution of the light emission according to the specific light emission effect by the first light emission means, and to achieve an advantageous state by the light emission mode of the specific light emission means. Players' expectations can be maintained for a long time.

The gaming machine of form 49 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 46 to 48,
Both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means are capable of blinking light emission (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in the part where the starter lamp 135SG009S can blink),
The blinking period of the first light emitting means is different from the blinking period of the specific light emitting means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-10, the blinking period of the starting lamp 135SG009S is used as a winning flash effect as a winning flash effect. The part that is different from the flashing cycle of the lamp 135SG009F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the blinking periods are different, the player can be attracted to both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means, thereby improving the game interest.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 274 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 276). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 274, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 276), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 274, the lower left part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstructing nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 274), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 276).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 276).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

275 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main substrate 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some of the big-hit types (in the big-hit type of the big-hit game state in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 276, for example. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100 V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 277 is a flow chart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 277, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not established. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is performed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is performed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flow chart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 279 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 278 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 280 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. Figure 280 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variation special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 280 (B) shows that the variation special figure is the second special figure. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbols, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. As a result, when the high probability state such as the probability variable state in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, compared to the low probability state such as the normal state or the time saving state, the probability of being determined to control to the jackpot game state is increased. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is determined to be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the passage of a ball through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 281 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt prohibition state is used, the interrupt It is desirable to emit a prohibit command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

Figure 282 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of Figure 281 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 282, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 135SG)
Next, the characteristic portion 135SG (hereinafter abbreviated as the characteristic portion 135SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 283-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG. As shown in FIG. 283-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 135SG, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F imitating the character A is provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and a winning ball device 6A is provided. A starting port lamp 135SG009S for lighting the winning ball device 6A (first starting port) is provided in the vicinity of .

Further, a stick lamp 135SG009X for lighting the stick controller 31A is provided in the stick controller 31A, and a button lamp 135SG009Y for lighting the push button 31B is provided in the push button 31B. These stick lamps 135SG009X and button lamps 135Sg009Y constitute the game effect lamps 9 in the characteristic part 135SG together with the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d.

As shown in FIG. 283-2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the starting lamp 135SG009S, the stick lamp 135SG09X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y are connected to the lamp control board 14, and are used for effect control via the lamp control board 14. Lighting (blinking) is possible under the control of the CPU 120 .

FIG. 283-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 135SG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 135SG constitutes a first display area 135SG005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative patterns and ready-to-win effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 has a first reserved storage display area 135SG005D that can display the number of the first special figure reserved storage by the number of circular reserved displays, and a circular reserved display of the number of the second special figure reserved storage. A second display area 135SG005Sa including a second reserved memory display area 135SG005U that can be displayed according to the number of , and a telop display area 135SG005T that can display a telop indicating a game state, an effect during execution, and the like.

Then, the upper right end of the image display device 5 includes the display of the fourth symbol 135SG005J indicating that the special symbols are being variably displayed, the number of the first special symbol pending storage, and the number of the second special symbol pending storage. 3 display area 135SG005Sb.

In the center of the first display area 135SG005F, "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are arranged, and the decoration patterns can be displayed in a variable manner. It's becoming Also, a small pattern 135SG005M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F. The small designs are the decorative designs displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L, the decorative designs displayed in the "middle" decorative design display areas 5C, and the "right" decorative design display areas. Designs corresponding to each of the decorative designs displayed on 5R are arranged vertically. The small pattern 135SG005M is also a pattern that is always displayed within the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5 without being hidden during variable display.

283-3, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, a decorative pattern is arranged in the central portion of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 135SG005M is the first display area of the image display device 5. 1 display area 135SG005F is arranged in a size smaller than the decorative pattern at the left end. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 135SG005M is lower than the visibility of the decoration pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 135SG005A for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display is provided at the lower center of the first display area 135SG005F in the characteristic portion 135SG.

Henceforth, in this characteristic part 135SG, a hold display and an active display may be generically called a specific display.

FIG. 283-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this characterizing portion 135SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 283-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 283-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 283-4 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also called variable display result) is "loss" or "big hit" or "minor hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result specifying command, for example, as shown in FIG. 283-4(B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while it is performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game or a small winning game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (for example, "1" to "10"). .

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed through (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second starting opening winning designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a pattern designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" as a result of determination at the time of winning, the determination result of the big hit type (probability variation or non-probability variation), and whether it will be a small hit. . In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating whether the random number for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 283-4(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count of a passage notification command, probability variation control, and time saving control to be performed.

FIG. 283-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 283-5, in this characteristic portion 135SG, on the main board 11 side, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big win" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". is a random value used to determine , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 283-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM101. In this characteristic part 135SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big win" to the big win game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 135SG), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to when it is a normal state or a time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the probability of winning is increased.

In addition, FIG. 283-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small win". is a table referenced for

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this characteristic portion 135SG, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "small hit" to the small hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the characteristic part 135SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the first special figure game and the second special figure. there is Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 283-7(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in the present characteristic portion 135SG selects one of a plurality of types of jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot game state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, the jackpot type in the present characteristic portion 135SG will be described using FIG. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot B" that are executed and shift to a high-probability high base state, and high-probability low base state in which high-probability control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state but time-saving control is not executed. "Variable probability big hit C" to shift, and "non-variable big hit" to shift to the low probability high base state by executing only time saving control after the end of the big win game state are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal open big-hit game in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . Then, the big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a normal open big win in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeated twice (so-called two rounds). . In addition, the big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" and "non-probability variable big win" is repeated twice (so-called two rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. It is usually an open jackpot. Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. may be called.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in the characteristic portion 135SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is set to 0.1 second. It's becoming In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

The high-probability control and the time-saving control executed after the jackpot game state of the variable probability big win is finished are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the jackpot game state is finished. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is a variable-probability big win, the high-probability control and time-saving control are executed again after the big-win game state ends, so that the big-win game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state. , a so-called continuous state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 135SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 283-7 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "Variable probability big hit A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is controlled to the normal opening jackpot state or the high-speed opening jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to ``probable variable jackpot B'' or ``probable variable jackpot C''. Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls obtained is small is avoided. It is possible to prevent the game interest from being lowered.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 283-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C" is different depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value of the predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value that is smaller than that of the special game of the first special figure is the big hit type of "variable big hit B" or "variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 283-8 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 135SG. In this characteristic portion 135SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, in this characteristic portion 135SG, as the normal reach variation pattern, a normal reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous performance described later is not executed and a normal reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous performance described later is performed once, are common normal reach reach performance. is set to run. Furthermore, as the super reach variation pattern, a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect described later is performed twice and a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect described later is performed three times. A production is to be executed. In other words, in the characteristic portion 135SG, only one type of reach effect is provided as the reach effect of normal reach and the reach effect of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a plurality of reach effects may be provided as the reach effects of normal reach and the reach effects of super reach.

In addition, the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 135SG includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 283-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 135SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, the normal reach variation pattern in the present characteristic portion 135SG includes a variation pattern in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and re-variably displayed during variable display, and a pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, and a pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during variable display. There is a variation pattern. In addition, in the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed during the variable display is set to have a shorter special figure variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during the variable display.

Further, the super reach variation pattern in the characteristic portion 135SG includes a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed twice during variable display, and a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed three times during variable display. In addition, in the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is performed twice during the variable display is set to have a special figure variation time shorter than the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is performed three times during the variable display. .

In addition, in this characteristic portion 135SG, since the variable display result is set in order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes "big hit", in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

That is, with respect to the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern in the present characteristic portion 135SG, the greater the number of times of simulated continuous effects executed during variable display, the higher the degree of expectation for a big hit.

In addition, in the present characteristic unit 135SG, as will be described later, the type of variation pattern is first determined, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of the variation pattern first, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 283-9 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 135SG. In this characterizing section 135SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is changed according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 283-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of one-time jackpot of normal reach pseudo-continuous production), PB1-3 (variation pattern of two-time jackpot of super reach pseudo-continuous production), PB1-4 (super Reach pseudo continuous performance 3 times big hit variation pattern). Further, when the variable display result is a probability variable big hit, the big hit variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is PB1-1 (normal reach big hit variation pattern), PB1 using the big hit variation pattern determination table B. -2 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 1 time big hit), PB1-3 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 2 times big hit), PB1-4 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 3 times big hit) are determined. .

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 283-9, the determination ratio for PB1-1 to PB1-4 is different between the big-hit variation pattern determination table A and the big-hit variation pattern determination table B. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-4 are determined at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PB1- 4 is determined at a rate of 45%. That is, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. Furthermore, focusing on the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot, more pseudo-continuous effects are more likely to be executed during the variable display than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. there is Therefore, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display and the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect.

Also, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special winning variation pattern determination table, and use the special winning variation pattern determination table to determine the variation pattern as PC1-1 (special winning variation pattern). do.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time loss variation pattern ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, the variation pattern determination table C for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 (Shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1 time), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo-continuous production 2 times It is determined from PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing 3 times of super reach pseudo-continuous effect).

That is, if the variable display result in the present characteristic portion 135SG is "missing", the number of pending storage of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the time saving state, the special figure Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is performed more frequently due to the shortening fluctuation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). , it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being delayed.

The RAM 102 in the characteristic portion 135SG includes a game control data holding area 135SG150 as shown in, for example, FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 135SG150 shown in FIG. 283-10 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 135SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 135SG152. , A game control timer setting unit 135SG153, a game control counter setting unit 135SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 135SG155.

The 1st special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A has a game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and although the start winning (first starting winning) has occurred, the special that has not yet started The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 135SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 135SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern pending storage unit 135SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 135SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 135SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 135SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 135SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 135SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 135SG190 as shown in FIG. It is The effect control data holding area 135SG190 shown in FIG. 283-11 (A) includes a effect control flag setting portion 135SG191, a effect control timer setting portion 135SG192, a effect control counter setting portion 135SG193, and a effect control buffer setting portion 135SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 135SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 135SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 135SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 135SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 135SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 135SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 135SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 135SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing section 135SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 135SG194A, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding areas) are provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ) is provided. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A are the area for storing these start winning prize designation commands and the symbol designation command. A storage area, an area for storing a variable category designation command, an area for storing a pending storage number notification command, an area for storing a pending display flag, and whether or not it is a target of a winning flash effect to be described later. A storage area (entry) is secured for storing an area for storing a flash effect target flag at the time of winning, and a storage area (entry) for separately storing the first special figure reserved memory and the second special figure reserved memory in association with the number of reserved memories. ing.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are changed when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The content (data) of the pending memory for which the start condition is satisfied is copied to the active display buffer 135SG194B in FIG. Deleted. Then, the storage contents of the storage areas lower than the deleted reserved storage are shifted to upper storage areas one by one.

In the active display buffer 135SG194B, as described above, when the variable display of the pending memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is started, the content of the pending memory satisfying the start condition ( Data) is copied, so as shown in FIG. 283-11(C), a storage area similar to the start winning receive command buffer 135SG194A is provided. That is, an area for storing the start opening winning designation command, an area for storing the pattern designation command, an area for storing the variable category command, an area for storing the pending memory number notification command, and an area for storing the pending display flag , and an area for storing a win-time flash effect target flag indicating whether or not a win-time flash effect is to be performed, which will be described later.

In this characteristic part 135SG, when a start winning is generated when variable display is not executed and no pending memory exists, a start winning designation command, a pattern designation command, a variable category command, a hold The memory number notification command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B without going through the reception command buffer 135SG194A at the time of start winning. It should be noted that the pending display flag is set by executing a pre-reading notice setting process (S161) described later by the effect control CPU 120. FIG.

Then, the storage contents of the active display buffer 135SG194B are cleared (deleted) in the special figure per waiting process executed when ending the variable display.

The suspended display flag is a flag indicating the display mode of the active display corresponding to the suspended display and the variable display being executed. Although the details will be described later, in this characterizing portion 135SG, it is possible to suggest the ratio of control to the big hit game state by the display mode of these pending display and active display (the value of the pending display flag).

Next, the starting winning judgment processing of the characterizing section 135SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 279 will be described based on FIG. 283-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 135SGS101a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 135SGS101a; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 135SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 135SG154, it should be able to identify the number of the 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 135SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 135SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is set to "1" ( step 135 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 135SGS101a (step 135SGS101; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit at step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 135 SGS 101b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 135SGS101b; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 135SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, it is sufficient if it can identify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At step 135SGS105, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (step 135SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is set to "2" ( step 135 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 135SGS103 and step 135SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the start buffer value, which is the stored value of the start buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (step 135SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", 1 is added to the first reserved storage number count value, and when the starting buffer value is "2", 1 is added to the second reserved storage number count value. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 135SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the processing of step 135SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted (step 135 SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the top of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the start buffer value (step 135SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A, while the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the process of step 135 SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 135SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 135SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for sending the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this manner is, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 135SGS111, the winning random number determination processing is executed (step 135SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (Step 135SGS113). The pending memory number notification command set in this manner is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 135SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114; Y), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS115). move on. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (step 135SGS114; N), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS116). End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 283-13(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS112 of FIG. 283-12 as the winning random number determination process. In this characteristic portion 135SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 279) sets the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbol) as "jackpot". It is determined whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state. Also, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 279), determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed.

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning in step 135 SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is to be displayed as a special figure display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, before the start of the variable display, it is decided whether or not to make a big hit. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on the determination result, the effect control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-reading preview effect is executed.

Figure 283-13 (A) in the random number value determination process shown in (A), the CPU103, first, for example by checking the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 135SG152, etc., Pachinko game Identify the current gaming state of machine 1 (step 135SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability flag is on when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that it is the time saving state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are specified. When it is off, it should be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the processing of step 135SGS121, the special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 283-6 is selected and set (step 135SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 135SGS109 in FIG. 283-12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 135SGS123). In the big hit determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected by the processing of step 135SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and each determination value. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined that it is not within the jackpot determination range in step 135SGS123, that is, when it is determined that the variable display does not hit the jackpot (step 135SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 283-6 2 is selected and set (step 135 SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 135SGS109 in FIG. 283-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 135SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display will result in a small hit (step 135 SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command which is the symbol designation command according to the event (step 135SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 135SGS127), and proceed to step 135SGS138. .

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when the variable display result is "loss" in the variable display, a pattern corresponding to the variable display result being "loss" Execute the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command (step 135 SGS128), and determine whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current game state is the time saving state (step 135SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 135SGS129; N), select and set the change pattern determination table A for loss, and if the time saving flag is on (step 135SGS129; Y), change pattern determination for loss Table D is selected and set (step 135SGS131). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition to the deviation variation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the characteristic part 135SG includes a deviation variation pattern determination table B that is used when the number of pending memories is 3. 283-9, the deviation variation pattern determination table C used when the number of pending memories is 4 is prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. , In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. In the variation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take, and the variation pattern determination table for loss In C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 are assigned to non-reach variation patterns within the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination tables A to C for loss, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach out of the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. .

Therefore, in step 135SGS126, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the number of pending memories changes after the determination Therefore, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination at the time of starting winning.

In addition, when it is determined in step 135SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that a jackpot will be hit during variable display (step 135SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 283-13(A) , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 135 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

Also, the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation jackpot A, the third symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation jackpot B, and the probability variation jackpot C in the case of the probability variation jackpot C Executes the transmission setting of the fourth symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the fifth symbol designation command (step 135 SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 135 SGS 134). If the determined jackpot type is non-probable variable jackpot (step 135SGS134; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 135SGS135), and step Go to 135SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot (step 135SGS134; N), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table B (step 135SGS136), and proceed to step 135SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 135SGS127, step 135SGS130, step 135SGS131, step 135SGS135, and step 135SGS136, a numerical value indicating each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination data, a variation category is determined according to the range of determination values that include the random number MR3 (step 135SGS138). In this characteristic part 135SG, as shown in FIG. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode (for example, normal reach) other than "non-reach" and "super reach" A variable category of "other" is provided, It suffices if it can be determined whether or not it is determined to be in such a variation category based on the random number MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 135SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 135SGS139), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

FIG. 283-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 281 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 283-14, the effect control CPU 120 first receives data from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by checking the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 135SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 135 SGS221; N), the command analysis process is terminated.

If there is a received command in step 135SGS221 (step 135SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start winning prize designation command. (Step 135 SGS222).

When the received command is not the first start winning designation command at step 135SGS222 (step 135SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting gate winning designation command (step 135SGS224).

At step 135SGS224, when the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the design designation command (step 135SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command at step 135SGS226 (step 135SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variation category command (step 135SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command at step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS228).

If the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command at step 135SGS228 (step 135SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (step 135SGS230).

If the received command in step 135SGS222 is the first starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS222; Y), or if the receiving command in step 135SGS224 is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS224; Y), in step 135SGS226 If the received command is a design designation command (step 135SGS226; Y), if the received command is a variable category command in step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; Y), in step 135SGS228 the received command is the first pending storage number notification command If (135SGS228; Y), if the received command in step 135SGS230 is the second pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS230; Y), the received command is transferred to the start winning time reception command buffer 135SG194A shown in FIG. Store at the beginning of the free area in the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS233), and return to the processing of step 135SGS221.

Specifically, in step 135SGS233, if there is no pending memory and variable display is not being executed, the received command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B. , the received command may be stored at the beginning of the empty area in the start winning received command buffer 135SG194A.

In addition, when the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command) and the reservation storage number notification command (first reservation storage number notification command or second reservation storage number notification command) are received, , The pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A. That is, the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of starting winning can be stored sequentially from the top of the empty area in the receiving command buffer 135SG194A when starting winning.

In step 135SGS230, if the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS230; N), settings are made according to other received commands (step 135SGS234), and the process returns to step 135SGS221.

In addition, in the command analysis processing of this characteristic part 135SG, if the received command is any of the starting entrance winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the pending storage number notification command, the received command is Although the form of sequentially storing from the beginning of the empty area of the received command buffer 135SG194A was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the received command is the first start winning prize designation command, the pending storage number notification command If a pending memory number notification command is not received before the timer times out, the entry pending memory that has not received the pending memory number notification command It may be set outside the target of the reading notice effect.

Next, the effect control process processing in this characterizing portion 135SG will be described. As shown in FIG. 283-15, in the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161), and then the active display area 135SG005A, the first reservation storage display area 135SG005D and the second reservation. A specific display start effect execution process (step 135SGS162) is executed for executing a specific display start effect as a display start animation of the suspended display in the storage display area 135SG005U and a display start animation of the active display in the active display area 135SG005A. After the specific display start effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 performs a winning flash effect execution process (step 135 SGS163) for executing a winning flash effect. 283-19 (B-1) to 283-19 (B-4)) for executing a specific display rotation display effect (see FIGS. Specific display rotation display effect execution processing (step 135SGS164), when it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect as a pre-reading notice in this feature part 135SG, the variable display based on the pending memory that is the target of the pending display notice effect is performed. Starting lamp light emission effect execution processing (step 135SG165) for executing the starting lamp light emission effect of causing the starting lamp 135SG009S to emit light in a color corresponding to the display mode of the reserved display/active display based on the reserved memory until the end of the process (step 135SG165) , and executes any one of steps S170 to S177.

Note that the specific display rotation display effect execution processing in the present characteristic portion 135SG includes processing for shifting each hold display to the next display position based on the start of the variable display and displaying it as a rotating animation, and processing for displaying the hold display as an active display. It also includes a process of shifting to the display area 135SG005A and displaying it as a rotation animation.

FIG. 283-16 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step 161 of FIG. 283-15 as pre-reading notice setting processing. In the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A or the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS240), and determines whether there is an entry in which the display mode flag is not set. Determine (step 135 SGS241). If there is no entry whose display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. If there is an entry whose display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241; Y), the It is determined whether or not there is an entry whose mode flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the pending display notice effect as the pre-reading notice effect is already being executed (step 135 SGS242). .

If there is no entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135 SGS242; N), it is further determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small hit (step 135SGS243). When the symbol designation command of the entry does not indicate a small hit (step 135SGS243; N), the variable display result is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (step 135SGS244a), and the variation category is determined from the variation category command of the entry. (step 135SGS244b). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pending display announcement effect and the display pattern based on the specified variable display result and variation category (step 135SGS245).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 283-17, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is non-reach, 95% of the time, the suspension display notice effect is not executed (suspension display or active display is determined to be a white display pattern α), and at a rate of 5%, the suspension display notice effect is executed in the display pattern β (the display mode of suspension display or active display is blue), and 0% is decided to execute the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern γ (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is red).

In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is other (normal reach), 80% of the display pattern α ), and decided to execute the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is blue) at a rate of 20%, and the pending display notice effect at a rate of 0%. It is decided to execute with γ (display mode of pending display or active display is red).

In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is super reach, the suspension display notice effect is not executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of suspension display or active display is white) at a rate of 65%. decided to execute the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is blue) at a rate of 25%; It is decided to execute the display mode of the pending display or the active display in red).

In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit, it is determined at a rate of 15% to not execute the pending display notice effect (display pattern α in which the display mode of the pending display or active display is white), and at a rate of 30% It is decided to execute the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is blue), and the pending display notice effect is executed in the display pattern γ (the display mode of the pending display or the active display) at a rate of 55%. red).

In other words, in the characteristic portion 135SG, when the pending display and the active display are displayed in red, the target variable display result has a high probability of winning a big hit (jackpot expectation), and the pending display and the active display are displayed in white. It is set so that the ratio of the target variable display result to be missed is the highest when the target is set (expectation for big hit according to display color of pending display and active display: red > blue > white).

Returning to FIG. 283-16, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pending display announcement effect has been determined in step 135SGS245 (step 135SGS246). If it is determined in step 135SGS245 to execute the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS246; Y), the display mode flag of the entry is set to a value ("1" or "2") corresponding to the determined display pattern ( Step 135 (SGS247), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated.

If there is an entry whose display mode flag is already set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS242; Y), if the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small win (step 135SGS243; Y) , when it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS246; N), the display mode flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to non-execution of the display notice effect (step 135SGS248), End the pre-reading notice setting process.

It should be noted that this characteristic portion 135SG exemplifies a form in which the pre-reading forewarning effect for determining the display mode of the pending display and the effect for determining the display mode for the active display can be collectively executed as a pending display forewarning effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. good.

FIG. 283-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS162 of FIG. 283-15 as the specific display start effect execution process. In the specific display start effect execution processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not either the specific display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B is being executed (step 135SGS251). Whether or not the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is being executed depends on the process timer for the specific display start effect A or the process timer for the specific display start effect B, which will be described later. The determination may be made based on whether or not it is in operation.

If the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is not being executed (step 135 SGS251; N), it is determined whether or not the start winning designation command is received (whether the start winning designation command reception flag is set). ) is determined (step 135SGS252). If the start winning designation command is not received (step 135 SGS252; N), the specific display display start effect execution processing is terminated. In addition, if there is a reception of the start winning designation command (step 135SGS252; Y), the newly generated pending memory entry is identified by referring to the start winning win command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B ( 263SGS273), it is determined whether or not it is the first special figure pending storage (step 135SGS253a). It should be noted that whether or not the first special figure reservation storage may be determined by the start opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry (specified entry) is not the first special figure pending storage (step 135SGS253a; N), proceed to step 135SGS255, and if the entry is the first special figure pending storage (step 135SGS253a; Y), specify It is determined whether or not the display mode flag of the entered entry is 0, that is, whether or not the entry is subject to the pending display notice effect (step 135 SGS254). If the display mode flag of the specified entry is 0, that is, if the entry is not subject to the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS254; Y), the process proceeds to step 135SGS255.

In the process of step 135 SGS255, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table for specific display start effect A according to the display position of the specific display (suspended display or active display). Then, the process timer for specific display display start effect A is started (step 135SGS256).

Further, if the display mode flag of the specified entry is not 0, that is, if the entry is the target of the suspension display notice effect (step 135 SGS254; N), the display position of the specified display (suspension display or active display) The corresponding process table for specific display display start effect B is selected (step 135SGS257). Then, the process timer for specific display display start effect B is started (step 135SGS258).

After executing step 135SGS256 or step 135SGS258, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 of the set process table for specific display display start effect (step 135SGS259), and executes specific display display start effect execution processing. finish.

Further, when the specific display display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B is being executed (step 135 SGS251; Y), the effect control CPU 120 controls the process timer for the specific display start effect being executed (specific display display start The process timer for effect A or the process timer for specific display start effect B) is decremented by 1 (step 135 SGS260), and the process timer for specific display start effect (the specific display start effect being executed) is decremented by 1. process timer) has timed out (step 135SGS261). If the process timer for specific display start effect being executed does not time out (step 135 SGS261; N), the effect device is controlled according to the process data of the process timer for specific display start effect being executed. (Step 135 SGS262), the specific display display start effect execution processing is terminated.

Further, when the process timer for specific display start effect in execution times out (step 135 SGS261; Y), whether the process timer for specific display start effect is the final process timer for specific display start effect. (Step 135SGS263). When the final process timer for specific display start effect times out (step 135SGS263; Y), the specific display start effect is terminated (step 135SGS267), and the specific display start effect execution process is terminated. If the final specific display display start rendering process timer has not timed out (step 135 SGS263; N), the process data is switched, the next specific display display start rendering process timer is started, and the next specific display is started. The effect device is controlled according to the process data of the process timer for display start effect (step 135SGS264, step 135SGS265, step 135SGS266), and the specific display start effect execution process is terminated.

As described above, in the present characterizing portion 135SG, when a starting prize is generated and it is decided not to execute the pre-reading notice effect (holding display notice effect) based on the starting prize, or when the starting prize is the second If it is a starting prize to the starting port, as shown in Figure 283-19 (A) and Figure 283-19 (B), Figure 283-19 (B-1) to Figure 283-19 (B-4) , in the active display area 135SG005A or the reserved memory display areas 135SG005D and 135SG005U, an appearance animation is displayed in which the reserved display (active display) gradually appears from the bottom to the top as the specific display display start effect A. be.

It should be noted that, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the appearance animation of the reserved display (active display) as the specific display display start effect A is approximately 0.2 seconds. Then, the suspended display (active display) after the end of the specific display display start effect A is the same as the other suspended displays and active displays as the specific display rotating display effect described above. Transition to display with rotation animation in .

In addition, when a starting prize is generated, execution of a prefetching notice effect (holding display notice effect) is determined based on the starting prize, and the starting prize is a starting prize to the first starting port, As shown in FIGS. 283-20(A) to 283-20(C) and FIGS. 283-20(C-1) to 283-20(C-4), as the specific display display start effect B, first, On the image display device 5, an animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. After the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, if the variable display is executed at the timing of the start winning, or if the first special figure pending memory already exists, the character A is the first An animation that moves to the 1 reserved storage display area 135SG005D is displayed. At this time, the character A is displayed overlapping part of the active display area 135SG005A in the process of moving to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D.

Then, when the character A moves to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D, as shown in FIGS. An animation is displayed that attacks (acts) on the position where the hold display is displayed. When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the hold display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A attacked.

In the characteristic part 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the starting prize to the end of the animation in which the character A attacks the position where the suspension display is displayed in the first suspension storage display area 135SG005D as the specific display display start effect B is finished. It is about 1 second, and the period from the end of the animation to the end of the pending display appearance animation is about 0.2 seconds. That is, when executing the specific display start effect B targeting the reserved display of the first special figure, it takes 1.2 seconds from the start winning to the completion of the display of the holding display based on the starting winning. need. Then, the suspended display after the end of the specific display display start effect B is transferred to the rotation animation display in the first suspended memory display area 135SG005D as the above-described specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays and active displays. .

In addition, when the character A appears from the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F as the specific display display start effect B, when the variable display is not executed at the timing of the start win and the first special figure reservation memory does not exist. , an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A. Then, when the character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A, the active display of the character A is displayed on the basis of the start winning as in FIGS. An animation that attacks (acts) is displayed on the position where the target is, that is, the active display area 135SG005A. When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A attacked.

In the characteristic portion 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the starting prize to the end of the animation in which the character A attacks the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display display start effect B is about 0.5 seconds. The period from the end to the end of the appearance animation of the active display is approximately 0.2 seconds. That is, when the specific display display start effect B is executed for the active display, it takes 0.7 seconds from the start winning to the completion of the display of the active display based on the starting winning. Then, the active display after the end of the specific display start effect B shifts to the rotation animation display in the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display rotating display effect described above.

FIGS. 283-21 and 283-22 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS163 of FIG. 283-21 as the winning flash effect execution process. In the winning flash effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning receive command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS272), and displays these in the start winning receive command buffer 135SG194A and active display buffer 135SG194B. It is determined whether or not there is an entry whose mode flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the pending display announcement effect is being executed (step 135 SGS273).

If there is an entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135 SGS273; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the entry is based on the start winning to the first start port. It is determined whether or not (step 135SGS274). Incidentally, whether or not the entry is based on the start winning to the first starting opening may be specified from the starting opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry is based on the start winning to the first start opening (step 135SGS274; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the game state is the normal state (step 135SGS275). If the game state is a normal state (step 135SGS275; Y), further whether the value of the effect control process flag is any one of 0 to 3, that is, the game state is a big hit game state or a small hit game state (Step 135SGS276). If the value of the effect control process flag is any one of 0 to 3 (step 135SGS276; Y), the variation category of the entry (the entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2") is super. It is determined whether or not it is a reach (step 135SGS277).

If the variable category of the entry is super reach (step 135 SGS277; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is 2, that is, whether variable display is being executed (step 135 SGS278). When the value of the effect control process flag is 2 (step 135SGS278; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the ready-to-win effect is being executed (step 135SGS279). It should be noted that whether or not the ready-to-win effect is being executed may be determined from the contents of the process data displayed in the variable display.

If the value of the effect control process flag is not 2 (step 135SGS278; N) or if the ready-to-win effect is not being executed (step 135SGS279; N), the effect control CPU 120 executes the win-time flash effect based on the variable display result.・Determine non-execution. It should be noted that the variable display result may be specified from the symbol designation command of the entry for which the win-time flash effect target flag is not set.

As shown in FIG. 283-24, when the variable display result is a loss, execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 10%, and non-execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 90%. When the result of the variable display is a big hit, execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 20%, and non-execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 80%.

That is, in this characteristic part 135SG, when the winning flush performance is executed from the start winning, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is set higher than when the winning flash performance is not executed.

Returning to FIG. 283-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the winning flash effect is determined (step 135SG279b). If it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning (step 135SG279b; Y), the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is set to the target of the flash effect at the time of winning of the relevant entry (the entry for which the flag for the flash effect at the time of winning is not set). (Step 135SG280), and the flash effect execution flag at the time of winning is turned on (Step 135SG280a). The process table for the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning is selected, the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning is started, the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data 1 (steps 135SGS281 to step 135SGS283), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

As shown in FIG. 283-23, the flash effect at the time of winning the first term means that the flash effect at the time of winning 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are set to the flash effect at the time of winning for 1.5 seconds from the occurrence of the start winning. Flashing in a corresponding manner (as shown in FIGS. 283-26 (A) and 283-26 (B), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are lit at high luminance C1 and extinguishing are repeatedly executed), the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, and the effect image 135SG005E of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in this feature part 135SG is the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the previous term winning, which is output during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the first term winning, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term, which is output during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the latter term winning. It is divided into the sound corresponding to the flash effect and the sound corresponding to the flash effect. Among these, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term, a sound having a relatively short output period (for example, one second) such as an electronic sound or a voice sound of a specific character may be output once. Also, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the late winning, a sound such as dedicated BGM or SE (sound effect) having a longer output period than the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the early winning may be repeatedly output. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 135SG, in addition to the above-described sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, a plurality of effect sounds such as a sound corresponding to the notice effect and a sound corresponding to the variable display, which will be described later, are different using different channels. Simultaneous output from the speakers 8L and 8R is possible depending on the volume.

In addition, if the entry is based on winning a prize to the second start port (step 135SG274; N), if the gaming state is not normal (step 135SG275; N), the effect control process flag is any of 0-3 If neither (step 135SG276; N), if the variation category of the entry is not super reach (step 135SG277; N), if the ready-to-win effect is being executed (step 135SG279; Y), no winning flash effect is determined (step 135SG279b), the winning flash effect target flag of the entry is set to "0" indicating that the winning flash effect is not the target (step 135SG279c), and the winning flash effect execution process is executed. finish.

In addition, when the prize winning flash effect execution flag is ON at step 135SGS271 (step 135SGS271; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process timer for the first winning flash effect is in operation (step 135SGS271). 135SGS284). When the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning is in operation (step 135SGS284; Y), the value of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning is decremented by 1 (step 135SGS285), and the previous term after decrementing the value by 1. It is determined whether or not the process timer for winning flash effects has timed out (step 135SGS286). When the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning has not timed out (step 135 SGS286; N), the effect control CPU 120 operates the effect device according to the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning being executed. control (step 135SGS287) and proceed to step 135SGS292.

Also, when the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous term has timed out (step 135SGS286; Y), it is determined whether or not the last process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous term has timed out (step 135SGS288). When the final process timer for flash effect at the time of winning the last term has not timed out (step 135 SGS288; N), the effect control CPU 120 executes switching of the process data, and starts the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the next previous term winning. , the effect device is controlled in accordance with the process data of the process timer for flash effect at the time of the next winning (step 135SGS289, step 135SGS290, step 135SGS291), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

In step 135SGS292, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and the stick lamp 135SG009Y, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. is controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning the first term. Also, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (step 135SGS293), and the winning flash effect execution process is terminated. As a mode corresponding to the first winning flash effect, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be repeatedly illuminated in white or red. In addition, as a mode corresponding to the winning flash effect, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and the stick lamp 135SG009Y, and the winning flash effect. The lamp 135SG009F may emit light in the same color.

Also, in step 135SGS288, when the last process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning the last term has timed out (step 135SGS288; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term (step 135SGS294). Then, the process table for flash effect at the time of late winning is selected, the process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning is started, the effect device is controlled according to the content of process data 1 (step 135SGS294 to step 135SGS297), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

As shown in FIG. 283-23, the flash effect at the time of winning means that the flash effect at the time of winning 135SG009F is turned on from the end of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first half to the start timing of the reach effect of the target variable display super reach. A silhouette image of the character A imitated by a lamp 135SG009F for winning a flash in an image display device 5 is flashed in a manner corresponding to the flash performance at winning, a sound corresponding to the flash performance at winning is output from speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V1. This is an effect for displaying 135SG005S. As a mode corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter term, the lamp for flashing at the time of winning 135SG009F may be caused to repeatedly emit light in white or red as in the flash effect at the time of winning in the first term. In addition, since the late winning flash effect is performed at a lower brightness than the early winning flash effect (see Fig. 283-28), the actual lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the late winning flash effect is It will emit light in a darker color than the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term.

As shown in FIG. 283-27(A), the game effect lamp 9 (particularly the frame lamp 9b) has a luminance C2 which is lower than the luminance C1 described above during a period other than during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term. It is designed to repeat lighting and (blinking) extinguishing with . In particular, the blinking cycle at the brightness C2 is longer than the blinking cycle during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term, and during the blinking, Figs. Thus, the frame lamp 9b blinks while changing the emission color step by step in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 . For this reason, the game effect lamp 9 during the period other than the period during execution of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning has a lower impression given to the player than the game effect lamp 9 during the execution of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning.

Further, when the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the early winning is not in operation at step 135SGS284, that is, when the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning is in operation (step 135SGS284; N), the effect control CPU 120 will Decrease the value of the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning by 1 (step 135SGS298), and judge whether or not the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning after decreasing the value by 1 has timed out (step 135SGS299). When the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning has not timed out (step 135 SGS299; N), the effect device is controlled according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning being executed (step 135 SGS300). ), go to step 135 SGS307.

Then, when the process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning has timed out (step 135SGS299; Y), it is determined whether or not the last process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning has timed out (step 135SGS301). When the final process timer for flash effects at the time of the latter period has not timed out (step 135 SGS301; N), the process data is switched, the next process timer for the flash effects at the time of the latter period is started, and the process data 1 Control the rendering device according to the content (steps 135SGS302 to step 135SGS304), and proceed to step 135SGS307.

Further, when the final process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning has timed out (step 135 SGS301; Y), the first process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning is started, and the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data 1 ( Step 135SGS305, step 135SGS306) and step 135SGS307.

At step 135SGS307, the effect control CPU 120 blinks and controls the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in a manner corresponding to the late winning flash effect. Also, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (step 135SGS308).

Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 checks the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS309), and determines whether or not the flash effect object flag at the time of winning of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "1", that is, the variable display during execution. It is determined whether or not is a variable display for flash effect at the time of winning (step 135SGS310). When "0" is set in the winning flash effect target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS310; N), the winning flash effect execution processing is terminated. When "1" is set in the winning flash effect target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS310; Y), it is determined whether or not it is time to start the ready-to-win effect (step 135SGS311).

When it is time to start the ready-to-win effect (step 135SGS311; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect at the time of the late winning, turns off the flash effect executing flag at the time of winning (step 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), and Terminate the flash effect execution process.

Moreover, when it is not the ready-to-win effect start timing (step 135SGS311; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a pattern confirmation command is received (step 135SGS311a). When there is a reception of the pattern confirmation command (step 135SGS311a; Y), the flash effect at the time of winning is ended, the flash effect execution flag at the time of winning is turned off (step 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), and the flash effect execution processing at the time of winning is executed. finish. If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step 135SGS311a; N), the winning flash effect execution process is terminated without executing the processes of steps 135SGS312 and 135SGS313.

As described above, the flash effect at the time of early winning in the present characteristic section 135SG is a effect that ends when a predetermined effect period (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses, while the flash effect at the time of late winning is the effect It is an effect that is repeatedly executed without ending every time a certain period passes until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the target variable display.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the object of effect due to the generation of static electricity or the like during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the start timing of the ready-to-win effect. At the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the pattern confirmation command), which is the later timing, it is possible to end the late winning flash effect including blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F.

As shown in step 135SGS281 in FIG. 283-21 and step 135SGS295 in FIG. is selected, and one process table for effect is selected as the process table for flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period. In other words, regardless of the number of reserved memories, etc., the effect pattern (effect period) of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term and the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term of this characteristic part 135SG is always the same effect mode and the same effect period at the time of winning the first term regardless of the number of reserved memories. A flash effect and a flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period are executed.

FIG. 283-25 is a flow chart showing the effect process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from each value of the process timer, the variable time timer, and the variable control timer (step 135SGS351, step 135SGS352, step 135SGS353). The process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are timers set in the variable display start setting process.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356). If the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356; Y), the process data is switched (step 135SGS357). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table set in the variable display start setting process to the process timer (step 135 SGS358). In addition, the control state for the production device (parts for production) is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. (step 135SGS359). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out (step 135 SGS356; N), the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) Control of the production device (parts for production) is executed according to (step 135SGS360).

In particular, as the control contents of step 135SGS359 and step 135SGS360, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a variable display corresponding sound corresponding to the variable display being executed from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2 smaller than the volume V1 (step 135SGS361). Note that the variable display corresponding sound in the characteristic portion 135SG refers to BGM corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5, BGM corresponding to the number of simulated continuous effects performed during variable display, and the like. Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is not executed (step 135SGS362; N), blinking control is performed in a manner corresponding to the variable display during execution of the game effect lamp 9 (step 135SGS363). While the effect is being executed (step 135 SGS362; Y), the blinking control in the mode corresponding to the variable display during execution of the game effect lamp 9 is not executed (as shown in FIGS. 283-21 and 283-22, the game effect The flashing control of the lamp 9 is performed in a manner corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning the previous term).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a notice effect execution process (step 135SG364). In the advance notice effect execution processing, for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display start setting processing, it is determined whether or not the notice effect is to be executed during execution of the variable display, and in which effect pattern the notice effect is executed. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not to perform the advance notice effect according to the result of the determination. Further, when the effect pattern of the notice effect is determined in the variable display start setting process described above, one effect pattern is determined from a plurality of effect patterns at different ratios according to the result of the variable display. The ratio of control to the jackpot game state may be made different depending on whether the performance pattern is executed.

The effect executed as the forewarning effect in the characterizing portion 135SG is a dialogue foretelling effect in which the character's lines are displayed on the image display device 5, and the degree of expectation for the big win varies according to the displayed lines.

Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365). When the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen for the left, middle, and right decorative patterns (displayed after 30 ms have elapsed since the display of the previous decorative pattern was switched). The image data of the screen to be displayed) is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 135SGS366). Thus, in the image display device 5, the variable display control of the decoration pattern is realized. The display control unit 123 transmits to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing the image data of a predetermined area such as the set background image and the image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this manner, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image and the decorative design in the variable display of the decorative design. Also, a predetermined value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 135SGS367).

Also, when the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 135SGS365; N) or after execution of step 135SGS366, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 135SGS368). . If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 135 SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the determination command reception flag indicating that the design determination command is received is set (step 135 SGS369; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is processed for special symbols. (Step S173) is updated to a value according to (Step 135SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, when the pattern confirmation command is received, the control is shifted to stop the variable display. is received, the variable display of the decorative design can be terminated when the regular variable display time elapses (at the end of the variable display of the special design).

Process data during variable display of decorative patterns is set in the process table used for variable display control of the decorative patterns. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decoration pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n has timed out in the process of step 135 SGS356, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and the decorative design effect control based on the process table is finish.

Next, the operation mode of each effect device at the time of execution of the winning flash effect in the present characteristic portion 135SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 283-28 to 283-68. First, FIG. 283-28 is a timing chart in the case where a starting winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and it is determined to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning. FIG. 283-28 shows both the case where execution of the holding display notice effect is decided when the execution of the winning flash effect is decided based on the start winning, and the case where it is decided not to execute the holding display notice effect. It is a corresponding timing chart. Figures 283-29 to 283-48 show the image display device 5 when a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and execution of the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. Figures 283-49 to 283-68 show that a starting prize is generated during the execution of the variable display, and based on the starting prize, it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning, while the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is decided. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a presentation mode in the image display device 5 and the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the case of winning.

283-29 to 283-48 "When execution of pending display notice effect and winning flash effect is determined", the display mode of the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, is the display pattern β or This is the case where it is displayed in the display pattern γ (displayed in a blue or red round shape), and "while the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning has been decided, the pending display notice" shown in Figs. "When it is decided not to execute the effect" refers to the case where the display mode of the pending display, which is the object of the winning flash effect, is displayed in the display pattern α (displayed in a white round shape).

First, as shown in FIGS. 283-28 and 283-29 (A), during the execution of the variable display, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the variable display is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The corresponding sound is output at volume V2. In addition, during the execution of the variable display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes at the cycle T0 corresponding to the variable display (Fig. 283-27 (A) to Fig. 283-27 Blinking in the mode shown in (D)) is controlled.

Further, during execution of the variable display, during the execution period of the notice effect, an image corresponding to the effect pattern of the notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound corresponding to the production pattern (for example, a sound corresponding to the advance notice production such as the sound of a character speaking characters displayed on the image display device 5) is output at volume V2. In addition, as the reserved memory, there are three first special figure reserved memories (three reserved indications are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

During such a variable display, if a prize is awarded to the first start port (start prize), and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start prize, As shown in 283-28 and FIG. 283-29(B), the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started.

As the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term, first, as shown in FIGS. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are once turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 283-28, 283-30(C), and 283-30(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG009X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the period T1. In the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

In addition, when the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. , an animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F which is controlled to blink, and an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. After the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the reserved display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D (in the case of this feature part 135SG, the fourth reserved An animation that attacks (acts) against the position where the display is displayed is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the pending display, which is the object of the winning flash effect (previous winning flash effect) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the acted position. Appearance animation is displayed (see FIGS. 283-20 (D-1) to 283-20 (D-5)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

That is, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when a start winning occurs during the variable display, and execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning, display of the pending display based on the starting win is completed. At the same time, the output of sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. It should be noted that the appearance animation of the reserved display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect B in this characteristic portion 135SG is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period (FIGS. 283-32 (G) and FIG. -32(H)).

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the later stage, as shown in FIGS. At the same time, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking with brightness C2 and period T2 (period T2>period T1). Also, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

It should be noted that at the end timing of the flash effect for the first-term winning and the start timing of the flash effect for the second-term winning, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The light emission mode (blinking at the brightness C1 and the period T1) according to the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term of the attacker lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d) ends. The light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is similar to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. 283-27(A) to 283-27(D) (flashing at brightness C2 and cycle T0). That is, the light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is based on the end of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term. Return to the lighting mode before the start of the flash performance at the time of winning the first term. Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are kept turned off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of the late winning.

The game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y blink at the brightness C2 and the period T0 as described above. As the same mode as the mode before execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (light emission mode shown in FIG. 283-29 (A)), a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image gradation in bluish colors, gradation in reddish colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1 and shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 283-32(H), 283-33(I), and 283-33(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which the transparent black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the entire first display area 135SG005F except for the active display area 135SG005A. The silhouette image 135SG005S in the characteristic portion 135SG is displayed in blue so as to be easily recognized by the player when displayed overlapping the black image 135SG005B.

In this characterizing portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in blue so that the player can easily see it when displayed overlapping the black image 135SG005B, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed in a color other than blue, such as green or red. In particular, when the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed in a plurality of colors such as blue, green, and red as described above, the degree of expectation for a big hit may be changed according to which color the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed. good. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the color of the silhouette image 135SG005S, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 283-32(H) and 283-33(J), in the characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the image display device 5, a small pattern 135SG005M is displayed at the left end. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of the characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed in duplicate, and the player can display the silhouette image 135SG005S during the winning flash effect. Whether or not the variable display is being executed can be confirmed by visually recognizing the small pattern 135SG005M regardless of whether or not the variable display is being executed.

As shown in Figures 283-33 (J), Figures 283-34 (K) and Figure 283-34 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design confirmation command, the image display device 5 decorates the design and The small symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is during the pattern fixing period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 283-33(J), the black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the image display device 5 and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even during the design confirmation period, and the speakers 8L and 8R output the silhouette image 135SG005S. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at the volume V2.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 283-34(K) to 283-41(Z), in the variable display before the variable display which is the target of the winning flash effect, the speaker 8L as the late winning flash effect, Output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from 8R at the volume V2, blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with brightness C2 and period T2, and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 283-38 (S) to 283-40 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (FIG. 283-40 (W ).In this characterizing portion 135SG, decorative patterns showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and special patterns indicating temporary stop are temporarily stopped in the inner decorative pattern display area 5C. ), as a flash effect at the time of the late winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning flashes with a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and the image display device 5 is executed to display the silhouette image 135SG005S.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 283-41 (Y) and 283-41 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is lost according to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the image display device 5 displays the decoration pattern and the small display. The symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is also executed during the pattern fixing period of the variable display that is out of normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 283-41(Y) and 283-41(Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed while the black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the image display device 5 even during the design determination period. At the same time, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2.

As shown in FIGS. 283-40(W) and 283-40(X), during the temporary stop period of the decoration pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are applicable. It emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped for the first time in the variable display, it emits light in blue with luminance C2), and the background image is based on the execution of the re-variable display. It returns to the light emission mode according to . Furthermore, during the period in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary suspension. It is possible to recognize that the variable display has not ended yet.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 283-42(a) and 283-42(b), when the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. A pending display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIGS. 283-43(c) to 283-47(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period is continuously executed. Also, during the variable display, there are cases where the advance notice effect is executed (see FIGS. 283-43(d) and 283-44(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (Figs. 283-45(g) to 283-46(j). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period in which the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 283-46 (j)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 283-45(g) and 283-46(j), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are displayed in the decorative pattern. (for example, blue with luminance C2 for the first temporary stop, and green with luminance C2 for the second temporary stop) according to the temporary stop, and to execute the re-variable display Based on this, the lighting mode returns to the light emission mode corresponding to the background image. Although not shown in the characteristic portion 135SG, in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker The lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode (for example, red with luminance C2) corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decoration pattern, and light emission corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display. Back to Aspects.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 283-48 (m) and 283-48 (n), when the ready-to-win effect starts timing due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 After 135SG005F is once whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white), the ready-to-win effect is started. In addition, in this characterizing portion 135SG, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the white-out timing, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning flashes with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends.

Also, at the white-out timing, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y finish blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T0. . These main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are kept off during the whiteout period.

That is, during the white-out period, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are kept turned off. Then, from the timing when the white-out ends, as a mode corresponding to the above-described ready-to-win effect, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d respond to the ready-to-win effect. The light emission mode (lighting at luminance C1) is started.

Also, during the white-out period, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and no sound is produced. At the same time that the attack lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d start emitting light according to the ready-to-win effect (lighting with the brightness C1), the output of the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, which is the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, starts from the speakers 8L and 8R. . It should be noted that, as the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound in the characteristic portion 135SG, BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound may be output so that the player can recognize that the ready-to-win effect (the ready-to-win effect of super reach) is being executed. Just do it.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 283-28, when the start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and the execution of the holding display notice effect is determined based on the start winning, the starting entrance lamp light emission effect is used. From the timing of the starting prize, the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S changes color according to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect (for example, if the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern β, it is blue, and the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern γ). red) to start emitting light.

The light emission of the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the above-described winning flash effect. Light emission in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is continued from the time of winning to the end of the target variable display of the starting port lamp light emission effect (the target variable display of the flash effect at the time of winning).

Next, a description will be given of a case where execution of the holding display forewarning effect as well as the flash effect at the time of winning is not determined in the start winning during the execution of the variable display.

First, as shown in FIGS. 283-28 and 283-49(A), during the execution of the variable display, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the variable display is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The corresponding sound is output at volume V2. In addition, while the variable display is being executed, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes at the cycle T0 corresponding to the variable display (Figs. Blinking in the mode shown in (D)) is controlled.

Further, during execution of the variable display, during the execution period of the notice effect, an image corresponding to the effect pattern of the notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound corresponding to the production pattern (preliminary production corresponding sound) is output at volume V2. In addition, as the reserved memory, there are three first special figure reserved memories (three reserved indications are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

During such a variable display, if a prize is awarded to the first start port (start prize), and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start prize, As shown in 283-28 and FIG. 283-49(B), the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started.

As the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term, first, as shown in FIGS. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are once turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 283-28, 283-50(C), and 283-50(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed from around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the cycle T1. Incidentally, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Also, when the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. , Appearance animation is displayed in which the pending display, which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning (previous flash effect at the time of winning) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top (Fig. 283-19 (B-1) to Fig. 283-19 (B-4)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D has been completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

In particular, when the specific display display start effect A is executed together with the winning flash effect, the pending display appearance animation ends when the effect image 135SG005E is still being displayed on the image display device 5 . On the other hand, when the specific display display start effect B described above is executed together with the winning flash effect, the appearance animation of the pending display ends after the display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 ends (Fig. See Figure 283-32). That is, when the specific display start effect A is executed, the display of the pending display (appearance animation) is completed at an earlier timing than when the specific display display start effect B is executed, and the rotation animation is started. there is

That is, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when a start winning occurs during the variable display, and execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning, display of the pending display based on the starting win is completed. At the same time, the output of sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. It should be noted that the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect A in this characterizing portion 135SG is completed during the execution of the previous winning flash effect.

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the flash effect at the time of the late winning, as shown in FIGS. 283-28, 283-52 (G) and 283-52 (H), the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2. At the same time, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking with brightness C2 and cycle T2 (cycle T2>cycle T1). Further, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

It should be noted that at the end timing of the flash effect for the first-term winning and the start timing of the flash effect for the second-term winning, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The light emission mode (blinking at the brightness C1 and the period T1) according to the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term of the attacker lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d) ends. The light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is similar to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. 283-27(A) to 283-27(D) (flashing at brightness C2 and cycle T0). That is, the light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is based on the end of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term. At the time of winning the first term, the light emission mode is returned to before the start of the flash performance. Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are kept turned off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of the late winning.

The game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y blink at the brightness C2 and the period T0 as described above. As the same mode as the mode before execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (light emission mode shown in FIG. 283-29 (A)), a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image gradation in bluish colors, gradation in reddish colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1, but is shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 283-52(H), 283-53(I), and 283-53(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which the transparent black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the entire first display area 135SG005F except for the active display area 135SG005A.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 283-52(H) and 283-53(J), in the characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the image display device 5, a small pattern 135SG005M is displayed at the left end. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of the characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed in duplicate, and the player can display the silhouette image 135SG005S during the winning flash effect. Whether or not the variable display is being executed can be confirmed by visually recognizing the small pattern 135SG005M regardless of whether or not the variable display is being executed.

As shown in FIGS. 283-53 (J), 283-54 (K) and 283-54 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design confirmation command, the image display device 5 The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the outputs of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R are stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing section 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is during the symbol fixing period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 283-53(J), the image display device 5 displays the silhouette image 135SG005S in a state in which the black image 135SG005B is overlapped even during the design determination period, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the silhouette image 135SG005S. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at the volume V2.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 283-54(K) to 283-61(Z), in the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning, the speaker 8L as the flash effect at the time of winning, Output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from 8R at the volume V2, flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F with brightness C2 and period T2, and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 283-58 (S) to 283-60 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (FIG. 283-60 (W ).In this characterizing portion 135SG, decorative patterns indicating normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and special patterns indicating temporary stop are temporarily stopped in the inner decorative pattern display area 5C. ), as a flash effect at the time of the late winning, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 is executed to display the silhouette image 135SG005S.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 283-61 (Y) and 283-51 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is lost according to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the image display device 5 displays the decorative pattern and the small The symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is also executed during the pattern fixing period of the variable display that is out of normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 283-61 (Y) and 283-61 (Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed while the black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the image display device 5 even during the design determination period. At the same time, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2.

As shown in FIGS. 283-60 (W) and 283-60 (X), during the temporary stop period of the decoration pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are applicable. It emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped for the first time in the variable display, it emits light in blue with luminance C2), and the background image is based on the execution of the re-variable display. It returns to the light emission mode according to . Furthermore, during the period in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary suspension. It is possible to recognize that the variable display has not ended yet.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 283-62(a) and 283-62(b), when the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, the display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. A suspended display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIGS. 283-63(c) to 283-67(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period is continuously executed. Also, during the variable display, there are cases where the advance notice effect is executed (see FIGS. 283-63(d) and 283-64(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 283-65(g) to 283-66(j). reference).

As shown in FIGS. 283-65(g) and 283-66(j), the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are displayed during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern. (for example, blue with luminance C2 for the first temporary stop, green with luminance C2 for the second temporary stop) according to the temporary stop, and to execute the re-variable display Based on this, the lighting mode returns to the light emission mode corresponding to the background image. Incidentally, although not shown in the characteristic portion 135SG, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker The lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode (for example, red with luminance C2) corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decoration pattern, and light emission corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display. Back to Aspects.

In particular, even in the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period in which the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 283-66 (j)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 283-68 (m) and 283-68 (n), when it comes to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 After 135SG005F is once whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white), the ready-to-win effect is started. In addition, in this characterizing portion 135SG, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the white-out timing, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning flashes with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends.

At the white-out timing, the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0 ends. . The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are maintained in an extinguished state during the whiteout period, but emit light in a mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect from the timing when the whiteout ends. .

Also, during the white-out period, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and no sound is produced. At the same time that the attack lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d start emitting light according to the ready-to-win effect (lighting with the brightness C1), the output of the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, which is the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, starts from the speakers 8L and 8R. . It should be noted that, as the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound in the characteristic portion 135SG, BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound may be output so that the player can recognize that the ready-to-win effect (the ready-to-win effect of super reach) is being executed. Just do it.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG, FIGS. As shown in D), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light before the display of the pending display is completed, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize the pending display that is the object of the winning flash effect. . Further, it has a winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the first light emitting means in the present invention, and a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c and a movable body lamp 9d as the second light emitting means in the present invention. As shown in 283-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at a brightness of C1 and a period of T1 during the execution period of the first winning flash presentation, and has a brightness of C2 and a cycle during the execution period of the latter winning flash presentation. While flashing at T2, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d flash at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning, and at the time of the second prize winning. During the execution period of the flash effect, it flashes at the brightness C2 and the period T0, so during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, not only the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning but also the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c. The movable body lamp 9d also blinks at the brightness C1 and the period T1, so that the winning flash effect can be made more conspicuous. It's becoming

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, when a new starting prize occurs during the variable display, whether or not the flash effect at the time of winning is executed and whether or not the pending display notice effect is executed are targeted for the pending memory based on the start winning. is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible to determine whether or not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning and whether or not to execute the pending display notice effect for the reserved storage based on. Specifically, when a new start winning occurs during the variable display, the specific display display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A with the display pattern α to the display pattern γ (holding display notice After executing the appearance animation of the active display of either the display pattern in the case of non-execution of the effect or the display pattern in the case of execution of the pending display notice effect), the active display is displayed as a specific display rotating display effect. The rotating display may be executed, and the winning flash effects (early winning flash effects and late winning flash effects) may be executed based on the start of the variable display based on the start winning.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 283-15, 283-30 (D) to 283-32 (H), and 283-49 (B) to 283-50 (D), the specific display display start effect is 283-15, FIGS. 283-30(D) to 283-32(H), and FIGS. 283-49(B) to 283 As shown in -50 (D), it is displayed as a suspended display and a rotating animation, and as shown in FIGS. , the rotation animation of the hold display is started, so that the player's attention to the hold display can be increased.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 283-29(A) to 283-32(H), when the specific display display start effect B is executed, from the timing before the start of display of the reserved display, flash effect at the time of winning Winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d emit light, so that winning flash performance can be made more conspicuous. 283-49(A) to 283-50(D), even when the specific display start effect A is executed, the flash effect at the time of winning is started from the timing before the start of display of the pending display. Since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attack lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light, the winning flash effect can be made more conspicuous.

Further, the execution period of the specific display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, and the execution period of the specific display display start effect B is 1.2 seconds. As shown in FIG. 283-50(D), since the winning flash effect starts before the end timing of the specific display start effect A, the display pattern of the pending display is any one of the display patterns α to γ. Even so, since the win-time flash performance can be started before the specific display display start performance ends, the player can surely recognize the pending display targeted for the win-time flash performance.

Also, as shown in Figure 283-28, Figure 283-29 (A), Figure 283-29 (B), Figure 283-49 (A), and Figure 283-49 (B), when winning based on the start winning When it is decided to execute the flash effect, the player turns off the winning flash effect lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d once to turn off the winning flash effect. recognizable.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, when it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start winning, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attack lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are once turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame The lamp 9b, the attack lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light at a luminance lower than the previous luminance (for example, if the luminance was C2 until then, C3 is lower than the luminance C2). You can change it. In other words, the ``low luminance state'' in the present invention includes a state in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light with low luminance, and in addition to the state in which they are turned off. It also includes a state in which the light is on (a state in which light is not emitted).

Also, as shown in FIGS. 283-29(A) to 283-48(n) and FIGS. 283-49(A) to 283-68(n), the notice effect is being executed during the variable display. Winning flash effect can be executed depending on whether or not it is being executed, and speakers 8L and 8R execute the winning flash effect during execution of the variable display as shown in FIG. 283-29(B). When doing so, the sound corresponding to the variable display is output at the volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at the volume V1 (V1>V2), and when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed during the execution of the notice effect, The sound corresponding to the advance notice performance is output at the volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is output at the volume V1 (V1>V2). Therefore, even if the sound corresponding to the variable display or the sound corresponding to the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning can be output so that the player can easily hear the flash effect at the time of winning. By outputting the corresponding sound, the player can easily recognize the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning.

In this feature part 135SG, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output with priority over the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is set to volume V1 from the speakers 8L and 8R. , and the sound corresponding to the announcement effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are output at the volume V2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is the sound corresponding to the announcement effect. As a form of outputting with priority over the sound corresponding to the variable display, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at volume V2, and the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are output at a volume lower than V2. (For example, volume V3) may be output.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, an example has been exemplified in which the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output with priority over the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display body, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not necessary to output the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning with priority over the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display body. Specifically, when the advance notice effect is started during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning or the sound corresponding to the variable display is being output from the speakers 8L and 8R), the winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is performed. Output of the sound corresponding to the hour flash effect may be temporarily stopped and only the sound corresponding to the variable display and the sound corresponding to the notice effect may be output, or only one of the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the change display may be output. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the player's difficulty in hearing the sound corresponding to the announcement effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display due to the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning.

Also, as shown in Figure 283-28, Figure 283-29 (A) to Figure 283-32 (H), Figure 283-49 (A) to Figure 283-50 (D), when winning according to the start winning When execution of the flash effect is determined, after the winning flash effect corresponding sound is started to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started and the appearance animation of the pending display is completed. Therefore, by outputting the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize that the occurrence of the start winning and the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is decided, so that the interest in the game is improved. can.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, after the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is started to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, blinking of the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F is started and the appearance animation of the pending display is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is started to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the pending display animation are started. You may do so.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 283-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning is blinked at the brightness C1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the second prize, the flash at the time of the prize is flashed. By blinking the winning lamp 135SG009F at a luminance C2 (C1>C2), at least the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at a luminance C1 so that the player can recognize the start of the winning flash effect. It is possible to prevent the lamp 135SG009F for flashing at the time of winning from flickering at the brightness C1 even during the execution period of the flashing at the time of winning the latter period, which hinders other performances and lowers the interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 283-28, in this characterizing section 135SG, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the period T2 as the first winning flash effect, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes as the latter winning flash effect. is blinked at a luminance C2 that is lower than the luminance C1 and a period T2 that is longer than the period T1 as a "specific form with a low degree of emphasis". In other words, the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the late winning flash effect of the characteristic portion 135SG is a low-speed flashing mode with a low degree of emphasis due to the slow flashing speed (long flashing cycle). and a low luminance mode in which the degree of emphasis is low due to the low luminance. Only one of the low-speed flashing mode and the low-brightness mode may be used as the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the lamp 135SG009F.

Also, as shown in FIG. 283-28, the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning is the period in which the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, and the period during which the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. Since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2 throughout the start of the variable display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, the target It becomes easy for the player to recognize that the display is variable, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 283-28, the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, and displays the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, so that the player can recognize the start of the flash effect at the time of winning. During the execution period of the flash performance at the time of the late prize winning, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 so that the image display device 5 continues to display the effect image 135SG005E, thereby hindering other displays and enhancing the enjoyment of the game. decrease can be suppressed.

In particular, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the effect image 135SG005E is brighter than the silhouette image 135SG005S, as shown in FIGS. Since the effect image 135SG005E is displayed in color and the display area of the image display device 5 is wide, the player can effectively recognize the start of the winning flash effect by displaying the effect image 135SG005E.

Also, as shown in FIG. 283-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the prize is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V1, and during the period of execution of the flash effect at the time of the second prize. Then, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8l and 8R at a volume V2 (V1>V2). In this way, by outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect at the volume V1 as the winning flash effect, the player can easily recognize that the winning flash effect has started. At the same time, during the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning in the latter period, the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is output at the volume V2, thereby preventing the deterioration of the game interest due to the other performance being hindered by the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning. can be suppressed.

In this characteristic part 135SG, during execution of the flash effect at the time of the latter period, by outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2, other effects are hindered by the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning. Although the mode for suppressing the decline in game interest has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and by not outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, other effects will be performed at the time of winning. It is also possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game due to being hindered by the sound corresponding to the flash effect.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 283-29(A) to 283-48(n), during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, before the start of the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning During the symbol determination period of the variable display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues blinking, that is, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol determination command (the determination command reception flag is set) or not, or variable Regardless of whether the display time timer has timed out or not, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is continuously flashed even during the pattern fixing period, thereby preventing the player from being controlled to the jackpot game state. The sense of anticipation can be accurately maintained until the start of the variable display, which is the object of the flash performance at the time of winning, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, as the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are set in accordance with the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term (brightness C1 and period T1), and after the end of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning is turned on as the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term according to the flash effect at the time of winning (luminance C2 and cycle T2). ), while the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are caused to emit light in a manner (luminance C2 and period T0) corresponding to the background image, but the present invention has been exemplified. is not limited to this, the effect control CPU 120 clears the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous term at the timing when the flash effect at the time of the previous term ends, so that during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the latter term It may be possible to prevent the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d from emitting light in accordance with the previous winning flash effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 283-3, a small pattern 135SG005M is arranged at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. During the period, the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped, so even if the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to emit light during the pattern fixing period, the small pattern 135SG005M is derived in combination indicating a failure. Since it is displayed, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is during the pattern fixing period.

Further, as shown in FIG. 283-33(J) and the like, during execution of the winning flash effect, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small Since the symbol 135SG005M is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, the overlapping display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the small symbol 135SG005M makes it difficult for the player to recognize the end of the variable display. You can prevent it from slipping.

Further, in this characteristic portion 135SG, it is possible to execute a pseudo-continuous effect including temporary stop and re-variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 during the variable display, and variable display during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning. In the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, when the decorative pattern temporarily stops, the special pattern (see Fig. 283-40 etc.) that stops in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C is a silhouette as a flash effect at the time of winning Since the image 135SG005S can be displayed in an overlapping manner, the special pattern is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 283-28 and 283-42(a) to 283-47(l), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the object of the flash effect when winning, and the interest of the variable display which is the object of the flash effect when winning is improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 283-28, during the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C2 and the period T2 before the start of the ready-to-win effect. At the start timing, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and as shown in FIG. If it is not possible, at the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the pattern confirmation command), which is the timing after the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, the flash effect at the time of winning including the flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning again. is ended, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect does not end at the start timing of the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 283-22, when the effect control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is time to start the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the effect target due to the generation of static electricity, etc., the effect control CPU 120 confirms the pattern. Since the flash effect at the time of winning is ended based on the reception of the command, it is possible to further reduce the sense of incongruity at the time of ending the emission of the flash effect at the time of winning 135SG009F as the flash effect at the time of winning.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 283-21, when the start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is not decided, so the ready-to-win effect of super to reach. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 283-17, in this characteristic portion 135SG, the pending display or active display can be displayed in any one of the display patterns α to display patterns γ that differ in the degree of expectation of a big hit, and as shown in FIG. As shown, when it is decided to display the pending display or the active display in the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S flashes the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect or the game effect. Regardless of the light emission mode of the lamps 9 and the like, the light is emitted in a color corresponding to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ from the occurrence of the starting winning to the end of the variable display based on the starting winning. can also be recognized by the light emitting mode (light emitting color) of the starting port lamp 135SG009S, so the amusement of the game can be improved.

The features of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these features, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. be

For example, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the characterizing part 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is during the pattern fixing period (while the variable display is stopped) or not, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 283-69 to 283-89 as a modified example 135SG-1, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the light emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the silhouette The display of the image 135SG005S and the like may not be executed during the design determination period.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 283-69 and 283-70 (A), during the execution of the variable display, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the speakers 8L, 8R , the sound corresponding to the variable display is output at volume V2. In addition, while the variable display is being executed, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes at the cycle T0 corresponding to the variable display (Figs. Blinking in the mode shown in (D)) is controlled.

Further, during execution of the variable display, during the execution period of the notice effect, an image corresponding to the effect pattern of the notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound corresponding to the production pattern (sound corresponding to the advance notice production) is output at volume V2. In addition, as reserved memory, there are three first special figure reserved memories (three reserved indications are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

During such a variable display, if a prize is awarded to the first start port (start prize), and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start prize, FIG. As shown in 283-69 and FIG. 283-70(B), the flash effect at the time of the previous winning is started.

As the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term, first, as shown in FIGS. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are once turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 283-69, 283-71(C), and 283-71(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed from around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the period T1. In the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Also, when the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. , an animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F which is controlled to blink, and an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. Then, after the character A has moved to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D is displayed (in the case of this modification 135SG-1, the fourth An animation that attacks (acts) against the position where the display of the pending display of is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the pending display, which is the object of the winning flash effect (previous winning flash effect) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the acted position. Appearance animation is displayed (see FIGS. 283-20 (D-1) to 283-20 (D-5)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

That is, in this modification 135SG-1, when a start winning occurs during the variable display, and execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning, from the completion of display of the pending display based on the starting win. First, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. In addition, the appearance animation of the reserved display (specific display) accompanying the execution of the specific display start effect B in this modification 135SG-1 is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the late prize (Fig. 283-73 (G) and See Figure 283-73(H)).

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the later stage, as shown in FIGS. At the time of winning, the flash lamp 135SG009F blinks with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 (cycle T2>cycle T1), and the game effect lamp 9 except the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y blinks with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2. Blinking (blinking in the manner shown in FIGS. 283-27(A) to 283-27(D)), the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 at regular intervals starts to be displayed.

The blinking of the game effect lamps 9 other than the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 is determined according to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image, gradation in bluish colors, gradation in reddish colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1, but is shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 283-74(I) and 283-74(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is excluded. A silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which a black image 135SG005B having transparency is displayed in an overlapping manner over the entirety of one display area 135SG005F.

As shown in FIGS. 283-74 (J), 283-75 (K) and 283-75 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design confirmation command, the image display device 5 The symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Then, as shown in FIGS. 283-69, 283-76 (M) and 283-76 (N), during the pattern fixing period from the end timing of the variable display to the start timing of the next variable display, the latter The output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the winning flash effect and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are stopped, and the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b and the attacker lamp 9c are movable. Only the flashing of the body lamp 9d in accordance with the background image displayed on the image display device 5 continues.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 283-75(K) to 283-82(Z), in the variable display before the variable display which is the target of the winning flash effect, the speaker 8L as the late winning flash effect, While the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from 8R at volume V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F with brightness C2 and period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed, During the design fixing period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is output at the volume V2 as the flash effect at the time of winning, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning flashes with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image is displayed. The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the device 5 is never executed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 283-79 (S) to 283-81 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (FIG. 283-81 ( W) In this variation 135SG-1, the decorative patterns showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative design display areas 5L and 5R, and the special design that notifies the temporary stop in the middle decorative design display area 5C. is temporarily stopped), as a flash effect for the late winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect for winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is output at a volume V2, the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize flashes with a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and an image is displayed. Display of silhouette image 135SG005S on device 5 is executed.

In FIG. 283-81(W), during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. Although the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 is not executed, depending on the timing of the temporary stop, even during the temporary stop of the decoration pattern, the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning blinking is executed. In other words, in the modification 135SG-1, for the variable display preceding the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash effect is continuously executed during the temporary stop period of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 283-82 (Y) and 283-82 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is lost according to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the image display device 5 displays the decorative pattern and the small The symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is also executed during the pattern fixing period of the variable display that is out of normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 283-82 (Y) and 283-82 (Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed while the black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the image display device 5 even during the design determination period. At the same time, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 283-81 (W) and 283-81 (X), while the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop. Therefore, the player can recognize that the variable display is not finished yet by visually recognizing the variable display of the small pattern 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 283-83(a) and 283-83(b), when the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. A pending display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIGS. 283-84(c) to 283-88(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period is continuously executed. Also, during the variable display, there are cases where the advance notice effect is executed (see FIGS. 283-84(d) and 283-85(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 283-86(g) to 283-87(j). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period in which the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 283-87 (j)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 283-89 (m) and 283-89 (n), when it is time to start the reach effect due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 After 135SG005F is once whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white), the ready-to-win effect is started. It should be noted that, in this modified example 135SG-1, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the white-out timing, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F blinks with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends. On the other hand, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, and the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 except for the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the period T0 are continued.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 283-69, when the start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and the execution of the holding display notice effect is determined based on the start winning, the starting entrance lamp light emission effect is used. From the timing of the starting prize, the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S changes color according to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect (for example, if the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern β, it is blue, and the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern γ). red) to start emitting light.

The light emission of the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the above-described winning flash effect. Light emission in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is continued from the time of winning to the end of the target variable display of the starting port lamp light emission effect (the target variable display of the flash effect at the time of winning).

As described above, in the modification 135SG-1, when the winning flash effect is started based on the start winning, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is stopped as the late winning flash effect during the symbol fixing period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable display is being executed by continuously turning on the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the late winning flash effect during the pattern fixing period. ing. Furthermore, during the temporary stop period of the variable display decoration pattern which is the target of the winning flash effect and the temporary stop period of the variable display decorative pattern which is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is provided. By continuing the blinking of the brightness C2 and the period T2, it is possible to prevent the game from erroneously recognizing that the variable display has ended even though the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped.

In this modified example 135SG-1, during the pattern fixing period during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output, the flash effect at the time of winning of the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning 135SG009F, the flash effect at the time of winning, and the silhouette Although the form of stopping the display of the image 135SG005S is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the player is executing the variable display during the symbol fixing period during the execution period of the flash effect for the late winning. If it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that it is, any one of the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash effect at the time of winning of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S Or you may make it perform only two.

Furthermore, in this modification 135SG-1, during the period during which the flash effect for the late winning is executed, the sound corresponding to the flash effect for the winning is output as the flash effect for the late winning, the light emission of the flash lamp for winning the prize 135SG009F, and the silhouette. Although the embodiment in which the image 135SG005S is not displayed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning flash as the late winning flash effect is executed during the symbol fixing period during the execution period of the late winning flash effect. As a form of not executing the output of the sound corresponding to the effect, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc., for example, the effect control CPU 120 receives the pattern confirmation command during execution of the late winning flash effect. Based on this, by clearing the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning, during the pattern fixing period, the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning as the flash performance at the time of winning is output, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning is emitted, The silhouette image 135SG005S may not be displayed.

In this case, the effect control CP 120 again selects the flash effect process table for the late winning and resets and starts the process timer for the flash effect for the late winning, based on the reception of the first variable display start command. By doing so, the late winning flash effect (output of sound corresponding to winning flash effect, emission of winning flash lamp 135SG009F, display of silhouette image 135SG005S) may be started in response to the start of a new variable display.

In addition, as a mode in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the late winning flash effect is not executed during the pattern fixing period during the execution period of the late winning flash effect, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to perform the late winning flash effect. Based on the reception of the pattern confirmation command during execution of the effect, the lighting control data corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning is not sent to the lamp control board 14, but the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F. Lighting control data for maintaining light-off (for example, "0:0:0" indicating light-off as RGB values of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F) may be continuously output until a variable display start command is received. .

In addition, if the late winning flash effect is not executed during the pattern fixing period, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect will be output again from the start timing of the new variable display, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the silhouette image will be performed. The display of 135SG005S may be re-executed from the beginning of each cycle (see FIG. 283-69), or from the start timing of the new variable display, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S may be restarted from the middle of each cycle.

In addition, in this variation 135SG-1, if the variable display ends during the execution of the flash effect for the late winning, during the pattern fixing period of the variable display, the flash effect for the late winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is displayed. While the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning and the display of the silhouette image 235SG005S are stopped, according to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d However, the present invention is not limited to this. Blinking may also stop. In particular, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d stop blinking during the design confirmation period. The body lamp 9d may be turned off, or the in-lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d may be turned off in a certain color (for example, the background displayed on the image display device 5) during the design fixing period. The color corresponding to the image) may be maintained in a continuously lit state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as the explanation of FIG. 283-8, it is described that a plurality of ready-to-reach effects may be provided as a ready-to-reach effect of super reach. is provided, the hit expectations are different between the reach effects of a plurality of super reach (for example, as the reach effects of super reach, the reach effect of super reach α and the reach effect of the super reach α). A reach effect with a high super reach β may be provided).

Especially in this way, when it is possible to execute a plurality of super reach performances with different jackpot expectations, as shown in FIGS. , the movable body 32 can be moved between a retracted position (e.g., an upper position of the image display device 5) and an effect position (e.g., a center front position when viewed from the front of the image display device 5), and a winning flash effect. If the target variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach α (variable display for executing a reach effect of super reach α), the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 during the variable display is By repeatedly moving the movable body 32 between the retracted position and the retracted position (for example, the intermediate position between the retracted position and the rendering position) during the period when the first display area 135SG005F except for the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, the movable body 32 Executes a movable body action suggestive effect that suggests moving to the effect position, and the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach β (Super Reach β reach effect is executed variable display), the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is temporarily whited out. A movable body motion presentation may be executed to move from the position to the presentation position.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the action of the movable body 32 during the whiteout period, and when the movable body 32 moves to the presentation position (when the movable body action presentation is executed). can inform the player that the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win β, which has a higher expectation for big hit than the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win α, will be executed by the movable body operation performance, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, if the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach α, as shown in FIGS. When the variable display is started, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. In addition, in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period is continuously executed. Further, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 283-91(B), 283-92(C), and 283-92(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (Figs. 283-93(E) to 283-94(H). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period in which the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIGS. 283-94 (H)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 283-95 (I) to 283-96 (L), when the ready-to-win effect is started due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F is temporarily whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white). It should be noted that, in this modified example 135SG-2, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIGS. 283-90 (A) and FIGS. 283-96 (K) to 283-97 (N), during the white-out period, at the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 ends. Then, as the movable body motion suggesting effect, the movable body motion suggesting effect is based on the fact that the movable body 32 is repeatedly reciprocated between the retracted position and the suggested position by a drive mechanism (not shown) a predetermined number of times (four reciprocations in this modification 135SG-2). ends, the white-out period also ends. In addition, during the execution period of the movable body motion suggesting effect, the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggesting effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 instead of the sound corresponding to the variable display. As the sound corresponding to the effect suggesting the movement of the movable body, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "rattling") that enables the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retracted position and the suggesting position ), etc., should be output.

As shown in FIGS. 283-90(A), 283-98(O) and 283-98(P), from the timing when the movable body motion suggesting effect and the whiteout are completed, the image display device 5 starts superimposing Along with the start of the ready-to-win effect of reach α, lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts with the brightness C1 corresponding to the ready-to-win effect. Then, from the speakers 8L and 8R, the output of the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound (BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound) corresponding to the ready-to-win effect of the super reach α is started.

In addition, when the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of super reach β, as shown in FIGS. When the variable display is started, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. In addition, in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period is continuously executed. Furthermore, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 283-99(B), 283-100(C), and 283-100(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (Figs. 283-101(E) to 283-102(H). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period in which the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 283-102 (H)), the flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is displayed as the late winning flash effect. Output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2, blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with brightness C2 and period T2, and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are executed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 283-103(I) to 283-104(L), when the ready-to-win effect is started due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area of the image display device 5 excluding the active display area 135SG005A 135SG005F is temporarily whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white). It should be noted that, in this modified example 135SG-2, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIGS. 283-90(B) and FIGS. 283-104(K) to 283-105(N), during the white-out period, at the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 ends. Then, as the movable body motion suggesting effect, the movable body motion is suggested based on the fact that the movable body 32 is repeatedly reciprocated a predetermined number of times (four reciprocations in this modification 135SG-2) between the retracted position and the suggested position by a drive mechanism (not shown). The performance ends. In addition, during the execution period of the movable body action suggesting effect, the sound corresponding to the movable body action suggesting effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 instead of the sound corresponding to the variable display. As the sound corresponding to the effect suggesting the action of the movable body, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "rattling") that enables the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retracted position and the suggesting position ), etc., should be output.

After the movable body motion suggesting rendering ends, as shown in FIGS. 283-90(B) and FIGS. , the movable body 32 is moved from the retracted position to the performance position by a drive mechanism (not shown). It should be noted that during the period of the movable body motion presentation, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are set at the brightness C1 according to the movable body motion presentation. Light. Although not shown in FIG. 283-90(B), the speakers 8L and 8R output the sound corresponding to the motion effect of the movable body at volume V1 (see FIG. 283-106(P)). As the sound corresponding to the motion of the movable body in the characterizing portion 135SG, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "boom") that enables the player to recognize that the movable body has moved may be output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 283-107(Q), the movable body action rendering ends when the movable body 32 returns from the rendering position to the retracted position. As shown in FIGS. 283-90(B), 283-107(Q), and 283-107(R), from the timing when the movable body motion effect and the whiteout are completed, the image display device 5 starts super reach. At the same time that the ready-to-win effect of β is started, lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F with the luminance C1 corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is started. , the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting a ready-to-win effect corresponding sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect of the super reach [beta]. As the reach effect corresponding sound corresponding to the reach effect of super reach β, a variable display corresponding sound and the reach effect of super reach α are used so that the player can recognize that the reach effect of super reach β is being executed. BGM or the like that is different from the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound corresponding to the effect may be output.

As described above, in the present modification 135SG-2, in the variable display of super ready-to-win, which is the object of the flash effect for winning, the lamp for flash for winning 135SG009F is set to brightness C2 and period T2 before the start of the ready-to-win effect for super ready-to-win. , and from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit with the brightness C2. Since light is emitted (lighting with luminance C2) in a manner corresponding to the ready-to-win effect instead of blinking at the cycle T2, the game interest of the ready-to-win effect can be improved.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 283-96(K) to 283-98(O) and FIGS. In addition, during the white-out period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is extinguished, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit at the brightness C2 from the subsequent start timing of the reach performance of the super reach. Since it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the change in the light emission mode of the lamp 135SG009F, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, when the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach β, the movable body motion suggesting effect is executed during the whiteout period, and the movable body motion suggesting effect is executed. Then, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off in response to the execution of the movable body action effect (moving the movable body 32 to the effect position). It lights up with the brightness C1 in a corresponding manner. In other words, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at the brightness C1 after turning off due to the execution of the movable body motion suggesting effect, so that the change in the light emission mode does not give the player a sense of incongruity. Since this can be prevented, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 135SG, a form in which the dialogue announcement effect can be executed as an announcement effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit during the variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , As a modification 135SG-3, as the notice effect, in addition to the dialogue notice effect, the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes step by step, and a big hit is expected according to the final number of change steps. A step-up effect with different degrees, a group announcement effect in which a group of characters crosses the image display device 5, or the like may be executed.

In particular, when the step-up effect can be executed as the modification 135SG-3, as shown in FIGS. When the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect is not executed, the timing for displaying the image (step-up image) on the image display device 5 or the timing for changing the image step by step is used for the winning flash. By temporarily lighting the lamp 135SG009F with the brightness C2, the effect of the step-up effect may be enhanced. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 283-108(B), 283-114(A) to 283-118(F), the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the winning flash effect is being executed. At this time, since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has already flashed with the brightness C2 and the period T2, the timing for displaying an image (step-up image) on the image display device 5 and the image are changed step by step. The winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not turned on at the timing, that is, during the execution of the winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is already emitting light in a manner corresponding to the winning flash performance, is turned on according to the step-up performance. You may make it not emit light in the mode.

As described above, in the modification 135SG-3, when the step-up effect is started in the variable display during execution of the flash effect for winning, that is, the lamp for flash for winning 135SG009F has the brightness C2 as the flash effect for winning. In addition, when the step-up effect of turning on the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started in the state of blinking at the cycle T2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F from starting lighting in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect from inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the win-time flash effect.

Further, in the characterizing part 135SG, the movable body 32 is not operated before the start of the ready-to-win effect of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. 2, the movable body motion rendering can be executed to move the movable body 32 from the retracted position (eg, the upper position of the image display device 5) to the rendering position (eg, the center front position in the front view of the image display device 5). By doing so, the player may be notified that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed.

In this way, when the movable body action effect can be executed before the reach effect of super reach, as shown in FIGS. When the winning flash effect is executed for the variable display of the super reach, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit may differ depending on which of the light emission modes according to the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is changed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 283-119(C), when the variable display result of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is a big hit, at the start of the variable display, 70% of the movable body It is decided to change the light emission mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize from the mode corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning to the light emission mode corresponding to the motion representation of the movable body from the operation performance start timing, and the ready-to-win performance is started at a rate of 30%. From the timing, it is determined to change the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect. Then, if the variable display result of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is a failure, at the start of the variable display, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F is displayed at a rate of 30% from the start timing of the movable body operation effect. It is decided to change the light emission mode from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body motion effect, and the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed at a rate of 70% from the ready-to-win effect start timing. is changed from a mode corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning to a light emission mode corresponding to the ready-to-win performance.

In addition, if it is decided to change the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect or the light emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, the decision is made. and control the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer according to the progress of the variable display.

As described above, in the present modification 135SG-4, depending on the timing of ending the lighting mode corresponding to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the execution period of the movable body motion effect is Since there is a case where the ready-to-win ready-to-win effect is executed, the game determines whether the end timing of the winning flash effect is during the moving body action effect or during the super-ready-to-win ready-to-win effect. easy for people to recognize. In particular, as shown in FIG. 283-119(C), the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode according to the winning flash effect to the start timing of the movable body motion effect according to the movable body motion effect. Since the degree of expectation for a big hit is different between the light emission mode and the light emission mode according to the ready-to-win performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the end timing of the flash performance at the time of winning. It is possible to improve the amusement interest of the game.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-4, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends (the light emitting mode changes to the light emitting mode according to the movable body operation effect or the light emitting mode according to the ready-to-win effect) timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and according to the timing at which the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends, the pachinko game The setting value set in the machine 1 may be suggested. By doing so, it is also possible to draw the player's attention to the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-4, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F emits light either at the start of the movable body action effect during the variable display that is the target of the win-time flash effect or at the start of the ready-to-win effect of super reach. The mode can be changed, and the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode according to the movable body motion effect from the start timing of the movable body motion effect. Since the degree of expectation for a big win differs between the start timing of the ready-to-win performance and the light emission mode corresponding to the ready-to-win performance, the player pays attention to the performance executed at the timing when the light-emitting mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F changes at the time of winning. It is possible to make it possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-4, in the super reach variable display, the movable body action effect can be executed before the start of the reach effect of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, before the execution of the movable body motion rendering, a movable body motion suggesting rendering that suggests the execution of the movable body motion rendering may be executed. In this way, when the movable body action suggesting effect can be executed before the execution of the movable body action effect, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the movable body motion suggesting effect. A case is provided in which the light emission mode is changed from the start timing of the performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the motion suggesting motion of the movable body, and the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the flash motion motion suggesting motion of the winning prize. The degree of expectation for a big win may be different between the case of setting the light emission mode according to the movable body operation suggesting performance from the start timing and the case of setting the light emission mode according to the ready-to-win performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect executed when the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in this modification 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission corresponding to the movable body motion suggesting effect from the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect. A mode is exemplified in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is different between the case of the mode and the case of the light emission mode according to the ready-to-win effect from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prize is won. The light emission (blinking) of the hour flash lamp 135SG009F is terminated at the start timing of the movable body operation suggesting presentation and at the start timing of the ready-to-win presentation, and at which timing the light emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of prize winning is provided. The degree of expectation for a big hit may differ depending on whether the game ends with . In this way, even if a plurality of timings are provided for stopping the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect during the variable display of 1, the effect control CPU 120 may not flash the winning flash due to the generation of static electricity or the like. If the flashing of the flashing lamp 135SG009F cannot be stopped, the late winning including the flashing of the flashing lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning again at the end timing of the variable display (the timing of receiving the pattern confirmation command), which is the timing after these timings It suffices to end the time flash effect.

By doing so, even when the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect cannot be finished at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect or the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, the winning flash effect can be performed. At the end timing of the target variable display, the late winning flash effect including blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be ended.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as the display patterns of the specific display (holding display and active display), the display pattern α having the lowest big-hit expectation is a white circle, and the big-hit expectation is higher than the display pattern α and is blue. and a red circular display pattern γ with a higher expectation of a big hit than the display pattern β, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific display As the display pattern, a display pattern other than these display patterns α to γ may be provided.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 283-120 as modification 135SG-5, as the display pattern of the specific display, in addition to the above-described display pattern α to display pattern γ, either display as pending display or active display (Expectation of change to display pattern β or display pattern γ: low) Display pattern δ, which is a round shape with flashing white, can be changed to display pattern β or display pattern γ at the timing of , as a pending display or active display is more likely than display pattern δ to change to display pattern β or display pattern γ at any time during the display of a specific character-shaped circle display pattern ε may be provided.

That is, as the display patterns of the pending display and the active display in the modification 135SG-5, for the display pattern α to the display pattern γ, the display pattern γ (red display) has the highest expectation for a big hit, and the display pattern α (white display ) is set to have the lowest jackpot expectation. On the other hand, with respect to the degree of expectation of a big win for the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε when the display pattern β and the display pattern γ do not change, the degree of expectation for a big win may be set lower than that of the display pattern α. The degree of expectation for a big hit may also be set to be high and lower than that of the display pattern β.

In addition, in the modification 135SG-5, the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, which can change to the display pattern β and the display pattern γ, are provided as the display patterns for the pending display and the active display. The display pattern α may also be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a lower rate than the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε. Furthermore, the suspended display and active display of the display pattern β may also be changed to the display pattern γ.

Further, the characterizing section 135SG determines whether or not to execute a pending display notice effect (a display pattern β or a display pattern β for displaying a pending display or an active display) and the display pattern, and determines whether to execute a winning flash effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. may decide.

For example, as shown in FIG. 283-120 as the above-mentioned modification 135SG-5, when it is determined to execute the flash effect at the time of winning based on the time of starting winning, as a display mode of pending display or active display based on the starting winning , the display pattern ε is determined at the highest rate, the display pattern δ is determined at a rate lower than the display pattern ε, the display pattern γ is determined at a rate lower than the display pattern δ, and the display pattern β is determined from the display pattern γ is determined at the lowest rate, and the display pattern α is determined at the lowest rate. Display pattern α).

As described above, display patterns α to ε are provided as display modes of specific displays (suspended display and active display), and when specific displays are displayed in display pattern δ and display pattern ε, the specific display is displayed. Since the ratio of execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is higher than in the case of display in the pattern β or the display pattern γ, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning can draw the player's attention to the specific display and the specific display. Since the player can also be made to pay attention to whether the display changes from the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, the display pattern α is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a white circle, the display pattern β is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a blue circle, and the display pattern γ is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a red circle. Since the display pattern and the display pattern δ are display patterns in which the specific display is displayed in a circle that blinks in white, the player can easily identify the difference in the specific display by the display color and blinking mode.

In this modification 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display is changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern depending on whether or not the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. Although the rate of change to the pattern γ is not described, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, flash effects are displayed at the time of winning. The rate at which the display pattern of the specific display changes to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ may differ depending on whether or not it is executed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, so that the interest in the game is improved. can.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-5, as a special mode of the specific display in the present invention, the display pattern δ blinking in white was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific display in the present invention. The special mode (display pattern δ) may be a color (for example, purple, black, etc.) other than white, blue, and red, which are the normal mode and special mode of the specific display in the present invention.

Further, in the modification 135SG-5, by displaying the specific display in the display pattern δ, the specific display is exemplified to change to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. The present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to execute an action effect that can change the specific display to the display pattern β or γ by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ. .

In particular, in the case of action effects, as the effect effects, a plurality of effects modes ( For example, a first effect effect that can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ, and an effect in which the effect mode is different from the first effect effect effect A second action effect that can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first effect effect by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ is provided. When the second effect performance is executed, the win-time flash performance may be executed at a higher rate than when the first effect performance is executed.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the action effect is executed as the first effect effect or the second effect effect. It is possible to heighten expectations for execution in action presentation.

In addition, in the present modification 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the ratio of execution of the win-time flash effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ. is high, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε and the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the change of the display pattern of the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ will cause the player to be dissuaded. Since it is possible to make the player pay attention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, in the modified example 135SG-5, a display pattern ε for displaying a character is provided as a display pattern of the specific display (suspended display and active display), and an action effect is executed for the character as the specific display. , the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display pattern of the specific display may be changed to the display pattern β or γ as a result of acting on another character.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 283-121 (A) and 283-121 (B), when the number of the first special figure pending memory is 3 and the display is variable, the first starting port is won When (start winning) occurs and the display pattern of the hold display based on the start win is determined as the display pattern ε as a hold display notice effect based on the start win, the fourth display pattern ε of the first hold memory display area 135SG005D is displayed. 283-121(B-1), the active display displayed in the active display area 135SG005A changes to the enemy character.

In this state, the variable display is terminated and a new variable display is started, that is, as shown in FIGS. When the friendly character (suspended display of the display pattern ε) moves from the display position of the fourth reserved display to the display position of the third reserved display, the friendly character is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. act (shoot) against

Next, every time the variable display ends and a new variable display is started, that is, as shown in FIGS. 283-122(C) and 283-122(D), the When the friendly character displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the third reserved display to the display position of the second reserved display, the friendly character displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D When moving from the display position of the display to the display position of the first hold display, the ally character acts (shoots) on the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A.

Furthermore, when the variable display ends and the variable display that is the target of the pending display notice effect is started, the ally character displayed at the display position of the first pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed in the active state. It moves to the area 135SG005A, and the ally character directly acts on the enemy character in the active display area 135SG005A (a battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character is executed).

Then, as shown in FIGS. 283-123(G) and 283-123(H), when the friendly character wins as a result of the battle effect, the friendly character is displayed in the display pattern β or the active display area 135SG005A. It changes to the active display of the display pattern γ. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 283-123(I) and 283-123(J), when the friendly character is defeated as a result of the battle effect, the display pattern of the enemy character or the friendly character is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. Change to the active display of α.

In this modification 135SG-6, when the pending display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the friendly character as the pending display of the display pattern ε defeats the enemy character in the active display area 135SG005A, thereby causing the active display to occur. Although the display pattern β and display pattern γ can be changed to the active display of the friendly character, the present invention is not limited to this. By defeating the enemy character while the hold display is displayed in the first hold display area 135SG005D, the friend character as the hold display may be changed to the hold display of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ.

Further, when the pending display is displayed by the display pattern ε, the pending display of the display pattern ε is higher in the case where the winning flash effect is executed than in the case where the winning flash effect is not executed. may be changed to the suspended display (or active display) of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. By doing so, it is possible not only to draw the player's attention to the result of the battle between the ally character and the enemy character as the pending display of the display pattern ε, but also to execute the winning flash effect during the execution of the battle. Since it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the player is present, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the modification 135SG-5 and the modification 135SG-6, the display patterns of the pending display and the active display are the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε in the display pattern α to the display pattern γ described in the characteristic portion 135SG. is added, but when the pending display and the active display are displayed in these display patterns δ and ε, it is the same as when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display patterns α to γ. Then, the specific display display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B may be executed.

More specifically, when the pending display or the active display is displayed with the display pattern δ, the specific display display start effect A (see FIG. 283-19) is executed as in the case of the display pattern α, and the pending display or the active display is executed. is displayed in the display pattern ε, as in the case of the display pattern β and the display pattern γ, the specific display display start effect B (see FIG. 283-20) or the period during which the display of the pending display or the active display is completed is specified. A specific display start effect longer than the display start effect A and shorter than the specific display display start effect B may be executed. By doing so, when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, similar to the characteristic portion 135SG, the timing before the display of the pending display and the active display is completed. , the winning flash effect sound and the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F are recognized by the player.

In addition, in the characterizing section 135SG, as an example of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 135SG-7, the display mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 may be changed stepwise according to the progress of the winning flash effect.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 283-124 (A) and 283-124 (B), the winning prize to the first start port during variable display in a state where there are three first special figure pending memories ( When a start winning) occurs, and execution of the pending display notice effect and execution of the win flash effect are determined based on the start win, as shown in FIG. The performance begins.

First, as shown in FIG. 283-124 (B), as the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is started at a volume V1 (V1>V2). , the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are turned off once. Then, as shown in FIGS. 283-125(C) and 283-125(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5, and the winning flash Flashing control of the control lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the period T1. In the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Also, when the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. , an animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F which is controlled to blink, and an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. After the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the reserved display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D (in the case of this feature part 135SG, the fourth reserved An animation that attacks (acts) against the position where the display is displayed is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the pending display, which is the object of the winning flash effect (previous winning flash effect) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the acted position. Appearance animation is displayed (see FIGS. 283-20 (D-1) to 283-20 (D-5)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the late winning flash effect, as shown in FIGS. 283-127 (G) and 283-127 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is started at volume V2. , Blinking at brightness C2 and cycle T2 (cycle T2 > cycle T1) of flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize, brightness C2 and blinking at cycle T2 of game effect lamp 9 excluding stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y (Fig. 283- 27(A) to FIG. 283-27(D)), the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 starts to be displayed at regular intervals. be.

The blinking of the game effect lamps 9 other than the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 is determined according to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image, gradation in bluish colors, gradation in reddish colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1, but is shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 283-128(I) and 283-128(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is excluded. A silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which a black image 135SG005B having transparency is displayed in an overlapping manner over the entirety of one display area 135SG005F.

As shown in FIGS. 283-128 (J), 283-129 (K) and 283-129 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design determination command, the image display device 5 displays the decorative design and the small display. The symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period in this modified example 135SG-7 is executed regardless of whether it is the symbol fixing period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 283-128(J), the black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the image display device 5 and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even during the design confirmation period, and the speakers 8L and 8R output the silhouette image 135SG005S. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at the volume V2.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

In the variable display, as shown in FIGS. 283-129(K) and 283-129(L), the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed together with the black image 135SG005B on the image display device 5 is larger than the previous variable display. may be displayed. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S larger than the previous variable display in this manner, the silhouette image is displayed in an overlapping manner in the active display area 135SG005A.

As shown in FIGS. 283-130 (M) and 283-130 (N), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design determination command, the image display device 5 displays a combination of the decorative design and the small design 135SG005M indicating a failure. Along with the derived display (displayed with the variable display stopped), the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Even during the symbol fixation period, the flash effect at the time of the latter winning is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 283-130(N), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B overlappingly displayed on the image display device 5 even during the pattern fixing period. In particular, the silhouette image 135SG005S is also displayed overlapping the active display area 135SG005A. Also, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2.

In this modification 135SG-7, one of two silhouette images 135SG005S having different sizes can be displayed as the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning, and a silhouette of a large size can be displayed. When the image 135SG005S is displayed, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A are overlapped and displayed as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a large size silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed. and the active display area 135SG005A may be displayed in an overlapping manner only when the variable display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, is executed. By doing so, the player can easily recognize the variable display corresponding to the flash effect when winning, and the active display area 135SG005A, that is, the active display corresponding to the flash effect when winning can be hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by imparting surprise to the player.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, silhouette images 135SG005S having different sizes can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning, and the silhouette images 135SG005S and the silhouette images 135SG005S are active according to the size of the silhouette images 135SG005S to be displayed. Since the overlap mode with the display area 135SG005A is different, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this modification 135SG-7, depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5, there are cases where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap and cases where they do not overlap. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the overlapping area between the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 (for example, active display A case where only a part of the area 135SG005A overlaps the silhouette image 135SG005S, a case where the entire area of the active display area 135SG005A overlaps the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc.) may be provided.

In addition, in the modification 135SG-7, a case where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap according to the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 is provided. Before the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it overlaps with the pending display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the active display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, displayed in the active display area 135SG005A during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. A silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed. By doing so, the player can easily recognize the pending display and the active display corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, and not only the pending display but also the active display can be hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game by further imparting unexpectedness to the game.

In addition, in the modification 135SG-7, only one of the suspension display and the active display is hidden by the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S as the flash effect at the time of winning, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a case may be provided in which both the suspension display and the active display are hidden by the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning is illustrated in a form in which it can be displayed overlapping the active display area 135SG005A and the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. It is not limited to this, and in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the variable display during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning as illustrated in the characteristic portion 135SG, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the "intermediate ” (refer to FIG. 283-40, etc.) displayed in the decoration symbol display area 5C, the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning may be overlapped and displayed. In this way, the silhouette image 135SG005S as a winning flash effect hides the special pattern for informing the temporary stop, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, as a re-variable display effect in the present invention, a form in which the special pattern stops in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, as a re-variable display effect, the image display device 5 may display an image different from the special symbol, and the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning may be displayed overlapping the image.

Further, in the characterizing section 135SG, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the ready-to-win effect of super reach, execution of the flash effect at the time of winning based on the starting win is not determined (determined to be non-execution). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-8, when the start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the variable display, the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is equal to or less than the execution period of the flash presentation at the time of winning, the execution of the flash presentation at the time of winning is not determined (determined to be non-execution). By doing so, when the remaining period of the variable display is short, such as the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term or less, the flash effect at the time of winning (the flash effect at the time of winning the first term) is executed, whereby the flash at the time of winning is performed. It is possible to prevent the specific display (suspended display or active display) of the object of rendering from becoming difficult to understand.

In this variation 135SG-8, whether or not to execute the winning flash effect is exemplified based on the remaining period of the variable display and the execution period of the preceding winning flash effect. is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute the winning flash effect depends on a period other than the remaining period of the variable display and the execution period of the previous winning flash effect (for example, a period of 5 seconds, 10 seconds, etc.) ) may be used as a reference.

Furthermore, in this modification 135SG-8, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is the first winning flash effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specified period is less than or equal to the execution period of the first prize flash effect. In this case, on the condition that the variable display result of the variable display is a loss, the win-time flash effect may be executed from the start timing of the next variable display. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win and the flash performance to win a prize due to the redundant execution of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win and the flash performance to win.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect, blinking with brightness C1 and cycle T1 (light emission mode in the previous winning flash effect) and brightness C2 and cycle T2. blinking (light emission mode in the flash effect at the time of winning a prize later) and two light emission modes are provided. On the other hand, as the light emission mode of the starter lamp 135SG009S in the light emission effect of the starter lamp, blue light emission with a luminance C2 corresponding to the display pattern β and red light emission with a luminance C2 according to the display pattern γ are performed. is provided. That is, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the number of lighting modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect is the same as the number of lighting modes of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the starting lamp lighting effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-9, the number of lighting modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect and the light emission of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the starting lamp light emitting effect The number of modes may be different.

In particular, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-5, a display pattern δ and a display pattern ε are provided as display patterns for the pending display and the active display, and these display patterns δ are used as the lighting mode of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the lighting performance of the starting lamp. and the display pattern ε, even if the number of light emission modes of the starter lamp 135SG009S in the starter lamp light emission effect is greater than the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect. good. By doing so, the variations in light emission of the starter lamp 135SG009S are increased, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 135SG, the win flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as the win flash effect, and the starting lamp 135SG009S emits light in the start lamp light emitting effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 135SG-10, the light emitting area in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as the winning flash effect may be provided larger than the light emitting area in which the starting lamp 135SG009S emits light as the starting lamp light emitting effect. good.

Further, as shown in FIG. 283-28, in the case where execution of both the winning flash effect and the hold display notice effect is determined based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is set to the winning starting flash effect. After that, it emits light until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the start winning flash effect, while the starting port lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the start winning flash effect. Since the light is emitted until the end of the variable display, which is the object of the flash effect, by applying the modification 135SG-10, the light emission corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be performed for an excessively long time. It is possible to maintain the player's expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state by the light emitting mode of the starter lamp 135SG009S while preventing the deterioration of the game interest due to the above.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the form in which the starter lamp 135SG009S emits light without blinking as the starter lamp light emission effect was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the starter lamp is started as the starter lamp light emission effect. The mouth lamp 135SG009S may be blinked. Furthermore, when the starter lamp 135SG009S is flashed as the starter lamp light emission effect in this way, the flashing cycle of the starter lamp 135SG009S is regarded as the flashing cycle (cycle T2) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect. can be different. By making the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking cycle of the starting lamp 135SG009S different in this way, the player pays attention to both the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking of the starting lamp 135SG009S. It is possible to make it possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 283-28, the characterizing section 135SG has a configuration in which the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, etc. are turned off once when the winning flash effect is executed. Although it is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as modification 135SG-11, in the case of executing the flash effect at the time of winning, the brightness of the backlight or the like built in the image display device 5 is temporarily changed. may be reduced to reduce the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5, and then the winning flash effect may be started. In this way, when the winning flash performance is executed, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is lowered so that the player can easily recognize the start of the winning flash performance.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-11, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced by reducing the brightness of the backlight or the like built in the image display device 5, that is, the image display Although the form in which the brightness of the device 5 is changed to change the image display device 5 to the low visibility state in which the visibility is lower than that of the previous state has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display device 5 is not limited to this. As a form of reducing the visibility of the image displayed on the display device 5, in addition to reducing the luminance (brightness) of the image display device 5, temporarily stopping the display of the image on the image display device 5, The movable body 32 is operated in front of the image display device 5, the image display device 5 itself is repeatedly operated in vertical directions, etc., and the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is increased to relatively display on the image display device 5. It may be one that lowers the visibility of the image that is displayed.

In other words, the "low visibility state" in the present invention means that if the visibility of the image display device 5 is lower than the previous state, the brightness of the image display device 5 is reduced by a method other than the brightness reduction. Includes images that reduce the visibility of the image.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 283-28, in the characterizing section 135SG, when execution of the winning flash effect is determined in accordance with the start winning, the output of the winning flash effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. Although the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking after the win-win flash lamp 135SG009F is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. When the execution is decided, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the speaker 8L, 8R will output the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect and the animation of the pending display and the active display will be completed. may By doing so, it is possible for the player to quickly recognize that the start winning has occurred by flashing (emission) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and that the execution of the winning flash effect has been decided. It can improve amusement interest.

In this modified example 135SG-12, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, and the appearance animation of the pending display and the active display is completed. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the hold display and An appearance animation of the active display may be started.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 283-28, in the characteristic part 135SG, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V1, and for the flash effect at the time of winning. Flashing of the lamp 135SG009F with the brightness C1 and the period T1, display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period, the volume of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R Although the output at V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are each repeatedly executed, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the second term, when the variable display targeted for the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is the same as during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term. , the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning at the brightness C1 and the period T1, and the display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are temporarily executed. You may By doing so, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is output at the volume V1 as in the case of the flash effect at the time of the previous term, and is for the flash at the time of winning. When the lamp 135SG009F flashes with the brightness C1 and the period T1 and the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, the player recognizes that the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started. Since it can be easily performed, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this modification 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second term, when the variable display for the flash effect at the time of winning starts, the same as during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first term, The speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V1, blinks the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with the brightness C1 and the period T1, and displays the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 temporarily. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display for the flash effect at the time of winning starts during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning at the later stage, the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R is started. Only one or only two of the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the volume V1, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with the brightness C1 and the period T1, and the display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are executed. You may do so.

In addition, as the pachinko game machine 1 of the present specification, the jackpot probability differs according to the set value (Figs. 274 to 282), and the holding display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning are displayed based on the start winning. It can be executed, and the change in the light emission mode as the winning flash effect differs according to the lamp (characteristic part 135SG, Figs. 283-1 to 283-68), and the winning flash effect during the variable display symbol fixing period (Modified example 135SG-1, FIGS. 283-69 to 283-89), capable of executing reach effects of super reach with different expectations of big hits, and moving body operation before reach effects with high expectations of big hits. An effect can be executed, and when the movable body action effect is to be executed, the light emission mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is changed to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body action effect from the start timing of the movable body action effect. One (Modification 2, FIGS. 283-90 to 283-107), it is possible to execute a step-up effect during variable display, and when the step-up effect is executed when the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed, flash at the time of winning While the lighting lamp 135SG009F is caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the step-up performance, when the step-up performance is executed during execution of the winning flash performance, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed to the winning flash performance. (Modification 135SG-3, FIGS. 283-108 to 283-118), which does not change the light emission mode according to the response, can execute the movable body operation effect before the start of the reach effect of super reach, and the lamp for the flash at the time of winning When the light emission mode of 135SG009F changes from the light emission mode according to the flash effect at the time of winning to the light emission mode according to the movable body motion effect from the start timing of the movable body motion effect, and from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect according to the ready-to-win effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit is different depending on whether the lighting mode changes (Modification 135SG-4, FIGS. 283-119), and display patterns α to ε are provided as display modes for pending display and active display. Depending on whether the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined by winning, the ratio of which display pattern is determined as the display pattern of the pending display or the active display is different (Modification 135SG-5, Fig. 283- 120), when the display pattern ε is determined as the display pattern for the pending display, the display pattern ε is changed to any one of the display patterns α to γ according to the execution of the action effect (variation 135SG- 6, Figures 283-121 to 283-123), in which the display mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 changes according to the progress of the winning flash effect (modification 135SG-7, Figure 283-124 to 283-130), etc., but the pachinko game machine of the present invention may be implemented by combining two or more of these characteristic portions and modifications. good.

Further, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as the gaming machine that performs the predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs the predetermined game is at least the predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used as long as it performs

1 pachinko game machine 2 game board 3 game machine frame 5 image display device 5C, 5L, 5R decoration pattern display area 6A winning ball device 6B variable winning ball device 8L, 8R speaker 9 game effect lamp , 10 general winning opening, 11 main board, 12 effect control board, 13 voice control board, 15 relay board, 9020 special figure LED board, 21 gate switch, 22A first start opening switch, 22B second start opening switch, 23 count switch, 24 V winning switch, 30 batted ball operation handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push button, 32 movable body, 35A controller sensor unit, 35B push sensor, 41 passage gate, 9050 fourth symbol unit, 81, 82, 83 solenoid, 100 game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 104, 124 random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a light emitting means capable of emitting light;
display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
an effect execution means capable of executing a specific display effect of displaying the specific display and a specific light emission effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, a dialog sound emitted by a character is output,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by characters and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed,
The effect executing means causes the light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect before the display of the specific display is completed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition ,
A rate of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting control to be in an advantageous state during execution of the variable display, and when the suggestive effect is being executed and when the suggestive effect is not being executed. It is possible to execute the specific light emission effect with
further comprising sound output means capable of outputting a variable display corresponding sound corresponding to the variable display, a suggestive effect corresponding sound corresponding to the suggestive effect, and a specific light emitting effect corresponding sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect,
The sound output means is
when the specific light emission effect is executed while the sound corresponding to the variable display is being output, the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the variable display being output;
When the specific light-emitting effect is executed while the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect is being output, the sound corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect can be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect being output,
A game machine capable of outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect before the light emission means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect.

Images